SAP Cloud for Customer User Guide
जाहिरात
जाहिरात
Product Documentation
SAP Cloud for Customer
SAP Cloud for Customer User Guide
PUBLIC
Table Of Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
SAP Cloud for Customer
Table Of Contents
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
4 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Table Of Contents
3.18
3.19
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.11
5
SAP Cloud for Customer
Table Of Contents
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Table Of Contents
6.5
Common Scenarios for Commercial Banking and Wealth Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6
6.7
SAP Cloud for Customer for Apparel and Footwear Solution (AFS): Scenario Overview . . . . . . . .
6.7.2.1
.1
6.7.2.1
.2
6.7.2.1
.3
6.7.2.1
.4
6.7.2.1
.5
7
7.1
7.2
SAP Cloud for Customer
Table Of Contents
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
7
1 General Features
1.1 HTML5
1.1.1 HTML5 in SAP Cloud for Customer
Please note that this document is relevant only for HTML5-based screens. Either the described function is available only in HTML5, or its HTML5 version differs from the Microsoft Silverlight
®
version. To use this function in the Microsoft Silverlight client, please log on to the Microsoft Silverlight-based screen and follow the instructions in the corresponding help document.
Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. Your solution is Microsoft Silverlightbased if a Silverlight pop-up window appears when you right-click anywhere on the screen.
SAP Cloud for Customer uses HTML5 technology.
Prerequisite
Your administrator has set the default client to HTML5.
Business Background
HTML5 is the new standard for internet technology. It has open standards and runs on multiple platforms including mobile-device platforms. Using HTML5 in SAP Cloud for Customer creates a plug-and-play solution, meaning that it is not necessary to install additional software on each user’s machine.
Tasks
Use Interactive Dashboards
.
Personalize Your Screens
Each user can personalize their own screen to reflect the way they like to work. You can personalize the following:
●
●
Background image
For information about personalizing your background image, see Personalizing My Background Image
.
Home page
●
For information about personalizing your home page, see
All other screens
Welcome to Your Home Page (3m 40s).
8 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
1.
Start personalization.
Stripes appear in the title bar of the solution to indicate personalization mode.
2.
Hover on the area you want to change.
For information about adding a mashup to a screen, see Personalize a Mashup.
3.
Select one of the options that appears in the hover tooltip and make your change.
4.
End personalization.
The stripes disappear from the title bar.
For more information about personalizing HTML5 screens, see About Personalization (HTML5)
Use Updated Elements
Compared to the Microsoft Silverlight® client, some elements of the screen appear and work differently in HTML5.
The following are a few examples:
●
●
Tabs
To open multiple items at the same time, such as an account, opportunity, and lead, right-click the item's link and choose Open link in new tab . You can use the tabs to navigate between the open objects.
Inline editing
●
In the HTML5 version, the editor opens in display mode. Click Edit to make changes to the entries in the fields. Ensure that you have saved your changes by clicking Save . In the Silverlight version, inline editing is available. This means that you need to double-click on a field to edit its content. The
Save button only appears when you have made a change.
For more information about adding or changing fields, see Extension Fields Quick Guide.
Reporting an Incident [page 9]
1.1.2 Report an Incident
Overview
Please note that this document is relevant only for HTML5-based screens. Either the described function is available only in HTML5, or its HTML5 version differs from the Microsoft Silverlight ® version. To use this function in the Microsoft Silverlight client, please log on to the Microsoft Silverlight-based screen and follow the instructions in the corresponding help document.
Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. Your solution is Microsoft Silverlightbased if a Silverlight pop-up window appears when you right-click anywhere on the screen.
If you encounter a problem in the application, you can search existing knowledge bases for a solution. If no solution is available, you can report an incident to your administrator to request help in solving the problem. The system collects context data, such as system information, a screenshot of the screen from which the incident was reported, and relevant business data, and attaches it to the incident. This data gives information about the system at the time at which the incident occurred and helps your provider to better understand the problem if your administrator cannot solve the incident. The context data is only useful if you report the incident from the screen on which the problem occurred since it includes information that is specific to this screen. Therefore, it is important that you always report application-related incidents from the screen on which they occur. To do so, go to Help Report an Incident .
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
9
If your administrator forwards the incident to SAP and SAP's root cause analysis shows that the incident results from a partner product which your company has licensed, SAP may forward this incident, including all corresponding context data, to the support organization of the partner responsible.
If you encounter a problem when exporting or uploading business data from or to Microsoft Excel®, you can also access the Report Incident screen from the SAP Add-in tab by clicking Help Report an Incident .
Prerequisites
You have configured your computer settings correctly by choosing Check My Computer Settings from the logon screen.
Process Flow
1.
To reach the Report an Incident screen, click Help Report an Incident .
2.
Under Show us where the issue is you can annotate a screenshot of where you were working to better illustrate your problem. You can highlight areas of the screenshot or add comments by inserting a callout. This helps your administrator to better understand the problem and solve your incident more quickly.
If the screenshot is not relevant, you can:
● Close the Report an Incident screen without saving the changes, then navigate to the screen on which the problem occurred and report an incident from there to ensure that a relevant screenshot is attached to the incident.
● Deselect the Attach Screen checkbox. The screenshot will not be included and you can continue reporting the incident.
Optional: You can provide screenshots or other relevant information as attachments to help your administrator understand your problem quickly. To add an attachment, click Attach File .
3.
Under Tell us what's wrong , specify the information your administrator requires to solve the incident:
● In the Subject field, enter a brief description of the problem.
● Enter a detailed description of the problem that includes the following information:
○ The events or actions that led to the problem, that is, details how to reproduce the problem
○
○
The results you expected (for example, different values or a more detailed error message)
If you are not reporting the incident from the Help Center , also include the following information in your description:
○ Your user name
○
○
○
The work center and view in which the issue occurred
The documents or object IDs in which the issue occurred
The system behavior (for example, the error message displayed)
For security reasons, never include your password anywhere in the incident.
If you are an administrator and you want to send the incident directly to your provider, select the
Forward to Provider checkbox.
4.
Under How serious is it?
, select the priority of your incident based on the following information:
10 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Business Impact for Incident Priorities
Business Impact Priority
Critical business processes are affected and crucial tasks cannot be carried out. The incident requires immediate attention because it could result in business downtime for the organization. Security-related incidents must always be assigned this priority.
If you want to report an incident with this priority to SAP outside of your standard local business hours, enter the incident information in English to ensure that it can be processed by after hours support, which is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Can't work
Business processes are affected, but the incident has only a minor impact on business productivity.
I am concerned
The issue has little or no effect on business processes.
5.
To save your entries and submit the incident to your administrator, click Submit .
Minor thing
The incident is submitted to your administrator, who either solves your problem directly or forwards the incident to the provider for further analysis.
For more information, see Working with Incidents.
1.2 Layout and Navigation
The layout of the user interface (UI) in SAP Cloud for Customer is organized by item type into various views, which appear across the top of the screen.
Tasks
Understanding the Layout of the SAP Cloud for Customer User Interface
The following figure illustrates the placement of the work centers and work center views on the user interface of SAP
Cloud for Customer. The table below describes each element shown in the figure.
● Work centers
A work area that is grouped by function. Titles of the available work centers appear horizontally across the initial screen.
The work centers in the figure may look different as the available work centers varies depending on the access rights given by the administrator.
● Work center views
A subdivision of a work center.
When you choose a work center, the default view will always be the first work center view on the screen.
For an example, if you choose the Customers work center, then Accounts will be shown as the default view.
● Toolbar
A persistent vertical list of icons that appears on the left side of the screen, offering shortcuts for many of the basic functions, such as search and new.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
11
1.3 Personalization
1.3.1 About Personalization (HTML5)
Please note that this document is relevant only for HTML5-based screens. Either the described function is available only in HTML5, or its HTML5 version differs from the Microsoft Silverlight
®
version. To use this function in the Microsoft Silverlight client, please log on to the Microsoft Silverlight-based screen and follow the instructions in the corresponding help document.
Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. Your solution is Microsoft Silverlightbased if a Silverlight pop-up window appears when you right-click anywhere on the screen.
You can personalize the SAP solution with your preferences regarding system settings, navigation settings, content, and layout settings of a screen. You can also change labels, add mashups and fields to further personalize your solution.
To personalize your solution, you enter the Personalization mode. Go to the Personalize menu in the title bar and select the Start Personalization option. Once you are in the Personalization mode, you can hover over the content area and see that editable areas are highlighted and marked by a frame.
When you hover over the area you want to personalize, icons with available functions will be displayed in the upper corner of each framed area. You can select the icon which allows you to make the corresponding personalized changes.
In the Personalize mode, you can make various changes to the current screen such as:
● Personalize the layout
12 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
●
●
●
●
Hide labels and field names
Add fields and mashups
Personalize queries
Edit tabs on an editor screen
After completing the personalization of your screen, you can exit the Personalization mode by selecting the End
Personalization option from the Personalize menu in the title bar.
Apart from the personalized changes mentioned above, you can make changes to your screen without entering
Personalization mode. For example, you can sort columns, adjust column width, and rearrange the order of your work centers directly on your screen. If you want to remove any of these changes, you have to select Start
Personalization from the Personalize menu in the title bar. Go to Personalize again, select Discard Screen and all your personalized changes will be removed.
Note that any changes on the screen take effect immediately.
Note that any changes that you make to screen sections, tables, or fields are your responsibility. If you change the name of a field or section, the help documents do not reflect your changes.
Tasks
Personalize Screen Layout
You can personalize your screen layout in the Personalization mode. With drag-and-drop you can easily move screen sections to another location within the current content area.
The drag-and-drop feature also allows you to change the display sequence of fields within the current section. This way you can easily move fields up or down and sort fields by your own preferences.
To move a screen section to another location, go to Personalize Start Personalization and follow these steps:
1.
Go to the screen that you want to personalize.
2.
Hover over the highlighted section you want to move.
3.
Press the left mouse button and then drag-and-drop the section into the desired location of your screen.
When you have finished, select Personalize End Personalization .
Note that you can only drag-and-drop objects within one screen area and not to other areas of your screen.
Your changes are saved automatically.
Personalize My Settings
You can personalize your system settings, such as regional settings, help content and related settings, in My
Settings from the Personalize menu.
● In the Regional Settings tab you can select default settings such as date format, time zone, decimal notation, and system language.
● In the Onscreen Help tab, you select whether to display additional onscreen explanatory texts and countryspecific help. Onscreen explanatory texts consist of text boxes that are shown at the top of a screen or screen section, and short help texts that are displayed when you move the cursor over a field that is underlined. In
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
13
●
●
● addition, you can activate country-specific online help content to view content specific to your country in the
Help Center.
For a better accessibility, you can choose screen reader support in the Accessibility tab. Screen readers will read UI texts and mouse-over texts in all screens.
In My Settings , you can also change the password you use to log on to the system. Click the Change
Password button to change your current password.
By clicking the Manage Certificate button, you can access functions to manage logon certificates for your user. Logon certificates enable you to log on to the system without entering your user ID and password.
Note that you must log off and then log on again for all changes in My Settings to take effect.
Personalize Your Background Image
You can personalize your background image and related settings to change the look and feel of your SAP solution.
You can set an image as your personalized background image and adjust the color and transparency settings associated to the background image.
1.
From the Personalize menu, select My Background Image .
2.
To upload a background image, in the My Background Image screen, drag and drop an image file. You can also click on Browse... and select an image from your local system. The image file should be in .png or .jpg
format. We recommend that the size of the image is the size of your screen resolution. The size of the image cannot exceed 1MB.
This feature is not supported for Microsoft Internet Explorer
®
9 Web browsers.
3.
To save your changes, click OK .
To remove your personalized background and related settings, in the My Background Image screen, click
Clear or Reset All .
Add a Field or a Column
You can add hidden existing fields or columns to sections and tables. New fields can only be created by the system administrator. You can add these fields, make them visible and use them.
To add a hidden existing field or column to a screen, go to Personalize Start Personalization and follow these steps:
1.
Open the Editor screen, Quick Create or Quick View window that you want to personalize.
2.
Place your cursor over a field or column header and the area becomes highlighted and icons with available functions appear.
3.
To add a hidden field or column, click followed by Add Fields .
A dialog box with available additional fields appears.
4.
Select a field and click Apply to add this field or column to your Editor screen, Quick Create or Quick View window.
When you have finished, select Personalize End Personalization .
14 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Hide a Field, Section, or Column
To hide a field, section, or column on a screen, go to Personalize Start Personalization and follow these steps:
1.
Open the Editor Screen, Quick Create or Quick View window that you want to personalize.
2.
Go to the field, section or column you want to hide.
3.
Once you place your cursor over the item, the area becomes highlighted and icons with available functions appear.
4.
Click to hide the field, section or column from your screen.
When you have finished, select Personalize End Personalization .
You can make hidden items visible again by clicking followed by Add Fields . All hidden and available items will appear in the list and you can add them again.
If any hidden sections exist on your screen, an Add icon appears in the corresponding location of your screen.
You can make the section visible by clicking .
Edit Tabs on an Editor Screen
You can work with tabs and personalize them to suit your needs. In Personalization mode, you can change the tab order by dragging and dropping a tab into the desired location of your header.
Place your cursor over a tab and click to rename it, or click to hide a tab.
To add an additional tab to an Editor screen, go to Personalize Start Personalization and follow these steps:
1.
Go to the Editor screen where you want to add a tab.
By hovering over the header, it becomes highlighted and icons with available functions appear.
2.
Click and a dialog box with available additional tabs appears.
3.
Select a tab title from the list and click Apply .
4.
The new tab is saved and appears in your header.
When you have finished, select Personalize End Personalization .
Create/Organize Your Queries
You can create new queries, change the default queries, and organize the queries in each screen.
Create a new query
1.
Go to the screen where you want to create a new query. Enter the parameters for the new query. Click
Save Query .
2.
In the pop up box, you can give the query a name, and opt to make it your default query.
3.
Click Apply . A new query is created, and it will now appear in your default selection drop down list.
Organize you queries
1.
Go to the screen where you want to organize your queries. Click Organize Query .
2.
In the dialogue box that pops up, you can see all the queries available for the screen. You can select a query as your default query by clicking on the radio button next to the name of the query.
3.
To remove a query from the list, check the check box next to the name of the query.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
15
You can only remove the queries that you have created, and not the once which are pre-configured in the system.
4.
Click Apply . The selected query will now appear as the default query in your default selection drop down list.
While the removed query will no longer appear in the list.
Alternative way to organize queries
The process described here is an alternative way to organize queries. We highly recommend that you use the process as described above.
In Personalization mode, you can work with queries and personalize them to suit your needs. You can organize queries, add new queries, or remove queries from your selection list.
To organize your queries, go to Personalize Start Personalization and follow these steps:
1.
Go to the Editor screen where you want to organize the queries of your selection list.
2.
Click next to your selection list.
All your filter categories are displayed.
3.
Place your cursor over a field, the area becomes highlighted and icons with available functions appear.
4.
Click and a dialog box opens.
5.
In the dialog box, you can select your default query or remove any queries from the selection list.
6.
Click Apply to save your changes.
To add a new query to your selection list, go to Personalize Start Personalization and follow these steps:
1.
Go to the Editor screen where you want to add a new query to your selection list.
2.
Click next to your selection list.
All your filter categories are displayed.
3.
Place your cursor over a field, the area becomes highlighted and icons with available functions appear.
4.
Click followed by Add Query .
A dialog box opens.
5.
In the dialog box, you can add the name of your new query and set it as default if necessary.
6.
Click Apply to save your changes.
When you have finished organizing your queries, select Personalize End Personalization .
Edit Queries on an Editor Screen
This is an alternate way to create / organize your queries. We recommend that you use the procedure as described in the Create/Organize Your Queries.
Personalize a Mashup
1.
From the Personalize menu in the screen that you want to personalize, select This Screen .
The personalize panel opens.
2.
Click Mashups and Web Services to open this section of the personalize panel.
A list of all mashups that can be used in the current screen is displayed.
3.
Click on a mashup to view more information and adjust settings.
4.
To make a hidden mashup visible, select the Visible checkbox next to the mashup name.
16 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Note that the mashup will be visible on the screen the next time you open it.
5.
If required, you can adjust the appearance of the mashup by selecting one of the following options under
Properties .
The options available to you will vary depending on the mashup.
●
●
●
Web Services Menu
The mashup can be accessed from the Web Services menu button that is typically located in the menu bar at the top of a screen.
Web Services Menu in <name of section> Section
The mashup can be accessed from a Web Services menu button located in a section of a screen.
Link in <name of section> Section
The mashup can be accessed using a link directly embedded in a screen section.
●
●
New Screen Section
The mashup is embedded directly into the screen as a new section.
Embedded Near <name of section> Section
The mashup is embedded directly into the screen as a new section. This section is located beside or below the named section.
To display an embedded mashup across the full width of the screen rather than the default setting of half screen width, select the Full Width checkbox.
6.
Save your changes and close the personalize panel.
You can personalize your screen by selecting from a list of available mashups. Afterwards, they are either displayed on your screen, or you can access them by clicking Web Services . If you need a new mashup, you can ask your administrator to procure it from the SAP Store or to create a new mashup.
For more information on how to personalize a mashup, see Personalize a Mashup.
Discard Your Personalization Changes
The changes you’ve made are reversible. You can undo the personalization of the current screen and set it back to default. Navigate to the screen, go to Personalize in the title bar and select Discard Screen . This discards all changes that you have made to the current screen. For example, if you added new sections, fields and mashups to a screen and click Discard Screen , all changes to screen layout and embedded mashups are discarded.
While working in the Personalization mode, you will also find a Revert Changes icon in sections and tables. By clicking
, you will undo the personalization for the highlighted section or table only. For example, if you’ve added fields to a section, you can remove them by clicking , but the rest of the personalized screen remains the same.
Navigate Through Your Screen
In Personalization mode, you can navigate easily from one screen element or section to the superordinate area. Place your cursor over the field or section until the area becomes highlighted and icons with available functions appear.
Then select and it will move you up to the corresponding superordinate area.
While working in Personalization mode, you can move up from a field to the superordinate section to make changes on section level:
1.
Hover over a field and click .
2.
You will move up and the section area becomes highlighted.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
17
3.
You can make further personalized changes on section level, such as discard changes and change section titles.
When you have finished, select Personalize End Personalization .
1.3.2 About Personalization (Microsoft Silverlight®)
You can personalize the SAP solution with your preferences. You can personalize system settings, navigation settings, content and layout settings of a screen.
When you select This Screen from the Personalize menu in the title bar, the personalize panel opens on the right side of the screen. The personalize panel contains the following sections:
●
●
Personalize Layout : A list of available content for the current screen is displayed.
Mashups and Web Services : A list of all available mashups for the current screen is displayed.
Note that any changes that you make to screen sections, tables, or fields are your responsibility. If you change the name of a field or section, the help documents do not reflect your changes.
Tasks
Personalize My Settings
You can personalize your system settings, such as data and time formats in My Settings from the Personalize menu.
You can also personalize your background image and related settings to change the look and feel of the solution. For more information, see
Personalizing My Settings [page 317] .
Display and Rename a Field on a Quick Create or Quick View Window
1.
From the Quick Create or Quick View window that you want to personalize, click the Settings icon. The personalize panel opens.
2.
In the personalize panel, in the Sections table, select the screen section where the field that you want to personalize is located.
3.
In the Fields table, select the field that you want to display.
4.
To display the field in the screen, in the Fields table, select the Visible checkbox of the field.
5.
To adjust the display sequence of the field, in the Fields table, use the arrow buttons to move the field up or down.
6.
In the Field Properties section, you can change the time of the field.
7.
To save your changes to the current screen, click Save and close the personalize panel.
Display and Rename a Field on an Editor Screen
1.
From the Editor screen that you want to personalize, open the Personalize menu and select This Screen . The personalize panel opens.
2.
In the personalize panel, in the Sections table, select the screen section where the field that you want to personalize is located.
3.
In the Fields table, select the field that you want to display.
4.
To display the field in the screen, in the Fields table, select the Visible checkbox of the field.
18 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
5.
To adjust the display sequence of the field, in the Fields table, use the arrow buttons to move the field up or down.
6.
In the Field Properties section, you can change the name of the field.
7.
To save your changes to the current screen, click Save and close the personalize panel.
Add a Tab to an Editor Screen
1.
From the Editor screen that you want to personalize, open the Personalize menu and select This Screen . The personalize panel opens.
2.
In the personalize panel, in the Sections table, select the Tabs item.
3.
In the Tabs section, click Add . A dialog window opens.
4.
In the Add Tab dialog window, enter the name of the new tab.
5.
From the header, select the fields or groups of fields that you want to display under the new tab.
6.
Drag and drop the fields into the content area of the new tab.
7.
To save your changes to the current screen, click Save and close the personalize panel.
Personalize Reports
1.
From the Dashboard screen that you want to personalize, open the Personalize menu and select This
Screen . The personalize panel opens.
2.
In the personalize panel, in the Dashboard table, select the report that you want to display.
3.
Drag and drop the report into the content area.
4.
To rename the report, in the content area, click the name of the report and enter the new name.
5.
To change the display view of the report, in the content area, click the Chart icon under the name of the report and select the display view to be used to display the report. For example, you can select table view, bar view, line view, or pie view.
6.
To configure the report, in the content area, click the Settings icon on the top right of the report and make the following changes if applicable:
● Remove the report.
●
●
Rename the report.
Resize the columns in the report.
7.
To save your changes to the current screen, in the personalize panel, click Save and close the personalize panel.
Personalize a Mashup
For more information, see Personalize a Mashup.
Discard Your Personalization Changes
You can discard all personalization changes that you have made to a screen.
1.
Navigate to the screen, and from the Personalize menu, select This Screen .
The personalization panel opens.
2.
Click on a section of the personalization panel, for example, Mashups and Web Services or Screen Layout .
3.
Click Discard .
This discards all changes that you have made to the current screen. For example, if you are currently in the
Mashups and Web Services section and click Discard , all changes to screen layout and embedded mashups in the screen are discarded.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
19
1.4 Changing Your Profile Picture
Your profile gives you tools to manage your personal information. To open your profile, in the topmost menu bar, choose Your Name Profile .
Tasks
Changing Your Profile Picture
1.
From your profile, choose Actions Change Image .
2.
Browse and select the image you want to upload.
3.
Save your entries.
The image that you selected appears as your profile picture.
1.5 VIDEO: Customizing Your Personal Settings
Video
Customizing Your Personal Settings (3m 43s)
Find out how to change your general system settings and how to personalize the content on screens.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
1.6 VIDEO: Creating and Editing Items
Video
Creating and Editing Items (2m 11s)
Find out the different ways you can create items.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
20 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
1.7 Feed
1.7.1 VIDEO: Changing Your Feed Settings
Video
Changing Your Feed Settings (2m 49s)
Find out how to adjust which updates you receive from the source you're following and how to automatically flag and tag incoming updates.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
1.7.2 About the Feed
The feed allows you to quickly communicate and collaborate with your network. The feed is where you post updates to your network and receive updates from your feed sources — the information and people you need to complete your work. In the feed, you can post feed updates (using shorthand), comment on feed updates, and delete feed updates. You can also manage your feed sources and feed settings. As with other items, you can also search feed updates, use filters to view only certain types of updates, and flag or tag feed updates, or add them to your favorites.
Tasks
Posting Feed Updates
To post a feed update, enter a text of up to 500 characters in length, then choose Post .
Once you post an update, it appears in your feed. If other employees are following either you or the item you updated, then your update also appears in their feed. Employees you mention in your update (with the shorthand
@
) also automatically see the update in their feed, even if they are not following you or — when you mention them while posting an update from an item — the associated item.
Using Shorthand in Feed Updates
Within feed updates, you can use shorthand to tag items or mention people, or send private updates, as described below.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
21
Shorthand Description
@
To tag an item or mention a person in your update, enter an at sign (
@
) plus the item or person name.
For example, enter
@AccountABC
to tag the account named AccountABC , or enter
@Frank Friedman
to mention a customer named Frank Friedman.
Items that you tag in an update appear in the feed as links that can be opened for viewing or editing. Employees who receive your update can only open tagged items that they are already following.
*
To send a private update to an employee, enter an asterisk (
*
) plus the employee name, followed by the private update.
For example, to send the private update “Good work!” to the employee Maria Smith, enter
*Maria Smith
Good work!
, then choose Post .
After you enter shorthand and two characters of the item or person — for example,
@Ac
,
@Fr
or
*Ma
— an automatic search is performed, comparing your entry with existing items or people, and allowing you to select the correct one.
If a business document has a single-digit number, enter an asterisk after the number, for example
5*
.
Commenting on Feed Updates
To comment on a feed update, choose Comment within the update. Enter your comment, then choose Post .
Within the comment of a feed update, you can also use the shorthand
@ to tag items or mention people. If you tag an item in the comment, then your comment also appears in the feed of that item.
You cannot use the shorthand
* to send private comments to other employees.
Deleting Feed Updates
To delete a feed update, choose Delete within the update line.
In response, the update and its comments will be removed from your feed. If you delete a feed update of your own, then the update and its comments will be removed both from your feed and from the feed of your followers.
Certain feed updates cannot be deleted.
Following Feed Sources
If you are authorized to receive updates from an item that you have chosen to follow, then updates about that item automatically begin to appear in your feed. If you are not authorized, then a follow request is sent to the person responsible for approval.
If you stop following an item or person, then the source is removed from your feed, and updates for that item or person no longer appear there.
Managing Feed Sources
To manage your feed sources, choose Feed Feed Sources , where you can see a list of the sources that you are currently following. For each source that you follow, you can specify the source events that will trigger an update.
To do so, select a source from the list, then choose Manage Source Events .
22 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
On this screen, you can specify, for example, that a status change to an account that you are following will trigger an update in your feed. You can also specify whether the source event will be included in e-mail digests, or flagged.
For more information about source events, see
Managing Feed Settings
To manage your feed settings, choose Feed Feed Settings , where you can determine the following:
● How your follow requests are accepted
To specify that all follow requests be accepted automatically, choose Automatically accept requests to follow .
●
●
Whether e-mail digests for feed updates are sent
To receive periodic summaries of all feed updates via e-mail, choose Send digests of all my feeds .
The date by which feed updates are sorted
Feed updates are sorted, by default, according to the date they were last commented. If you prefer that feed updates be sorted according to the date they were created, then select According to creation date .
On this screen, you can also define default event types for the items that trigger feed updates.
For more information about source events, see
1.7.3 Feed Events
For each type of feed source there are defined events which, when selected, trigger feed updates. The table below lists those events and, in some cases, an additional description of the event.
Feed Events
Source
Account
Event
Creation
Default
Event
Yes
Additional Description
A feed update is posted if an owner is assigned when the account is created. This default event cannot be switched off.
Creation of Contact
Address Change
Yes
No A feed update is posted if changes are made to any address on the account.
Owner or Territory Change
Status Change
Yes
No
Addition or Removal of
Attachment or Note
No
Activity Creation or Change No
Update Posted from the Item
View
Yes
A feed update is posted if an account activity (that is, an appointment, task or phone call) is created or changed.
When someone posts an update from the item view, the feed update will contain a byline indicating who posted the update.
This default event cannot be switched off.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
23
Source
Opportunity
Event
Creation
Status Change
Sales Phase Change
Yes
Yes
Revenue Change
Category Change
Yes
Yes
Chance of Success Change Yes
Addition or Removal of
Contact
No
Addition or Removal of Sales
Team Member
No
Addition of Removal of
Product or Quantity Change
No
Addition or Removal of
Attachment or Note
No
Activity Creation or Change No
Default
Event
Yes
Additional Description
A feed update is posted if an owner is assigned when the opportunity is created. This default event cannot be switched off.
A feed update is posted if an opportunity activity (that is, a task) is created or changed.
Owner Change
Addition or Removal of
Competitor
Quote and Sales Order
Creation
Yes
No
Yes
Update Posted from the Item
View
Yes
A feed update is posted if a quote request or sales order request is created. The resulting feed update will not contain user information.
When someone posts an update from the item view, the feed update will contain a byline indicating who posted the update.
This default event cannot be switched off.
24 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Source
Lead
Ticket
Contact
Event
Creation
Status Change
Qualification Level Change
Addition or Removal of
Attachment or Note
Addition or Removal of
Contact
Lead Conversion
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Default
Event
Yes
Additional Description
A feed update is posted if an owner is assigned when the lead is created. This default event cannot be switched off.
Activity Creation or Change No
A feed update is posted if the lead is converted to an opportunity.
A feed update is posted if a lead activity (that is, a task) is created or changed.
Addition or Removal of
Product or Quantity Change
Owner Change
No
Yes
Update Posted from the Item
View
Yes When someone posts an update from the item view, the feed update will contain a byline indicating who posted the update.
This default event cannot be switched off.
Status Change Yes
Service Request Escalation Yes
Yes Service Request Processor
Change
Text Changes Yes
Contact Details Change
Address Change
Activity Creation or Change
Update Posted from the Item
View
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
A feed update is posted if the ticket is escalated.
A feed update is posted if the agent assigned to the ticket is changed.
A feed update is posted anytime new text is added to the ticket by anyone other than the assigned agent, for example the customer responds or another agent adds a note.
A feed update is posted if changes are made to the contact details on the header level only (for example, function, department, or phone).
A feed update is posted if changes are made to any address for the contact.
A feed update is posted if a contact activity (that is, an appointment, task or phone call) is created or changed.
When someone posts an update from the item view, the feed update will contain a byline indicating who posted the update.
This default event cannot be switched off.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
25
Source
Employee
Feed Item
Group
Event
User Update
Profile Change
User Accepted a Request to be Followed
Yes
User Rejected a Request to be
Followed
Yes
Default
Event
Yes
No
User Requested to Follow You Yes
Additional Description
A feed update is posted if changes are made to the employee profile such as phone, mobile, e-mail, or address information.
This event is only relevant if you have chosen (via Managing
Feed Settings ) not to have requests to follow you automatically accepted. This default event cannot be switched off.
This default event cannot be switched off.
Activity Creation or Change
Private Update
Comment or Reply
Yes
Yes
Yes
If provided, the reason for the rejection is included in the requestor's feed update. This default event cannot be switched off.
A feed update is posted if an employee activity (that is, an appointment, task or phone call) is created or changed.
Private updates are declared using the asterisk (*) notation.
This default event cannot be switched off.
A feed update is posted to all recipients of the original feed item when a comment or reply is posted, unless they have deleted the original feed item. This default event cannot be switched off.
Addition or Removal of
Member
Addition or Removal of
Attachment
Yes
No
1.8 VIDEO: Using the Toolbar and Panes
Video
Using the Toolbar and Panes (3m 47s)
Find out how to use the toolbar to search for and create items quickly, and how to use panes to search for tags, favorite and flagged items, products, and solution help.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
26 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
1.9 VIDEO: Using the Shelf, Flags, and Favorites
Video
Using the Shelf, Flags, and Favorites (2m 46s)
Find out about the shelf, how flags and favorites are connected to it, and how to use it to keep important items at your fingertips.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
1.10 Shelf
The shelf displays items that you flag or mark as favorite. These items remain on the shelf for quick access until you remove them.
Tasks
Adding Items to the Shelf
1.
Access the item that you want to add to the shelf.
2.
Set a flag or favorite indicator for the item.
The item you flagged or marked as a favorite now appears in the shelf pane for quick access.
Opening Items from the Shelf
1.
Open the shelf pane by choosing Shelf .
2.
Use the following predefined filters to sort the items:
● All
●
●
Flagged Items
Favorite Items
3.
To open an item from the shelf, choose the name of that item, which appears as a link.
To open a feed update, choose the Open icon. (The links in feed updates link to the item or person in the feed update.)
Removing Items from the Shelf
Items remain in the shelf pane until you remove them manually. To do so, you have the following options:
● Remove all flag and favorite indicators from the item.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
27
● Remove the item from the shelf directly as follows: a.
Rest the cursor on the shelf item.
The Remove icon appears.
b.
Choose Remove .
The item disappears from the shelf pane, and the flag and favorite indicators are removed from the item.
The item still exists in the system.
1.11 Tags
Tags are indicators that help you categorize items. Tags appear in the Tags pane, and in item headers.
Tasks
Creating or Adding a Tag
1.
Open the item to which you want to add a tag.
The tags area is located in the item header.
2.
In the tags area, choose the plus sign (+), which has the tooltip Add Tag .
3.
Enter the name you want to use for your tag then choose
SPACEBAR
. You have the following options:
● To enter a public tag that all users can see, enter the tag text in the entry field.
● To enter a private tag that only you can see, enter an asterisk (*) before the tag name.
For example, at a sales conference, you talk to five potential customers who are eager to buy your product. You want to follow up on these leads yourself, so you use a private tag,
*hot_leads
, so that you can find them easily in the system and call them next week.
●
●
Tags cannot contain spaces.
Tags are not case-sensitive and always appear in the Tags pane as lowercase.
For example, the system regards the following tags as the same tag, which appears in the system as “hartford”:
● Hartford
●
●
HARTford hartford
4.
As you type your tag, the system runs an automatic search, comparing your entry to existing tags. You can accept a suggested tag from the list presented by the solution.
When you accept a suggested tag, the system creates a copy of that tag for you. As a result, you can edit, remove, or delete any tag that you assign to an item without affecting this tag in the rest of the system.
5.
To add an additional tag, click the Edit tooltip, which appears when you click in the Tags area in the item header and add your tag to the list.
6.
Save your entries.
28 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Displaying Items Assigned to a Tag
1.
Open the tags pane by choosing Tags .
For more information about panes, see Layout of the User Interface.
2.
Search or filter the list.
To search the list, enter a search term in the Find...
search field at the top of the pane. When you click on the result of the search, the Search screen appears and lists the corresponding items.
To filter the list, you can use the following predefined filters:
● Recent
This filter shows the 50 most recently used tags from the last 30 days. This list is sorted chronologically so that the tags that were used most recently appear at the top of the list.
●
●
●
Private
This filter shows your 50 most frequently used private tags in the system.
Public
This filter shows the 50 most frequently used public tags in the system.
Top 50
This filter shows a ranked list of the top 50 most popular tags that have been used in the system, including both your private tags and all public tags.
A tag can be used multiple times. The sum of all usages of exactly the same tag defines the rank of that tag in the list.
You can display the tags in list view and cloud view by using the corresponding buttons at the bottom of the pane. For more information about display options, see Understanding the Display Options.
3.
Select a tag from the list.
The system runs a search for items assigned to that tag and displays them as search results. You can also run this same search using shortcuts in the global search. For more information, see Running a Global Search.
Renaming a Tag
1.
In the Tags pane, click on the tag you want to rename.
This opens the Search , where all items containing your tag are listed.
2.
Open the item in which you want to change the tag.
3.
Delete the existing tag and replace it with the new tag.
Removing a Tag from an Item
1.
Open the item that contains the tag that you want to remove.
2.
In the item header, in the tags section, all the tags for this item appear.
3.
Click the pencil icon that appears when you hover in the Tags area. Rest the cursor on the tag that you want to remove.
A Remove ( x ) icon appears to the right of your tag.
If you move the cursor over a tag and the Remove ( x ) icon does not appear, it means that it is someone else’s tag, and you cannot remove it.
4.
Choose Remove .
The tag is removed from this item only. All other items in the assigned to this tag keep their assignments and the tag is still displayed by the solution as one of your tags.
Deleting a Tag
1.
In the Tags pane, find the tag you want to delete and choose the Delete icon.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
29
2.
Confirm the message that appears at the bottom of the pane.
The tag is deleted from the system and no items are associated with the tag any longer.
Automatically Adding Tags to Feed Updates
When you add a tag to a feed source, the same tag is added automatically to any subsequent feed updates from this source.
You can only add private tags to feed sources. If you enter or select a public tag, the system switches it to a private tag by adding an asterisk (*) before the tag text that you entered.
For example, one of your colleagues has been helpful in the past with marketing questions, so you add her as a feed source, which you tag with
*marketing
. When a feed update from her arrives, it automatically appears with a private tag,
*marketing
. Since the tag is private, you are the only one who sees this tag when you view the feed update. Thanks to the tag, when you see feed updates from her, you can identify the source immediately, and you can use a tag search to find other feed updates from her.
See Also
VIDEO: Organizing Your Items with Tags [page 30]
1.12 VIDEO: Organizing Your Items with Tags
Video
Organizing Your Items with Tags (2m 12s)
Find out how to use tags to organize and quickly find items.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
1.13 Download
Tasks
Ensure that your Web browser is set to prompt automatically for file downloads. If needed, consult your
Web browser documentation for additional information.
Downloading Add-Ins to Synchronize and Export Data
To download add-ins that enable data to be communicated to external applications, proceed as follows:
30 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
1.
Under Download , select one of the following add-ins:
● Add-In for Microsoft Outlook®
For information about using SAP Cloud for Customer together with Microsoft Outlook, see Working from
Microsoft Outlook® for Sales Users [page 120] or
Working from Microsoft Outlook® for Service Users
● Add-In for Microsoft Excel®
For information about using SAP Cloud for Customer together with Microsoft Excel, see Working with
Reports in Microsoft Excel®.
2.
Choose Download .
3.
Select one of the following download options:
● To execute and install the add-in directly, choose Run .
Follow the instructions provided by the setup wizard to install the add-in directly. When the setup wizard has finished, you may begin to use the add-in.
● To download the add-in to your preferred directory, choose Save .
Execute the add-in from your preferred directory at a later time, then follow the instructions provided by the setup wizard to install the add-in for subsequent use.
Downloading Mobile Applications
Under Download , select one of the mobile applications. This opens a new browser window containing a Web site where you can download the mobile application for the appropriate Cloud solution.
For more information about the mobile application you are interested in, see:
●
SAP Cloud for Customer for Android [page 167]
●
●
SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad [page 171]
SAP Cloud for Customer for iPhone [page 187]
1.14 Creating Incidents
Beta Feature
This document describes how to access these features from the (Beta) Administration tab. If you are accessing the features described here from the existing Administrator tab, or an alternate entry point, the menu paths may be different.
This tab is available only in the Silverlight client. To switch to the Silverlight client from the HTML5 client, choose Adapt Launch in Microsoft Silverlight® .
You can create incidents to report problems with the user interface to your administrator.
Tasks
Creating an Incident
To create an incident:
1.
Open the Help Center pane and click Report Incident .
2.
In the window that appears, enter the following information:
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
31
●
●
Enter a Subject .
Select a Priority setting from the drop-down.
●
●
Enter a Category .
Enter a note describing the issue in the Description field.
3.
Click Save and Close to submit the incident or Close if you do not want to submit the incident.
Editing an Incident
You can add additional notes, files, and Web site links to an incident to provide information that will help your administrator understand the user interface problems that you have experienced.
To add notes to the incident, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the Help Center pane and click Track My Incidents .
2.
Open the incident by clicking either the subject or the ID number.
3.
Enter any additional information into the Note box.
4.
Click Submit .
To add files to the incident, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the Help Center pane and click Track My Incidents .
2.
Open the incident by clicking either the subject or the ID number.
3.
Click Attachments .
4.
Click Add then choose File .
5.
Use the browser in the window that opens to navigate to the item on your desktop.
6.
Double-click the item.
7.
If necessary, add a title and comments.
8.
Click Add .
To add a link to the incident, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the Help Center pane and click Track My Incidents .
2.
Open the incident by clicking either the subject or the ID number.
3.
Click Attachments .
4.
Click Add then choose Link . A browser window opens.
5.
In the window that opens, specify the URL of the link that you want to add.
6.
If necessary, add a title and comments.
7.
Click Add .
Creating a Trace for an Incident
A trace is a record of the program running in the background. Your administrator may ask you to provide this information to understand the incident you have reported.
To record a trace, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the Help Center pane and click Track My Incidents .
2.
Open the incident by clicking either the subject or the ID number.
3.
Click Start Trace .
4.
Perform any activities in the user interface as instructed by your administrator.
5.
When you are finished, click Stop Trace .
The trace recording will be sent automatically to your administrator.
32 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
6.
If you make a mistake while recording the trace, click Cancel Trace and re-perform this activity.
1.15 Legacy Groups
Groups are now supported via SAP Jam. Groups created in previous versions of SAP Cloud for Customer are now labelled Legacy Groups. You can continue to edit and manage legacy groups, but you cannot create new groups in this tab. For more information, on the Groups function in SAP Jam, visit SAP Help Portal, at http:// help.sap.com/sapjam .
You can use groups to collaborate with other employees via the feed and to share attachments. When you create a group, you automatically become the group owner.
There are three types of groups:
●
●
●
Public groups are visible to all employees and requests to join are automatically accepted. Anyone can post updates, add and remove attachments, or add members.
Private groups are visible to all employees but require the owner to accept requests to join. You must be a member to post updates, add and remove attachments, or add members.
Secret groups are only visible to members and require an invitation to join and owner approval. You must be a member to post updates or add and remove attachments. New members must be approved by the group owner.
Tasks
Changing Group Attributes
If you are the group owner, you can change the group type, or status. To do this, display the group details and then position the cursor over the corresponding field in the group header and click it to enter the edit mode.
Adding Members to a Group
1.
Display the group details.
2.
Select the Members tab.
3.
Choose Add .
4.
Select the employee you wish to add or invite and save your entry.
Any member of a public or private group may add new members. For secret groups of which you are not the owner, the owner receives a notification to either accept or decline the member request.
Removing Members from a Group
To remove yourself or other members from a group, from the Members tab of the group click the Remove icon for each member you want to remove and confirm.
If you are the group owner, you must assign a new owner before you can leave the group.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
33
Changing the Group Owner
If you are the current group owner, you can assign a group member to be the new owner.
To change the group owner, from the group header choose Actions Change Owner , and select a group member.
1.16 Calendar
This feature is only available for HTML5 clients. Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/HTML5
.
For more information about the HTML5 client, contact your system administrator.
If you are not using the HTML5 client, you can see your appointments and visits in the calendar pane.
Tasks
Your calendar shows all of your upcoming appointments, visits, and phone calls. Each one is color coded, based on its status. Access the calendar from anywhere in the solution by using the icon in the toolbar.
Creating new appointments, visits, or phone calls from your calendar
1.
Click on a block of time in your calendar or choose New .
2.
Select which type of activity you want to create.
3.
In the screen that appears, enter the details.
4.
Save your entries.
Your appointment, visit, or phone call appears in your calendar.
Filtering your calendar entries
1.
Select Filter .
2.
Select the types or statuses that you want to use for your filter.
The calendar display shows only calendar entries that meet the criteria you selected.
Displaying calendars of your colleagues
1.
In the field that displays your name, clear your name and start typing the name of a colleague.
2.
Select the name of your colleague from the available options.
Your calendar is replaced by that of your colleague.
It is not possible to display more that one calendar at a time.
Displaying your calendar
After you have checked your colleague's schedule, choose Reset . Your calendar appears.
See Also
VIDEO: Start Here for Sales [page 79]
34 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
1.17 Activities
Activities are methods of recording information that results from interactions between business partners during the customer relationship life cycle. Each activity type includes a notes feature that allows you to add more information, as necessary. If your administrator has included the Changes tab for activities, you can use it to track the changes made to each activity.
Your administrator may have enabled fields or created custom content for those fields, such as companyspecific categories for the Document Type field. To use these fields, you must add them by personalizing
your activity screens. For more information, depending on the client you are using, see About
Personalization (HTML5) [page 12]
or About Personalization (Microsoft Silverlight®) [page 18]
.
The following table lists the available activity types and options for creating them:
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
35
Activity
Appointm ents
Description
A planned activity that is maintained in a calendar, including external appointments and scheduled meetings with business partners. Appointments contain information regarding the business partner involved and the date on which it is to take place.
To check your schedule for upcoming visits and appointments, you can use the Calendar .
X
Create from
Activities
View
●
●
Microsoft Silverlight® clients: use the Calendar pane.
○ Other activity types, such as phone calls, e-mails, and tasks, do not appear in the calendar pane.
○ Even if you are looking at My Team or another group tab, the calendar pane only displays your own schedule.
HTML5 clients: use the Calendar .
○ In addition to appointments and visits, phone calls also appear on your calendar.
○ You can view other users' schedules if you are authorized to do so.
For more information, see Calendar
Create from
Reference
Item
Create from
Microsoft
Outlook ®
X X
(sync in both directions
)
Create from IBM
Lotus
Notes ®
X
(sync in both directions
)
The calendar view of an account shows all upcoming appointments for that account in one calendar, even if they were scheduled by other colleagues. For more information,
The location in the system allows 80 characters. It reflects the first 80 characters of the location in appointments that are synchronized from the e-mail add-in.
If you need more space for the location, you can use personalization to add a second line for the location.
Then, when you synchronize an appointment from your e-mail add-in, the rest of the characters
(characters 81–255) appear in line 2. If you enter location information in line 2 directly in the browser, there is no character limit. For more information about personalization, depending on the client you are using, see
or
About Personalization (Microsoft
You can cancel appointments in the system. Unlike deleted activities, canceled activities still appear in the system, which means you can use them to track appointments that were originally scheduled but not completed.
Canceled appointments are synchronized with
Microsoft Outlook but not with IBM Lotus Notes. In
36
Microsoft Outlook, a canceled appointment is
• reflected the same way as a deleted appointment: If you are the organizer, the appointment is canceled and a cancellation is sent to participants.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Activity
E-Mails
Phone calls
Tasks
Description
An electronic message that is sent from one person to another person or group.
Create from
Activities
View
Create from
Reference
Item
Create from
Microsoft
Outlook ®
X
(sync in one direction only)
X
Create from IBM
Lotus
Notes ®
X
(sync in one direction only)
A business option that allows you to track and document your phone calls with business partners.
If your solution has SAP Cloud for Service features enabled, you can convert phone calls into tickets. Go to Activities
Phone Call . Select Actions and then Convert to Ticket . A ticket has been created that contains the information from the phone call activity. The new ticket can be found in the Queue .
X
A unit of work that has to be done by a user.
X
In the advanced search for activities, you can exclude tasks that were generated as a part of visits, which helps you focus on tasks that are not linked to visits.
X X
(sync in both directions
)
X
(sync in both directions
)
Blast
You can use an e-mail blast to send mass e-mails to a target group. A subset of the campaign tracking options are available for e-mail blasts.
To send an e-mail blast, you must first do the following:
● Ensure that your administrator has set up mass e-mail in your system. For more information, see Activation of Mass E-Mail.
● Save an e-mail template on your local drive. For more information, see E-Mail Templates.
For information about the options related to SAP Cloud for Customer in Microsoft Outlook, see
Microsoft Outlook® for Sales Users [page 120] or
Working from Microsoft Outlook® for Service Users
For information about the options related to SAP Cloud for Customer in IBM Lotus Notes, see
VIDEO: IBM Lotus Notes® Settings and Features [page 132]
.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
37
1.18 E-Mail
1.18.1 Installing the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft
Outlook®
The SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook allows you to exchange information between Microsoft
Outlook and SAP Cloud for Customer.
Microsoft Outlook integration supports Microsoft Outlook 2007, Microsoft Outlook 2010, and Microsoft Outlook
2013.
Tasks
Installing or Updating the Add-In for Microsoft Outlook Integration
Each user who wants to use SAP Cloud for Customer functions from Microsoft Outlook must install the add-in on his or her computer. To update the add-in, follow the same procedure. To download the add-in, you must have administrative rights on the computer.
To avoid compatibility issues with previous releases, make sure that you have installed the latest version of the add-in.
1.
In SAP Cloud for Customer, choose Download .
2.
Choose the download link for the add-in for Microsoft Outlook.
3.
Install the add-in.
Follow the instructions in the installation wizard.
4.
Restart Microsoft Outlook to activate the add-in.
When you restart Microsoft Outlook SAP Cloud for Customer appears on your Microsoft Outlook screen, either as a separate toolbar (Microsoft Outlook 2007) or as a separate tab in the ribbon (Microsoft Outlook
2010 and Microsoft Outlook 2013).
Making Settings for SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook
1.
Enable the side pane in Microsoft Outlook as follows:
Microsoft Outlook Version
2007
2010 and 2013
Action
Enable the view SAP Cloud for Customer .
Enable the add-in SAP Cloud for Customer .
2.
Check the SAP Cloud for Customer folder locations in Microsoft Outlook as follows:
Microsoft Outlook Version
2007
Action
Check tools for SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In Settings .
38 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Microsoft Outlook Version
2010 and 2013
Action
Choose SAP Cloud for Customer Settings .
The add-in automatically creates the synchronization folders, including the following:
● Default Folder
This is the main folder where error and conflict information is stored.
●
●
Accounts Folder (only necessary for sales users)
This folder contains the accounts downloaded from SAP Cloud for Customer.
Contacts Folder (only necessary for sales users)
This folder contains the contacts downloaded from SAP Cloud for Customer.
To change any of these folders, click the folder link, select a new folder, and choose OK.
3.
In the Advanced Settings section, set the following: a.
If you want the system to display synchronization-related notifications in a message in the Microsoft
Windows task bar, select the Display Synchronization Notifications checkbox.
b.
If you want the system to display synchronization-related errors in a message in the Microsoft Windows task bar, select the Display Synchronization Errors checkbox.
You can use a right click on the SAP Cloud for Customer add-in icon in the Microsoft Outlook toolbar as a shortcut to display synchronization errors and notifications directly, access the error and conflict folders, open the activities list, and send meeting requests.
4.
If you are a service agent using Microsoft Outlook to reply to tickets, in the Initial Synchronization section, select the Enable Service Scenario checkbox.
Uninstalling the Add-In for Microsoft Outlook Integration
If you want to update your add-in, there is no need to uninstall it. Simply follow the procedure described in section Installing or Updating the Add-In for Microsoft Outlook Integration.
If you no longer want to use the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook, you can uninstall it as follows:
1.
On your computer, from your list of installed programs, uninstall the add-in for Microsoft Outlook.
2.
In Microsoft Outlook, find the folder that has the same title as the SAP solution and delete it.
See Also
Working from Microsoft Outlook® for Sales Users [page 120]
Working from Microsoft Outlook® for Service Users [page 214]
1.18.2 Installing the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Gmail™
The SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Gmail allows you to exchange information between Gmail and SAP Cloud for Customer. To use this add-in, you must first install it and make a few settings, as described here.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
39
Tasks
Installing the Add-In
1.
Go to the Google Chrome Web Store and search for “SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Gmail™”.
2.
Download the app by clicking + FREE .
The end-user license agreement (EULA) appears. Scroll down to read the agreement, then accept or reject it with the buttons at the bottom of the page.
If you reject the agreement, you will not be able to use the app. You can review the EULA later on and accept it under Options License .
Making Settings
1.
Open a Google Chrome™ browser and from the browser menu, choose Tools Extensions .
A list of your extensions appears.
2.
Under the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Gmail app, choose Options .
3.
In the URL field, enter the URL for your company's SAP Cloud for Customer system, which was probably communicated to you by your system administrator.
4.
If you did not accept the end-user license agreement (EULA) during installation and would like to do so, or if you would just like to review it, choose License .
See Also
1.18.3 Working from Gmail™
Prerequisites
You have installed the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Gmail™ locally on your computer and made the appropriate settings. For more information, see
Installing SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Gmail™ [page 39] .
Tasks
Logging on to SAP Cloud for Customer from Gmail
1.
Using the Google Chrome browser, log on to your Gmail account.
2.
Select an e-mail from your inbox.
If your administrator has set up single sign-on (SSO), the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar appears.
Otherwise, a logon screen appears. Enter your user name and password for your SAP solution.
40 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Create Items from Gmail
A toolbar with a subset of features appears in the Gmail sidebar. You can use the icons that appear here the same way you would in the SAP solution. For example, you can use them to create new contacts or accounts in the SAP system, right from your Gmail inbox.
Adding or Removing E-Mail for Synchronization
To synchronize an e-mail with your SAP solution, choose the icon that appears nearest to the contact's name. To undo this action, use .
Open the SAP Solution from Gmail
To open your SAP solution from the Gmail sidebar, choose Details .
Linking or Unlinking E-Mail and SAP Items
Items that exist in your SAP solution, such as leads or opportunities, appear in the tabs within the sidebar. To link the selected e-mail to an item that appears here, choose the icon that appears next to that item. To undo this action, use .
See Also
Installing SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Gmail™ [page 39]
1.18.4 E-Mail Security
Overview
To increase e-mail security, your SAP solution enables you to decrypt incoming e-mails and check them for trustworthy signatures, as well as encrypt and sign outgoing e-mails. Outgoing e-mails are encrypted using the
Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME) standard.
You can use this function for e-mail communication between your solution and your employees and your solution and your business partners, in e-mail scenarios provided by SAP. You can send encrypted e-mails to your users, (for example, to send them new passwords) or to business partners. You specify which e-mail scenarios you want to use and define settings for encryption and signatures for these scenarios in Business Configuration, in the E-Mail
Encryption and Signature Check fine-tuning activity.
The following diagram illustrates how e-mail encryption and signature is set up for communication between your system and your employees:
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
41
S/MIME Configuration and Process Description
The following diagram illustrates how e-mail encryption and signature is set up for communication between your system and your e-mail recipients:
42 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
S/MIME Configuration and Process Description
Encrypting E-Mails Sent from Your System
Key pairs, which consist of a public key and a private key, are used to encrypt and decrypt e-mails. The sender uses the recipient’s public key to encrypt e-mails sent to the recipient and the recipient uses his or her private key to decrypt these e-mails. Therefore, before outgoing e-mails can be encrypted, the recipient’s public key must be uploaded to the system. This can be done in the following ways:
●
●
●
The administrator uploads it manually. This option is valid for both employees and for business partners.
The employee uploads it manually. This option is valid for employees only.
The employee sends a signed e-mail (where the signature contains the S/MIME certificate) to the central security e-mail address. This option is valid for employees only.
Note that before an employee sends a signed e-mail containing the S/MIME certificate to the central security e-mail address, you have to upload the certificate of the trusted Certification Authority (CA) that has also issued the employee’s certificate. Otherwise, the system does not accept the employee's public key.
You can use only one S/MIME certificate for each employee. That is, if the employee uploads a second S/
MIME certificate, the system replaces the old one.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
43
Receiving Encrypted E-Mails Sent to Your System
You can define in an e-mail scenario that you only want to receive encrypted e-mails from a sender. For the sender to be able to send you encrypted e-mails, he or she must have your system’s certificate. Therefore, you must download this certificate and distribute it to the relevant employees and business partners.
Checking the Signature of E-Mails Sent to Your System
The sender signs e-mails using his or her private key and the recipient can then verify the signature using the public key.
To verify the signature of incoming e-mails, you have to upload the certificate of a trusted CA into your system. You have to do this for the central security e-mail address and for all system e-mail addresses to which employees and business partners can send an e-mail. The S/MIME certificate of the sender must be issued by the same CA. When receiving a signed e-mail, the system verifies whether the certificate in the e-mail is issued by a trusted CA, checks whether the signature is valid, and, if the certificate has been assigned to an employee, authenticates the employee's user ID by means of the S/MIME certificate. If the e-mail has been sent by a business partner who does not have a user in the system, the e-mail is processed by the system using a technical user. If the verification fails, the system rejects the e-mail and informs the sender.
Only trust those CAs that verify the e-mail address of the sender. Otherwise other persons could become the owner of a certificate that has been issued by the same CA and contains a valid e-mail address.
Signing E-Mails Sent from Your System
To sign e-mails sent from your system’s standard sender address (DoNotReply@<systemdomain>) a key pair is automatically created and signed by the SAP Passport CA for this e-mail address.
E-Mail Recipients: To be able to verify the signatures of e-mails sent from this address, the recipients of these emails need to install the corresponding CA certificate in their e-mails clients. For the standard sender address you can download the certificate from the SAP Passport CA. For external key pairs, you can get the certificate from the signing CA.
See Also
Configuration: Load Certificates and Activate Signing and Encryption for E-Mails
Configuration: E-Mail Encryption and Signature Check
Process-Integrated Output Settings
1.18.5 Uploading New E-Mail Security Certificates
When your system administrator set up your cloud solution, he or she uploaded an e-mail security certificate for you. This certificate is also called a Secure/Multipurpose Internet E-Mail Extension (S/MIME) certificate, and it is necessary for the system to encrypt outgoing e-mails.
In case your certificate becomes invalid or expires, you may want to upload a new certificate yourself.
If you have any difficulties, consult your system administrator.
44 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Tasks
Saving Your New Certificate
You can use your internet browser to download and save the latest certificate from the trusted Certification Authority
(CA).
For example, in Microsoft Internet Explorer® 9, download the certificate as follows:
1.
Go to the settings for internet options.
2.
As part of content, go to the list of certificates and choose the relevant one.
3.
In the details for that certificate, save a copy to file with file format Base-64 encoded X.509
.
Uploading Your New Certificate
1.
In SAP Cloud for Customer, under Personalize My Settings , choose Manage Certificates .
2.
Choose Upload S/MIME Certificate .
A separate window opens, displaying the files in your system.
3.
Direct the system to the place you saved your updated certificate in the last step and choose Open .
See Also
1.19 Working with Lists
Tasks
Filtering Lists
You can narrow down a list by searching or by using the following filtering or query options:
● Predefined filters
For some lists, you can select a predefined filter from a drop-down list. These filters are specific to the content in each list, and will allow you to filter your items or your team's items.
● Show Filter
For some lists, you may select additional options by doing the following:
1.
At the top of a list, choose .
●
2.
Narrow the list by choosing the appropriate categories, which appear above the list.
The number that follows a category name is the number of entries in that category.
3.
Select an item from the list for more details. To close the filter without selecting an item, choose .
Charts filter
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
45
The charts filter is only available in HTML5 clients.
●
The charts filter displays certain columns in the list visually, as segments of a chart.
1.
At the top of a list, choose Charts.
Charts appear for certain columns, containing segments for each category, along with a legend.
2.
To filter the list according to a segment, either click on the segment of the chart or the corresponding legend entry.
The list is filtered according to the information you chose. You can select more than one segment in the same chart, which increases the number of the results in the list.
3.
To narrow the number of results in the list, select segments in another chart as well.
Advanced Filter
For some lists, you may select additional options in the filter bar by doing the following:
1.
At the top of a list, choose .
2.
Make the appropriate selections. For more options, you may select .
3.
Select an item for more details.
To close the filter without selecting an item, choose .
To set up a filter to see obsolete accounts:
1.
Navigate to the accounts list.
2.
Choose .
3.
Under status, choose .
4.
Set the option as Equal To , and the value as Obsolete .
5.
If necessary, deselect the But Exclude box.
From the filter or advanced filter view, you can save or organize your filters or queries for future use. Saved queries appear in the drop-down list of filters. You can also set a query as the default so that it will automatically filter the list. Organize your queries to delete a saved query or to set a new default query.
Sorting Lists
●
●
●
●
You can sort a list by selecting at the top of a list, or by choosing a column header.
When you make a selection, an arrow pointing up appears, and the results appear in alphabetical order.
Select the column again to see the list in descending order. An arrow pointing down appears, and the results appear in reverse alphabetical order.
If you are sorting with the column header, you can sort multiple columns at once by holding down the
Shift
key as you choose. The direction of the arrow indicates the sort order, as described above.
1.20 Processing Inbound Phone Calls
Overview
Upon installing the Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) client adapter provided by SAP, your solution will automatically generate phone activities that capture customer information for incoming calls, provided that your solution is enabled to contain the Live Activity pane.
46 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Prerequisites
You have installed third-party telephony software.
Tasks
Installing the CTI Client Adapter
To allow your solution to automatically generate phone activities, install the CTI client adapter as follows:
1.
In SAP Cloud for Customer, choose Download .
2.
Download the CTI Client Adapter as follows:
1.
Hover over CTI Client Adapter , then click Download .
2.
Click Run when prompted.
3.
Click Yes when asked if you want the solution to publish changes on your computer.
4.
Complete the steps in the setup wizard.
Upon completing the installation steps, the adapter will be installed on your computer, and a shortcut will be visible on your desktop.
3.
Right-click the shortcut to the adapter on your desktop. Open the Compatibility menu. Enable the selection
Run the program as an administrator .
Adding Notes to Current Phone Call Activity
If you solution is enabled to contain the Live Activity pane, then you can view the details of your current phone call and add notes to the activity.
To see current phone call details, the CTI Client Adapter installed on your desktop must be running. You need to run the adapter before you open SAP Cloud for Customer .
1.
During a phone call, click Live Activity .
If necessary, you can choose Actions Reset in the live activity pane to clear the previous call information.
The details of your current call will be populated in the pane:
● Call Information contains details about the current call.
●
●
Customers contains detailed information about the customer on the call. You can also search for customer information.
Tickets contains a list of tickets related to the current customer. You can also search for tickets.
2.
Enter your comments in Notes and save your changes.
To see the notes you added to the activity, choose Activities Phone Calls , then open the phone call activity.
Your comments are visible in Notes .
Converting a Phone Activity to a Ticket
You can convert a phone activity to a ticket if your solution is scoped to use Social and Service features.
1.
Choose Activities Phone Calls .
2.
Select the phone activity you want to convert from the list.
3.
Select Actions and then Convert to New Ticket .
You will see a ticket in the Queue that contains the information from the phone activity.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
47
1.21 Search
1.21.1 About Worklists
Worklists are tables that contain documents and tasks. The worklist provides a summarized view of all your data records. You can use the search and filter options to locate the records you need. You can also perform actions such as open, edit, create, delete, or release.
Depending on the solution you are using, you might find two types of worklists: worklist and the new worklist.
Worklist
Worklist Layout
1.
Title of the worklist.
2.
Show dropdown listbox: You choose a predefined query from the dropdown list, and get the selected records in the table. For example, you choose My Sales Orders from the Show dropdown listbox, and get the sales orders that are created by you.
3.
Refresh and Search: You refresh the table to get the latest data records. You can also search within the worklist to find the record you need.
4.
Action: You can preform actions such as view, edit, create, preview in PDF version, export to Microsoft
Excel ® . The actions that you can perform here are determined by the application.
5.
Filter: You can use filters to find data records that fulfill the search criteria you define.
The New Worklist
The New Worklist Layout
48 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
1.
Title of the worklist.
2.
Action: From here you can perform actions that are not related to any items from the table. For example, you can create a new record.
3.
View: You can have different views on the records in the worklist. The types of views that you can choose from depends on the content of the worklist. Here is an overview of all views:
List View A classical table is displayed.
Card View
List View
Tile View
Card View
Thumbnail View
Tile View
Map View
Thumbnail View
Map View
The card view shows the data in four columns, where the first column is an image.
The tile view shows the data in two columns, where the first column is an image.
The thumbnail view shows an image and the title of the record below the image.
The map view supports Google Maps ® or Microsoft
Bing ® . The map area shows Google map or Bing map view for the address in the data record.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
49
Cloud View The cloud view shows tags in different sizes. Each tag is shown only once. The more a certain word is tagged, the bigger the font size of the word is in the cloud view.
Cloud View
4.
Sort: you can sort the data records by certain key fields.
5.
Show dropdown listbox: You choose a predefined query from the dropdown list, and get the selected records in the table. For example, you choose My Sales Orders from the Show dropdown listbox, and get the sales orders that are created by you.
6.
Filter: You can use filters to find data records that fulfill the search criteria you define.
7.
Search: You can also search within the worklist to find the record you need.
8.
Action: From here you can perform actions that are related to this particular data record. For example, you can view, edit, or release the document. You can also flag or tag the record. In the List view, place your mouse over the Actions column of the data record, and the available actions appears as an overlay. The actions that you can perform here are determined by the application.
Using Filters
You can use filters in a worklist to only show those data records that fulfill the search criteria you define in the filter row.
To filter the data in the worklist, you can follow the following steps:
1.
To define a filter using the filter row, in the toolbar above the list, choose the filter icon with the Show Filter
Row tool tip. The filter row is displayed as the first row in the list.
2.
Define the appropriate filter criteria the in the relevant columns. Use the appropriate filter operators.
3.
To apply the filter or filters to the list, press
Enter
or choose the filter icon at the beginning of the filter row with the Apply Filter tool tip.
The system searches across all available data records that are available in the worklist.
4.
To delete specific filters, delete the filter criteria for the column in the filter row and press
Enter
or choose the filter icon at the beginning of the filter row with the Filter Button tool tip.
5.
To hide the filter row and thereby delete all filters in it, in the toolbar above the list, choose the filter icon with the Delete Filter and Close Filter Row tool tip.
For additional information about the filter operators that are available in the solution, see
.
To obtain the filter results more quickly in a worklist, we recommend that you use the advanced search function.
Using Basic Search
To perform a basic search, enter a value, for example, an ID or description, in the search input field. The system searches the main fields for data that matches the value you entered. The search is case-independent, and you can use wildcard characters (such as an asterisk or question mark) in your search.
We recommend that you use the basic search.
Using Advanced Search
You can use the advance search to specify your search in detail.
50 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
To open the advanced search, click Advanced next to the search input field. Enter the value in the relevant advanced search input field(s). The advanced search fields vary according to document type or task.
To define a single field in more detail, or to enter multiple search values per field, you can use more options. More options are available to the right of the advanced search field by clicking the icon with the More Options tool tip.
Using More Options , you can use the following operators to define your search further:
● Equal To
●
●
Contains Pattern
Greater Than
●
●
Greater Than or Equal To
Less Than
●
●
Less Than or Equal To
Between
You can also exclude values based on the same operators.
If you use certain search criteria frequently, you can save your search variant as a query. To save your search criteria as a variant, enter your search criteria, perform the search, and then click Save (Query) , and enter a query name. By clicking Organize (Queries) , you can either organize your personal queries or delete them.
1.21.2 Enterprise Search
Enterprise Search allows you to search through the entire SAP solution.
Basic Search
Using the basic search, you can search for a term without specifying any details. You can search in all categories or you specify a specific category.
1.
Click the Enterprise Search icon in the Taskbar.
2.
Narrow down your search to a specific category by selecting the category in the dropdown list. If you want to search through the entire system, select All Categories .
3.
Enter your search terms then click Go or press
Enter
.
Search results are presented in the Search window.
You can use the asterisk (*) symbol to perform a wildcard search.
For example, searching *ell* returns terms such as well and hello.
4.
Click the link of the item you want to view.
Advanced Search
Advanced Enterprise Search is available in the Search window that results from performing a basic Enterprise Search.
1.
Click Advanced in the Search window.
2.
Narrow down your search to a specific category by selecting the category in the dropdown list. If you want to search through the entire system, select All Categories .
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
51
3.
Enter additional values in the input fields to narrow your search results. Note that the input fields available in your search pane might vary depending on your application.
The table below shows how each field will affect your search:
Field Name
Changed On: ... To:
Owner
ID:
Description:
Search Effect
Displays items edited between the specified dates.
Displays items that belong to the specified owner.
Displays items with the specified ID, for example, message ID or employee ID.
Displays items that match the specified item description.
Tag Name: Displays items tagged with the specified name.
4.
Click Go or press
Enter
to initiate the search.
The solution returns a list of items based on your search criteria.
5.
Click Reset to clear your search criteria.
1.21.3 Filter Operators
Available Filter Operators
The search syntax supports the following operators:
Filter Criteria
Display only those result records that contain the value
[comparison value]
Operator
*
Display only those result records that start with
[comparison value]
Display only those result records that contain a value that is less than [comparison value]
Display only those result records that contain a value that is either greater than or equal to [comparison value]
Display only those result records that contain any value, but not [comparison value]
Display only those result records that contain any value between [lower limit] and [upper limit] (including these limit values)
-
!
<
>=
Display only those result records that contain a value that is either less than or equal to [comparison value]
<=
Example
*2*
No operator or = 123
Display only those result records that contain a value that is greater than [comparison value]
>
= 123
> 123.00
< 123.00
>= 123.00
<= 123.00
! 123.00
123.00
122.99
-124.00
122.00
123.01
124.00
100.00 – 123.00
100.00
110.77
123.00
Result Examples Not Found
2
123
999 123 999
111
123
123 ABC
123.01
124.00
54684884.89
123ABC
ABC123
ABC 123
2.00
123.00
-124.00
123.00
122.90
-123.00
123.00
123.01
>= 123.00
<= 123.01
123.00
99.99
123.01
-110.00
52 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Filter Criteria Operator
Display only those result records that contain any value below [lower limit] or above [upper limit], but no value in between (and also not the limit values)
! and -
Display only those result records that fulfill at least one of the filter criteria
;
Example Result Examples Not Found
! 100.00 – 123.00 99.99
123.01
-110.00
100.00
110.77
123.00
A*; X A
A BCD
ABCD
X
XA
X A
X ABCD
X A BCD
If you want to use a character string as a filter and this character string contains one of the special characters listed above (such as C-1025), you need to place the entire character string in quotation marks (
"C-1025"
, for example).
You want to identify all data records in the current column that end with ouse, such as House and Mouse.
To do this, you enter
*ouse
as the comparison value.
Filter Operators for Checkboxes
For worklists that contain checkboxes, the following operators are available:
Filter Criteria
Display only those result records for which the checkbox is selected
Display only those result records for which the checkbox is not selected
Operator yes no
1.22 Library
The Library allows you to store documents, pictures, or other files directly in the solution. Here you can view, edit, or delete files.
You can also easily share files with your colleagues to collaborate with them. Version tracking and exclusive editing rights using a check in/check out policy ensure that the files are always up to date, and searching and linking functions allow you to easily find and share your files with colleagues.
Tasks
Add a Document
1.
From the Library , choose Actions Add .
The Add Document window appears.
2.
Browse to the file location.
If necessary, change the automatically populated Title .
3.
Select Enable Versioning if you want to track the history of the document.
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
53
When versioning is enabled, a major revision is represented by an increase of the first digit in the version number of the document. Within a major version of a document, there can be several minor versions, which are represented by the second digit in the version number.
4.
Save your entries.
You can also add a document by choosing the Add Document option from the toolbar.
Display a Document
●
●
●
●
●
From the Library , rest your cursor on the title of the document.
The information regarding the document is displayed.
Choose the title from the list or in the window.
The Document details window opens.
In the Header View , you have an overview of the properties of the document.
Overview gives you an overview of the recent updates of the documents as well as a table with version information.
Feed provides you with information regarding the latest feed updates.
Versions provides an overview of the versions of the document.
Edit a Document
1.
From the Library , highlight the document you want to edit.
2.
Choose Actions Check Out .
You can now open, edit, and save the document.
3.
After editing, upload a new version of the document by choosing updated file.
Actions Check In and browsing to the
Search for a Document
1.
From the Library , choose the Show Filter icon.
2.
Select your parameters in the lists displayed, or enter your search terms.
The system displays the documents matching your criteria.
3.
Choose Advanced for advanced search options.
1.23 Using the SAP Add-In for Microsoft Excel®
Overview
The SAP Add-In for Microsoft Excel provides the integration of Microsoft Excel with an SAP system. Depending on where you open the add-in for Microsoft Excel, different functions are available.
You can use the SAP Add-In for Microsoft Excel for the following purposes:
● To create business data (administrators only)
● To analyze report data
54 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
Prerequisites
To use Microsoft Excel with your solution, ensure that the Add-In for Microsoft Excel® is correctly installed, as follows:
1.
Choose Download , then download the Add-In for Microsoft Excel® .
2.
Run the installation and setup wizards that appear.
3.
Open Microsoft Excel, then ensure that the add-in is active. If needed, consult the documentation in Microsoft
Excel for instructions on how to activate add-ins.
4.
Ensure that your Web browser is set to prompt automatically for file downloads. If needed, consult the documentation in your Web browser for additional information.
Using Microsoft Excel to Create Business Data (Administrators)
Administrators can use the SAP Add-In for Microsoft Excel to create objects, such as an account or a lead, by entering them in a predefined Microsoft Excel template and uploading them to the SAP system.
For more information about the application-specific business data, see Create Business Data Using Microsoft Excel.
If you can log on to the SAP system in a Web browser as normal, but cannot log on to the system from the
Add-In for Microsoft Excel, ask your administrator to check your proxy server settings to ensure that the connection to the system is not blocked.
Using Microsoft Excel to Analyze Report and Plan Data
You can use the SAP Add-In for Microsoft Excel to execute ad hoc analyses, create plan data, and define sales targets.
Note that the functions available to you depend on your role.
For more information about using Microsoft Excel for the specific purposes listed below, see the following:
Sales Users
●
●
Working with Reports in Microsoft Excel
Working with Sales Planning Data [page 159]
Administrators
● Design Reports Quick Guide
●
SAP Cloud for Customer
General Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
55
2 Marketing Features
2.1 Campaigns
Marketing campaigns enable you to plan, create, and execute campaigns. With the solution you can create either email campaigns directly out of the system or you create a campaign with a file export where you can let an external agency execute the campaign with the required data for phone call or letter campaigns.
To start a campaign you need to create first of all a target group, where you add members such as contacts, individual customers, existing target groups or accounts. But you can also import a CSV file or you export a report and add it to a target group. With the target group then you can create a campaign and execute it.
E-Mail Campaigns
If you want to send out e-mails directly out of the system you need to create an HTML file on your machine where you specify how the e-mail should look like. There you can also insert placeholders for personalization and you can enable parts for editing. This keeps the look and feel of your outgoing e-mails stable and you are only able to edit the required information. Then you create the e-mail template in the system under Marketing Content and upload the HTML file. In the Content view then you can add also placeholders, edit content, insert external surveys, and so on.
Now you can create a campaign and assign the e-mail template to it. After execution the system sends out personalized e-mails with the data of the target group.
Campaigns with File Export
To execute a phone or letter campaign where you can download the target group file based on a file format, you need a target group and a campaign file format defined in the Campaign File Export view in the Marketing work center.
With the Export List action in Build tab of a campaign, you can then download the file to a particular campaign file format you selected on the Attachments tab. This file can be handed over to your telemarketing team or to an outside agency for creating leads or nurturing existing leads.
Enhanced Marketing Functionalities
If your system is set up to support it and your system administrator enabled the Enhanced Marketing
Functionalities in scoping, you can create campaigns with multiple steps where you can define automated actions based on a trigger from the prospect, contact or customer with regards to a campaign.
Business Background
Prerequisites
Before you can use the marketing features of the solution, your administrator is required to have enabled the
Enhanced Marketing Functionalities option in business configuration. This includes:
●
●
●
Multi-step campaigns
Handling of soft bounces
Customer satisfaction surveys
●
●
●
Additional actions and triggers in campaign execution
Notifications that will appear, for example, when an e-mail bounce happen
Editor for editing e-mail templates in the system
56 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
Features that are related to this scoping option are introduced with the sentence “If your system is set up to support it...”.
Access control based on sales organization
If you want to restrict the access to the campaigns you can do this by granting a user the access to campaigns that are assigned to a specific sales organization.
Though if a sales organization is assigned to a campaign and the user has no authorization to see or edit campaigns for this sales organization, this campaign is not visible in list.
But if the sales organization has been changed in a campaign, the old assignment is still valid for one day. That means:
If you have the rights to access the campaign, you can assign any sales organization, even you have no rights for this sales organization. For current day, you can still access the campaign. Next day, the normal check is applied as described. Also after this period you can't access the campaign from other screens and work centers, such as from the Campaigns tab in the Accounts master data.
Marketing Permissions
It is the responsibility of your organization to comply with national legislation regarding data protection and the provision of marketing materials. Therefore, administrators must configure the solution for each country in which, or each customer with whom, your organization intends to conduct marketing activities and, to the extent legally required, make use of the option to store documents such as opt-ins or opt-outs.
Using marketing permissions, you can control the information and advertisements that are offered directly to your customers using e-mail, fax or phone calls. You can find the Marketing Permissions tab in the master data for contacts, individual customers, and leads.
For more information, see Marketing Permissions.
Approval Processes
You can enhance the campaign activation with a multi-step approval process, where approval is necessary before the campaign can be activated. An example of a two-step approval could be the following: In the first step you can define that the approval depends on the execution type and you have several approvers who can approve. Then in a second step the approval gets also relevant when the target group exceeds a given limit and the line manager of the employee must give the approval too. If the defined execution type is assigned to a campaign and also the assigned target group exceeds the defined limit, the approvers of both steps need to approve, before the campaign activation can be triggered. The approval functionality can also be used as a simple single-step approval.
For more information, see Enabling Approval Processes.
Multistep Campaigns Based on Triggers and Actions
If your system is set up to support it you create multistep campaign on the Built tab with defining the different marketing steps. There you can combine the following triggers and actions. The unavailable triggers are greyed out automatically:
● Triggers are the starting point where the system shall trigger a reaction:
○ Submitted Form : Here you can specify a reaction in case the addressee submitted a form back to your company.
●
○
○
E-Mail Interaction : Here you can specify a reaction in case the addressee opened or replied to an e-mail and on the other hand side in case the addressee didn't open or reply during a certain time frame.
Clicked Link : Here the e-mail template and the hyperlink of the e-mail on which you want to react when the addressee clicks this hyperlink in the sent out e-mail or doesn't click within a certain time frame.
Actions are follow-up activities for a specified trigger in the campaign:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
57
○
○
Send E-Mail : Sends e-mails directly out of the system with the selected e-mail template to the addressees that fit to the pre-set triggers.
Create Lead : Creates leads with a pre-set status assigned either to the selected employee directly or determined by lead routing rules.
Please be aware that the system creates leads only for accounts and contacts where no open lead exists already.
○
○
○
Notify : Creates a notification that triggers the selected employee.
Create Activity : Creates either e-mail or phone call activities with a specified subject and note that will assigned to the account manager or employee.
Export List : Creates a campaign where you get a file with the required data to handle the campaign externally. And according to the selection of the Channel (E-Mail, Fax, Letter or Phone) and Format you will get the applicable contact data of your selected target group. You will find the file on the
Attachments tab.
Communication Channels and Categories
Communication Categories are used to:
● Define limits on how often your customers can be contacted for each category within a certain period of time.
●
●
Maintain for each contact and individual account on the Marketing Permissions tab in the master data whether or not the customer subscribed the communication category.
Categorize the e-mail templates on the Content view.
The combination of the subscription for each category in the master data and the assignment to the e-mail template the system determines whether the customer gets the e-mail.
Communication Channel such as e-mail, fax, and telephone, are used in the marketing permissions to maintain the legal requirements for the required countries in your company on the one hand side and on the other side you can also maintain for each contact and individual account on the Marketing Permissions tab in the master data whether or not the customer has given the consent to get contacted by fax, e-mail or telephone in general.
So it can happen that although the customer subscribed for a specific communication category it can be prohibited by the communication channel for this customer or the permission settings for the corresponding country in business configuration.
For more information, see Configuring Marketing Permissions.
Target Group Members in the Export File
Only target group members who meet the following criteria are added to the export file:
● Member can be contacted (contact permission has not been denied)
●
●
Member status is not obsolete or blocked
Member's address information is available. For example, if you launch an e-mail campaign, all exported target group members must have an e-mail address in their contact information.
E-Mail Templates in the System and HTML E-Mail Template Files
●
●
To use e-mail templates in the system you have to create the HTML e-mail template file locally on your machine and then create the e-mail template in the Content view of the Marketing work center.
If your system is set up to support it, you can enable paragraphs for editing with the
<div>
tag
<div class="editable">
in the HTML files for the e-mail templates. After the upload in the system you can edit these paragraphs on the Design tab. All other parts of the e-mail template are disabled for editing.
58 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
●
●
With the e-mail templates in the system you define also the sender's name and e-mail address for this template.
The system uploads the template and checks the HTML code for viruses, HTML syntax, code page, and the used placeholders. In case of any errors, the system does not upload the file. Though if the system doesn't upload the file but shows error messages, you have to correct the file content by a 3rd party software and upload the corrected file again.
Tasks
Creating Target Groups
For more information, see
.
Creating E-Mail Templates Including Surveys in the E-Mail
To make e-mail templates and satisfaction surveys available for marketing campaigns you must upload or create in the Content view of the Marketing work center.
Note that satisfaction surveys for external use are only available, if your system is set up to support it.
●
●
Creating an HTML E-Mail Template Offline
For more information, see E-Mail Templates.
Create an E-Mail Template in the System a.
To upload an e-mail template choose Marketing Content and click New E-Mail Template .
b.
Enter the required data such as a name, communication category, and the senders name and e-mail address.
Please note that you can also change the reply-to address and reply-to name after you saved the e-mail template. But these fields are personalized hidden and if you remove or change the replyto address the automatic reply tracking will not work anymore.
c.
Click Save and Open .
d.
On the Details tab under Languages click Add to add a template.
e.
Choose the language of the template and enter a subject.
You can assign one e-mail template for each language. During the campaign execution, the communication language of the target group member (depending on the type of the member, the data is derived from the communication data of the corporate account, the person data of the private account or the person data of the corporate account's contact person) is taken in order to use the corresponding e-mail template. For example, an account has the communication language German and so the German e-mail template is used to create the e-mail. In case no communication language is selected, the default e-mail template is used. Also some place holders such as title and form of address are taken language-dependent.
f.
Then click Upload to select the template from your local machine and click Add to finish the upload.
To add more languages click Add and New .
g.
If your system is set up to support it, you can edit on the Design tab the template in the system assumed you enabled the paragraphs you want to change with the tag
<div class="editable">
.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
59
During editing, it may occur that the placeholders lose their highlighting, and therefore their function as placeholders. If you observe this behavior, select
CTRL
plus
Z
immediately. In response, the highlighting will return, and you can proceed with editing.
h.
If your system is set up to support it, you can also insert satisfaction survey links to the e-mail template during the editing.
i.
Save your changes and to activate the template choose Actions Activate .
As soon as the activated template is assigned to a campaign you can't change the template.
●
●
Sending Test E-Mail
To test your e-mail template, click Actions Send Test E-Mail , enter at least the e-mail address of the recipient, for example, your own e-mail address, and click OK . For each language, exactly one test e-mail will be created and sent. If you use placeholders in the e-mail template, you can enter an account and a contact person. In this case, the placeholders in the e-mail will be filled with the corresponding values of the account and contact person.
Note that the system can only confirm that the e-mail has been sent but not that it has been received by the sender.
Create a Satisfaction Survey
To create a satisfaction survey choose Marketing Content and click New Survey .
For more information on how to create a survey, see Configuring Visits and Designing Surveys.
In the Content view you can create satisfaction surveys only.
Creating Campaigns
1.
Choose Marketing Campaigns New .
You can also create a campaign directly from a target group by choosing Actions New
Campaign . The target group from which you created the campaign is assigned automatically.
2.
Then enter a name and click Save and Open .
3.
On the Details tab you can enter a description, select a channel, and a sales organization.
In case you create an e-mail campaign you can also let the system assign a task to the account owners in case there are e-mail bounces where the account owner should follow-up to update the master data.
4.
Under Schedule enter the dates when the campaign shall start or schedule it immediately.
To finish a campaign you have to set it manually to Finished by choosing Actions Set as
Finished .
5.
On the Build tab you model the whole campaign flow with triggers and actions:
1.
Click on the plus sign after Target Group to select a target group, then add an action, for example, Send e-mail , and select an e-mail template.
2.
Then select a trigger and add action as well.
6.
Save your entries.
The campaign is created with status Planned .
60 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
Executing a Campaign
If your campaign needs approval based on any of the conditions defined in the approval process, under actions
Submit for Approval will be visible. Once the approval is received, your campaign status will automatically be updated to Approved . You can execute the campaign by choosing Activate under Actions . If a campaign doesn’t need approval,
Submit for Approval will not be visible and you can activate the campaign by choosing Activate Actions .
Once the campaign is activated, you will see whether the campaign has been executed successfully on the Details tab.
But note that the activation runs in the background and can have a time delay.
To set the campaign to complete, you need to select Finished under Actions of a campaign.
Once the campaign is executed, and if it’s an e-mail campaign, you can see the e-mail metrics and campaign performance on the Results tab.
Within e-mail metrics, you can see various metrics per e-mail, for example, sent, hard bounced, soft bounced, no contacted, delivered, replied, opened, clicked, and unsubscribed. Please see below under Handling E-Mail
Campaigns the definitions of hard bounce, soft bounce, and unsubscribe.
Handling E-Mail Campaigns
With e-mail campaigns you can send personalized HTML e-mail messages in marketing campaigns directly from the solution while the campaign is activated. Each account or contact of the assigned target group will receive a personalized e-mail messages if he or she is allowed to be contacted and has a valid e-mail address. The activation can be scheduled to be started immediately or in the future at a certain date and time. To personalize the e-mail you should create an e-mail template that contains the mail content and placeholders, such as the formatted name of the account or contact. These placeholders will be filled with the information of the contacted account or contact while the e-mail is sent.
On the Execution Details tab you see the key figures and you can track whether or not the customer opens the e-mail message on his or her computer.
● Handling Bounces and Unsubscribe
If your system is set up to support it, the account responsible is triggered with a task to check the master data.
○ Hard Bounces
A hard bounce is an e-mail that technically could not be delivered, for example, because of an invalid email address. though, if such an hard bounce happens the status of campaign's outbound tracking record will be updated and the appropriate reason, for example, Delivery Failed or E-Mail Address not correct , is set.
If the reason E-Mail address not correct has been set, the flag E-Mail Invalid is set in the corresponding contact. This is to avoid that the invalid or incorrect e-mail address is used in future campaign activations.
You can find this information also in the Not Contacted list on the Execution Details tab of the campaign.
○ Soft Bounces
A soft bounce is an e-mail that could not be delivered, for example, because the recipient’s inbox is full, server is temporarily unavailable, our maybe even because the recipient has an auto reply such as an out-of-office reply or about having left the company. If your system is set up to support it and if you have maintained the key words in business configuration for soft bounces, you will find the tracking in your campaign on the Execution Details tab in the Not Contacted list as Soft Bounce: Temporary not available; try again later.
Prerequisite:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
61
●
○
You have maintained the key words for each language in the Enhanced Campaign Execution fine-tune activity in the Business Configuration work center accordingly.
Unsubscribe
The recipient of the campaign e-mail can unsubscribe by sending back a pre-configured e-mail to a certain e-mail address. In future this recipient will not get any campaign e-mail and his or her marketing permission for e-mail is updated in the master data as Opt-Out for the communication channel E-Mail .
For subscribing again, go to the Marketing Permission tab of the Contact , Individual Customer or lead , and set the E-Mail channel back to Opt-In . For more information, see Marketing Permission.
Troubleshooting
○ Why does the execution status of the campaign remain in Scheduled or Running although the planned start date and time has been reached?
Once the campaign is started, the status will be updated by the system automatically. But there can be different reasons why this status update does not happen:
○ Due to high workload on the server, the campaign cannot be started at the planned start date and time. It will be started once the system has again free resources.
○ The campaign has been started but it failed. One reason, for example, can be a server shutdown.
Once a day, the status of the campaign is corrected automatically. This means the next day you should see that the status has been changed to Failed .
○
○
○
What to do if a campaign failed?
Restart the failed campaign again.
Why did the activation of the campaign end with status Finished with Errors?
The campaign has been started successfully, but it could not create and send all personalized e-mail.
Therefore it set the status of the campaign to Finished with Errors . One reason could be that the campaign execution was scheduled for a future date and time but the campaign was locked by another user at this date and time.
You can click on the hyperlink of the execution status and open an application log with detailed messages.
Analyze the messages and restart the failed campaign again.
The campaign activation has been Finished Successfully. On the tab “Execution Details” the list
“Contacted” shows all successfully contacted members of the target group. After some minutes or hours a successfully contacted member vanished.
The system has created and sent a personalized e-mail to the mailbox of this member. But this mailbox does not exist. The mail server received a so-called Delivery Status Notification .
This notification is processed automatically and updated the campaign information of the Contacted list.
The member has been moved to the list Not Contacted and a corresponding reason has been set.
In addition, the indicator E-Mail Invalid has been set for the e-mail address of this member. You can see this indicator in the corresponding account or contact person master data. Here you can correct the email address and remove this indicator again. In a future campaign, this e-mail address would be used again and the campaign activation will send a personalized e-mail to this mailbox.
If the indicator is not removed, a future campaign would filter out this e-mail address. It would appear in the Not Contacted list with a corresponding reason.
Defining Response Options for Campaigns
If you want to classify responses that you capture from campaigns, a marketing administrator can create response options that can be assigned to campaigns. A response option can be assigned a positive, negative, or neutral classification, for example to capture customers' sentiment or interest.
1.
Choose Marketing Response Options New .
62 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
The Response Options view is personalized hidden.
2.
Enter a name for the response option and select a classification.
3.
Save your entries.
The response option is saved with status Active and can be assigned to campaigns that have not yet been activated.
The response options are mainly used for giving any semantics to activities that are related to a campaign. If you defined a standard response option for a campaign this option will be preset in the activity when you enter the related campaign but you can also change the option again to another value.
Creating Marketing Funds for Campaigns
1.
Choose Marketing Marketing Funds New .
2.
Enter a description for the fund, choose type from the dropdown list, the amount and currency, the start and end dates, and finally associate a campaign with it. Then save your entries. A fund is created and associated with a campaign with status Active . This displays in your marketing funds list.
3.
Enter any additional information you want to save for the new fund. For example, you can add attachments.
Follow-up Actions
●
●
Capture Responses to a Campaign
After you have activated a campaign, you can capture responses from the target group members.
To do so, open the campaign and go to the Execution Details tab. There you can capture the responses for each account under Actions .
Monitor Your Campaign
On the Results tab you can monitor your campaign and find the response numbers and e-mail metrics.
2.2 Target Groups
Target groups are used to segment your market and to target the right customers or prospects for each campaign.
You create target groups with members from your existing customer and prospect database or from tickets, if you have service features enabled for your solution.
You can use an e-mail blast to send mass e-mails to a target group. A subset of the campaign tracking options is available for e-mail blasts.
To send an e-mail blast, you must first do the following:
●
●
Ensure that your administrator has set up mass e-mail in your system. For more information, see
Activation of Mass E-Mail.
Save an e-mail template on your local drive. For more information, see E-Mail Templates.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
63
Tasks
Creating Target Groups from Marketing
1.
To create a new target group, choose Marketing Target Groups New .
2.
Enter the target group name and save your entries.
The target group is created with status Active . You can use the active target group in your marketing campaigns.
If you do not want the target group to be used immediately in campaigns, you can change the status from the Actions menu.
Creating Target Groups from Tickets
1.
To create a new target group from tickets, choose either Customer Service Queue or Customer
Service Tickets .
2.
Choose the tickets you want to use to create the group.
3.
Choose Actions Create Target Group .
4.
Enter the target group name and save your entries.
The target group is created with status Active . You can use the active target group to e-mail customers that have an e-mail address in their account.
If you do not want the target group to be used immediately in campaigns, you can change the status from the Actions menu.
Editing Target Group Members
1.
To add members to the target group, open the target group and choose Members New .
2.
Enter individual accounts and contacts or select from many accounts and contacts and then choose OK .
The members are added to the target group.
You can only add individual accounts and contacts according to the general access rights valid for individual accounts and contacts.
3.
To remove members, select the members in the list, click the actions icon, and then choose Remove Selected
Members .
4.
To check whether target group members have contact information, select a member from the list, click the actions icon, and then choose Check Contact Info .
5.
Select the type of contact information you want to check and then choose OK .
The Addressability status for the target group member changes depending on whether the selected contact information exists.
6.
To export the target group member list to a Microsoft Excel ® file, click the actions icon and then choose Export to Microsoft Excel ® .
Uploading Target Group Using CSV File
You can upload a target group into the system using a CSV file. The only prerequisite is that the internal customer and contact IDs are already in the system.
64 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
1.
To upload a target group in your system you need to create a CSV file using the following pattern:
CUSTOMER_INTERNAL_ID;CONTACT_PERSON_INTERNAL_ID;CUSTOMER_FORMATTED_NAME;CONTACT_P
ERSON_FORMATTED_NAME;
<internal ID of the customer>;<internal ID of the contact>;<formatted name of the customer>;<formatted name of the contact>;
The fields
CUSTOMER_FORMATTED_NAME
and
CONTACT_PERSON_FORMATTED_NAME
are only for a better usability of the table but aren't required for the upload.
2.
Now create a new target group or open the target group that you want to enhance with members and choose
Members .
3.
Then click Actions Upload from File .
4.
Click Select File , select the file from your local machine, and click Upload .
5.
Save your changes.
2.3 VIDEO: Working with Leads
Video
Working with Leads (4m 48s)
Find out how to create and qualify leads, and how to convert leads to other items — such as opportunities— to drive sales activity.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
2.4 Leads
Under Sales Leads or Marketing Leads — depending upon the authorizations you have been assigned
— you can create leads to record raw data that is derived from campaigns, trade shows, and other marketing activities. You can also edit leads, and convert leads to follow-on items — such as opportunities, or accounts and contacts — to drive sales activity. To this end, you can also perform the following optional actions:
●
●
Specify the source and campaign of your leads
Classify leads according to a particular interest
●
●
●
Qualify leads by applicable levels — for example, as cold, warm, or hot
Track and analyze the success of your leads over a specified time frame
Add products to leads
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
65
Tasks
Creating Leads
1.
Choose Sales Leads New or Marketing Leads New .
2.
Enter the pertinent information about the lead.
3.
Save your entries.
Using Existing Accounts to Create Leads
1.
Choose Sales Leads New or Marketing Leads New .
2.
Select Use Existing Account , provided that you have personalized the solution to make this option visible.
3.
Enter the name of the lead.
4.
Specify the existing account to be used.
5.
Specify the source.
6.
Save your entries.
Leads that are created with this option can only be converted to opportunities, because an account and contact are already associated with them.
Creating Individual Customers from New Leads
1.
Choose Sales Leads New or Marketing Leads New .
2.
Select Create Indiv. Customer , provided that you have personalized the solution to make this option visible.
3.
Enter the name of the lead.
4.
Enter, at a minimum, the last name of the individual customer to be created.
5.
Save your entries.
Within a lead, you can also choose Actions Convert to Individual Customer to convert a lead to an individual customer, or Actions Associate Individual Customer to associate an individual customer with a lead without changing that lead’s status.
Using the Business Card Scanner to Create Leads
Prerequisite
Your company has purchased the necessary licenses and your administrator has made the appropriate settings to activate the business card scanner. For more information, your administrator should see Getting
Started for SAP Cloud for Sales and Marketing Administrators, section Enable the Business Card Scanner to
Create Leads (optional) .
1.
On your iPhone
®
or Android™ device in the SAP Cloud for Customer app, go to Leads .
2.
Tap Actions , then choose Scan .
In response, the phone's camera is activated.
3.
Center on the screen the business card that you'd like to scan.
In response, the app takes a picture of the business card, which appears on the screen.
66 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
4.
Check the image. If it is clear and legible, then tap Use Photo .
In response, the app transfers the information from the business card to the appropriate fields to create the lead.
5.
Confirm or adjust the information as required, then save the lead by tapping Done .
The information from the business card now appears as a contact under your leads.
Editing Leads
1.
Open the lead of interest.
2.
Position the cursor over the information you want to edit.
As you move the cursor over an editable field, the background changes to a different color. When you click a field, you enter edit mode.
3.
Edit the lead as required, then save your entries.
You cannot edit leads that have been converted to follow-on items, such as opportunities.
Copying Leads
Provided that an active account is associated with a lead, proceed as follows to copy it:
1.
Open the lead of interest.
2.
Choose Actions Copy .
3.
On the following screen, adjust the entries for the resultant lead, as required.
4.
Save the copied lead.
Assigning Owners to Leads Automatically
If your system administrator has activated lead assignment in your system, then owners are automatically assigned for new leads only. For more information, see Defining Rules for Lead Assignment.
Assigning Owners to Leads Manually
1.
Select one or more leads.
2.
Choose Actions Route Selected Leads .
The system uses the rules defined by the system administrator to assign owners to these leads. The owner that is assigned this way overrides any previous owner information for a lead.
Assigning Products to Leads
In the Microsoft Silverlight
®
client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Leads or Marketing Leads .
2.
Open the lead of interest.
3.
Select the Products tab.
4.
Open the Products pane.
5.
Drag the product icon of interest from the Products pane and drop it onto the table within the Products tab.
In the HTML5 client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Leads or Marketing Leads .
2.
Open the lead of interest.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
67
3.
Select the Products tab, then choose Add .
4.
Specify the product to be assigned, then choose Add .
Removing Products from Leads
1.
Choose Sales Leads or Marketing Leads .
2.
Open the lead of interest.
3.
Select the Products tab.
4.
Find the product to be removed.
5.
In the Action column corresponding to the product to remove, choose Remove .
Converting Leads
When you convert a lead to an opportunity, it remains in the system as a record. You can further process, as required, any follow-on items that arise from the lead, but you cannot delete the lead once it has been converted.
To convert a lead to another item, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the lead of interest.
2.
On the lead details screen, choose one of the following:
● Actions Convert to Sales Lead
● Actions Convert to Opportunity
● Actions Convert to Account and Contact
3.
Edit the item that is to result from this lead, then save your entries.
If your administrator has scoped the solution to check for potential duplicate accounts and contacts, then select Check for Duplicates before you save the account and contact, to ensure that its information is unique.
If the information you enter is found to resemble the information of an existing account or contact, then the solution notifies you that potential duplicate accounts or contacts were found.
In response, the follow-on item of the converted lead appears in the Converted to column.
Editing Marketing Permissions
It is the responsibility of your organization to comply with national legislation regarding data protection and the provision of marketing materials. Therefore, administrators must configure the solution for each country in which, or each customer with whom, your organization intends to conduct marketing activities and, to the extent legally required, make use of the option to store documents such as opt-ins or opt-outs.
Using marketing permissions, you can control the information and advertisements that are offered directly to your customers using e-mail, fax or phone calls. You can find the Marketing Permissions tab in the master data for contacts, individual customers, and leads.
For more information, see Marketing Permissions.
Deleting Activities
1.
Open the Activities tab.
2.
Within the Action column of the activity to be deleted, choose Delete .
Deleting activities from the lead removes them from the system entirely.
68 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
3.
In the dialog box that follows, confirm that you want to delete the selected activity
See Also
2.5 Lead Scores
In the Lead Scores view of the Marketing work center you can configure engagement scores for the corresponding consumer behavior patterns, and define follow-up actions accordingly, to ensure that sales teams focus on the most promising leads. For example, if an engagement score exceeds 70, then a lead qualification level of Hot can be defined by marketing operations users.
Engagement scores are a dimension of the lead score concept that reflects the behavior of customers and prospects in relation to whether they clicked a link, opened an e-mail, submitted a form, and so on.
The engagement score is calculated based on marketing interactions between your company and your customer.
For example, if you started an e- mail campaign the system can analyze whether the customer has clicked on hyperlinks in the sent out e-mail, responded by e-mail to your campaign or unsubscribed for information by e-mail.
Based on these interactions the score increases or decreases.
You can find then the engagement score in the account's contact data as a value between 0 and 100.
Lead scores are only available if you system administrator has activated the Enhanced Marketing Functionalities in the Business Configuration .
Business Background
Triggers and Actions
●
●
Triggers Opened E-Mail, Submitted Form, and Clicked Link Only With Action Change Engagement Score
With the triggers Opened E-Mail , Submitted Form , and Clicked Link you can monitor inbound marketing interactions of your customers and depending on the specified reaction times you can increase or decrease the engagement score of the corresponding account's contact.
Trigger Engagement Score Only With Actions Create Lead, Create Activity, and Set Lead Qualification Level
With the trigger Engagement Score you define the resulting actions based on the corresponding engagement score:
○ Create Activity of type E-Mail , Phone Call , and Task
○ Create Lead with status Open or Qualified
○ Set Lead Qualification Level to Cold , Warm or Hot
When the lead qualification level was changed by a lead score also a note was added to the lead telling the user that the lead qualification level was changed to, for example, Hot by lead score XYZ.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
69
We strongly recommend to define:
●
●
Clear time frame conditions without any overlap for action Change Engagement Score because otherwise the engagement score isn't calculated correctly.
Clear conditions without any overlap for the Engagement Score trigger if you selected the Set Lead
Qualification Level action. Otherwise you will get wrong level changes.
● First all inbound triggers according to your needs before handling the resulting actions based on the newly calculated engagement score.
Tasks
Creating a Lead Score
1.
To create a lead score, click New , enter a name, and click Save and Open .
2.
To select a trigger click on the plus sign (+) beside and specify the details.
3.
Then select an action and specify the details.
4.
Save your entries
The lead score is now in status Planned .
Activating a Lead Score
To activate a lead score, open it and click Actions Activate .
Only one lead score in your system can be active. Though in case you activate a new lead score, the system deactivates the old one.
Deactivating a Lead Score
To deactivate a lead score, open it and click Actions Deactivate .
The lead score appears in the Lead Scores view with status Canceled and you can't delete it.
Copying a Lead Score
1.
To copy a lead score, open an existing one and click Actions Copy .
2.
Modify the name and click Save and Open .
Deleting a Lead Score
You can only delete lead scores with status Planned .
To delete a lead score, select the lead score in the Lead Scores view you want to delete and click the Delete icon in the Actions column.
70 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
2.6 SAP Customer Insight for Marketing
2.6.1 SAP Customer Insight for Marketing: Overview and Headline
Overview
The SAP Customer Insight for marketing provides you more control over all your marketing initiatives and keeps track of your campaigns, leads, and allocations of your marketing spend. It helps you better manage your marketing activities including market development, campaign management, funds management, and lead qualifications.
The marketing dashboard presents marketing executives with a unified view of all their key performance metrics for marketing and helps them gain intelligent and actionable insights into their business. The dashboard provides marketing executives with a visualization of how well an organization is achieving key outcomes and objectives and optimizing performance creating an agile business to stay ahead in the market and react timely to market influences.
This is the ideal tool to ensure marketing initiatives are on track, and facilitates strategic decisions and recommends course adjustments, such as whether the marketing organization is on track for driving demand of products according to forecasts through higher quality leads to sales, improved customer retention, or increased market footprint.
You can view marketing-specific tiles with key performance indicators for reports such as pipeline, forecast, marketing funds, campaigns, marketing ROI, cost per lead, social media sentiment, and social reach, and drill down to detailed reports. You can also view new headlines for trending metrics.
You now have the option of configuring dynamic headline tiles. That includes defining the metadata for headlines from a predefined text model. You can choose the KPIs that you would like to monitor for strong positive and negative deviations from pre-defined thresholds that you set. The headlines alert users to the KPIs with the highest deviations.
For information on how to set up the SAP Customer Insight for marketing dashboard, watch the video Setting Up the Home Page and SAP Customer Insight.
Tasks
Headline Concept
The purpose of a Headline is to alert marketing executives to a strong positive or negative deviation from a predefined threshold in a KPI
You can now use dynamic headline capabilities with the option of monitoring a list of KPIs of your choice in the adapt mode. You can set thresholds for these KPIs based on report dimensions such as Country , Region , and Product
Category . Based on the threshold set, the analytics framework will calculate and display the strongest deviations as headlines.
Headlines display the top three KPIs with the strongest deviations from threshold. The web UI displays ellipses
(arrows) at the corner of the headline tile, which you can click to display the next report. On the iPad, you can swipe the headline tile to see the next report. You have the ability to define and set the threshold for each report. The headline tile text is displayed based on deviations as well.
You have the ability to define the text for your headline that coincides with any particular deviation on any given report. To build more meaningful texts for the headline, we provide you with a set of Tags which you can use within your headline texts.
For information on configuring the headline tile, see Setting Up Tiles for the Home Page and SAP Customer Insight.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
71
Pipeline Health
This headlines report tile tracks pipeline health, and also the trending metrics and exceptions in the pipeline multiple
KPI. It further tracks the pipeline multiple KPI for exceptions in the established thresholds, and also alerts users to the same.
Calculation
Pipeline Calculation = Sales Revenue Amount – Divided by - Sales Forecast Amount
Sales Revenue
This headline report tile tracks the sales revenue KPI for exceptions, either positive or negative, in the established thresholds; and alerts users to the same.
Calculation
Sales Revenue Amount = OPP_YEARMONTH in CURRENT Quarter + PAST 3 Quarters and
OPP_LIFECYCLE_STATUS = 4 (WON)
See Also
SAP Customer Insight for Marketing: KPI [page 72]
2.6.2 SAP Customer Insight for Marketing: KPI
KPI Templates
SAP Customer Insight for Marketing offers KPI templates for you to create marketing-specific dashboards. You can define custom KPIs based on the templates provided. This will also enable you to set thresholds for your report metrics.
As the KPI templates are visible in the Microsoft Silverlight
®
client only, you have to configure them first in that client, and then view the changes on the dashboard in HTML5.
For information on how to set up KPIs, see Create and Edit a KPI.
Tasks
To configure a headline KPI, refer to the steps below.
How to Configure a Headline KPI
You can now use dynamic headline capabilities with the option of monitoring a list of KPIs of your choice in the adapt mode. You can set thresholds for these KPIs based on report dimensions such as country, region, and product category. Based on the threshold set, the analytics framework calculates and displays the strongest deviations as headlines.
To configure a headline KPI:
Step 1: Log in to the system
1.
Log in to the Microsoft Silverlight
®
client of your tenant as the administrator.
2.
Under the Business Analytics work center, choose the Design KPI option.
72 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
3.
Select a KPI which you would like to configure the headline for and click on the Edit button.
For Headline Revenue , create the KPI by copying that specific KPI template.
4.
On the following screen, set parameters for generating a headline.
Step 2: Configuring KPI for Headline
To configure a headline, you have to set parameters in the Drill Characteristics and Rules tabs.
1.
Go to the General tab to configure a KPI. Enter all required information for the KPI based on the following parameters:
● Name — name of the KPI
●
●
●
Description — text explaining the purpose of the KPI
KPI Category — displays work centers the KPI is assigned to
Current value — determines the current value from the report
Sales revenue for the current quarter.
●
●
Value settings — allows you to configure the display settings for the value to be displayed
Context report — allows you to configure the displayed report when you open the KPI details
2.
Next, go to the Values and Thresholds tab to set threshold which would be compared against the current value to predict trends. Set the threshold based on the following parameters:
● Target value — defines the value to be compared with current value
●
●
Reference value — defines the value to define trends
Thresholds — defines limits set for measuring value
3.
Go to the Drill Characteristics tab to drill down into a report based on certain characteristics of a report. Click on Add Row to add the technical name for the data source behind the current value report.
This characteristic Is used for exception reporting for the headline. It will alert you if the sales revenue in a specific region is deviating from the threshold.
4.
Now go to the Rules tab to create rules for generating a headline for a selected KPI. To add a rule, do the following:
● Click on the Add Row option.
● Fill in information for the displayed columns to generate a headline for the KPI
5.
Once the headline is generated for a rule, you have the option of applying formatting tags which would be replaced with the actual values during runtime.
Sales in <CharText> is excellent would be displayed as: “Sales in US Region Midwest is excellent”.
Step 3: Configuring KPI on the Headline Tile in the Home Page
1.
Log on to your solution as an administrator.
2.
Open the home page.
3.
Enter adaptation mode.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
73
4.
Next, select the role for which you would like to configure the headline.
If you do not see the headline in the adaptation screen, then click on the Edit button.
5.
Choose Score Cards and add the headline score card to the role. To display this tile, choose Publish .
6.
Hover over the headline tile and click on the gear icon. This will launch a list of KPIs that have been configured for your headlines. Click on Show to view a specific KPI.
7.
On the headline tile, you can now see the reports if the data matches the KPI drill down definitions.
8.
You will also see the navigation arrows at the bottom of the headline tile to navigate between reports. When you click on a report headline, the corresponding KPI details screen displays.
See Also
Setting Up Tiles for the Home Page and SAP Customer Insight
2.6.3 SAP Customer Insight for Marketing: Report Tiles
About this document
You have the ability to view various formats of a report by associating it to a specific report tile. The following report tiles are delivered out-of-box:
Tasks
Marketing ROI
Return on Marketing Investment (ROMI) is a metric used to measure the overall effectiveness of a marketing campaign to help marketers make better decisions about allocating future investments. It is measured by comparing revenue gains against marketing investment.
Calculation
The sum of weighted values of all 'Won' opportunities which are associated to campaigns –divided by – the total marketing spend on the campaigns.
Must consider amounts for last 6 months (current month and previous 5 months).
Report and View Details
When you access the homepage for the first time, the ROI tile displays as a simple numeric tile. You will have to define a threshold based on your business requirements to view the KPI. To do this, go to Personalize .
For details on how to personalize, refer to: Setting Up Tiles for the Homepage and SAP Customer Insight
Once this is complete, you will be able to view the gauge display tile on the homepage.
Due to limitations, the default out-of-box ROI tile has to be manually hidden. To do this, go to Personalize , and then hide the tile.
74 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
On the iPad, the ROI tile displays only after it has been defined using KPI definition. To configure the tile display, click the wheel icon to bring up the layout screen and choose a style to display your report tile. When you click on the tile, the report associated with that tile displays. You have the option of choosing from a drop down list of views to display marketing ROI drill down by:
● Channel
●
●
Product Category
Region
If you choose Marketing ROI by Channel, then you can view the details of your report based on the following categories:
● Advertising
●
●
●
Mobile
Web browser
On the iPad, when you drill down on any tile, the report data displays in a graph format, such as, bar or pie chart.
Cost per Lead
This report displays how effective your marketing spend is by tracking it against the generated leads. It displays the actual cost incurred for a lead.
Calculation
Marketing Spend (quarter till date) – Divided by - Number of Leads (Marketing) generated (quarter till date)
Leads must be associated to a Campaign Report and View Details
When you click on the cost per lead tile, the report associated with it displays. You have the option of choosing from a drop down list of views. You can also drill down into the report tile to display by:
● Region
●
●
Product Lines / Categories
Product Lines / Categories
●
●
●
Region
Time line (last four quarters)
Cost per Lead by Marketing Channels Push versus Pull
● Campaigns
If you choose cost per lead by channel, then you can view the details of your report based on the following categories:
● Advertising
●
●
Mobile
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
75
● Web browser
The data is sorted in a descending order, starting from the best numbers.
Social Media Sentiment and Social Reach Tiles
Social Media Sentiment and Social Reach report tiles are intergrated with SAP Social Media Analytics. This offers social media analyses tools that help marketing and sales professionals analyze customer insights, opinions, emotions, and behavior online. To integrate the topics you have defined in your SAP Social Media Analytics dashboard, into SAP Cloud for Customer for marketing dashboards, do the following:
● Create and define a topic in SAP Social Media Analytics
● Set various parameters for your topic and then generate a Url
You can then copy the generated Url to the SAP Cloud for Customer mashup to trigger the import of data from SAP
Social Media Analytics. This data will display on the marketing dashboard in the social media sentiment and social reach tiles. For details on integrating with SAP Social Media Analytics, refer to: Integrating Marketing Report Tiles with SAP Social Media Analytics
Social Media Sentiment
This report displays how to monitor public sentiment trends towards your products and brand.
Calculation
This report has SAP Social Media Analytics Integration. You have to copy your web service and configure it to your mashup service.
Report and View Details
You have the option of displaying the net sentiment by:
● Region
●
●
●
Trends (both % positive and negative trends with net %）
Impressions over time
Top terms
SAP does not deliver this mashup service out-of-box. You have the option of creating a mashup service using the Url and credentials you obtain from SAP Social Media Analytics.
Social Reach
This report displays how engaged your customers or audiences are with you on various social media channels, which will affect your brand exposure. It displays total mentions of your product over a period of time.
Calculation
This report has SAP Social Media Analytics Integration. You have to copy your web service and configure it to your mashup service.
For information on how to create a mashup web service, refer to: Creating a Mashup Web Service
How many of your fans on Facebook see your posts OR number of Twitter users that potentially saw your
Twitter handle mentioned in a tweet by a person they follow.
Report and View Details
You have the option of displaying your Social reach by:
● Region
● Number of followers by region
76 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
●
●
●
Trends over time
Unique re-tweeters by region
Source
Sales Forecast
This report displays your sales forecast performance. This is a subset of sales pipeline that includes only those qualified opportunities that are expected to close in a defined reporting period. Forecasted sales numbers, when compared to target, indicates the progression in the growth of your business.
Calculation
The Sales Forecast Amount = The sum of WEIGHTED_VALUE where:
● OPP_END_DATE in Current Quarter
● OPP_LIFECYCLE_STATUS = 1 or OPP_LIFECYCLE_STATUS =2 or OPP_LIFECYCLE_STATUS =4 and (Publish to Forecast)
● OPP_SALESFCSTRELEVANCE_FLAG = ‘X’ (Active)
STATUS 1 = Open, 2 = In Process, and 4 = Won
Pipeline Multiple
This report displays a measure of the health of your sales pipeline as compared to your quota in a defined reporting period. It displays your pipeline performance versus the sales forecast. A high pipeline multiple indicates that your business is exceeding expected growth.
Calculation
Sales Revenue Amount – Divided by - Sales Forecast Amount
Sales from Pull
This report displays your percentage and value of sales generated by marketing pull campaigns.
Calculation
Total Sales = Sum of the OPP_SALESRVN_AMOUNT (Expected Value) where OPP_LIFECYCLE_STATUS=4 (WON)
Sales from Pull = Sum of the OPP_SALESRVN_AMOUNT (Expected Value) where OPP_LIFECYCLE_STATUS=4
(WON) and CHANNEL_TYPE_CODE in (2, 4, 5, 9) and each Opportunity must be linked to a Campaign.
Ratio Pull Vs Total Sales = (Sales from Pull/ Total sales) * 100
For Channel Type Code: 2 = WEB） 4= Social Network） 5 =Inbound Marketing） and 9 = Search
Marketing Spend
This report displays the comparison between your marketing spend and marketing budget.
Calculation
1.
Calculation of YTD for Campaigns:
● Consider current date as: 5/15/2014
● Start Date / End date value considered
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
77
●
●
10/1/2013 3/31/2014 Prorate of the FINAL_AMOUNT between 01/01/14 to 3/31/14
10/1/2013 6/30/2014 Prorate of the FINAL_AMOUNT between 01/01/14 to 5/15/14
● 1/1/2014 1/31/2014 Total value of the FINAL_AMOUNT
● 2/1/2014 5/31/2014 Prorate of the FINAL_AMOUNT between 02/01/14 to 5/15/14
2.
Calculation of Budget Amount :
● Sum of the FINAL_AMOUNT where TYPE_CODE =1 as per the above YTD condition
3.
Calculation of Spend Amount :
● Sum of the FINAL_AMOUNT where TYPE_CODE =2 as per the above YTD condition
Campaign Status
This report displays the status of your campaigns in terms of how many are on track and behind schedule.
Calculation
1.
Campaign Lifecycle Status:
● 1= Planned
● 2 = Active
● 3= Completed
● 4=cancelled
2.
On Track Calculation:
● Number of CAMPAIGNS where CAMP_START_DATE in Current Quarter and STATUS = 2 OR STATUS
=3
3.
Behind Schedule Calculation:
● CAMPAIGNS where CAMP_START_DATE in Current Quarter and STATUS = 1
See Also
Mashups and Web Services
Setting Up a Mashup web Service for SAP Social Media Analytics by NetBase
78 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Marketing Features
3 Sales Features
3.1 SAP Cloud for Sales: Solution Overview
To give your sales team the agility and power to find answers, engage in meaningful customer conversations, and deliver the right impact every time, salespeople need a new set of capabilities that enhance the selling process. Going beyond the traditional approach to sales software, SAP Cloud for Sales is easy to use and equips your sales team to close more deals faster in today's complex selling environment.
●
●
Customer Demand:
Recognition that there is a demand for your product in the marketplace through multiple channels
Lead:
Capture information from potential clients or customers that can then lead to a sale
●
●
●
Account and Contact:
Make fast account updates, get complete customer intelligence and keep everyone in the loop so that you and your team are delivering the right impact in every customer conversation
Opportunity:
Accelerate sales wins by rapidly tracking activities, collaborating with internal teams, customers and partners, keeping tabs on the competition, and obtaining guided selling materials for each deal
Sales Quote:
Create and submit quotes to align with your internal approval process
● Sales Order:
Utilizing the robust integration features available on the back end, you can also create sales orders
3.2 VIDEO: Start Here for Sales
Video
Start Here for Sales (5m 20s)
Find out how to walk through the sales cycle: starting with an assigned lead, converting it to an opportunity, and finally reporting on the closed deal.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
79
3.3 Accounts
On the Accounts tab, you can display existing accounts, create new accounts, and set account statuses. You can also display account details, review additional data, and rename and edit accounts, as required, and, if you are authorized to do so, assign employees to an account team.
Once you have created an account, it can no longer be deleted. You can, however, set its status as
Obsolete .
Tasks
Creating Accounts
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the Name and Country of the account, then specify its City .
If desired, you also may enter the account's Web site, or specify its classification.
4.
Save your entries.
If your administrator has configured the solution to check for potential duplicate accounts, then the system performs a duplicate check when you save the account to ensure that its information is unique.
Alternatively you can select Check for Duplicates , before you save the account.
If the information you enter is found to resemble the information of an existing account, then the solution notifies you that potential duplicate accounts were found.
You might be confused that if you enter, for example, the name
Eastsouth
and the system doesn't find the already existing
Eastsouth Corp
as a duplicate. The reason is that the system calculates the duplicate possibility according a specific algorithm and only accounts with a similarity above the configured threshold are shown as possible duplicates.
The algorithm calculates the account name similarity of two accounts with one account name consisting of one word, for example,
Eastsouth
, and the other account name consisting of two words, for example,
Eastsouth Corp
with a similarity that is below the standard threshold. Hence the existing
Eastsouth Corp
is not shown as possible duplicate.
Therefore we recommend to enter as much correct information as possible if you want to get reasonable results, especially the whole account name and, for example, address information.
Alternatively, you can contact your administrator to change the system settings to weak duplicate checks.
You can find theses settings in your implementation project in the Business Configuration work center when you edit the project scope: Phase Questions General Business Data Business
Partners Handling of Business Partners Group: Duplicate Check for Business Partners .
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
You may designate only one primary contact per account. Secondary contacts cannot be specified.
If Territory Management has been activated, then an employee who is not defined to be a territory owner cannot be defined as the owner of an account.
80 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Editing Accounts
You can edit accounts from the Account item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the account, position the cursor over the Name field.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the dropdown menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
From the item header, you can only edit the current main address of an account.
To edit an address other than the current main address, or to designate a different address as the main address, choose the Addresses tab.
Choosing Account Filters
In the standard solution, accounts are displayed in various filters, described below:
Standard Account Filters
Filter
My Accounts
Accounts Displayed
Accounts where you are assigned either to the account team or (if territory management is active in your solution) to the territory team.
My Account
Team's Accounts
Accounts where you are assigned to the account team.
This filter only appears if territory management is active in your solution.
My Territory
Team's Accounts
Accounts where you are assigned to the territory team.
This filter only appears if territory management is active in your solution.
My Team's
Accounts
All
Accounts where anyone in your organization, including employees in subordinate organizations, is assigned either to the account team or (where applicable) to the territory team:
● For employees, the team is defined as employees in the organization to which the logged on user is directly assigned, and employees in any organization subordinate to the logged on user’s organization.
●
●
For managers, the team is defined as employees
○ in any organization which the logged on user is assigned as manager, and employees in any organization subordinate to the organization logged on user is assigned as a manager, and;
○ in the organization to which the logged on user is directly assigned, and employees in any organization subordinate to the logged on user’s organization.
If the logged on user is not assigned to any position in any organization, then the team is just the employee.
Accounts for which you have at least read access.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
81
The accounts that appear in your solution, per filter, may differ in relation to the access restrictions that your administrator has established.
The standard filters above do not include obsolete accounts. To view obsolete accounts, create and save a
new filter. For more information, see Working with Lists [page 45] .
The default filter is My Accounts . You can modify the range of accounts displayed by selecting among these filters.
Using Advanced Filters
If you are using the advanced filters, you can filter your accounts, for example, by including sub-territories or narrowing the result by adding a top-level account.
Feature Account in SAP Jam
Business objects like Accounts can be featured in SAP Jam from your SAP Cloud for Customer system.
1.
In the Accounts view, select a single account or multiple accounts.
2.
Select New , Feature in Group .
3.
From the Feature in popup, select the group in which you want to feature the account and click OK .
Setting Account Status
From the account details, use the Actions menu to choose the following applicable status:
● Choose Actions Set as Active to change the account status to Active.
● Choose Actions Block to change the account status to Blocked, which will exclude the account from subsequent search results. By blocking an account, you also prevent future opportunities, activities and other items from being assigned to it.
● Choose Actions Set as Obsolete to change the account status to Obsolete. By setting an account as obsolete, you also prevent future opportunities, activities and other items from being assigned to it.
You may assign a new status to an account at any time, as required. For example, you can set any active account as obsolete, or any blocked account as active.
Using Calendar View
The calendar view only appears in HTML5 clients. You are using an HTML5 client if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. For further information, contact your system administrator.
This view shows the calendar from the perspective of an account.
To show all upcoming appointments, visits, and phone calls scheduled by anyone in your organization for an account, select that account and choose the calendar view. Each one is color coded, based on its status.
You can create new appointments, visits, or phone calls right from the calendar view.
Using Map View
If your administrator has configured the solution accordingly, then you can display accounts in Map View , if desired.
Choose Map View to see, in an integrated third-party mapping service, the location of each account address — both individually, and in relation to one another. Within Map View , you can also zoom in, zoom out, and pan in any direction.
Reviewing Tabs in Account Details
The tabs that you see in the account details depend upon the features of SAP Cloud for Customer that your company has implemented.
82 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Some of the tabs below are not visible by default. Assuming the features are enabled by your administrator, you must personalize the screen to make some tabs visible. For more information, watch the video
Customizing Your Personal Settings .
From the account details, you can select these tabs to perform additional actions. The following table summarizes, per feature, the tabs that are available:
Tab
Overview
Feed
Recent Orders
Actions
Select this tab to see the latest updates made to the account, the contacts designated to the account, and any addresses associated with the account.
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes yes yes Select this tab to read, open, tag, flag or comment feed updates that
are associated with this account. For more information, see About the Feed [page 21] .
yes
Select this tab to view recent orders that are associated with this account.
yes yes
If your administrator has not set up the 360 overview, then this tab will not appear.
Charts ●
●
On this tab, under Average Sales Cycle , you can view the average sales cycle, in number of days, for this account and for all accounts. Data for each average sales cycle is represented separately, but both sets of data are represented in relation to the quarterly sales cycle. You may also export this data to Microsoft Excel ® , if desired. For more information, see
On this tab, under Revenue Trend , you can view the overall revenue trend for this account in relation to the quarterly sales cycle. You may also export this data to Microsoft Excel, if desired.
yes
Activities
Account Team
Select this tab to view, edit or create appointments, tasks, phone calls, or e-mails that are associated with this account.
yes
Select this tab to add employees to, or remove employees from, the team responsible for this account. Here you can also add employees with the same role but with different validities and sales data responsibilities, such as Sales Organization , Distribution Channel ,
Division . If you possess the appropriate authorizations, you can also modify the role of employees who are assigned to this account.
yes
If territory management is active, then the sales territory team also appears in this tab.
no yes yes
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
83
Tab Actions
Sales Territories Select this tab to view associated sales territories.
If your administrator has not configured the solution to make sales territories visible, then this tab will not appear.
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes no yes Relationships Select this tab to view associated relationships.
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP
ERP, then this tab will not appear.
yes
Addresses
Contacts
Select this tab to view, edit or add addresses that are associated with this account.
For any account, only one address can be specified as the main address.
To indicate that an address may be used for shipping or billing, select
Yes in the corresponding column. If more than one shipping or billing address is specified, select Yes (standard) in the appropriate column to designate an address as the default shipping or billing address.
yes
It is not possible to remove an existing address from an account, because the existing address may already be referenced by other items, such as leads and opportunities.
If you have data for geographic placements for the address you can enter them in the fields Latitude and Longitude and you can make them visible on an online map provider using a mash-up.
You have the following options to enter latitude and longitude:
● You can export all addresses, use an external service to create the data, and import the data back using the mass data maintenance or the migration tool.
● You can use the A2X service II_MANAGE_CUSTOMER_IN to update the data.
●
●
You can update the fields creating a custom solution using
SDK.
You can use a data mash-up to clean-up the fields on update with geo codes.
Select this tab to add new or existing contacts to, or remove contacts from, this account. On this tab, you can also designate a contact as the Primary Contact for the account.
To add an existing contact click Actions Add and select a contact.
yes yes yes
84 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Tab
Account
Hierarchy
Actions
Select this tab to view the displayed accounts in a hierarchical structure, provided that a parent account has been specified for the accounts at hand. You can expand and collapse the account hierarchy at any level to display as many or as few accounts as you like.
yes
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes
If your administrator has not configured the solution to make account hierarchies visible, then this tab will not appear.
Campaigns
Sales Leads
Opportunities
Attachments
Groups
Select this tab to view associated campaigns.
yes
Select this tab to view or create sales leads that relate to this account. yes yes Select this tab to view or create opportunities that relate to this account.
Select this tab to view, edit or add attachments that relate to this account.
yes
Select this tab to view information that derives from SAP Jam, and to perform the following actions:
● create internal groups in SAP Jam to collaborate on account team meetings, prepare for customer visits, and so on
●
●
● create external or cross-company groups in SAP Jam to safeguard accounts, upsell products, and so on automatically invite account team members and contacts to the group in SAP Jam, with the flexibility to add or remove email addresses view a list of groups in SAP Jam that are associated with the given account, and navigate from this list to SAP Jam
●
●
● navigate from SAP Jam back to the account view a list of recommended groups in SAP Jam for the given account, and navigate from this list to SAP Jam view the latest SAP Jam Feed updates for the associated groups yes
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP
Jam, then this tab will not appear.
no no no yes no
Sales Data
Sales
Documents
Tickets
Target Groups
Select this tab to view or edit associated sales data from SAP
Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) and SAP ERP.
Select this tab to view associated sales documents.
Select this tab to view associated tickets.
Select this tab to view associated target groups.
yes yes no yes no no yes no
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
85
Tab
Registered
Products
Visiting Hours
Actions
Select this tab to view associated registered products.
Here you can define the hours for visits. These date and time ranges are taken into account when sales and service representatives plan site visits for accounts.
yes
The Visiting Hours tab is delivered hidden. To use it, either personalize your screen, or ask your administrator to adapt the screens for everyone in the company.
Visits
Product Lists
Survey Results
Marketing
Attributes
Select this tab to view associated visits, and to set the recommended visit frequency for this account.
yes
Select this tab to view associated product lists.
Select this tab to view associated survey results.
yes yes
If integration with SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP
CRM) is set up in your system, then you can choose this tab to access
SAP CRM marketing attributes associated with this account.
yes
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
no yes yes no yes yes no
Assigning Employees to an Account Team
In the Microsoft Silverlight
®
client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Select the Account Team tab.
4.
Open the Employees pane.
5.
Drag the icon of the appropriate employee from the Employees pane and drop it onto the table within the
Account Team tab.
In the HTML5 client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Select the Account Team tab, then choose Add .
4.
Specify the party role and name of the employee to be assigned, then choose Add .
Removing Employees from an Account Team
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Select the Account Team tab.
4.
Find the employee to be removed.
5.
In the Action column corresponding to the employee to remove, choose Remove .
86 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Deleting Account Activities
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Activities .
4.
Within the Action column of the activity to be deleted, choose Delete .
Deleting activities from the account removes them from the system entirely.
5.
In the dialog box that follows, confirm that you want to delete the selected activity.
Generating Account Summaries
To generate a summary of any account in PDF format, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Summary .
Opening CRM Factsheet
To open a CRM Factsheet, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Actions CRM Customer Factsheet .
Launching ERP Customer Cockpit
From the details of the account on the Sales Data tab you can also launch the ERP Cockpit with Actions ERP
Cockpit and you can open an ERP Customer Factsheet as PDF with Actions ERP Customer Factsheet presumed your system is connected with ERP.
Prerequisites
To enable the Cloud for Customer system to launch the ERP Customer Cockpit you must do the following adaptations:
1.
In the Administrator work center choose General Mashups Mashup Authoring and search for
Account Cockpit (SM00105) and update the URL with the connected ERP system data.
ERP
2.
To find the URL, login to the corresponding ERP system and do the following steps:
1.
Start transaction
SICF
, enter
CFS_APPILCATION
into the field ServiceName and press F8 .
The service cfs_application is shown in the next screen.
2.
Make a right click on the screen and select Test Service .
3.
A web browser is opened with an URL. Copy this URL.
Alternatively you can also to the following:
Start transaction
SE80
, select Web Dynpro Comp/Intf.
and enter
CFS_COMPONENT
and click Display . Then open web dynpro applications cfs_application
and under the properties, copy the URL from field URL .
3.
Now you can paste the URL in the mash-up and save your work.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
87
Using International Address Versions
If your administrator has activated this function, then proceed as follows to record address information for accounts in multiple character sets — for example, in the Greek or Roman alphabets, or in Cyrillic or Thai script, among others.
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Actions International Version .
4.
On the following screen, from the dropdown list, select the alternative alphabet or script in which the address information is to be specified.
If a user is logged on to the system in Japanese, but wants to enter address information for an account in Thailand, then that user can specify the Thai script from the dropdown to enter the address, as required.
5.
Choose OK .
This function is also accessible from the Addresses tab of the account.
See Also
Start Here for SAP Cloud for Sales
3.4 Contacts
Contacts are organized in relation to the accounts from which they originate. For more information, see
.
On the Contacts tab, you can display existing contacts associated with accounts, create new contacts, and set contact statuses. You can also display contact details, review additional data, and rename and edit contacts, as required.
Once you have created a contact, it can no longer be deleted. You can, however, set its status as
Obsolete .
Tasks
Creating Contacts
1.
Choose Customers Contacts .
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the First Name and Last Name of the contact, then specify the Account that is associated with it.
88 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
If desired, enter additional details for the contact, such as organizational information, or the Phone , Mobile , and E-Mail of the contact.
4.
Save your entries.
If your administrator has scoped the solution to check for potential duplicate contacts, then select
Check for Duplicates , before you save the contact, to ensure that its information is unique.
If the information you enter is found to resemble the information of an existing contact, then the solution notifies you that potential duplicate contacts were found.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
Editing Contacts
You can edit contacts from the Contact item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the contact, position the cursor over the Name field.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the dropdown menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
From the item header, you cannot edit the business address of the account that is associated with this contact, but you can use the dropdown menu to specify a different business address for this contact, if desired.
To create or edit personal addresses for the contact, choose the Addresses tab.
Choosing Contact Filters
Contacts are displayed in one of three standard filters, described below:
Standard Contact Filters
Filter Contacts Displayed
All All contacts of all accounts that you are authorized to access.
My Contacts
My Team's
Contacts
All contacts of all accounts for which you are assigned as a member of the account team.
All contacts of all accounts for which you are assigned as a member of the account team, and, if you are a sales manager, all contacts of all accounts for which any subordinate of yours is assigned as a member of the account team.
The standard filters above do not include obsolete accounts. To view obsolete contacts, create and save a
new filter. For more information, see Working with Lists [page 45]
.
The default filter is My Contacts , You can modify the range of accounts displayed by selecting among these filters.
Setting Contact Status
From the contact details, use the Actions menu to choose the following applicable status:
● Choose Actions Set as Active to change the contact status to Active.
● Choose Actions Block to change the contact status to Blocked, which will exclude the contact from subsequent search results.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
89
● Choose Actions Set as Obsolete to change the contact status to Obsolete.
You may assign a new status to a contact at any time, as required. For example, you can set any active contact as obsolete, or any blocked contact as active.
Reviewing Tabs in Contact Details
The tabs that you see in the contact details depend upon the features of SAP Cloud for Customer that your company has implemented.
Some of the tabs below are not visible by default. Assuming the features are enabled by your administrator, you must personalize the screen to make some tabs visible. For more information, watch the video
Customizing Your Personal Settings .
From the contact details, you can select these tabs to perform additional actions. The following table summarizes, per feature, the tabs that are available:
Tab
Overview
Feed
Addresses
Activities
Sales Leads
Opportunities
Relationships
Actions
Select this tab to see the latest updates made to the contact, and any addresses associated with the contact.
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes yes yes Select this tab to read any Feed updates that are associated with this
contact. For more information, see About the Feed [page 21]
.
On this tab, you can also open, tag or flag Feed updates, mark them
as favorites, or comment them. For more information, see Tags
.
yes
Select this tab to view, edit or add addresses that are associated with this contact.
yes yes
It is not possible to remove an existing address from a contact, because the existing address may already be referenced by other items, such as leads and opportunities.
yes Select this tab to view, edit or create activities that are associated with this contact — including appointments, tasks, phone calls, and e-mails. For more information, see
.
yes
Select this tab to view leads that relate to this contact. For more information, see
.
yes
Select this tab to view potential sales opportunities for this contact.
For more information, see Opportunities [page 97] .
yes
Select this tab to view associated relationships.
yes
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP
ERP, then this tab will not appear.
yes yes yes
Registered
Products
Campaigns
Select Registered Products to view registered products associated with this contact.
Select this tab to view associated campaigns.
no yes yes no
90 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Tab
Marketing
Interactions
Tickets
Marketing
Permissions
Marketing
Attributes
Actions
Select this tab to view associated marketing interactions.
Select this tab to view tickets associated with this contact.
Select this tab to view the marketing permissions that have been defined for this contact.
no yes
If integration with SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP
CRM) is set up in your system, then you can choose this tab to access
SAP CRM marketing attributes associated with this contact.
yes
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes no yes no no
See Also
3.5 VIDEO: Working with Leads
Video
Working with Leads (4m 48s)
Find out how to create and qualify leads, and how to convert leads to other items — such as opportunities— to drive sales activity.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
3.6 Leads
Under Sales Leads or Marketing Leads — depending upon the authorizations you have been assigned
— you can create leads to record raw data that is derived from campaigns, trade shows, and other marketing activities. You can also edit leads, and convert leads to follow-on items — such as opportunities, or accounts and contacts — to drive sales activity. To this end, you can also perform the following optional actions:
●
●
●
Specify the source and campaign of your leads
Classify leads according to a particular interest
Qualify leads by applicable levels — for example, as cold, warm, or hot
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
91
●
●
Track and analyze the success of your leads over a specified time frame
Add products to leads
Tasks
Creating Leads
1.
Choose Sales Leads New or Marketing Leads New .
2.
Enter the pertinent information about the lead.
3.
Save your entries.
Using Existing Accounts to Create Leads
1.
Choose Sales Leads New or Marketing Leads New .
2.
Select Use Existing Account , provided that you have personalized the solution to make this option visible.
3.
Enter the name of the lead.
4.
Specify the existing account to be used.
5.
Specify the source.
6.
Save your entries.
Leads that are created with this option can only be converted to opportunities, because an account and contact are already associated with them.
Creating Individual Customers from New Leads
1.
Choose Sales Leads New or Marketing Leads New .
2.
Select Create Indiv. Customer , provided that you have personalized the solution to make this option visible.
3.
Enter the name of the lead.
4.
Enter, at a minimum, the last name of the individual customer to be created.
5.
Save your entries.
Within a lead, you can also choose Actions Convert to Individual Customer to convert a lead to an individual customer, or Actions Associate Individual Customer to associate an individual customer with a lead without changing that lead’s status.
Using the Business Card Scanner to Create Leads
Prerequisite
Your company has purchased the necessary licenses and your administrator has made the appropriate settings to activate the business card scanner. For more information, your administrator should see Getting
Started for SAP Cloud for Sales and Marketing Administrators, section Enable the Business Card Scanner to
Create Leads (optional) .
1.
On your iPhone ® or Android™ device in the SAP Cloud for Customer app, go to Leads .
2.
Tap Actions , then choose Scan .
In response, the phone's camera is activated.
92 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
3.
Center on the screen the business card that you'd like to scan.
In response, the app takes a picture of the business card, which appears on the screen.
4.
Check the image. If it is clear and legible, then tap Use Photo .
In response, the app transfers the information from the business card to the appropriate fields to create the lead.
5.
Confirm or adjust the information as required, then save the lead by tapping Done .
The information from the business card now appears as a contact under your leads.
Editing Leads
1.
Open the lead of interest.
2.
Position the cursor over the information you want to edit.
As you move the cursor over an editable field, the background changes to a different color. When you click a field, you enter edit mode.
3.
Edit the lead as required, then save your entries.
You cannot edit leads that have been converted to follow-on items, such as opportunities.
Copying Leads
Provided that an active account is associated with a lead, proceed as follows to copy it:
1.
Open the lead of interest.
2.
Choose Actions Copy .
3.
On the following screen, adjust the entries for the resultant lead, as required.
4.
Save the copied lead.
Assigning Owners to Leads Automatically
If your system administrator has activated lead assignment in your system, then owners are automatically assigned for new leads only. For more information, see Defining Rules for Lead Assignment.
Assigning Owners to Leads Manually
1.
Select one or more leads.
2.
Choose Actions Route Selected Leads .
The system uses the rules defined by the system administrator to assign owners to these leads. The owner that is assigned this way overrides any previous owner information for a lead.
Assigning Products to Leads
In the Microsoft Silverlight ® client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Leads or Marketing Leads .
2.
Open the lead of interest.
3.
Select the Products tab.
4.
Open the Products pane.
5.
Drag the product icon of interest from the Products pane and drop it onto the table within the Products tab.
In the HTML5 client, proceed as follows:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
93
1.
Choose Sales Leads or Marketing Leads .
2.
Open the lead of interest.
3.
Select the Products tab, then choose Add .
4.
Specify the product to be assigned, then choose Add .
Removing Products from Leads
1.
Choose Sales Leads or Marketing Leads .
2.
Open the lead of interest.
3.
Select the Products tab.
4.
Find the product to be removed.
5.
In the Action column corresponding to the product to remove, choose Remove .
Converting Leads
When you convert a lead to an opportunity, it remains in the system as a record. You can further process, as required, any follow-on items that arise from the lead, but you cannot delete the lead once it has been converted.
To convert a lead to another item, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the lead of interest.
2.
On the lead details screen, choose one of the following:
● Actions Convert to Sales Lead
● Actions Convert to Opportunity
● Actions Convert to Account and Contact
3.
Edit the item that is to result from this lead, then save your entries.
If your administrator has scoped the solution to check for potential duplicate accounts and contacts, then select Check for Duplicates before you save the account and contact, to ensure that its information is unique.
If the information you enter is found to resemble the information of an existing account or contact, then the solution notifies you that potential duplicate accounts or contacts were found.
In response, the follow-on item of the converted lead appears in the Converted to column.
Editing Marketing Permissions
It is the responsibility of your organization to comply with national legislation regarding data protection and the provision of marketing materials. Therefore, administrators must configure the solution for each country in which, or each customer with whom, your organization intends to conduct marketing activities and, to the extent legally required, make use of the option to store documents such as opt-ins or opt-outs.
Using marketing permissions, you can control the information and advertisements that are offered directly to your customers using e-mail, fax or phone calls. You can find the Marketing Permissions tab in the master data for contacts, individual customers, and leads.
For more information, see Marketing Permissions.
Deleting Activities
1.
Open the Activities tab.
2.
Within the Action column of the activity to be deleted, choose Delete .
94 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Deleting activities from the lead removes them from the system entirely.
3.
In the dialog box that follows, confirm that you want to delete the selected activity
See Also
3.7 Sales Leads
Under Sales Sales Leads , you can manage your sales leads, maintain relationships with your customers and prospects, and convert sales leads to opportunities. Sales leads are the starting point for future sales. Sales leads are created, qualified, and can be assigned to sales staff automatically, using rules created by the administrator.
Once a sales lead has been qualified, you can accept or decline that lead. You can also convert sales leads, once they have been qualified, to opportunities. To drive sales activity, you can also perform the following optional actions:
●
●
●
●
Specify the source and campaign of your sales leads
Classify sales leads according to a particular interest
Qualify sales leads by applicable levels — for example, as cold, warm, or hot
Track and analyze the success of your sales leads over a specified time frame
●
●
●
Add team members to the marketing team for the sales lead
Add products to the sales lead
Add contacts to the sales lead
You can only designate an employee as a contact for a sales lead if that employee is already a contact for the account that is associated with that lead. To view the list of contacts for the account, open the account details, then choose Contacts .
Tasks
Creating Sales Leads
1.
Choose Sales Sales Leads New .
2.
Enter the pertinent information about the sales lead.
3.
Save your entries.
Qualifying Sales Leads
1.
Choose Sales Sales Leads .
2.
Open the sales lead of interest.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
95
3.
Select Qualification Level , then specify the applicable level.
4.
Save your entries.
Accepting or Declining Sales Leads
1.
Open the sales lead of interest.
2.
On the sales lead details screen, choose Actions Accept or Actions Decline .
Editing Sales Leads
1.
Open the sales lead of interest.
2.
Position the cursor over the information you want to edit.
As you move the cursor over an editable field, the background changes to a different color. When you click a field, you enter edit mode.
3.
Edit the sales lead as required, then save your entries.
Assigning Products to Sales Leads
In the Microsoft Silverlight ® client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Sales Leads .
2.
Open the desired sales lead.
3.
Select the Products tab.
4.
Open the Products pane.
5.
Drag the desired product icon from the Products pane and drop it onto the table within the Products tab.
In the HTML5 client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Sales Leads .
2.
Open the desired sales lead.
3.
Select the Products tab, then choose Add .
4.
Specify the product to be assigned, then choose Add .
Removing Products from Sales Leads
1.
Choose Sales Sales Leads .
2.
Open the desired sales lead.
3.
Select the Products tab.
4.
Find the product to be removed.
5.
In the Action column corresponding to the product to remove, choose Remove .
Converting Sales Leads to Opportunities
When you convert a sales lead to an opportunity, the original sales lead remains in the system as a record. You can still edit the original sales lead, but you cannot delete it. You can further process, as required, the opportunity that arises from the sales lead.
To convert a sales lead to an opportunity, proceed as follows:
1.
Open the qualified sales lead of interest.
Only sales leads whose status is Qualified can be converted to opportunities.
96 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
2.
On the sales lead details screen, choose Actions Convert to Opportunity .
3.
Edit the opportunity that is to result from this sales lead, then save your entries.
See Also
Start Here for SAP Cloud for Sales [page 79]
3.8 Opportunities
Opportunities represent potential sales. Under Sales Opportunities , you can display and edit existing opportunities, and create new ones. You can also edit opportunities that have been converted from leads, and assign products to opportunities, and employees to opportunity sales teams.
Tasks
Creating Opportunities
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the required information, including the corresponding account and probability of success.
4.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
Editing Opportunities
You can edit opportunities from the Opportunity item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the opportunity, position the cursor over the Name field.
As you move the cursor over an editable field, the background changes to a different color. When you click a field, you enter edit mode.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the drop-down menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
Choosing Opportunity Filters
Opportunities are displayed in one of three standard filters: All Opportunities , My Opportunities , or My Team's
Opportunities . You can modify the range of opportunities to display by selecting among these filters. The default filter is My Opportunities .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
97
Applying Filters by Sales Organization When Adding Competitors
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open the appropriate opportunity.
3.
Select the Competitors tab.
4.
Choose Add .
5.
From the Name field, choose the value selection.
6.
Select the By Organization filter.
7.
Select the desired organization.
Assigning Products to an Opportunity
In the Microsoft Silverlight ® client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open the appropriate opportunity.
3.
Select the Products tab.
4.
Open the Products pane.
5.
Drag the desired product icon from the Products pane and drop it onto the table within the Products tab.
In the HTML5 client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open the appropriate opportunity.
3.
Select the Products tab, then choose Add .
4.
Specify the product to be assigned, then choose Add .
Removing Products from an Opportunity
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open the appropriate opportunity.
3.
Select the Products tab.
4.
Find the product to be removed.
5.
In the Action column corresponding to the product to remove, choose Remove .
Copying Products Within an Opportunity
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open the appropriate opportunity.
3.
Select the Products tab.
4.
Select the product to be copied.
5.
From the Actions menu at right, choose Copy .
6.
Choose Save .
Assigning Employees to an Opportunity Sales Team
In the Microsoft Silverlight ® client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open the appropriate opportunity.
98 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
3.
Select the Sales Team tab.
4.
Open the Employees pane.
5.
Drag the icon of the appropriate employee from the Employees pane and drop it onto the table within the
Sales Team tab.
When you assign an employee to an opportunity sales team in this way, the solution assigns the Sales
Employee role to that employee by default. If desired, you can change the role that is assigned to the employee.
In the HTML5 client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open the appropriate opportunity.
3.
Select the Sales Team tab, then choose Add .
4.
Specify the role and name of the employee to be assigned, then choose Add .
Removing Employees from an Opportunity Sales Team
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open the appropriate opportunity.
3.
Select the Sales Team tab.
4.
Find the employee to be removed.
5.
In the Action column corresponding to the employee to remove, choose Remove .
Requesting SAP ERP Pricing Information for an Opportunity
If your solution is integrated with SAP ERP, then you can request SAP ERP pricing information for an opportunity, as follows:
1.
Open the opportunity for which you want to request pricing.
2.
Choose Products .
3.
Choose Actions Request Pricing .
SAP ERP pricing information appears in the Negotiated Price column for each product. To enter a negotiated sales price manually, you can edit this field.
Collaborating on Opportunities via SAP Jam
If your solution is integrated with SAP Jam, then you can collaborate on opportunities via SAP Jam, as follows:
1.
Open the opportunity on which you want to collaborate.
2.
Choose Groups .
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP Jam, then this tab will not appear.
3.
On this tab, you can view information that derives from SAP Jam, and perform the following actions:
● create internal groups in SAP Jam to collaborate on sales team meetings, prepare for customer visits, and so on
● create external or cross-company groups in SAP Jam to collaborate on pricing negotiations, reference customer discussions, and so on
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
99
●
●
●
●
●
● automatically invite sales team members and contacts to the group in SAP Jam, with flexibility to add or remove e-mail addresses view opportunity data that is communicated to SAP Jam at the time the group is created view a list of groups in SAP Jam that are associated with the given opportunity, and navigate from this list to SAP Jam navigate from SAP Jam back to the opportunity view a list of recommended groups in SAP Jam for the given opportunity, and navigate from this list to
SAP Jam view the latest SAP Jam Feed updates for the associated groups
Deleting Activities
1.
Open the Activities tab.
2.
Within the Action column of the activity to be deleted, choose Delete .
Deleting activities from the opportunity removes them from the system entirely.
3.
In the dialog box that follows, confirm that you want to delete the selected activity.
Ending Opportunities
You end an opportunity by changing its status to Won , Lost , or Stopped . Proceed as follows:
1.
Select an opportunity, choose Actions , and then select the appropriate status.
Opportunities that have the status Stopped are not displayed in the Opportunity Pipeline or in the Won/
Lost Opportunities chart, and they are not taken into account for forecasting.
If you have selected the status Won or Lost , you can enter a reason why the opportunity was won or lost in the opportunity item header. The reason you select is displayed in the opportunity as Reason for Status under
Pipeline Status and is also used in analytics.
2.
Save your entries.
See Also
VIDEO: Start Here for Sales [page 79]
Enabling Approval Processes
3.9 Influencer Map
The influencer map allows you to visualize contacts and employees associated with an opportunity, and to prioritize the perceived success of these contacts and colleagues in helping you close deals by adjusting their position to be larger and closer to the center of the map (to indicate more influence) or smaller and further from the center (to indicate less influence). If your system is set up to support this feature and correctly configured, then you can open
100 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
the influencer map from your opportunities, from the home page, or from SAP Customer Insight, as described in the first task below.
Working within the influencer map, you can more easily identify the top influencers for a given contact or employee, and help build a more successful sales team for your opportunities, by improving the chance that your sales team will interact with the most influential decision makers. To help drive sales, the influencer map analyzes structured and unstructured data within the solution for contacts and employees, as well as their common activities, to recommend the individuals who are most likely to influence the respective decision makers. A weighted scoring algorithm is applied to calculate a composite influence score for every contact and employee in relation to the decision maker.
As the influence score of a contact or employee increases (or decreases), the size of the contact or employee on the influencer map grows larger (or smaller), and the position of the contact or employee grows closer to (or further from) the center of the influencer map. As other users reposition contacts or employees on the influencer map to be closer to or further from the center, and proportionately larger or smaller, the solution records this information to improve the accuracy of the feature in identifying top influencers for the contacts and employees that are assigned to an opportunity.
Prerequisites
●
●
●
●
This feature is only available for HTML5 clients. Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/
HTML5
. For more information about the HTML5 client, contact your system administrator.
Your solution includes the advanced user option, and your administrator has scoped your solution to enable the influencer map to be used.
The Opportunities view within the Sales work center is assigned either to your user or to your user's business role.
Your administrator has enabled you to open the influencer map by configuring at least one of the following areas:
○ The Sales Team or Contacts tabs, within your opportunity details
○
○
Your home page
SAP Customer Insight
If your administrator has scoped your solution to enable the influencer map to be used, but has not configured the area from which you want to access the influencer map, then review the last task below.
Tasks
Opening an Opportunity from the Pipeline
To access the influencer map from an opportunity, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open the opportunity of interest.
3.
In the opportunity details, choose the Sales Team or Contacts tab.
4.
Choose Top Influencers .
In response, the pipeline appears in the Top Influencers tab of the opportunity.
5.
Within the pipeline, click on the opportunity to open it.
To access the influencer map from your home page, proceed as follows:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
101
1.
Open your home page.
2.
Choose the Pipeline Influencers tile. On this tile, opportunities are depicted graphically by total value, sales period, and chance of success.
In response, the pipeline appears.
3.
Within the pipeline, click on the opportunity to open it.
To open the influencer map from SAP Customer Insight, proceed as follows:
1.
Log on to SAP Customer Insight.
2.
Choose the Pipeline Influencers tile, where opportunities are depicted graphically, as on the home page.
In response, the pipeline appears.
3.
Within the pipeline, click on the opportunity to open it.
Reviewing Opportunity Details
Upon opening the opportunity from the pipeline, you can review information of potential use in driving sales, including:
●
●
●
Its account, sales cycle, status, sales phase, expected revenue, and chance of success
A timeline of related past and future activities
Subscreens for:
○ Contacts
○
○
○
○
Sales Team
Products
Competitors
Involved Parties
Opening the Influencer Map for Contacts
To open the influencer map for a contact, choose the contact of interest from the Contacts subscreen.
In response, the top influencers for the contact are depicted graphically. The larger the influencer is, and the closer it lies to the center, the more influential he or she has been calculated to be, in accordance with the weighted scoring algorithm.
Opening the Influencer Map for Employees
To open the influencer map for an employee on the sales team, choose the employee of interest from the Sales
Team subscreen.
In response, the top influencers for the employee are depicted graphically, with more influential individuals depicted larger, and closer to the center.
Repositioning Influencers
1.
Open the influencer map.
2.
Select the influencer for the contact or employee whose perceived influence is to be adjusted.
3.
Move the influencer closer to the center, if their perceived influence is larger, or further from the center, if their perceived influence is smaller.
In response, the depiction of the individual increases or decreases in size.
4.
Release the influencer in its new position on the map.
In response, the overall map is adjusted, with the repositioned influencer assigned greater or lesser influence, along with all other influencers on the map.
102 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Personalizing Your Solution for Influencer Map Access
To personalize your solution so that you can access the influencer map from an opportunity, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Sales Opportunities .
2.
Open an opportunity, then choose the Sales Team or Contacts tab.
3.
Choose Personalize Start Personalization .
4.
Select any column, then choose Add Items Add Fields .
5.
Select the Top Influencers checkbox, then choose Apply .
6.
Choose Personalize End Personalization .
To personalize your home page for this purpose, proceed as follows:
1.
Open your home page.
2.
Choose Settings , then Personalize .
3.
Under Scorecards , find
Pipeline Influencers
, then choose Show .
4.
Choose Save .
To personalize SAP Customer Insight for this purpose, proceed as follows:
1.
Log on to SAP Customer Insight.
2.
Choose Settings , then Personalize .
3.
Under Scorecards , find
Pipeline Influencers
, then choose Show .
4.
Choose Save .
Upon completing these procedures, you can open the influencer map from the corresponding areas, as described in the first task above.
See Also
3.10 Retail Execution
3.10.1 VIDEO: Start Here for Retail Execution
Video
Start Here for Retail Execution (4m 45s)
Find out all about retail execution, including planning a visit, recording site information with surveys, and working in offline mode at the account location.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
103
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
3.10.2 About Retail Execution
Retail execution is a set of features that enables field sales personnel to plan and record site visits and activities while on site at the account.
Retail execution is based on site visits, which can be enhanced by using surveys, activity plans, and routing rules.
For more information, see Configuring Visits.
Once the administrator has set up the necessary surveys, activity plans, and routing rules, sales users can work in
SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad to plan site visits and collect visit information while on site. For sales users, the process proceeds as follows:
1.
Plan site visits. For more information, see Visits [page 104]
.
This can be achieved either in the browser, or via SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad. You can use the included system tools to plan the most efficient route between locations, check which sites are due for a visit, and review past visit notes.
2.
Record visit information.
Use
SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad [page 171]
to record visit information. This can include, for example:
● Check in/check out times
●
●
Record tasks (from activity plan)
Complete site checklists and customer surveys and attach photos when required
●
●
Create sales quotes and orders
Order site assets
See Also
Designing Surveys
SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad [page 171]
3.10.3 Visits
Customer site visits are a part of creating and keeping good relationships with customers. They can also be a way to discuss, run, and monitor marketing activities, such as campaigns.
On the Visits tab, you can use tools such as tasks, surveys, and campaigns to gather and record information from each customer visit.
The steps of this process can be completed either in SAP Cloud for Customer in the browser or in SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad, with one exception: route planning is only available in the browser.
You can set the recommended frequency for visits in the account detail view, Visits tab.
104 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Tasks
Create Visits
1.
View your accounts under Visits Visit Planner .
To help you prioritize visits, you can sort your list of accounts using filters, including the below:
● My Accounts with No Visits Planned
These are your accounts where there are no future visits planned.
If the Next Planned Visit date is in the past, it will not show up under this filter.
● My Accounts Overdue for Visits
These are your accounts where the Visit Before or Next Planned Visit dates have passed without a visit.
2.
Select the account you want to visit and choose New Visit .
3.
Enter the necessary information and save the visit.
To check your schedule for upcoming visits and appointments, you can use the Calendar .
●
●
Microsoft Silverlight® clients: use the Calendar pane.
○ Other activity types, such as phone calls, e-mails, and tasks, do not appear in the calendar pane.
○ Even if you are looking at My Team or another group tab, the calendar pane only displays your own schedule.
HTML5 clients: use the Calendar .
○ In addition to appointments and visits, phone calls also appear on your calendar.
○ You can view other users' schedules if you are authorized to do so.
For more information, see
The calendar view of an account shows all upcoming appointments for that account in one calendar, even if they were scheduled by other colleagues. For more information, see
.
Add Tasks or Surveys to the Visit
You can add items to help you document your visit. These items are predefined in activity plans by your system administrator, and may include general checklists, industry-specific surveys, or recommended tasks to complete while you are onsite. To view these items and add the relevant ones, do the following:
1.
Under Visits , open one of your visits.
2.
To add standard tasks, choose Tasks Add .
A list of predefined tasks appears. Select the ones that are relevant for this visit.
Allsurveys are routed using certain rules. If you do not find the survey you expected to see in the list, ask the person who created the surveys to ensure that the routing rules were set up properly. For more information, see Configuring Visits.
3.
To add standard surveys or checklists, choose Surveys Add .
A list of predefined surveys appears. Select the ones that are relevant for this visit.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
105
Allsurveys are routed using certain rules. If you do not find the survey you expected to see in the list, ask the person who created the surveys to ensure that the routing rules were set up properly. For more information, see Configuring Visits.
Check Current Campaigns
In the visit overview, you can see the number of ongoing or upcoming campaigns that are assigned to this account.
For more information about specific campaigns, check the Campaigns tab, where you can link to the assigned campaigns directly.
Refresh Visits
Sometimes your administrator adds tasks or surveys to an existing activity plan. Before you go on a visit, you can update the tasks and surveys, so you know you're working with the latest data. You can do so in one of the following ways:
● From the list of visits, select one or more visits that you want to update, and choose
Selected Visits .
Actions Refresh
● Open a visit and choose Actions Refresh Visit .
Arrive and Check In
To ensure you are working with the latest information, you may want to refresh the visit before you arrive at the customer site. To do so, see section Refresh Visits.
1.
When you arrive at a customer's site, open the visit.
2.
Choose Check In .
Checking in captures the date and time and opens the visit for editing, allowing you to record information about this visit in the system.
Complete Tasks and Surveys
During your site visit, you can open each task, survey, or checklist and process it accordingly.
1.
From the visit, choose the Tasks or Surveys tab.
2.
Open the task or survey and complete the items it contains.
For mandatory questions of type Amount a value of zero is not a valid response.
3.
Add any relevant notes.
4.
For surveys, you can add pictures as attachments.
● In SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad, there are predefined picture sizes for you to use.
For performance reasons, we recommend attaching a maximum of one large picture, 10 medium pictures, or 30 small pictures per survey.
5.
● Pictures you add to the survey appear as attachments to both the survey and the visit.
When you have completed the task or survey, set it to completed by choosing Actions Set as
Complete .
106 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Add Contacts
If you have met or worked with another contact for this account during your visit, you can add that person to the visit under Contacts .
Only contacts that are listed in the account itself appear for selection.
Create Follow-Up Items
During your visit, if you discover that the customer needs additional products, an upgrade, or spare parts or repairs, create a follow-up item. The following table outlines the types of requests, lists examples, and indicates how to order them in the system.
Request Type
Product order
Examples
Out-of-stock products
In the visit, choose Follow-Up Items New
Sales Quote
Opportunities Machine should be upgraded to the latest model Opportunity
Spare parts or repair Appliance for storage (refrigerator) or demonstration (mini-grill) does not work
Service Ticket
Add Pictures or Other Attachments to the Visit
To add additional documents or pictures as part of this visit, add them in the visit under Attachments .
Leave and Check Out
After you have wrapped up your visit with the customer and entered all the information you wanted to record for the visit, choose Check Out .
Checking out automatically sets the status of the visit to Completed .
To edit the visit after you have checked out, set the status back to In Process and then make your changes.
3.10.4 Routes
You can plan a group of visits in a route, which is a collection of visits in a logical sequence. When you are happy with the visit sequence and timing, you can generate all the visits at the same time.
You can also define route templates for routes that are repeated often, or for routes that are specific to a certain group of customers or sales- or service representatives. You can then use these templates to create routes, saving you time and ensuring accuracy and consistency.
As of February 2015, the routes feature replaces the tours feature. If you have used tours in the past, we recommend that you use routes for grouping and generating visits in the future.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
107
Tasks
Create a route
Decision Point
● Why create a route?
If you think you’ll use this group of visits only once, create a route.
● Why create a route template?
If this group of visits will be used multiple times by you or by other colleagues, you can save time by creating a route template first, from which you create routes as soon as you know the start dates.
1.
Under Visits Routes , choose New .
2.
In the Type field, select Route .
3.
Enter the details for this route and save your entries.
You are the owner by default. If you would like to assign this group of visits to another user, you can do so by entering that person as the owner.
4.
Open the route and go to More Details , where you can make the following settings:
● Start time, average prep time, average visit duration
If you make entries here, the system can pre-calculate these times for you as you add each visit.
● Automatic rescheduling
If you use automatic rescheduling, when you add or move visits within the route, subsequent visits are rescheduled automatically.
● Days on which you don’t plan to conduct visits
5.
Go to Overview and add visits.
Remember to organize the visits in the sequence you plan to conduct them.
6.
When you are happy with the visits and their sequence, save your changes.
7.
Activate the route by choosing Actions Activate .
When you activate a route, the system checks for conflicts, such as visits scheduled outside an account's visiting hours. You can also trigger this check manually with Actions Check
Route .
8.
Generate the visits in this route by choosing Actions Generate Visits .
When you generate visits, since you organized the route, your name also appears as the organizer for all visits included in the route.
There is a background job that runs every eight minutes to generate visits. When the background job is complete, the processing status of the route is set to complete. At that point, in the route, you will see links appear for each visit that was generated. The person you designated as the owner can also see the route and the visits when they log on.
108 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Create a route from a template
Prerequisites
There is an active route template available.
You can create a template for a group of visits that are repeated periodically. For more information, see section Create a route template.
1.
Open the active route template and choose Actions Create Route from Template .
2.
Enter information in the route as described in section Create a route.
Create a route template
Decision Point
● Why create a route?
If you think you’ll use this group of visits only once, create a route.
● Why create a route template?
If this group of visits will be used multiple times by you or by other colleagues, you can save time by creating a route template first, from which you create routes as soon as you know the start dates.
1.
Under Visits Routes , choose New .
2.
In the Type field, select Template .
3.
Enter the details for this template and save your entries.
If you define a sales territory, employees assigned to that territory can see and edit this template, as well as use it to generate routes.
Any notes that you add to a template appear in each route that is generated from this template.
4.
Open the template and go to More Details , where you can make the following settings:
● Start time, average prep time, average visit duration
If you make entries here, the system can pre-calculate these times for you as you add them.
● Automatic rescheduling
If you use automatic rescheduling, when you add or move visits within the route, subsequent visits are rescheduled automatically.
5.
Under Involved Parties , you can define the owner, organizer, and assign this template to sales employees.
Employees listed here can see and edit this template, as well as use it to generate routes.
6.
Under Attachments , add any documents that might be useful for these visits.
Any attachments you add to a template appear in each route that is generated from this template.
7.
Go to Overview and add visits. Remember to organize the visits in the sequence you plan to conduct them.
Since this is a template, you cannot enter actual dates. You simply enter the visits you want to make on day one, day two, and so on.
8.
When you are happy with the visits and their sequence, save your changes and activate the template by choosing Actions Activate .
9.
You can now use this template to create similar routes in the future. For more information, see section Create a route from a template.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
109
3.10.5 Tours
If you are assigned to a role with the proper authorization, you can create a tour, which includes multiple visits in sequence. Tours are useful if you want to plan the sequence and timing of multiple visits in one day, one week, or even an entire month.
Tasks
Create a tour
1.
Under Visits Tours , choose New .
2.
Enter the necessary information to define the tour.
Add visits to tours
You can add any visit in the system to a tour. However, it is only possible for a visit to belong to one tour.
1.
From the Visits tab, select the visits you want to add to a tour.
2.
Choose either Add to New Tour or Add to Existing Tour .
The existing visits that you selected appear in the tour.
For completed visits, only the name and account are copied for each visit. The start date and end date are copied from the tour. You must add other details manually.
Create a new visit and add it to a tour
1.
Open your tour and choose New .
2.
Enter the information for the visit and save it.
The visit is created in the system and added to the tour.
Change the sequence of visits within a tour
To change the sequence of a visit, open the visit and change the date or time. The next time you open the tour, the sequence of the visits has adjusted accordingly.
Edit visits within a tour
To edit tours within visits, simply open the visit. The visit details appear, where you can use the standard editing features to make any changes.
Activate a tour
When you activate a tour, you can no longer change it.
When you activate a tour, the name of the tour owner overwrites any previous names in the Owner field.
110 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
1.
Open your tour.
2.
Choose Actions Set as Active .
See Also
3.11 Sales Quotes
3.11.1 VIDEO: Creating Sales Quotes
Video
Creating Sales Quotes (4m 21s)
Find out how to create a sales quote.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
3.11.2 Creating and Processing Sales Quotes
A competitive and successful sales professional knows the benefits of an effective quote management system. You can enter the desired products and submit the quote to the customer.
For more information, watch the video Creating Sales Quotes , or follow the steps below.
Business Background
Sales Quote Processing
Sales quote processing is used to offer products to customers according to specific terms with fixed conditions. The seller is bound by the sales quote for a specific period of time. The sales quote is usually created by a sales representative of the company. The system supports pricing capabilities.
For more information, see
Sales Quote Processing [page 117]
.
Product Lists with Accounts as Proposal in the Sales Quotes
With product lists, you can combine a set of products associated with an account. When you create a sales quote for an account that has an associated product list, the product list will appear at the end of the form after you choose
New .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
111
To create a product list, enable in the Product Lists view in the Products work center. There you then can create a list, and use it in your quote when the list is activated.
For more information, see Creating and Maintaining Product Lists.
Approval for Sales Quotes
For more information, see Enabling Approval Processes.
Pricing
Pricing is based on price master data such as price lists and discount lists, which are used to automatically calculate pricing within all business documents. A predefined pricing procedure is used to determine the net value the customer has to pay for certain products to be received on a certain day at a certain place. The pricing procedure consists of price components, such as list price, discounts, surcharges, freights, and costs. The order of these price components is essential for the calculation of the total value.
For more information, see
Party Processing
For more information, see
.
Document Type 'Sales Order Request'
For the sales quotes you can create of course your own document types. But in the standard you can select
Sales
Quote
and in case you are working with visits you can also select
Sales Order Request
. With the sales order request the output management for the sales quote is deactivated because in the visit scenario you should get the approval for the quote by the customer directly in the office or store. A sales order request therefore has also no validity.
Integration with External Systems
When you create a sales quote in your system and you have a connection to an external system, such as SAP CRM and SAP ERP, a request can be triggered to the external system to create a sales order request.
Once the sales order gets created in the external system, sales order request and sales order documents can be captured in your system.
External Pricing with Free Goods, Product Availability, and Credit Status
When you have enabled the external pricing in your system you will retrieve for a specific sales quote document type from the external system:
●
●
Complete pricing information including tax and gross and net values
Free goods determination
●
●
Product availability check
Credit status
Prerequisite is that you enabled the external pricing for the document type and for the pricing itself aligned the pricing texts (conditions and subtotal descriptions) in the business configuration.
If everything is setup correctly, you create your quote, request the pricing from the external system (click
Actions Request External Pricing ). The external system then simulates a complete document, and you will get back the results in your quote and the following fields appear:
●
●
Pricing: Pricing Status and Pricing Procedure
Free goods appear as read-only items with reference to the corresponding line item under Products
112 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
If you change a product or the product quantity the free goods items disappear and will be recalculated with the next external pricing request.
●
●
Product availability check: ATP Quantity and ATP Delivery . These fields are also colored based on the available quantity that can be delivered:
○ Green: The offered quantity can also be delivered.
○
○
Yellow: The available quantity by the requested date is less then the offered quantity.
Red: The offered product can’t be delivered to the requested date.
The product availability is also checked for the free goods items.
Credit Status on the document header.
If the product is out-of-stock or discontinued, a substitute product and its pricing details are retrieved.
The substitute for a product is defined in the ERP system. The item now displays both the substituted product and the original product (field is hidden by default on the view).
Please keep the following facts in mind, when you work with external pricing:
● Your system is connected directly with the external system.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
When you requested pricing the found pricing conditions are shown in your sales quote. The external system controls whether an existing price component can be changed or deleted as well as whether it’s allowed to add a new price component. Only manually added price components can be deleted.
The pricing status is only reset when you change standard fields. In case you change only extension fields the update must be triggered separately using a PDI implementation.
When you copy a quote only the manually changed conditions are copied.
You can submit a quote only when a quote is calculated successfully. The to be printed pricing conditions are determined by the external system based on the settings in your pricing schema.
When you request pricing and the external system raises error messages, the messages are shown in your system but aren't saved. If you reopen a quote which is calculated with errors you have to request pricing again to see the error messages.
When you use campaign and contract determination in the external system, the determination results for the simulated document must be unique during the simulation. Otherwise you will get errors in the price determination.
Please prevent that in the external system additional document items are added during the simulation. This can makes the pricing result in your quote inconsistent, because your system can't add the items.
Follow-up Documents
If you have an integration with an external system, where you, for example, process your sales orders, you can then capture the references to the follow-up documents in the sales quote under Sales Documents External Follow-
Up Documents .
Tasks
Creating a Sales Quote
1.
You create a sales quote using the New Sales Quote tool which you can access from the following locations in the system:
● From the toolbar, click New Sales Quote .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
113
● Under Sales Sales Quotes click New .
● You can also copy an existing sales quote by opening a quote and choosing Actions Copy . The whole content then is copied and you can adapt it to your needs.
2.
Enter the account, date, and owner.
3.
To add products from a Product List for the entered account choose Actions Add from List
Products . Enter the quantities for the products you want to use and then save your entries.
under
The sales quote is created with status Open and products without any entered quantities won't be taken over.
4.
Open the newly created sales quote and enter or change at least the product the customer requested the quote for.
5.
Save your entries and click Actions Submit to trigger further processing, for example, sending it using fax or e-mail, or printing it for sending it by normal mail.
In case an approval is required for the quote, the output starts as soon as the approval is given.
Editing a Sales Quote
1.
Open a sales quote you want to update under Sales Sales Quotes .
● On the Overview tab you see the latest changes of the quote, the products, and involved parties.
● On the Products tab you can add or delete products, enter external and internal notes concerning the product, and add attachments.
You can view and change the internal and external notes for the sales quote and the products: The Internal
Note is only stored with the document and the External Note is also forwarded to the customer and forwarded to the external system, in case of an external integration.
In case you use an integration with an external system to calculate the prices for the products you can get the prices for the products entered by clicking Actions Request Pricing . The fields Pricing
Status and Pricing Procedure will then inform you about the current status of the request.
●
●
When you copy a line item also the notes and attachments are copied too.
You can also add products from product list: Click Actions Add from List .
●
●
●
●
On the Involved Parties tab you can add or delete parties and contacts. Here you can also select other addresses that you entered in the master data.
On the Document Flow tab you see all preceding and all follow-up documents for this quote.
On the Sales Documents tab you get an overview about the related sales quotes and the sales order requests and sales orders processed in the ERP system.
On the Attachments tab you can add attachments, for example, local files, web links, and links to Library content.
Here you find also the customer's signature of the quote done on an iPad in case the customer accepted the quote directly during a visit and signed it on the iPad.
Please be aware that this is not a legally binding signature.
●
●
On the Approval tab you can enter additional information for the approver and the approver can add also comments.
On the Activities tab you have an overview about the activities and you can add appointments, tasks, and phone calls. Here you see also the e-mails related to this quote and you can add tasks from the determined activity plans.
114 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
●
●
●
On the Output tab you can see the output history and the sent out documents as PDF files. Here you can also trigger the sending of a document again by clicking Resubmit .
On the Feed tab you can see major updates concerning the quote. For more information, see
On the Changes tab you can follow-up on all changes made in the document.
● On the Tickets tab you can find all related tickets for this sales quote and you can create tickets based on the quote.
● On the Surveys you can add and edit surveys from the determined activity plans to the document.
2.
Save your changes.
Tracking Changes
On the Changes tab of a sales quote you can see all changes made in the quote, but you can also filter for a specific time period.
In the list you then see the originating and the new value after the change.
Structuring and Renumbering Products
Before you can structure your sales quote you must personalize the Products tab. For this open the sales quote, go to the Products tab, click Personalize at the upper right of the screen and choose This Screen , select Products under
Sections: . Then select the Parent Line field, save your changes and close the Personalize pane.
1.
You can structure the entered products with text lines. To do so, add lines with only a description on the
Product tab.
2.
Then enter the line number of the created text line as Parent Line to the corresponding product line.
3.
To rearrange your product list click Actions Renumber and save your changes.
●
●
You can cascade several text lines, but you cannot use a product line as structuring element.
On text line level you can add more text to describe this part and add attachments.
Triggering Approval and Output
1.
After you have created a sales quote click Actions Submit to trigger the approval check and the output of the sales quote.
2.
The system then checks whether an approval is required for the quote, and in case it is required the necessary notifications are generated for the responsible employees.
3.
Only after the approval is given or is not necessary the output of the sales quote is generated by the system according the output settings which can be viewed and edited under Actions Edit Output Settings .
4.
The document then is either sent to the local printer or sent to the customer as e-mail.
You can also add manually an approver as alternative approver to your quotes. The only prerequisite is that you activated the role Approver it in the Involved Parties activity in the fine-tune activity for Sales Quotes .
Changing the Output Language
You can change the output language of a quote by changing the selection in the Language field. By default it is set by the account master data.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
115
●
●
If you change the language after you entered already some items the description of these items aren't translated automatically.
Please keep in mind that you can print forms only in languages for which you have a translated form template.
Previewing a Sales Quote
1.
Open the sales quote.
2.
Choose Actions Preview .
A new window opens with the quote as PDF document.
Creating a Follow-Up Sales Quote
1.
In the sales quote where you want to create a follow-up quote from select the Sales Documents tab.
2.
Under Sales Quotes click New .
The data from the current quote is copied into the quick activity form.
3.
Adapt the entries and select Save Save and Open .
The system copies the whole quote including the products into a new document and opens it.
In the old quote you can find the new quote now under Sales Documents .
4.
Now you can work with the new sales quote.
Creating a Follow-Up Ticket
1.
To create a follow-up ticket from a sales quote, open the corresponding quote and go to the Tickets tab.
2.
Then click New to create a ticket with reference to the corresponding sales quote.
3.
Enter the required data and save your ticket.
Deleting a Sales Quote
1.
Choose Sales Sales Quote and select the line of sales quote you want to delete.
2.
Click the Delete icon in the Actions column.
The sales quote is deleted in the system.
Quotes that have been submitted to a customer cannot be deleted, but can be cancelled.
Cancelling a Sales Quote or a Single Item
1.
Choose Sales Sales Quote and open quote you want to cancel.
2.
To cancel the entire sales quote, choose a Reason for Rejection and save your changes.
The system sets the quote to Lost and the status to Completed .
3.
To cancel the a single item choose on the Products tab for the corresponding line item a Reason for
Rejection (hidden field in standard) and save your changes.
The system sets the status to In Process .
Creating Sales Orders in an External System
In case your system is conducted with an external system, such as SAP ERP, you can create sales orders in the external system that are replicated from sales quotes in your system. The corresponding sales quote must be at least consistent and must have at least one product.
116 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
1.
To replicate a sales quote to a sales order in the external system select the sales quote and click
Actions Create Follow-Up Document . This action will only be enabled after a quote has been submitted and approved.
2.
Save your changes.
The quote has been replicated into the external system as inquiry with reference to the sales quote.
You can find the references to the business documents, such as sales order requests and orders, created in the ERP system on the Sales Documents tab under External Follow-Up Documents .
●
●
If a sale quote is changed after replication, the changes are not forwarded to the external system after the replication.
If you use incoterms in sales quotes of your system make sure that you decided in the configuration for SAP ERP under Customers: Incoterms whether the location for the corresponding incoterms is mandatory or not. As result of your decision either only the field Incoterms or both, Incoterms and
Incoterms Location , must be filled in the sales quote before forwarding the quote to SAP ERP.
3.11.3 Sales Quote Processing
Overview
Sales quote processing is used to offer products to customers according to specific terms with fixed conditions. The seller is bound by the sales quote for a specific period of time. The sales quote is usually created by a sales representative of the company. The system supports pricing capabilities.
Features
●
●
You can create and edit notification rules for the handling of sales quotes in the Administrator work center under Workflow Notification Rules.
. For more information, see Notification Rules Quick Guide.
Directly accepted sales quote: If you don't need the acceptance by the customer afterwards you can prevent this by streamlining your processing and prevent the whole output management after the quote was submitted. For more information see Configuring Sales Quotes.
Process Flow
The following steps explain the typical process flow for sales quote processing. During this process, you access the
Sales work center.
1.
The sales representative creates a sales quote and enters first the account, and the products to be offered.
2.
The system uses details such as account, products, and date to calculate net value. The sales representative can overwrite the automatically-determined prices and discounts or add further discounts and surcharges.
3.
Optionally, the sales quote may need to be approved according your approval processes, if certain thresholds have been exceeded such as total net value or total given discounts. For more information about approval processes, see Enabling Approval Processes.
4.
The sales quote is sent to the customer through the Submit action according to the output settings.
5.
If the account accepts the sales quote, it can be set to Won and the status changes to Completed . With an external integration, such as SAP ERP, you can also transfer the sales quote into a sales order in the external system through Action Create Sales Order .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
117
See Also
Start Here for SAP Cloud for Sales
3.12 Sales Orders
3.12.1 Creating and Processing Sales Orders
About this document
Sales orders can be created and processed in Cloud for Customer. You can synchronize these sales orders with the external system to update them with the pricing and other product details.
Business Background
Order History
A detailed order history is displayed in the launch screen for sales orders. You can use the standard features for search, advanced search, sort and filter to organize display of the sales orders.
Simulate
You can use the simulate feature in sales order to simulate the order in the external system. Note that before the simulation is triggered, total pricing details are not available and the pricing status of the sales order is set to
Not
Calculated
.
Simulate fetches the pricing and other product details from the external system. After simulation is complete, the net price is updated in the sales order header and the pricing status is set appropriately (for example, the pricing status is set to Calculated Successfully or Calculated with Errors ). The total price component details will be updated in the Products tab screen.
Once you simulate the order, the pricing status is set appropriately. You can modify the details after simulating the sales order. Note that though the pricing status remains unchanged, the Actions Transfer is disabled if you modify the order after simulate. You will need to simulate again to be able to transfer the order to external
ERP system.
Party Processing
A set of pre-delivered party roles similar to sales quote are delivered in the standard solution. For more information, see Party Processing.
Document Types
You can create own document types specific for sales orders and use them to create new sales orders.
118 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Integration with External Systems
●
●
Only integration with SAP ERP is supported in the current release.
If a connection has been established with an on-premise ERP system, then the sales orders that you create will be replicated in the external ERP system. Note that Transfer is possible only if the pricing status is set to
Calculated Successfully . Therefore, you can transfer only after you have completed the simulation. The following data is exchanged between the two systems:
From Cloud for Customer:
○ Account and description for the account
○ Document type
○
○
Notes
Involved parties
From External System:
○ External reference data ( External ID or sales order ID in the external system, External Reference and
Description )
○ All header statuses for the sales order including Ext. Overall Status , Credit Status Cancellation Status and Blocked Status .
An order can be cancelled only if has not yet been transferred to the external system.
○
○
○
○
Rejection Status for product line items
Involved Parties
ATP quantity (available quantity as confirmed from external system) and ATP Delivery (scheduled delivery date confirmed from external system)
External notes created in the external system.
Copy Sales Order
You can create a new sales order in your system by copying an existing sales order. Note that you can only copy sales orders created in Cloud for Customer that are not yet transferred to the external system.
All data from the existing sales order is replicated to the copy that is created. You can modify this data for the new sales order. Note that pricing details are not copied. You must simulate the order to fetch the price component details from the external system.
Tasks
Creating a Sales Order
1.
You create a sales order using the New Sales Order tool which you can access under Sales Sales
Orders and click New .
The sales order quick create screen appears.
You can also copy an existing sales order by opening an order and choosing Actions Copy
2.
Select the Document Type , Account and Ship-To for the new order.
3.
To add products, click on Add in the quick create screen and select the products from the product list or add products using the product master list. Similarly, you can also add products after creating the sales order using the Add in the Products tab screen.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
119
4.
Save the quick create details to create the new sales order.
5.
Open the newly created sales order and enter or change the products that the customer has requested for.
6.
Save your entries and click Actions Simulate to synchronize the order with the external ERP system.
After the sales order is simulated, you will see that the order in your system is updated with the following details:
● Pricing status updated appropriately from Not Calculated (for example the pricing status is set to,
Successfully Calculated or Calculated with Errors ). If you modify a sales order after simulation, you will need to run Simulate again in order to be able to transfer the order to the external system.
● Total price component information including prices, quantity and unit of measure for each of the line items is populated in the tables in the Products tab screen
7.
Use Actions -> Transfer to transfer the sales order to the external system. Note that transfer is allowed only if the pricing status is set to Calculated Successfully . Following details are updated after the order is transferred back from external system:
● External reference data ( External ID or sales order ID in the external system, External Reference and
Description )
● All header statuses for the sales order including Ext. Overall Status , Credit Status , Cancellation Status and Blocked Status .
An order can be cancelled only if it has not yet been transferred to the external system.
●
●
●
●
Rejection Status for product line items
Involved Parties
ATP quantity (available quantity as confirmed from external system) and ATP Delivery (scheduled delivery date confirmed from external system)
External notes created in the external system.
See Also
3.13 E-Mail
3.13.1 Working from Microsoft Outlook® for Sales Users
The SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook allows you to exchange information between Microsoft
Outlook and SAP Cloud for Customer. After installing the add-in, you can do the tasks listed below right from
Microsoft Outlook.
Microsoft Outlook integration supports Microsoft Outlook 2007, Microsoft Outlook 2010, and Microsoft Outlook
2013.
Prerequisites
You have installed the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook locally on your computer and made the appropriate settings. For more information, see
Setting Up the Add-In for Microsoft Outlook® [page 38] .
120 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Tasks
If you want to use Microsoft Outlook ®
with SAP Cloud for Service, see Working from Microsoft Outlook® for
.
Logging On to SAP Cloud for Customer From Microsoft Outlook
If your administrator has set up single sign-on (SSO), you are logged on automatically and the SAP Cloud for
Customer sidebar appears.
If you don't see the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar in Microsoft Outlook, log on as follows:
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, under SAP Cloud for Customer, click the button to log on to SAP Cloud for Customer.
2.
In the dialog box that appears, select the row displaying the system where your SAP Cloud for Customer system is located and choose OK .
The logon is certificate-based and runs automatically in the background.
Your Microsoft Outlook is now connected with the SAP Cloud for Customer system that you selected.
3.
If there is a problem with the certificate for your user, or if you are not working with certificates, a dialog box appears, where you can enter your user ID and password.
Enter your URL in the SAP System field, leaving out the path or directory information at the end of the URL.
For example, you log on with URL http://Test.sap.corp:7000
, and not http://Test.sap.corp:
7000/irj/portal
.
You can confirm that you have logged on to the system by checking the title of the button that you used to log on. If the text has switched to Log Off , you have logged on successfully.
When you are working offline and cannot log on to the system, any changes to relevant e-mails, appointments, and tasks, or new items for synchronization to SAP Cloud for Customer are kept in a pool in Microsoft Outlook. Actual synchronization of these items occurs automatically as soon as you log on to SAP Cloud for Customer using the add-in.
If you are logged on to SAP Cloud for Customer with the add-in for many hours without any action, you may receive an authorization error when trying to use a Microsoft Outlook integration function.
In this case, your user cookies may have expired. Simply log off and log on again.
Synchronization of Contacts, Accounts and Individual Customers
To ensure that your contacts appear in Microsoft Outlook and are synchronized in the future, we recommend that you add them to your Microsoft Outlook. For more information, see section Adding
Contacts from SAP Cloud for Customer into Microsoft Outlook.
Viewing SAP Cloud for Customer Information
When you select an e-mail from an SAP Cloud for Customer contact, information related to that contact and account appears in the side pane. You can access contact and account information, as well as related opportunities, leads, and activities for the current week, and you can personalize how you would like to view the content.
From the side pane, you can do the following:
● Search SAP Cloud for Customer for active contacts and accounts.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
121
Accounts or contacts with non-active statuses, such as obsolete, blocked, or in preparation, do not appear in Microsoft Outlook, but they are still in the system.
●
●
●
●
View information for a contact and the corresponding account by selecting an e-mail from an SAP Cloud for
Customer contact.
Within the list of Opportunities , Leads , or Recent Activities for an SAP Cloud for Customer contact, right mouse click to select the information for each that you want to view.
Select Feed to view, post, or comment on feed updates.
Select Shelf to view your flagged and favorite items.
Items listed throughout the side pane are hyperlinks. Click an item name to open that item in SAP Cloud for Customer.
Pinning Contact Information in the Side Pane
When you select an e-mail in your inbox from an SAP Cloud for Customer contact, the information for that contact appears in the side pane. Selecting a message from a different SAP Cloud for Customer contact updates the information in the side pane. If you want the information for a specific contact to remain available in the side pane, do the following:
1.
Click the pin icon at the top of the side pane to keep this contact information available while you select other e-mail messages.
2.
Click the pin icon again to allow the side pane to dynamically update contact information based on the currently selected message.
Adding E-Mails for Synchronization
If you have contact information showing in the SAP Cloud for Customer side pane, you can associate an e-mail with an opportunity, lead, sales quote, or account listed under that contact simply by using drag and drop. The e-mail is associated automatically with the lead, opportunity, sales quote, or account in the system.
If you wish to add an e-mail for synchronization and do not have relevant contact information visible in the side pane, proceed as follows:
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, open an existing e-mail, and under SAP Cloud for Customer , choose Add E-Mail .
You can add one or more e-mails directly, without opening them, by right-clicking on them in your inbox, and choosing Add E-Mail .
When you create a new e-mail, you can synchronize and send it by choosing Send and Add E-Mail .
This step combines the synchronize and send steps, saving you time.
2.
Add a reference to an account, if desired.
3.
Choose Submit .
An e-mail activity is created in SAP Cloud for Customer, based on information in the Microsoft Outlook e-mail.
It is not possible to create an e-mail in SAP Cloud for Customer. All new e-mails must be created in
Microsoft Outlook directly, and synchronized with SAP Cloud for Customer.
122 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Adding Appointments for Synchronization
If you have contact information showing in the SAP Cloud for Customer side pane, you can associate an appointment with an opportunity, lead, or account listed under that contact simply by using drag and drop.
The appointment is associated automatically with the lead, opportunity, or account.
If you wish to add an appointment for synchronization and do not have relevant contact information visible in the side pane, proceed as follows:
You can only synchronize appointments for which you are the organizer. If you are a participant, you receive any updates from the organizer's Outlook appointment.
1.
In your calendar in Microsoft Outlook, open an appointment and under SAP Cloud for Customer , choose Add
Appointment .
You can add an appointment directly, without opening it, by right-clicking on the appointment in your calendar, and choosing Add Appointment .
When you create a new appointment, you can synchronize it and send it by choosing Save, Send, and Sync Appointment . This step combines multiple steps, saving you time.
2.
Add a reference to an account, if desired.
3.
Choose Submit .
An appointment activity is created in SAP Cloud for Customer, based on the information in the Microsoft
Outlook appointment.
. To synchronize any future changes to the appointment in SAP Cloud for Customer or in Microsoft
Outlook, repeat the steps above.
It is not possible to synchronize recurring appointments.
If you add or change attendees in an SAP Cloud for Customer appointment, you can send the meeting request as follows:
1.
Ensure that the appointment is synchronized, by repeating the steps above.
2.
Open the appointment in Microsoft Outlook and send the meeting request.
Adding Tasks for Synchronization
If you have contact information showing in the SAP Cloud for Customer side pane, you can associate a task with an opportunity, lead, or account listed under that contact simply by using drag and drop. The task is associated automatically with the lead, opportunity, or account.
If you wish to add a task for synchronization and do not have relevant contact information visible in the side pane, proceed as follows:
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, open a task in your To-Do List and choose SAP Cloud for Customer Add Task .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
123
In the task details, if you enter a name in the Company Name field, it is used as the account name in the system.
Simlarly, if you create a task in the system and synchronize it to Microsoft Outlook, the account name appears in the task details as the company name.
2.
Add an account as a reference, if desired.
3.
Choose Submit .
A task activity is created in SAP Cloud for Customer, based on information in the Microsoft Outlook task.
.
Future tasks and tasks within the last 30 days are sychronized and appear in Microsoft Outlook. Tasks older than 30 days are no longer synchronized.
If you change a task in SAP Cloud for Customer, the changes are automatically synchronized to Microsoft
Outlook within five minutes. However, there is no automatic synchronization if you change a task in Microsoft
Outlook that has already been synchronized. In this case, open the task in Microsoft Outlook, make your changes, and then choose Add Task to trigger synchronization to SAP Cloud for Customer.
Adding Appointments, Tasks, and E-Mails with Reference
You can add e-mails, appointments, and tasks with reference to any of your SAP Cloud for Customer accounts, opportunities, or leads. In the steps listed below, an e-mail activity is used as an example, but the steps are similar for all activity types.
If you have contact information showing in the SAP Cloud for Customer side pane, you can associate an email, appointment, or task to an opportunity, lead, or account listed under that contact simply by using drag and drop. The activity is associated automatically with the lead, opportunity, or account.
If you wish to add an e-mail, appointment, or task for synchronization and do not have relevant contact information visible in the side pane, proceed as follows:
To add an activity with reference to an account or campaign, proceed as follows:
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, to synchronize an e-mail to SAP Cloud for Customer, open an e-mail and under SAP
Cloud for Customer , choose Add E-Mail .
2.
Choose Add Reference Account or Add Reference Campaign .
You can also search for another account and add the e-mail with that account as a reference.
3.
An e-mail activity is created automatically in SAP Cloud for Customer under the account that you chose.
To add an activity with reference to an opportunity or lead, proceed as follows:
To add a reference to an opportunity or lead, you must first add a reference to an account.
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, to synchronize an e-mail to SAP Cloud for Customer, open an e-mail and under SAP
Cloud for Customer , choose Add E-Mail .
2.
Choose Add Reference Account .
3.
Add a reference to an opportunity or lead.
When you search for the opportunity or lead, the results list displays the opportunities or leads that are associated with the referenced account.
4.
Select the relevant item from the resulting list.
124 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
5.
The e-mail is copied automatically into SAP Cloud for Customer and appears in the opportunity or lead that you selected.
You can also drag individual e-mails, appointments, or tasks and drop them on an account, lead, or opportunity saved in your shelf to associate the items.
Displaying Synchronized Appointments, Tasks, or E-Mails in SAP Cloud for Customer
1.
In SAP Cloud for Customer, go to Activities .
2.
Choose the Appointments , Tasks , or E-Mails subview.
The appointment, task, or e-mail that you synchronized from Microsoft Outlook appears in SAP Cloud for
Customer in the Activities tab.
If you added an account, opportunity, contact, or lead as a reference, it also appears in the item view for that item.
Cancelling Appointments
You can only synchronize appointments for which you are the organizer. If you are a participant, you receive any updates from the organizer's Outlook appointment.
Unlike deleted appointments, canceled appointments still appear in the system, which means you can use them to track appointments that were originally scheduled but not completed.
When you cancel your appointment in the system, it is synchronized with Outlook as described in section Adding
Appointments for Synchronization.
Following synchronization, in Outlook, cancellations are sent to the participants and the meeting is deleted from
Outlook.
You can only cancel appointments from the system. If you delete an appointment from Outlook, after synchronization, it appears in the system as deleted.
Deleting Appointments or Tasks
In the steps listed below, an appointment is used as an example, but the steps are similar for both appointments and tasks.
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, open the appointment you want to delete.
You can only synchronize appointments for which you are the organizer. If you are a participant, you receive any updates from the organizer's Outlook appointment.
2.
Choose SAP Cloud for Customer Delete Appointment .
You can only delete appointments or tasks that have been synchronized.
For appointments and tasks that were previously synchronized, the deletion is synchronized in both Microsoft
Outlook and SAP Cloud for Customer.
Creating Accounts and Contacts
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, go to the contacts view.
2.
In the navigation pane under My Contacts , choose the SAP Cloud for Customer folder for contacts.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
125
3.
Choose New Contact .
4.
Enter the information for the contact person.
5.
As you enter a new contact, you can check for duplicates.
If a contact with a similar name, e-mail, or address is found in your system, you can download it into Outlook.
6.
Under SAP Cloud for Customer , choose Add Contact . In the screen that appears, search for and select an existing account.
7.
If the account that you need does not exist, create a new account by entering information in the required fields.
8.
Assign the account to the contact and save your entries.
Accounts created directly in the Accounts from SAP Cloud for Customer folder cannot be synchronized.
Accounts can only be created from the contact area. However, once the account is created in the system, after the next synchronization, it appears in the accounts folder.
To synchronize this contact and its associated account with SAP Cloud for Customer, choose Add
Contact Submit .
The user who creates and synchronizes a new account from Microsoft Outlook is automatically the owner for that account.
The ability to create and synchronize accounts and contacts depends on your system authorizations, as well as your synchronization settings. If you have any questions or difficulties, contact your administrator.
Adding Contacts from SAP Cloud for Customer into Microsoft Outlook
To download all your contacts from the system to Microsoft Outlook at once, in the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-
In toolbar, choose Settings , make the appropriate selections for initial synchronization, and choose
Download Contacts .
To download individual contacts, do as follows:
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, on the SAP Cloud for Customer side pane, on the Contacts tab, search for a contact name.
A list of contacts found in SAP Cloud for Customer appears in the side pane.
2.
Select the contact that you want to add to your contacts in Microsoft Outlook and choose Click to Save
Contact .
The contact information is transferred from SAP Cloud for Customer and appears in your contacts in
Microsoft Outlook.
Working with Feed Updates
If you enable SAP Jam in SAP Cloud for Customer, the feed tab in the Microsoft Outlook side pane displays the last feeds before you switched to SAP Jam. It is not possible to see feed posts from SAP Jam in the side pane at this time.
1.
Select Feed in the side pane, where you can do the following:
● Display the feed updates that are in SAP Cloud for Customer for the relevant contact and account.
● Enter a new feed update just like you would in SAP Cloud for Customer.
Feed updates are synchronized automatically, so your feed update also appears in SAP Cloud for
Customer.
126 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
●
●
●
●
A feed update entered for an account references the account, and a feed update entered for a contact references the contact, similar to entering a feed update in the account or contact item view.
Enter comments on a feed update.
Repost a feed update.
Accept or decline a follow request.
Click a link to go to SAP Cloud for Customer.
Displaying Synchronization Details for an Item
1.
Open the item in Microsoft Outlook.
2.
In the bottom frame of the item, in the Details — SAP Cloud for Customer section, click the link.
Removing E-Mails from SAP Cloud for Customer
You can remove an e-mail message from SAP Cloud for Customer (browser only) if you linked it to the SAP system originally. The e-mail is not deleted: it still exists in Microsoft Outlook. The link to that e-mail is simply removed from
SAP Cloud for Customer.
To remove e-mails from SAP Cloud for Customer, under Activities , hover over an e-mail and choose Remove .
3.13.2 Working from IBM Lotus Notes
The SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for IBM Lotus Notes® allows you to exchange information between IBM Lotus
Notes and SAP Cloud for Customer. After installing the add-in, you can do the following tasks right from IBM Lotus
Notes.
IBM Lotus Notes integration supports IBM Lotus Notes 8.5.x.
IBM Lotus Notes integration does not support business-to-consumer (B2C) service processes, such as those involving individual customers, in SAP Cloud for Social Engagement and SAP Cloud for Service. IBM Lotus
Notes integration is supported for business-to-business (B2B) service processes, such as those involving accounts and contacts.
Prerequisites
●
●
IBM Lotus Notes has been installed, set up, and configured on your computer.
To allow IBM Lotus Notes to accept plug-ins, you have added the following line to your plugin_customization.ini
file: com.ibm.notes.branding/enable.update.ui=true
If you are using the Microsoft Windows® 7 operating system, to avoid permission errors, run notepad as an administrator and edit the .ini file as follows:
1.
Search programs and files for “notepad”.
2.
When the notepad text editor appears, run it as administrator.
3.
In notepad, open your IBM Lotus Notes .ini file, make the changes directly, and save.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
127
Tasks
Installing the Add-In for IBM Lotus Notes
Each user who wants to use SAP Cloud for Customer functions from IBM Lotus Notes must install the add-in on his or her computer. To download the add-in, you must have administrative rights on the computer.
To avoid compatibility issues with previous releases, make sure that you have installed the latest version of the add-in.
1.
In SAP Cloud for Customer, choose Download .
2.
Download the add-in for IBM Lotus Notes.
The add-on for IBM Lotus Notes is a zip file.
3.
Save the zip file locally.
4.
In IBM Lotus Notes, go to the application install step and use the option to search for new features to install.
5.
Add to the location of the zip file that you just downloaded.
6.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
7.
To activate the plug-in, restart IBM Lotus Notes.
Making Settings for SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for IBM Lotus Notes
You can make the following settings for the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar in IBM Lotus Notes:
●
●
●
Synchronization
○ Enable automatic synchronization to exchange data from IBM Lotus Notes to SAP Cloud for Customer for the items listed in this section.
○ Set up the timing for synchronization.
User interface settings
Select the sections you want to see in the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar.
Advanced
Configure the appearance of notifications.
Logging On to SAP Cloud for Customer From IBM Lotus Notes
1.
From the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar in IBM Lotus Notes, enter your URL of the SAP system.
Leave out the path or directory information at the end of the URL, and end the URL with
.com
. For example, you on log on with URL: http://Test.sap.com
and not http://Test.sap.com:7000/ iri/portal
.
2.
Enter the user name and password.
If you choose the options for remembering your password and automatic login, you will stay logged on automatically with the same user name and password in the system.
Your IBM Lotus Notes is now connected with the SAP Cloud for Customer system that you selected.
128 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
When you are working offline and cannot log on to the system, any changes to relevant e-mails, appointments, and tasks, or new items for synchronization to SAP Cloud for Customer are kept in a pool in IBM Lotus Notes. Actual synchronization of these items occurs automatically as soon as you log on to SAP Cloud for Customer using the add-in.
If you are logged on to SAP Cloud for Customer with the add-in for many hours without any action, you may receive an authorization error when trying to use an IBM Lotus Notes integration function.
In this case, your user cookies may have expired. Simply log off and log on again.
Copying Contacts from SAP Cloud for Customer into IBM Lotus Notes
You can either download all contacts from your SAP solution into Lotus Notes at once, or you can build your contacts in Lotus Notes as you work.
● To download all contacts at once, from the Options menu in the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar, choose
Initial Download .
● To build contacts in Lotus Notes as you work, you have the following options:
○ Automatic e-mail download
When you select an e-mail in Lotus Notes, the add-in searches your SAP solution for a corresponding contact. If one is found, it is downloaded into your Lotus Notes contacts automatically.
○ Use Save Contact button
Run a specific search in the sidebar, select a contact from the results, and choose Save Contact .
Running Initial Synchronization for Contacts and Accounts
The system synchronizes to and from IBM Lotus Notes any contacts that have been assigned to your accounts in the SAP Cloud for Customer system. To access an account's contacts, you must be on that account's team, or assigned as an owner.
To synchronize all contacts and accounts from SAP Cloud for Customer to IBM Lotus Notes, proceed as follows:
Prerequisite: In IBM Lotus Notes on the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar, make the appropriate settings for contacts, appointments, and tasks.
1.
From IBM Lotus Notes, choose SAP Cloud for Customer Sync Now .
2.
A progress bar appears in the system tray area.
3.
When the synchronization is complete, folders for accounts and contacts in SAP Cloud for Customer are available in the contacts within IBM Lotus Notes.
The system synchronizes all of your accounts and contacts to IBM Lotus Notes and groups them into folders for
SAP Cloud for Customer accounts and contacts. Any future changes to these contacts or accounts in SAP Cloud for
Customer or in IBM Lotus Notes are handled as follows:
●
●
Changes to contacts in IBM Lotus Notes are synchronized with SAP Cloud for Customer.
To synchronize contacts, they must be assigned to an account.
Although it is possible to delete a contact both in IBM Lotus Notes and in SAP Cloud for Customer, the deletion is not synchronized. If required, you must manually delete the contact in the opposite system.
Changes to accounts must be made in SAP Cloud for Customer directly. During the next synchronization, these changes will be updated in IBM Lotus Notes.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
129
Viewing SAP Cloud for Customer Information
When you select an e-mail from a person who is also listed as one of your contacts in SAP Cloud for Customer, information related to that contact and account appears in the sidebar. You can access contact and account information, as well as related opportunities, leads, and activities for the current week, and you can personalize how you would like to view the content. From the sidebar, you can search SAP Cloud for Customer contacts.
●
●
To see information for a contact or account, select an e-mail from a person who is also listed as one of your contacts in SAP Cloud for Customer.
Other information that may appear in the sidebar for contacts includes opportunities, leads, and recent activities.
Any hyperlinks that appear in the sidebar are shortcuts to items in SAP Cloud for Customer. To open the item in SAP Cloud for Customer, click the link.
Adding E-Mail for Synchronization
In IBM Lotus Notes, if you have contact information showing in the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar, you can simply use drag and drop to associate an e-mail with an opportunity, lead, or account listed in the SAP
Cloud for Customer sidebar for that contact.
If you wish to add an e-mail for synchronization and do not have relevant contact information visible in the sidebar, use the following procedure.
1.
In IBM Lotus Notes, select an e-mail, right click it, and add the e-mail to SAP Cloud for Customer.
2.
Add a reference to an account, opportunity, or lead.
3.
Submit your changes.
An e-mail activity is created in SAP Cloud for Customer, based on information in the IBM Lotus Notes e-mail.
It is not possible to create an e-mail in SAP Customer. All new e-mails must be created in IBM Lotus Notes directly, and synchronized with SAP Cloud for Customer.
Adding Appointments for Synchronization
In IBM Lotus Notes, if you have contact information showing in the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar, you can simply use drag and drop to associate an appointment with an opportunity, lead, or account listed under that contact.
If you wish to add an appointment for synchronization and do not have relevant contact information visible in the sidebar, use the following procedure.
1.
In your calendar in IBM Lotus Notes, select an appointment, right-click it, and add the appointment to SAP
Cloud for Customer.
2.
Add a reference to an account, opportunity, or lead.
3.
Submit your changes.
An appointment activity is created in SAP Cloud for Customer, based on the information in the IBM Lotus
Notes appointment.
. To synchronize any future changes to the appointment in SAP Cloud for Customer or in IBM Lotus Notes, repeat the steps above.
130 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
It is not possible to synchronize recurring appointments.
If you maintain attendees in an SAP Cloud for Customer appointment, you can send the meeting request as follows:
1.
Ensure that the appointment is synchronized by repeating the steps above.
2.
Open the appointment in IBM Lotus Notes and send the meeting request.
Adding Tasks for Synchronization
In IBM Lotus Notes, if you have contact information showing in the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar, you can simply use drag and drop to associate a task with an opportunity, lead, or account listed under that contact.
If you wish to add a task for synchronization and do not have relevant contact information visible in the sidebar, use the following procedure.
1.
In IBM Lotus Notes, select a task in your to-do list, right-click it, and add the task to SAP Cloud for Customer.
2.
Add an account, opportunity, or lead as a reference.
3.
Submit your changes.
A task activity is created in SAP Cloud for Customer, based on information in the IBM Lotus Notes task.
If you change a task, the changes are automatically synchronized to when you save your changes.
Displaying Synchronized Appointments, Tasks, or E-Mails in SAP Cloud for Customer
1.
In SAP Cloud for Customer, choose one of the following, depending on the activity:
● Activities Appointments
● Activities Tasks
● Activities E-Mails
2.
The appointment, task, or e-mail that you synchronized from IBM Lotus Notes appears in SAP Cloud for
Customer in the Activities view. If you added an account, opportunity, contact, or lead as a reference, it also appears in the item view for that item.
Deleting Appointments or Tasks
In the steps listed below, an appointment is used as an example, but the steps are similar for both appointments and tasks.
1.
In IBM Lotus Notes, select the appointment or task that you want to delete.
2.
Delete the appointment.
For appointments and tasks that were previously synchronized, the deletion is synchronized in both IBM Lotus Notes and SAP Cloud for Customer.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
131
Creating Accounts or Contacts
1.
In IBM Lotus Notes, under contacts, go to the SAP Cloud for Customer folder for contacts.
2.
Create a new contact.
3.
Enter the information for the contact person.
4.
Save and close.
Accounts can be only created directly in SAP Cloud for Customer. However, once the account is created in the SAP Cloud for Customer, after the next synchronization, it appears in IBM Lotus Notes in the SAP Cloud for Customer folder for accounts.
The ability to synchronize accounts and contacts depends on your user authorizations, as well as your synchronization settings. If you have any questions or difficulties, contact your administrator.
Editing Settings for Synchronization
1.
To change the settings for your synchronization updates for accounts, contacts, tasks, and appointments from IBM Lotus Notes to SAP Cloud for Customer, do the following:
● In IBM Lotus Notes on the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar, make the appropriate settings for contacts, appointments, and tasks.
● Enable automatic synchronization and define a time period.
Removing E-Mails from SAP Cloud for Customer
You can remove an e-mail message from SAP Cloud for Customer (browser only) if you linked it to the SAP system originally. The e-mail is not deleted; it still exists in its original e-mail system from which it was synchronized with the
SAP system (IBM Lotus Notes or Microsoft Outlook). The link to that e-mail is simply removed from SAP Cloud for
Customer.
To remove e-mails from SAP Cloud for Customer, under Activities , hover on an e-mail and in the Actions column, choose Remove .
Uninstalling the Add-In for Lotus Notes
1.
To uninstall the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar plug-in from IBM Lotus Notes sidebar plug-in, use the application management function within IBM Lotus Notes.
2.
Find the SAP Cloud for Customer add-in feature.
3.
Uninstall the add-in.
4.
Restart IBM Lotus Notes.
The SAP Cloud for Customer add-in no longer appears as a sidebar in IBM Lotus Notes.
3.13.3 VIDEO: IBM Lotus Notes® Settings and Features
Video
IBM Lotus Notes® Settings and Features (4m 42s)
132 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
For IBM Lotus Notes
®
users: The SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for IBM Lotus Notes lets you see and use information from your SAP solution, right from your inbox. This video steps you through the recommended settings and the most useful features of the add-in. Check it out!
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
3.14 Forecasts
On the Forecasts tab, sales representatives and sales managers can create forecasts in multiple dimensions — including product and product category — on the basis of accounts, opportunities, employees and sales organizations.
If Territory Management is active, then forecasts can also be created on the basis of territories.
Like sales representatives and sales managers, administrators can also create forecasts, as summarized in the following table:
Forecast Authorizations by Functional Role
Functional Role Forecast Authorizations
Sales Representative Sales representatives can create opportunity forecasts or product forecasts; for either forecast type, they can enter forecast data, select forecast dimensions and maintain forecast values at the selected dimension level. They can also submit forecasts of either type for aggregation into the forecasts of their managers, and adjust and re-submit any forecasts that their managers have identified to require revision.
Sales Manager
Administrator
Sales managers can create, in addition to opportunity forecasts and product forecasts, opportunity aggregate forecasts and product aggregate forecasts. They can also return for revision forecasts that their sales representatives have submitted, and that require adjustment. By means of the forecasts their sales representatives have submitted, sales managers can create opportunity aggregate forecasts and product aggregate forecasts at selected forecast levels.
Administrators can create forecasts for any other user in the system, although they can only create aggregate forecasts of either type for sales managers. Administrators can also modify any forecast that has been created by any sales representative or any sales manager.
Sales representatives submit new forecasts to sales managers, who can request revised forecasts, if required. When the revised forecasts are complete, sales representatives can submit them to their managers anew. Version management enables sales representatives and sales managers to keep track of any revisions that have occurred in their respective forecasts.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
133
Tasks
Choosing Forecast Filters
Forecasts are displayed in one of two standard filters: My Forecasts , and My Team's Forecasts . You can modify the range of forecasts to display by selecting among these filters. The default filter is My Forecasts .
Displaying Forecasts and Forecast Data
To display a forecast, rest the cursor on the
Name
of any forecast. In response, the system will display the forecast
(and its details) in quick view.
To display the data that is associated with a forecast, click on the icon that is displayed for the forecast in the Data column. In response, the system will open the forecast in Microsoft Excel ®, where the data associated with the forecast is displayed.
Forecast data is displayed by means of Microsoft Excel. Therefore, if you wish to display forecast data, you are required to use Microsoft Excel.
To use Microsoft Excel with your solution, ensure that the Add-In for Microsoft Excel® is correctly installed, as follows:
1.
Choose Download , then download the Add-In for Microsoft Excel® .
2.
Run the installation and setup wizards that appear.
3.
Open Microsoft Excel, then ensure that the add-in is active. If needed, consult the documentation in Microsoft
Excel for instructions on how to activate add-ins.
4.
Ensure that your Web browser is set to prompt automatically for file downloads. If needed, consult the documentation in your Web browser for additional information.
Forecasts are summarized in relation to the following columns:
From To Level Status Owner Sales Unit Revenue Latest Version
The entries in the From and To columns indicate, respectively, the year-month combination for which the forecast begins and ends — for example, from 2013–01 to 2013–12. The entries in the Level column indicate whether the forecasts at hand are an opportunity forecast, a product forecast, or an aggregate forecast of either type.
Creating Forecasts
1.
Select Sales Forecasts .
2.
Choose New ; this option appears above the Search this view field.
You can also choose New Sales Forecast from the toolbar. For more information, see Options for
Creating Items.
3.
Enter the Name of the forecast, along with the following data: a.
Currency , if desired.
b.
Under From Year-Month , the year and month in which the forecast should begin.
c.
Under To Year-Month , the year and month in which the forecast should end.
d.
Level .
e.
Source , if desired.
4.
Save your entries. For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
134 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Upon completing this procedure, the newly created forecast appears in the Forecasts tab, and is assigned the status
In Preparation .
At the appropriate time, the forecast can be submitted for aggregation into the forecasts of the sales manager.
Submitting New Forecasts
Sales representatives can submit new forecasts for consideration in the aggregate forecasts of their sales managers, as follows:
1.
3.
Select Sales Forecasts .
2.
Rest the cursor on the Name of the new forecast — with status In Preparation — to be submitted.
In response, the item details of the forecast are displayed in quick view.
Choose Open to open the forecast, then choose Actions Submit within the item header.
Upon completing this procedure, the status of the forecast changes to Submitted . The submitted forecast will be included for aggregation into the forecasts of the corresponding sales manager.
If the sales manager is not satisfied with the forecast as submitted, he or she may request revision from the sales representative. If such a revision is requested, the status of the forecast changes to In Revision , and the sales representative must submit a revised forecast.
Revising Forecasts
Sales managers can request revision of the forecasts that are submitted by their sales representatives, as follows:
1.
Select Sales Forecasts .
2.
Rest the cursor on the Name of the forecast — with status Submitted .
In response, the item details of the forecast are displayed in quick view.
3.
Choose Open to open the forecast, then choose Actions Revise within the item header.
Upon completing this procedure, the status of the forecast changes to In Revision . The sales representative can now submit a revised forecast.
Submitting Revised Forecasts
Sales representatives can submit revised forecasts for renewed consideration in the aggregate forecasts of their sales managers, as follows:
1.
Select Sales Forecasts .
2.
Rest the cursor on the Name of the forecast — with status In Revision , indicating that the sales manager has requested a revision of the forecast.
In response, the item details of the forecast are displayed in quick view.
3.
In quick view, choose Open to open the forecast.
In response, the item details of the forecast are displayed.
4.
Select the Versions tab.
In response, an overview of the versions of this forecast is displayed.
5.
Choose Add .
6.
In the resultant dialog, specify the revised forecast, then choose Save .
7.
Within the item header, choose Actions Submit
Upon completing this procedure, the status of the forecast changes to Submitted . The submitted forecast will be included for aggregation into the forecasts of the corresponding sales manager.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
135
If the sales manager is not satisfied with the revised forecast as submitted, he or she may request revision again from the sales representative. If such a revision is again requested, the status of the forecast changes to In
Revision again, and the sales representative must repeat the procedure above to submit another revised forecast.
See Also
3.15 Territories
Provided that Territory Management is active in your solution, sales administrators can create sales territories and organize them into hierarchies, which are used to delegate responsibility for each sales territory to the appropriate sales representatives. Sales administrators perform all associated tasks under Sales Territories .
3.16 Sales Target Planning
Sales planning functions are performed by sales managers.
Although sales representatives cannot perform sales planning functions, they can review reports that contain data that is associated with these functions. For more information, see
Working with Sales Planning Data
.
Prerequisites
Sales planning is activated. For more information, see Activating Sales Planning.
Business Background
Business Planning
Planning for your business involves three different elements: strategic planning, financial planning, and operational planning. While strategic planning is a high-level management task and therefore takes place outside of the system, financial and operational planning are supported by tools and applications that have been designed to guide and support you in mastering your company’s planning and budgeting tasks. Compared with traditional spreadsheetbased approaches, the system's planning features improve the efficiency and quality of the planning process by enhancing collaboration between planners, ensuring the consistency of planning data, and enabling drilldowns into various data dimensions.
Sales Planning
Sales planning offers a solution that enables you to define and monitor sales targets. It promotes seamless monitoring of sales targets, forecasts, and revenues and also makes it easy to create new plans.
136 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Tasks
Creating a Sales Plan
1.
Choose Sales Sales Target Planning New .
2.
On the Set General Properties screen, enter the necessary data - such as Sales Unit , Horizon From/To , Plan
Name , and Currency - then choose Next .
You can only have one plan for a certain sales unit and horizon. The overlapping of horizons for the same sales unit is not allowed.
By default, the currency of the sales unit's company is used. However, as long as the sales plan remains in preparation, you may change this currency, if desired.
3.
Specify the granularity of your plan on the Select Planning Dimensions screen. You can select the accounts, employees, product categories, and products that you want to be shown in the plan. You can also select the planning items to be planned, for example, certain employees, accounts, or products. Then choose Next .
4.
You can enter a description for the active version or you can create a new version on the Manage Plan
Versions screen. Then choose Next .
5.
You can select the data on which your planning is to be based and where it should be copied to on the Copy
Actual Data screen. First choose the plan data from existing sales plans that are created for the corresponding sales units in general data and the selected planning dimensions and time period that should be taken into account. Then select the plan version into which the data should be copied.
6.
On the Review screen, review your entries.
7.
To confirm your changes, choose Finish .
8.
On the Confirmation screen, you can open the plan data in Microsoft Excel
®
or close the wizard.
Editing a Sales Plan Structure
1.
To edit sales plan data in Microsoft Excel, select the appropriate plan.
Before you use Microsoft Excel to edit sales plan data, choose Download to download the Add-In for
Microsoft Excel ® .
2.
Choose Edit , then select Plan Data in Excel .
The sales targets are opened in Microsoft Excel. Now you can adjust the targets for your planning horizon.
3.
To show or hide dimensions, open the View pane. To this end, choose the SAP Cloud for Customer tab, find the View area, and choose Change the Current View of the Report .
You can also open and save views with different dimensions and settings in the panel.
4.
Select a desired dimension and drag and drop it to the rows and columns as necessary.
5.
You can also define how the data should appear on the user interface for each planning dimension by selecting the row or column label in the panel and changing the selections underneath.
6.
Enter your sales targets in the plan.
7.
After you have finished the planning, to recalculate the planning data in the workbook choose Refresh on the
SAP Cloud for Customer tab in the Microsoft Excel ribbon.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
137
If you enter a total target for a dimension, the sum is distributed to the unchanged items. Changed items are not affected during the recalculation.
8.
To finalize the planning, save your data by choosing Save All on the SAP Cloud for Customer tab.
Activating a Sales Plan
1.
2.
Select the sales target plan under New Sales Target Planning .
Select Change Status Active .
The plan is now activated.
See Also
3.17 Analysis
3.17.1 Analysis for HTML5 for SAP Cloud for Sales
3.17.1.1 Using Interactive Dashboards
Interactive dashboards allow you to get a big picture of your data, then zoom in by selecting a chart element, or by selecting specific characteristics, and applying filters. You access interactive dashboards on your browser, or with the SAP Customer Insight iPad app.
Please note that this document is relevant only for HTML5-based screens. Either the described function is available only in HTML5, or its HTML5 version differs from the Microsoft Silverlight ® version. To use this function in the Microsoft Silverlight client, please log on to the Microsoft Silverlight-based screen and follow the instructions in the corresponding help document.
Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. Your solution is Microsoft Silverlightbased if a Silverlight pop-up window appears when you right-click anywhere on the screen.
Tasks
Accessing Dashboards
●
●
Browser
1.
Choose the Analysis tab.
2.
Choose Dashboard .
3.
Select the desired dashboard from the menu.
SAP Customer Insight for iPad app
138 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
1.
Choose the sprocket icon at the upper right corner of the screen.
2.
Choose Dashboard .
3.
Select the desired dashboard from the menu.
Configuring a Chart
You have several options to control how the chart data appears on screen.
● Select a chart type from the settings menu.
● Show or hide the chart legend. Find this option in the Settings menu on the browser, or on SAP Customer
Insight for iPad, choose the small icon at the upper left of the chart.
● Choose a data element on a chart and linked reports update to reflect your selection. For example choose a specific bar in a bar chart, and linked reports on the dashboard update to show data from the selected element.
Drill Down and Filtering Data
Drill down and filter chart data to expose the information most relevant for you.
1.
Open the drill down pane for a chart by choosing the drill down icon.
2.
Select Drill Down , then select the desired characteristics.
The chart updates immediately to reflect your selections.
Linked charts do not update when the drill down pane is open.
● Choose Reset Dashboard to remove drill down characteristics and filters from all charts on the current dashboard.
(On SAP Customer Insight for iPad, from the dashboard list menu, choose Reset Current Dashboard .)
Annotating and E-Mailing Dashboards
If you are viewing the dashboard on the SAP Customer Insight for iPad app, you can add annotations and send an image of the annotated dashboard as an attachment via e-mail.
1.
Choose Annotation from the Action menu.
2.
Select a color for freehand markup, or select the note icon to enter a text note.
3.
Draw your markup or enter text.
4.
Choose Send as E-Mail from the Actions menu to send an image of the annotated dashboard as an attachment.
5.
Choose Cancel to exit annotation mode.
3.17.1.2 Charts
Overview
When you work with reports, you can choose from a range of charts to display data.
Not all reports are suitable to be displayed as a chart. For example, if the report to be displayed as a chart contains large amounts of data with multiple key figures and characteristics, you may want to restrict the number of characteristics and key figures in the report so that the display of data in the chart is comprehensible.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
139
Please note that this document is relevant only for HTML5-based screens. Either the described function is available only in HTML5, or its HTML5 version differs from the Microsoft Silverlight ® version. To use this function in the Microsoft Silverlight client, please log on to the Microsoft Silverlight-based screen and follow the instructions in the corresponding help document.
Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. Your solution is Microsoft Silverlightbased if a Silverlight pop-up window appears when you right-click anywhere on the screen.
Troubleshooting
There may be other reasons why a chart cannot be displayed. See the following list of possible issues:
● Chart not possible; hierarchy on characteristic is active.
There is a characteristic in rows for which a display hierarchy is active.
●
1.
Check the characteristics under Row Fields by clicking the characteristics and choosing Settings .
2.
On the General tab page, from the Display Hierarchy dropdown list, select Do Not Show .
Chart not possible; arrange as hierarchy is active.
1.
The table setting Arrange As Hierarchy is active. From the sprocket icon, select Table Settings .
●
●
●
2.
On the following screen, from the Arrange As Hierarchy dropdown list, select None .
Chart not possible; multiple units of measure are used.
The key figures displayed have different units of measure.
○ Check which units of measure are used and determine if all key figures are necessary for the chart. If all key figures are not necessary, remove the relevant key figures so that the units of measure match for the key figures displayed. For example, there are quantity and currency units of measure. You only really need the quantity key figures so you remove the currency key figures.
○ If you only have key figures with currencies, check if the currencies are the same. If the currencies are different, You can, for example, use the Display Currency variable. Click the pencil icon next to the
Selection dropdown list, If the Display Currency variable is available, set the value accordingly.
Chart not possible; key figures are in rows or characteristics are in columns.
Ensure that the key figures are in columns and the characteristics are in rows. Under columns, you can have a characteristic, but only above the key figures.
Chart not possible; no key figure selected.
Ensure that you have at least one key figure in columns.
● Chart not possible; no characteristic selected.
Ensure that you have at least one characteristic in rows.
Types of Charts
The examples in the charts are based on the following set of hypothetical data.
140 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Example of data in a report
Bar
Shows comparisons between individual elements shown in a bar chart. Categories are arranged vertically and values are arranged horizontally. The emphasis is on the comparison of values and not on displaying a change during a period of time.
The data as shown in table format is displayed in a bar chart as follows:
● The X axis shows the values in columns.
● The Y axis shows the values in rows.
You want to visualize the difference in net sales value between 2002 and 2003 for each product category.
The X axis shows net sales for 2002 and 2003.
The Y axis shows product categories.
Example of a bar chart
Column
Shows comparisons between individual elements. Categories are arranged horizontally and values are arranged vertically. The emphasis is on comparing a change in value during a period of time for individual elements.
The data as shown in table format is displayed in a column chart as follows:
●
●
The X axis shows the values in rows.
The Y axis shows the values in columns.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
141
You want to visualize the difference in net sales value between 2002 and 2003 for each product category.
The X axis shows product categories.
The Y axis shows net sales for 2002 and 2003.
Example of a column chart
Line
Shows trends in your data over time. The data is entered at regular intervals. Points in lines represent the intersection of the X and Y axes.
The data as shown in table format is displayed in a line chart as follows:
● The X axis shows the values in rows.
● The Y axis shows the values in columns.
You want to visualize the trend in invoiced quantity for your product categories.
The X axis shows product categories.
The Y axis shows invoiced quantities for 2002 and 2003.
Example of a line chart
142 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Stacked Column
Shows comparisons between individual elements in a category. Categories are arranged horizontally and values are arranged vertically. The emphasis is on the comparison of values in a category.
You want to visualize the difference in net sales value between 2002 and 2003 for each product category.
The X axis shows product categories.
The Y axis shows net sales for 2002 and 2003.
Example of a stacked column chart
Stacked Bar
Shows comparisons between individual elements in a category. Categories are arranged vertically and values are arranged horizontally. The emphasis is on the comparison of values in a category.
You want to visualize the net sales value for 2002 and for 2003 for each product category.
The X axis shows net sales for 2002 and 2003.
The Y axis shows product categories.
Example of a stacked bar chart
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
143
100 Percent Stacked Bar
Shows comparisons between individual elements in a category as a percentage. Categories are arranged vertically and values are arranged horizontally. The emphasis is on the comparison of values in a category as a percentage of the whole.
You want to visualize the net sales value for 2002 and for 2003 as a percentage of the total net sales for the two years for each product category.
The X axis shows net sales for 2002 and 2003.
The Y axis shows product categories.
Example of a 100 percent stacked bar chart
100 Percent Stacked Column
Shows comparisons between individual elements in a category as a percentage. Categories are arranged horizontally and values are arranged vertically. The emphasis is on the comparison of values in a category as a percentage of the whole.
You want to visualize the difference in net sales value between 2002 and 2003 for each product category.
The X axis shows product categories.
The Y axis shows net sales for 2002 and 2003.
144 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Example of a 100 percent stacked column chart
Pie
Shows values as pie segments. If the table contains more than one column, the additional columns are ignored when the table is converted into a chart. If the first column does not contain any values, the system does not convert the table into a chart.
The data as shown in table format is displayed in a line pie as follows:
● Segments represent values in rows.
● The size of the segments represent the values in columns as a percent.
You want to visualize the percent of total net sales value for each product category in 2002.
Example of a pie chart
Donut
The donut chart is similar to a pie chart in that it shows values as segments. The segments represent values in rows.
The size of the segments represent the values in columns as a percent of the whole.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
145
Example of a donut chart
Bubble
Shows relationships between data set values by the size of the bubble.
Example of a bubble chart
Scatter
Shows relationships between values as displayed in several columns. Scatter charts are suitable for large sets of data.
The data as shown in table format is displayed in a scatter chart as follows:
● The X axis shows the values in columns.
● The Y axis shows the values in columns.
You want to visualize the relationship between net sales value and invoiced quantity.
The X axis shows net sales.
The Y axis shows invoiced quantities.
Points in lines represent the intersection of the X and Y axes for product categories.
146 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Example of a scatter chart
Area
Shows trends of values over categories. The area between the axes and the values are filled in an area chart.
The data as shown in table format is displayed in an area chart as follows:
● The X axis shows values in rows.
● The Y axis shows values in columns.
You want to visualize a trend in your net sales value for 2002.
The X axis shows product categories.
The Y axis shows net sales.
Example of an area chart
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
147
Bullet Chart
Shows comparisons between one or more measures. Categories are arranged vertically and values are arranged horizontally. The emphasis is on the comparison of values and targets.
In the example vertical black line denotes Target and blue bar denotes Pipeline and pink color bar denotes Forecast
You want to visualize the difference between forecast, target and pipeline for each employee.
The X axis shows forecast, target and pipeline.
The Y axis shows employees.
The example in the chart are based on the following set of hypothetical data.
Employee Name
John
Alex
Sam
Gary
Kevin
Tom
Bruce
Forecast
44
53
21
42
42
33
44
Target
88
46
11
44
22
22
88
Pipeline
77
33
55
75
77
44
77
Example of a bullet chart
Heat Map
Show comparison between one or more dimensions. Based on the values of the categories the intensity of the color increases or decreases.
In the example each square denotes a row and the color intensity of the square denotes the value.
You can visualize the difference of accounts between each country based on the following hypothetical data:
148 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Country
India
Japan
China
Korea
Singapore
Malaysia
Accounts
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
Example of a heat map
Other Settings
By default, all of the following indicators are not set.
Legend
You can show the legend as well as determine where in the content area the legend is to be displayed.
Axis
You can provide labels for the X and Y axes.
Values
●
●
Show Results and Overall Results If Displayed in Table
You use this indicator to specify whether the results and overall results are to be displayed. By default, these results are suppressed since the display of the chart may otherwise be adversely affected.
Show Hierarchies If Displayed in Table
You use this indicator to specify whether hierarchy nodes are to be displayed.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
149
● Display Chart Values
You use this indicator if you want to view the values on the chart. Note that you cannot save this setting. You need to enable it manually each time you open the report.
Zoom
You can now view zoomed in values in your chart. To do this, click on Enable Zoom and select a section of the chart to view the zoomed in data. You can continue to zoom further down until there are just two data points.
Note that when the zoom feature is active, navigation is not possible. In order to activate navigation targets, just toggle the zoom icon. The system retains the chart in the zoomed state and allows you to navigate.
To clear the zoomed data and go back to the original chart, click on Reset Zoom
Zooming is available for only the following types of charts:
● Bar
●
●
●
Column
Line
Scatter
Since the zoom function is supported for the above charts only, all other chart types are disabled when the user is in zoom mode. Disable zoom to view data in other chart formats.
3.17.1.3 Reporting
When working the reports, the reporting functions of screens built in HTML5 provide business users with easier access to everyday functions, such as filtering or adding or removing characteristics and key figures.
The layout of the report, whether table or chart, has been initially defined.
Please note that this document is relevant only for HTML5-based screens. Either the described function is available only in HTML5, or its HTML5 version differs from the Microsoft Silverlight
®
version. To use this function in the Microsoft Silverlight client, please log on to the Microsoft Silverlight-based screen and follow the instructions in the corresponding help document.
Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. Your solution is Microsoft Silverlightbased if a Silverlight pop-up window appears when you right-click anywhere on the screen.
Analzying Reports
Toolbar Functions
● View
Shows the report view that is displayed in the Web browser. The dropdown list displays the report views that are available with the corresponding report. A report view is a modified view of the data available with a report.
To view and edit the report view, click the pencil icon next to the dropdown list. The following table provides an overview of the available functions:
150 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Function
View dropdown list
Report Default
Rename
Delete
Save
Save As
Defer Refresh
Add Fields
Description
Enables you to select a report view.
Makes the current report view the default when opening the report.
Renames the current report view.
Deletes report views created by you. Note that you cannot delete report views delivered by SAP or report views created by your administrator.
Save the report view .
Saves the current report view as a new report view.
If you want to make several changes to the report layout, we recommend deferring the refresh of the layout. When you click Defer Refresh , all other functions are inactive until you switch off Defer Refresh .
Add characteristic attributes to and remove them from the report view by clicking Add Fields . On the following screen, fields are group by specified criteria. For example, characteristics are grouped by dimensions. Note that you cannot select all fields to add to or to remove from the report view. Fields that you cannot select indicate that they are part of the report as it is defined, either as delivered content or as defined by administrators. When you add and remove fields, the system modifies the current report view. The characteristic attributes are then available. You can then add the new fields to rows and columns and save the personalized report view.
Available Fields Shows the characteristics and key figures that are available with the report view. By clicking an available characteristic, a check is displayed next to the characteristic, and the characteristic is added to rows.
Row Fields By clicking a characteristic under Row Fields , you can move the characteristic to Column Fields or back to Available Fields . You can also make settings for the characteristic. For information about characteristic settings, see here.
Column Fields By clicking Key Figure , you can move the key figures to Column Fields or back to Available Fields . You can also make settings for the characteristic. For information about key figure settings, see here.
You can also create exceptions and conditions. If you have an active condition, a filter icon appears next to the name of the report view.
For information about exceptions, see here.
For information about conditions, see here.
● Selection
Shows the set of variables available for the report and any defined value selections currently used. The dropdown list shows the selection available with the corresponding report.
To view and edit the selection, click the pencil icon next to the dropdown list. The following table provides an overview of the available functions:
Function Description
Selection dropdown list
Enables you to choose a selection.
Report
Default
Makes the current selection the default when opening the report.
View
Default
Rename
Makes the current selection the default when opening the report view.
Renames the current selection.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
151
Function Description
Delete Deletes the selection created by you. Note that you cannot delete selections delivered by SAP or created by your administrator.
Save
Save As
Save the current selection.
When you save a new selection, you have the option of saving the time characteristics of the selection as relative. By clicking Save Time Characteristics as Relative , the new values for time variables are calculated depending on the date when you saved the selection and when you next open the selection. The following graphic provides an example:
Example of saving time characteristics as relative
Show
Description
You can also decide if you want to display text descriptions for values. For example, the Project Status variable has been restricted to the value 5. By clicking Show Description , under the entry field, the description Started is displayed.
Add Fields Add characteristic attributes to and remove them from the report view by clicking Add Fields . On the following screen, fields are group by specified criteria. For example, characteristics are grouped by dimensions. Note that you cannot select all fields to add to or to remove from the report view. Fields that you cannot select indicate that they are part of the report as it is defined, either as delivered content or as defined by administrators. When you add and remove fields, the system modifies the current report view. The characteristic attributes are then available. You can then add the new fields to rows and columns and save the personalized report view.
●
●
●
For information about making value selection, see the section in this document called Working with Selections .
Refresh
By clicking the icon to the right of the Selection dropdown list, you can refresh the data and display of the report.
Display Format
You can switch formats between table and chart. Note that in some cases, you cannot switch the display format, for example, if your report contains a hierarchy.
Further functions
By clicking the sprocket icon, the following functions are available.
Setting
Report Header
Description
Displays values that have been set for variables in the selection. If available, any information and warnings are also displayed. For example, if the display currency is set using key figure settings or variables.
By clicking Technical Information , you can also view further information, such as the access context of the report and the data source that serves as a basis for the report data.
152 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Setting
Download
Start Options
Description
Exports the report data to Microsoft Excel® in XML format in read only mode. The export is useful if you want to use Microsoft Excel® functions to analyze report data.
Note that when you open the export, there is no longer a connection to the system, even if you view the report data on the SAP add-in for Microsoft Excel® ribbon.
You can also download data sources and reports in CSV format. The format and the available fields of the downloaded data source differ from a downloaded report. For example, in a downloaded report, the value and unit of measure are combined in one field whereas in the downloaded data source, the fields are separate. Another example is that there may be key figures only defined for the report, which are not available in the underlying data source.
You can decide if you want to show the Selection area and if you want to start the report.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
153
Setting
Table Settings
Chart Types
Send
Microsoft Excel®
Description
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Freeze Header Columns
You can freeze the headers of columns so that the headers are still displayed while scrolling.
Table Design
You can choose between a standard white background or alternating between white and blue.
Grid lines
You can decide if you want horizontal or vertical grid lines, both, or none.
Result Rows and Columns
You can decide if you want result rows or columns displayed as the first or last entry in a row and/or displayed in the first or last column.
Display Repeated Texts
You can specify whether every instance of a characteristic value is displayed in a row or column.
Display Scaling Factors
Use the dropdown list to set a scaling factor of 1 to ten billion
(10,000,000,000).
Arrange As Hierarchy
The system arranges characteristics in rows and in columns as a hierarchy.
The row or column further left serves as the tree structure into which characteristics to the right are inserted.
Hierarchy Design
You can decide between standard and cascading. If you choose standard, characteristics are arranged in a hierarchy; any characteristic attributes are arranged in rows or columns. If you choose cascading, characteristics are arranged in a hierarchy; any characteristic attributes are arranged individual columns or rows.
Hierarchy Initial Expansion
The hierarchy level up to which the hierarchy is to be displayed when it is expanded.
Invert Hierarchy
The system inverts the hierarchy so that the hierarchy is displayed from bottom to top or from right to left. You can decide to invert a hierarchy in rows, columns, or both.
Limit Data
By default, the records of data displayed are limited to the value in the specified field. You can change this value. Note that this setting is only valid for reports displayed as a table.
For information about the different chart types available, see
.
You can send the report as an e-mail attachment or as a link.
You can view and edit the report using the SAP add-in for Microsoft Excel®.
Working with Selections
A selection consists of the set of variables available for the report and any defined value selections.
The selection you define determines the data to be displayed in the report.
When you open a report, the data displayed in the report is restricted to the value selections set using variables in the
Selections area. You can display the Selections area by clicking the pencil icon next to the Selection dropdown list box.
Making Value Selections
154 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Note that you must specify a value for all mandatory variables. In the system, mandatory variables are indicated by an asterisk (*).
The Access Context variable is mandatory for all reports. This variable is defaulted to the access context to which the you are assigned. The system fills the variable with the access context available for the report. In this case, only one access context is assigned, and therefore the variable is not displayed.
If the report supports multiple access contexts, you must specify which access context is to be used to select data.
You can either enter values manually, the system supports manual entry of only the ID of variable or characteristic values.
For example, you know that you want to restrict the Supplier variable to
500001
(You cannot enter
Miller and Son
).
You therefore enter
500001
in the Supplier variable field.
You can add further values by clicking the plus icon to the right of the entry field. If the variable supports operators, such as greater than or less than, a dropdown list box is displayed.
Value Selection Help
The type of value entry allowed depends on how the content has been defined. For example, if you can select single values, multiple values, or set an interval.
The following options are available depending on the variable.
Allowed Value Entry
Single value
One or more values
Description
Allows you to select one value.
Allows you to select one or more values separated by semi-colons.
One or more values with an operator Allows you to select one or more values with an operator such as greater than or less than.
Note that the between operator is
..
, the unequal operator is
<>
.
Interval
Relative select
Allows you to select a single or interval value, for example, 100 or 19494 .. 4343434.
Allows you to restrict a specified characteristic to a relative variable selection. Relative selections are based on basic characteristics, such as Date, Week, Month, Fiscal Period, and
Company. When you start the report, the system fills the cells in the report with the corresponding values.
Expand the following table to view some examples of relative selections.
Variable
Posting Date
Relative Selection
Today
Description
Shows today's date.
Invoice Creation Date Last 7 Days
Fiscal Month
Company
Shows a time range of the last 7 days, including today.
Shows the current month.
Current Fiscal Period
Multiple Default Companies Derives multiple default companies based on the user's position.
When making value entries, note that you can choose either a relative select or other entries but not both.
Functions in the Content Area
Many of the functions in the content area of the report are available from the column headers of the report. The functions available differ for characteristics and key figures. To display the functions, click the column headers.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
155
Functions for Characteristics
Function
Sort
Display
Subtotals
Filter
Add
Remove
Use
Click the arrow next to the characteristic to sort values in ascending or descending order.
A period next to the characteristic indicates that the values are not sorted.
Displays the description or ID of characteristic values.
The name of the characteristic appears in a pop-up window. You can decide to display the description, ID, or a combination thereof.
Note that the display function is disabled if only IDs are available to display.
Enables you to display or hide subtotal results of key figures for characteristics.
A list of characteristic values appears in a pop-up window. You can select one or more values by which to filter the report. You can also use the search with its auto-fill function to make it easier to find values. Once you have set a filter, a filter icon appears next to the name of the report view.
Enables you to add a characteristic to the right of the column you click.
Enables you to remove characteristics. Note that in columns, one characteristic has to remain.
Functions for Key figures
Function
Add
Remove
Use
Enables you to add a key figure to the right of the column you click.
Enables you to remove the key figures, even those key figures that are initially defined. Note that one key figure has to remain.
Analytical Navigation
In cells of reports displayed in table format, you can use the context menu for further navigation and analysis. Using the context menu, you can view existing documents related to a value. When you click a cell, the documents and reports to which you can navigate are displayed. For example, you can navigate to a preceding document, such as a purchase request, an overview document that provides information about a customer, or to another report.
Working with Embedded Reports
Embedded reports are reports that you can find overview screens of work center views.
The following feature are available with embedded reports.
●
●
●
●
●
Select different report views from the View dropdown list.
Select different sets of saved value selections for variables from the Selection dropdown list.
Refresh the data.
From the sprocket icon, you can analyze the data of the report, set the refresh rate, and select a chart type.
Switch between chart and table display.
156 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
3.17.2 About Analysis
Analytics reports condense data in your company so that you can recognize trends, compare sales results, and estimate future performance. You can display certain information from each report in different types of charts.
You can also download reports and run ad-hoc analyses, either in your Web browser or in Microsoft Excel.
Example
Sales manager Donna Moore checks the Sales Summary chart to see whether her team is on track to meet its total revenue goals for the current quarter. She notices that the numbers in the Sales
Summary chart seem a little low when compared to the Pipeline Forecast chart. To improve her numbers for this quarter, she wants to find a way for her team to close more deals.
Donna checks the Pipeline Funnel chart and sees that many of the opportunities are in the initial stages.
She examines the details of this chart in the Web browser and notices that there is a large percentage of revenue in the decision phase. She adds opportunity and account information to the chart for more detail, and sorts the list according to revenue so that she can pinpoint the revenue that is easiest to close. She saves this version of the report for future reference.
She notices that one of the high-revenue opportunities is supported by Michael Adams, a sales representative who is currently working on many deals. She thinks it might be useful to add another one of her top salespeople to this opportunity. She checks the Sales Reps by Revenue in Pipeline (Top 10) chart and finds that Richard Wilson currently has fewer deals in the pipeline, so he should have capacity to support Michael. She asks Richard to join Michael on this opportunity.
Ultimately, this move results in Michael and Richard closing the deal in the current quarter, improving the overall revenue for the quarter.
The following dashboards, made up of the charts listed here, are available in SAP Cloud for Sales, under Analysis .
Dashboards can be personalized. The table below lists the standard dashboard set up shipped with SAP Cloud for Sales.
Administrators can create custom reports that appear in the reports list. For more information, see Design Reports
Quick Guide.
Dashboard
Sales Overview
Charts
Sales Summary
Pipeline Forecast
Sales by Product
Category (Top 10)
Competitors by
Number of Deals Lost
(Top 10)
Description
Total expected revenue of won opportunities in the current year, quarter, and month
Total expected revenue, separated by won and open opportunities closing in the current year
Top 10 product categories by total revenue share in won and open opportunities closing in the current year
Top 10 competitors by the number of opportunities lost over the last 12 months
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
157
Dashboard
Pipeline
Win/Loss
Sales
Performance
Charts
Pipeline Funnel
Pipeline by Month
Description
Projected trend of expected revenue of opportunities
Projected trend of expected revenue of opportunities closing in the next 12 months
Key metrics to evaluate the sales pipeline Pipeline Health
Scorecard
Pipeline Progress
Win/Loss Rate
Current progress of the pipeline, displaying stalled and on track opportunities
Trend of win and loss rates over the last 12 months
Win/Loss Revenue Trend of expected revenue of opportunities that were won and lost over the last
12 months
Rate of loss of opportunities during a given sales phase Loss Rate by Sales
Phase
Win/Loss Reason Number of wins and losses grouped by reason given for win/loss.
Sales Reps by Revenue
Won (Top 10)
Top 10 sales representatives by total revenue for opportunities won in the last 12 months
Pipeline Sourcing Lead Qualification Rate Percentage distribution of qualified and unqualified leads over the last 12 months
Lead Conversion Rate Rate of conversion of leads to opportunities over the last 12 months
Leads by Source
Leads by Status
Distribution of leads by source and qualification level over the last 12 months
Distribution of leads by status over the last 12 months
Performance
Sales Reps by Revenue in Pipeline (Top 10)
Top 10 sales representatives by total revenue for open opportunities closing in the next 12 months
Average Sales Cycle
Sales Effectiveness
Scorecard
Average sales cycle length across all opportunities won in the last 12 months
Key metrics for evaluating the effectiveness of the sales force
Forecast
Sales Target vs.
Pipeline
My Opportunities (Top
20 by Expected
Revenue)
My Progress
Sales target versus opportunity pipeline for the current year
Top 20 opportunities owned by the user, sorted by highest expected revenue
Consolidated view of a user's target, expected revenue and weighted revenue of opportunities in the current year
Top 20 opportunities owned by the user, sorted by earliest close date My Opportunities (Top
20 by Closing Date)
Forecast Metrics Comparison of forecast against target revenue, won revenue and override revenue (difference between pipeline revenue and forecast revenue for opportunities in submitted forecast)
Forecast by Category Sales forecasts distributed by forecast category
Sales Target vs.
Forecast
Sales target for the user versus the current submitted forecast
Opportunity List List of opportunities in a user's submitted forecast
Account View
158 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
The following charts appear in the Charts tab when you open an account:
● Revenue Trend
● Average Sales Cycle
Competitor View
The following charts appear in the overview information when you open a competitor:
●
●
Successful Sales Reps
Won/Lost Trend
Tasks
Personalizing Dashboards [page 159]
Viewing Reports with Web Browser — Quick Filter [page 330]
Viewing Reports with the Web Browser [page 327]
Working with Reports in Microsoft Excel
Working with Sales Planning Data [page 159]
3.17.3 Personalizing Dashboards
1.
Click Personalize at the upper right of the screen.
Choose This Screen .
A list of dashboard reports appears, as well as mashups and web services. Use the filters to narrow the list, or use search to find a specific report.
2.
Drag the report title from the list to the desired chart position.
Drop on top of an existing chart to replace the chart currently in that position; drop between charts to insert the new chart between the existing charts.
3.
Drag and drop to rearrange the charts as desired.
4.
Click the wrench icon at the upper right of a chart to remove, rename, or resize the chart.
5.
Click Save above the reports list to save changes.
You can also click Discard to cancel changes and revert back to the previous version of the dashboard.
6.
Click the X icon at the upper right of the report list to exit Personalize mode.
3.17.4 Working with Sales Planning Data
Under Analysis , three reports enable sales representatives to work with sales planning data that has been prepared by sales managers. The names and locations of these reports are as follows:
●
●
●
The first report, My Progress — Current Year , appears in the Pipeline Management filter.
The second report, Sales Target/Pipeline by Month , appears in the Sales and Marketing — Sales filter.
The third report, Sales Target/Pipeline by Sales Unit , also appears in the Sales and Marketing — Sales filter.
To view these reports and work with their data, proceed as follows:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
159
1.
Choose Analysis Reports .
2.
Choose the sales planning report that you want to work with, as follows:
● Pipeline Management My Progress — Current Year
● Sales and Marketing — Sales Sales Target/Pipeline by Month
● Sales and Marketing — Sales Sales Target/Pipeline by Sales Unit
3.
From the Actions column, open the report in the desired format.
4.
Edit or manage the sales planning report data, as required, using your preferred settings.
Sales planning functions are performed by sales managers in the Sales Planning work center. For more information, see
Sales Target Planning [page 136] .
3.17.5 Projecting Sales Volume
Use What-if Analysis to project sales volume or for tactical planning to meet sales targets. What-If Analysis helps you determine:
●
●
●
Which opportunities to focus on in the short term
Where to expand the portfolio to gain a higher average deal size
The number of opportunities you need in the pipeline to meet sales targets
To use What-if Analysis, do the following:
1.
Select the desired filters.
The opportunities included in the simulation appear in the list below the chart.
2.
Set the variables as desired using the sliders.
The results of the simulation appear in the chart below.
Adjust the variables to achieve the desired outcome, then plan how to achieve those changes in your pipeline.
When using What-if Analysis, consider the following points:
● The maximum value for the Average Probability of Success is 100%, and you cannot lower the probability of success below the current average. If the current average for the opportunities included in your simulation is 100%, then the slider is inactive.
●
●
Increasing either the Average Probability or the Average Deal Size slider results in a proportional increase of the simulated value of every opportunity. For example: if you increase the simulated average chance of success from 50% to 80%, the simulated value of each opportunity increases by 30%. This setting increases the simulated aggregated average chance of success to 80%, however, the simulated chance of success for each individual opportunity will not be set to 80%, rather the current value is increased by 30%.
What-if Analysis uses two data sources for the simulation: opportunity pipeline data and sales target planning data. If you filter on a characteristic that is present in opportunities, but not in sales target planning data, (sales phase, progress, opportunity, calendar quarter, account) then the sales target planning data is excluded from the simulation. To ensure that the sales target planning data appears in the simulation result chart, include Not Assigned as a filter value for opportunity-only parameters.
160 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
3.17.6 Viewing Forecast Revenue
Use the forecast chart to compare forecast revenue with sales target revenue and won revenue.
To view the forecast revenue chart, do the following:
1.
Choose Analysis Forecast .
2.
Use the filter to select opportunities to include in the forecast.
You can filter on time period, owner, sales unit, territory, etc.
The chart area shows forecast revenue, target revenue, won revenue, and the difference between estimated revenue from pipeline-relevant opportunities and forecast revenue. The last figure (labeled Relevant Pipeline minus
Forecast) indicates the extent of override on pipeline revenue in the forecast. A positive value here indicates a conservative forecast, and a negative value indicates an optimistic forecast compared to pipeline revenue.
Opportunities used to generate the figures appear below the chart.
See Also
3.18 Competitors and Competitor Products
3.18.1 Competitors
On the Competitors tab, you can display existing competitors, create new competitors, and set competitor statuses.
You can also display competitor details, review additional data, add and edit products in relation to competitors, and rename and edit competitors, as required.
Once you have created a competitor, it can no longer be deleted. You can, however, set its status as
Obsolete .
As you review analytics charts and other sales data on the Competitors tab, it is important to remember that it compares your company's results only with the results of the selected single competitor.
For example, suppose you are a sales representative at company A, and you are examining the Win/Loss
Trends chart in relation to company B, a key competitor. When you study this chart, it is important to remember that it only reflects two types of deals:
● Deals that company A won over company B
● Deals that company A lost to company B
In short, the chart reflects only those deals that company A won or lost in competition with company B, rather than all of the deals, as a whole, that company A has won or lost.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
161
Tasks
Creating Competitors
1.
Choose the Competitors tab.
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the Name and Classification of the competitor.
If desired, you also may enter the competitor's Web site.
4.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
Editing Competitors
You can edit competitors from the Competitor item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the competitor, position the cursor over the Name field.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the drop-down menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
To assign a new competitor product to a competitor, choose the Products tab within the competitor details.
On that tab, choose New , then enter the information for the competitor product.
To edit information for an existing competitor product, exit the item details, then choose
Competitors Competitor Products .
To edit information for an existing product of your own, exit the item details and the Competitors tab, then choose the Products tab and edit the product as described in the procedure above.
Choosing Competitor Filters
Competitors are displayed in one of three standard filters: Active Competitors , Big Threat Competitors , or All
Competitors . You can modify the range of competitors to display by selecting among these filters. The default filter is Active Competitors .
Setting Competitor Status
From the competitor details, use the Actions menu to choose the following applicable status:
● Choose Actions Set as Active to change the competitor status to Active.
● Choose Actions Block to change the competitor status to Blocked, which will exclude the competitor from subsequent search results. By blocking a competitor you also prevent future opportunities from being assigned to it.
● Choose Actions Set as Obsolete to change the competitor status to Obsolete. By setting a competitor as obsolete, you also prevent future opportunities from being assigned to it.
You may assign a new status to a competitor at any time, as required. For example, you can set any active competitor as obsolete, or any blocked competitor as active.
162 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Reviewing Tabs in Competitor Details
From the competitor details, you can select these tabs to perform additional actions. The following table summarizes the tabs that are available:
Tab
Overview
Feed
Products
Actions
Select Overview to see the latest updates made to the competitor, and any opportunities associated with the competitor.
Select Feed to read any Feed updates that are associated with this competitor. For more information, see
From this tab, you can also open, tag or flag Feed updates, mark them as favorites, or comment them.
Select Products to view, edit or add products that are sold by your organization and that are comparable to products your competitor sells.
For the selected competitor, the following product Information appears:
● Product ID
(of the competitor's product)
●
●
Description
(of the competitor's product)
Own Product ID
(of your product)
●
●
Description
(of your product)
Product Comparison
(for example,
Worse than ours
)
● List Price/Currency
Opportunities Select Opportunities to view potential sales opportunities that are in play with this competitor.
Attachments Select Attachments to view, edit or add attachments that relate to this competitor.
See Also
Competitor Products [page 163]
3.18.2 Competitor Products Quick Guide
The Competitor Products view enables you to create entries on competitor products and store and view detailed information on these products. You can access this view from the Competitors work center.
In this view, you can enter comparisons between competitor products and your products. This information is beneficial in positioning your products against the competitor. For example, if you are trying to sell a product to a customer, you can determine how your product is performing against the competition and develop presentations and demonstrations that highlight the benefits of your products over the competition.
On the initial screen, competitor products are displayed in List View by default. This and the Tile View provides you with the most detailed overview. Alternatively, you have the option to display competitor products in Thumbnail
View , where you see the icon, name, and code.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
163
Tasks
Create Competitor Products
1.
In the Action Bar , click New .
The New Competitor Product quick create window appears.
2.
Enter the Name , Competitor , and Our Product in the appropriate fields. If additional information is available, you can add that as well.
3.
Save your entries.
The competitor product is added to the overview.
You can also create competitor products by choosing the New Competitor Products option from the toolbar.
Display Competitor Products
In the overview, rest your cursor on any of the entered information.
The competitor product and its information is displayed in the Quick View window.
Edit Competitor Products
1.
In the overview, or in the Quick View window, click the Name of the competitor product.
The Competitor Products Details View opens.
2.
In the Headers View , move the cursor over the field you want to edit and click the field.
3.
Make changes to the field you want to edit.
4.
Save your changes.
3.19 Partners and Partner Contacts
3.19.1 Partners
A motivated group of partners — such as resellers, brokers, service providers or distributors — can assist your organization in attaining its goals. To achieve these goals with greater efficiency, members of your organization can collaborate with your company's partners within the solution.
Prerequisites
If your administrator has not configured the solution to display partners — which otherwise are accessed under
Partners — then you cannot use the solution to collaborate with partners there.
164 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Tasks
Creating Partners
1.
Choose Partners .
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the Name of the partner, then specify its Country .
4.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
Editing Partners
You can edit partners from the Partner item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the partner, position the cursor over the Name field.
As you move the cursor over an editable field, the background changes to a different color. When you click a field, you enter edit mode.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the drop-down menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
See Also
3.19.2 Partner Contacts
To facilitate the exchange of information, members of your organization can communicate within the solution with partner contacts — that is, individuals who are associated with the resellers, brokers, service providers, distributors, or other entities with which your organization collaborates.
Prerequisites
If your administrator has not configured the solution to display partner contacts — which otherwise are accessed under Partners Partner Contacts — then you cannot use the solution to communicate with partner contacts there.
Tasks
Creating Partner Contacts
1.
Choose Partners Partner Contacts .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
165
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the first and last name of the partner contact, then specify the e-mail address.
4.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
Editing Partner Contacts
You can edit partner contacts from the Partner Contact item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the partner, position the cursor over the Name field.
As you move the cursor over an editable field, the background changes to a different color. When you click a field, you enter edit mode.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the drop-down menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
Creating Users for Partner Contacts
If you want to enable your partner contacts to access the solution, so that you can collaborate with them directly, then you must create users for them, as follows:
1.
Open the partner contact.
2.
Choose Actions Create User .
Once a user has been created for the partner contact, then your administrator can choose Administrator Business
Users to assign either business roles or individual work centers or work center views to the user that you created for the partner contact.
See Also
3.19.3 Inviting Partner Contacts to Use the Partner Portal
You can use the partner portal to collaborate with your partners. The first step in this process is for partner managers to invite their employees (partner contacts) within the partner organization to collaborate with you in your SAP solution.
Prerequisites
●
●
●
The partner manager has a user in the SAP Cloud for Customer solution.
The partner manager has a user in the partner portal.
The administrator has made the appropriate settings for partner portal invitations. To review the settings, the administrator can do the following:
1.
In the Microsoft Silverlight ® client, log on to your SAP solution as an administrator.
166 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
2.
Under Business Configuration Overview , show Activities and search for “partner programs”.
3.
Select the Partner Programs activity and choose Define business roles for partner portal .
4.
Add a row and enter business role
PARTNER_CONTACT
.
5.
Save your changes.
Process Flow
Partner managers and partner contacts have the following authorizations in the system:
Role
Partner manager
Partner contact
Authorizations
●
●
●
Invite partner contacts
See company details
See leads and opportunities as per restrictions in the SAP solution
See leads and opportunities as per restrictions in the SAP solution
1.
The partner manager logs into the partner portal.
2.
The partner manager invites employees in his or her company (partner contacts) to use the partner portal.
The invitation feature automatically does the following:
● Ensures that the partner contact exists in your SAP solution as a contact.
● Sends an e-mail to the partner contacts, which includes a confirmation link
3.
Each partner contact clicks the link in the e-mail and goes to the registration page of the SAP Cloud ID provider.
4.
Each partner fills in the form, accepts the terms and conditions of use, and registers.
The partner contact's user is activated in the back end, and the appropriate role is assigned to the user.
5.
The partner contact logs on to the partner portal.
3.20 Mobile Users
3.20.1 SAP Cloud for Customer for Android™
With this mobile application, you can access many of the main functions of the solution that have been tailored to business on-the-run. These include managing accounts, contacts, and activities; and viewing personalized reports.
Changes made on your Android™ device are automatically updated in the system, over the Internet, online and in real time.
Information for Administrators
You need to ensure that for each mobile work center view to be accessed on a mobile device, the user of the mobile device is assigned the related desktop work center view. You can do this by creating a mobile specific business role and assigning it to the individual users or you can define access for each user independently. Work centers and views are assigned via Administrator General Settings Business Roles or Business Users .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
167
For information on adding existing extension fields to a mobile view, see Adding Extension Fields to Smartphones and Tablets.
You can also make your custom reports available for mobile use by selecting the Enable for Mobile Device option for the report.
The following reports have been designated for mobile use in the standard solution: Leads by Status , Sales
Effectiveness Scorecard , Lead Conversion Rate , Opportunity Pipeline Analysis , Sales Reps by Revenue Won , Sales
Reps by Revenue in Pipeline , Average Sales Cycle , Pipeline Analysis for Next 12 Months , Pipeline Health Scorecard ,
Pipeline Funnel , and Sales Summary (Current Year) .
Installing the Application
Device Prerequisites
This application has been optimized for use on Nexus 4™ and HTC One™ smartphones. Other Android devices should be able to run this application if they meet or exceed these minimum requirements:
● Operating system: Android 4.0 to Android 4.2.2
●
●
●
Screen resolution: 1280dp x 768dp
CPU: 1.5GHz processor speed
RAM: 2GB
Installation
If your device meets the above requirements, you can proceed to install the application by downloading the application directly from Google Play.
SAP does not warrant that the software and/or features as described herein will be available without interruption or permanently. SAP draws your attention to the fact that the availability is subject to the sole discretion of the operator of the app store. The operator of the app store may, at any time and without notice, restrict, interrupt, or prevent use of the software, or delete the software from your mobile device, or require SAP to do any of the foregoing actions.
Launching the Application
Launch the SAP Cloud for Customer application from your mobile device and log on using your user name and password. If this is the first time you are launching the application, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Settings .
2.
Enter the URL to your system.
For example, https://[tenant].[domain].com
3.
Enter an application password.
This is separate from your system user ID and password. You must supply your application password before accessing the system.
4.
Set a Remember App. Password timeout, which is the amount of time your application password is valid on your device for the next log on. Due to security issues, you should ensure that this timeout meets your company’s security guidelines. The default is Never , which clears the application password on log out.
5.
Return to the logon screen to enter your system user name and password, and then choose Log On .
If you do not have the information required for these settings or you have continued problems logging on to the application, contact your system administrator for assistance.
168 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Uninstalling the Application
You can uninstall the SAP Cloud for Customer application at any time, just as you would uninstall any other Android application on your device. For further information, refer to your device manufacturer's documentation.
For information on how to operate your mobile device, refer to the device manufacturer's documentation.
Views and further tasks
Searching and Navigating
When you call up an overview, the system automatically lists your items in alphabetical or chronological order. In many cases, you can switch to a list of all available items. You can filter any list by entering a search term manually.
Access actions for each view from the action menu at the top right of each screen. Use the back button at the top left of the screen to navigate back to a previous view. You can also use the device's menu and back buttons for actions and back navigation.
Log off by pressing the device's back button from the Home screen.
When you edit data in the application, you must manually save changes (touch the device's menu button and choose Save ). If you use the device's back button before you save your changes, you may lose all unsaved data.
Feed
Use the filters on the Feed overview to select the feed updates you wish to view. To create a new feed update, press the menu button and choose New . To post your new update, choose Save and Close . Choose an update to view details. From the details view you can comment on the update and open mentioned items.
You cannot mention people or items, send private updates, or tag feed updates created on your Android device.
SAP Jam Feed
If your system is set up to support it, you can also access your SAP Jam feed directly from the app.
Accounts
You can display, edit and create accounts.
In the Accounts view, a yellow or red light next to an account indicates the status of the account in the system: a yellow light indicates that the account is in preparation and the red light indicates that the account is blocked. A yellow or red light does not stop you from processing the account on your mobile device.
In the overview, account address information and communication details are displayed in the General tab. Use the device’s menu button to display available actions.
Using the Contacts and Activities tabs, you can search for, display, and edit related contacts or related activities for the account. Select the contact or activity to open an overview. Here you can access contact information and communication details, as well as activities related to this specific contact, or to the account in general.
Choose ERP Docs to view sales quote or sales order documents generated by your SAP ERP system. Note: this tab does not contain any data unless your system has been configured to integrate sales documents from your SAP ERP system.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
169
Contacts
You can display, edit and create contacts.
Contact address information, communication details, and activities are displayed in the overview. To change a contact’s general data, tap the actions button in the top right corner, then tap Edit or to create a new contact, tap
+ and enter the contact's name, address, communication details and more.
If you create a new contact for an existing account, you can search for and select the account ID of the account in the Account/Partner field.
If there is a photo of the contact in the system, it is automatically displayed.
Opportunities and Leads
You can display, edit and create opportunities and leads.
In the Opportunities , Leads , and Sales Leads views, you can access worklists of opportunities and leads.
Select one to check the details, change data, or create related follow-up activities and documents.
You can also, for example, accept or decline a lead that has been assigned to you, create an opportunity from a lead, change the chance of success, or status, of an opportunity, or follow feed updates for a lead or opportunity.
For opportunities, choose ERP Docs to view sales quote or sales order documents generated by your SAP ERP system. Note: this tab does not contain any data unless your system has been configured to integrate sales documents from your SAP ERP system.
Sales Quotes
You can display, edit, create, and submit sales quotes.
From the Sales Quotes view, you can choose either your list of open quotes or your team's.
Select one to check the details, change data, or create related follow-up activities.
To edit the quote, tap the actions button and then Edit . The following actions are available:
●
●
●
To remove a product, go the Products tab and tap next to the product you want to remove.
To add a product to the quote, go to the Products tab and tap the actions button and choose Actions then
Add Row . Select the product to add before saving your changes.
To submit a sales quote for approval, tap the actions button and choose Actions then Submit .
Activities
You can display, edit and create activities.
In the overview, use the menu button and select Edit to change an activity. The system proposes values for many of the fields, for example: organizer, dates and times, category, and priority. You can manually change these values and search for and select other values, such as the account and the contacts for the activity.
Today’s Appointments
You can display, edit and create appointments.
In the Today’s Appointments view, you can review and edit your appointments for the current and next day.
Tickets
You can display existing tickets and create new tickets.
Reports
Select a report to open the report and display it in graph form. In the graph view, you can select each bar to view its values and description.
170 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Use the menu button to edit a report and then sort and filter it. You can also zoom in (magnify) or switch between graph and table display.
Work Tickets
You can display, edit and create work tickets.
You can also create follow-up sales quotes and tickets.
Copyright/Trademark
3.20.2 SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad®
With this mobile solution, you can access the main functions of the solution that have been tailored to business on the go. Changes made on your iPad
®
are automatically updated in the system over the Internet in real time. The analysis feature uses worksheets to arrange and organize reports that you often need, compare versions, and highlight changes in data.
Installation, Support, and Security
Install SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad from the iTunes Store. Launch the application, and select Options on the log on screen and do the following:
● Enter the URL for your backend system.
● SAP recommends that you enable the Passcode Lock on your iPad when using SAP Cloud for Customer (In the iPad Settings app, General section).
Return to the logon screen to enter your user and password, and choose Log On .
If you do not have the information required for these settings or you have problems logging on, contact your system administrator.
SAP does not warrant that the software and/or features as described herein will be available without interruption or permanently. SAP draws your attention to the fact that the availability is subject to the sole discretion of the operator of the app store. The operator of the app store may, at any time and without notice, restrict, interrupt, or prevent use of the software, or delete the software from your mobile device, or require SAP to do any of the foregoing actions.
Getting Support
You can choose either of the following methods for reporting issues with the app:
1.
Report an Incident
For most app related issues, we recommend you report an incident.
1.
Navigate to the screen where you are experiencing the issue.
2.
Select the Help menu .
3.
Select Report an Incident .
4.
On the Subject line, enter a short description of the issue. Then enter a full step-by-step description in the space that follows.
5.
The app automatically captures the screen you're on when you report an incident. Select whether or not to attach the screen shot.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
171
6.
Select Annotate screen to highlight areas of the screen or add notes. When you're finished with your annotations, select Done .
7.
Choose how serious the issue is and then select Done to submit the incident.
You can track the status of your incidents from the Help menu by selecting Track Incidents .
2.
Activate Logging
For more serious issues, for example if the app crashes when you perform a specific action, we recommend you activate logging and send the report to support.
1.
Select Settings ( ) then select Support .
2.
Activate logging in the Support section.
3.
Reproduce the problem. The application automatically creates, saves, and attaches the log to an e-mail, and proposes an e-mail address if you have set one as default (under Support E-Mail Address ).
4.
Return to the settings screen, and choose Send E-mail to complete and send this e-mail to your local administrator, who can then try to assist you before contacting SAP support.
5.
Deactivate logging when you are done, as the logging function may impair performance on your iPad.
Security
We recommend setting a passcode lock for your device, especially if you work offline, as data is stored on the device.
To check the data sync logs, select , then select View Log .
To delete stored data, do the following:
1.
While online, select , then select Offline Setup .
2.
At the bottom of the settings screen, select Clear all data .
3.
Confirm that you want to delete all stored data from your device as well as your offline password by selecting
OK .
If you want to work offline after you've cleared all the data and your password, you just need to sync data again and setup a new offline password.
SAML2 based SSO is supported in Cloud for Customer for iPad®.
Steps to log in with SAML2 based SSO -
Pre-requisite: Contact your system administrator to setup your (Identity Provider) IdP.
1.
Go to the app settings on your iPad and turn on Enable SSO
As the SSO is enabled, the SSO is automatically added to the system URL.
2.
Switch to the login page to Log On.
3.
Login with IdP user.
Your application will be launched.
Views and Further Tasks
You may see some or all of the views described in the following sections, depending on how your user is configured in your solution.
172 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Feed and SAP Jam Feed
If you use SAP Jam feed in your solution, then that will be the feed you see and use in the app.
Feed is where you post and receive updates on your sources – the information and people that you need to complete your work.
Feed updates are presented differently than other information in the system to optimize communications and collaboration with your colleagues. In the feed, you can post and delete your own updates, view a list of automatic updates from sources that you select and add comments to updates. Updates are displayed in sequential order with the most recent update at the top of the feed.
You can post updates from the main Feed screen or from the Feed tab on an item details screen.
To follow a person or item, choose in the item quick view or item header. The follow icon turns blue to indicate that you are now following the person or item.
To stop following a person or item, choose and the icon turns grey to indicate that you are no longer following the person or item.
You can use search and filters in the Feed view to narrow the list and find specific updates.
Posting Feed updates
Select to open the feed update box. Type your update and select Post .
To mention a person or item, select @ . As you type, the app will suggest matches.
To send a private update, select .
You cannot tag feed updates on your iPad.
Posting updates using SAP Jam
For SAP Jam feed updates, the update box is already open. Type your update and then select Share . To mention specific people, type @ before their names. To post your update to a specific group, enter the group name in the group name lookup box.
You cannot mention items, send private updates, or tag feed updates when using SAP Jam on your iPad.
Navigating and Searching
Views
Views are basically work areas grouped by function. Select a view from the menu at the upper left of the screen.
The name of the current view appears at the top center of the screen.
Tap to display or hide the view labels.
Lists
When you select a view, the system displays a list of items. You can search the list for a specific item or narrow the list by selecting a filter.
●
●
To search in a list of items, use the search box at the top of the list or open the advanced search by selecting the list search icon ( ).
To apply a filter, choose the filter button above the list. The button name shows the current filter.
● To load more items, scroll to the bottom of the list, then choose more items .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
173
●
●
●
●
To view the items in a list format, choose .
To view complete item details, tap the item in the list.
To display just an item quick view, use a two-finger tap (iOS gesture).
This allows you to flag or add an item to your favorites without the need to open the full details.
In certain views (such as accounts, contacts, and service and repair) you also have the option of viewing items in the list by their location on a map.
○ To view items on a map, choose .
○
○
○
Choose an item in the list or a pin on the map to view item summary information.
○ Blue: Accounts in the list currently visible on the map
○ Red: Selected account
Choose to center the map on your current location.
Choose the tab button at the right of the list to hide or show the list, and see more or less of the map.
Item Details
● Tap at the top of the item details screen to edit information, such as the name or address of an account or contact.
●
●
●
The menu is where you'll find the commands available for the item.
You can capture a screen, add annotations, and e-mail it by selecting .
Also at the top of the item details screen, you'll find buttons for the following four functions:
○ Flag ( )
○
○
○
Mark as Favorite ( )
Follow ( )
Tag ( )
These buttons also appear in the item summary area of the map layout.
Tool Buttons
The following tools are always available at the lower left of the screen:
Tool Description
If you have new notifications, the corresponding red number displays with the icon.
Tap the icon to view your notifications.
Tap an individual notification message to navigate to the corresponding item.
Tap the icon to view your calendar of upcoming appointments, visits, and phone calls.
From the calendar view, tap to create new ones.
Tap the icon to create new items.
The list of items available is based on the views you're assigned.
Tap the icon to search for items by category.
By default, the search is set to all categories. To select a specific item category, like accounts for example, choose Category , select your category and choose Done .
Tap the icon to view your shelf containing the items you have flagged or marked as favorite.
Tap the icon to define your offline settings, to sync before working offline, to sync once back online, and to view your sync log.
Tap the icon to view tags.
174 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Tool Description
Tap the icon to launch the analysis features.
Tap the icon to log off, to access settings to enable support, and to launch the SAP
Customer Insight for iPad app.
Help
Tap in the upper right corner of any screen to view the help overlay or to launch related how-to videos.
Customers
The Customers view groups together Accounts , Contacts , Individual Customers , and Target Groups .
From the list or map, select an item to view the details.
The tabs you see on a detail screen are based on your system authorizations, as are the fields you can edit or the items you can create.
The table below outlines the tabs available on the account details, but many are the same for contact and individual customers as well.
Tab
Details
Overview
Feed
Activities
Account Team
Relationships
Addresses
Contacts
Campaigns
Sales Leads
Opportunities
Attachments
Tickets
Actions
View and edit account details such as account name, status, and contact information.
Get a summary of important account information such as latest updates, account team members, and account address.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this account. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View activities that are associated with this account. You can also create appointments and tasks.
Add employees to, or delete employees from the team responsible for this account. You can also modify the role of any employee assigned to this account.
View defined interactions between this account and other entities, for example other accounts, or contacts.
View, or add addresses that are associated with this account. You can also set the main address for the account.
After adding an address, you can edit it to indicate that the address may be used for shipping or billing.
Add contacts to, or remove contacts from, this account. You can also designate a contact as the primary contact for the account.
View campaigns.
View or create leads that relate to this account.
View or create potential sales opportunities that relate to this account
View attachments that relate to this account.
View tickets associated with this account.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
175
Tab
Target Groups
Registered Products
Actions
View target groups
View registered products for this account
Target Groups
Select a target group to view its details.
For more information on target groups, refer to that section under Marketing below.
People
The People view groups together Employees and Groups .
Employees
Select an employee to view details.
Tab
Details
Overview
Feed
* Following
* Followers
Groups
Relationships
Actions
View employee details such as department, manager, and contact information
Get a summary of important information such as latest updates, group membership, and followers.
Read any feed updates posted by this employee. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View people and items you are following. (*only appears on your own employee record)
See who is following you. (*only appears on your own employee record)
View groups to which this employee belongs, including SAP Jam groups.
If you are viewing your own employee record, you can also create new groups.
View defined interactions between this employee and other entities.
Groups
Groups displays a list of SAP Jam groups. For more information, select a group in the list and choose View Details .
This opens the SAP Jam page in a browser window. You can find more information on using SAP Jam groups here
.
Sales
The Sales view groups together Sales Leads , Opportunities , and Sales Quotes .
Sales Leads
Select a sales lead to view its details.
The tabs you see for a sales lead are based on your system authorizations, as are the fields you can edit or the items you can create.
Tab
Details
Actions
View lead details such as account, primary contact and status.
176 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Tab
Overview
Feed
Products
Activities
Contacts
Sales & Marketing Team
Involved Parties
Opportunities
Attachments
Actions
Get a summary of important information such as latest updates, contacts and products associated with this lead.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this lead. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View, add, or remove products that relate to this lead.
View activities that are associated with this lead. You can create and manage appointments, tasks, phone calls and e-mails.
Add or remove contacts that relate to, this lead. You can also designate a contact as the primary contact for this lead.
Add or remove marketing team members for this lead. You can designate an employee as the employee responsible for this lead.
Add or remove other employees or contacts who play a role in the lead.
View opportunities created from this lead.
View and add attachments that relate to this lead.
You can accept or decline a lead that has been assigned to you by choosing at the top of the screen and selecting
Accept or Decline .
Convert a qualified lead to an opportunity by choosing and selecting Convert to Opportunity .
Opportunities
In Opportunities you can view and edit opportunities. Opportunities represent potential sales. You can add competitors to opportunities. This information can be used later in analysis.
Select an opportunity to view its details.
The tabs you see for an opportunity are based on your system authorizations, as are the fields you can edit or the items you can create.
Item View
Details
Overview
Feed
Products
Actions
View opportunity details such as account, primary contact and status.
Get a summary of important information such as latest updates, contacts and products associated with this opportunity.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this opportunity. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View, add, or remove products that relate to this opportunity.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
177
Item View
Sales Activities
Competitors
Sales Team
Contacts
Involved Parties
Attachments
* Sales Documents
Actions
View activities associated with this opportunity. You can create and manage appointments, tasks, phone calls and e-mails.
You can also view appointments, phone calls, and tasks for an opportunity on a timeline. From the actions menu ( ), select Activities Timeline .
● Each activity is color-coded according to status.
● To zoom in on activities, adjust the time scale using the sliding bar below the timeline.
● To change which activity types display on the timeline, select
.
View, add, or remove competitors that relate to this opportunity.
Add employees to, or remove employees from the team responsible for this opportunity. You can also assign the employee responsible for this opportunity.
Add or remove contacts that relate to, this opportunity. You can also designate a contact as the primary contact for the opportunity.
View other employees or contacts who play a role in the opportunity.
View attachments that relate to this opportunity.
View sales quote or sales order documents generated by your SAP ERP system. (*only available with SAP ERP integration)
Sales Quotes
Select a sales quote to view its details.
The sales quote opens directly on the Products tab where you can quickly add products to the quote.
1.
Tap to open the Add Products screen.
2.
Choose one of the following options for adding products:
● + Add Product
Type the product name or ID to search for a specific product.
●
●
All Products
Choose from the available categories to drill down to the product or products you want to add.
Previous Quotes
Search for previous quotes to add all the products from that quote.
● Product Lists
Search for a product list to add to the quote.
3.
Save your entries.
Use the actions menu ( ) in the header to submit or copy the sales quote, set progress, preview the current quote in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) format, or edit the output settings.
From the details screen, you can select the following tabs for a sales quote:
Item View
Details
Overview
Actions
View quote details such as account, primary contact and status.
Get a summary of important information such as latest updates, involved parties and products associated with this sales quote.
178 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Item View
Products
Involved Parties
Sales Documents
Attachments
Activities
Feed
Actions
View, add, or remove products from this quote.
View, add or remove other business partners who play a role with this sales quote.
View and create related sales quotes.
View and add attachments that relate to this quote.
View activities associated with this quote. You can view e-mails, and create and manage appointments, tasks, phone calls.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this quote. You can also comment on feed updates here.
Activities
The Activities view groups together Appointments , E-Mails , Phone Calls and Tasks .
Marketing
The Marketing view groups together Campaigns , Target Groups , and Leads .
Campaigns
Select a campaign to view its details.
Tab
Details
Overview
Feed
Response Options
Execution Details
Respondents
Leads
Sales Leads
Opportunities
Sales Quotes
Activities
Actions
View campaign details such as name, type and target group.
Get a summary of important account information such as latest updates, response options, and activities, leads, and Opportunities generated by this campaign.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this campaign. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View, add and edit response options for this campaign.
View information on the deployment of this campaign.
View the responses generated by this campaign.
View leads generated by this campaign.
View sales leads generated by this campaign.
View potential sales opportunities that are generated by this campaign
View and add sales quotes related to this campaign.
View activities that are associated with this campaign. You can also create phone calls and e-mails.
View attachments that relate to this campaign.
Attachments
Target Groups
Target groups are used to segment your market and to target the right customers or prospects for each campaign.
You create target groups with members from your existing customer and prospect database.
Select a target group to view its details.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
179
Tab
Details
Overview
Feed
Members
Campaigns
Actions
View target group details such as name, status and notes.
Get a summary of important account information such as latest updates and members of this target group.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this target group. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View and edit details of members of this target group.
View campaigns associated with this target group.
Choose to set the target group status, create a new campaign for this target group or copy the group.
Leads
Select a lead to view its details.
Tab
Details
Overview
Feed
Products
Activities
Conversion
Attachments
Actions
View lead details such as account, primary contact and status.
Get a summary of important information such as latest updates, contacts and products associated with this lead.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this lead. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View, add, or remove products that relate to this lead.
View activities that are associated with this lead. You can create and manage appointments, tasks, phone calls and e-mails.
Shows objects to which this lead has been converted. For example, Sales
Leads or Opportunities.
View and add attachments that relate to this lead.
Competitors
The Competitors view groups together Competitors and Competitor Products .
Competitors
Select a competitor to view the details.
Choose at the top of the screen to set a competitor as active or obsolete or to block a competitor.
Item View
Details
Overview
Feed
Products
Actions
View competitor details such as status, classification and contact information.
Get a summary of important information such as latest updates and opportunities associated with this competitor.
Read all feed updates that are associated with this competitor. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View, and manage products that are associated with this competitor.
180 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Item View
Opportunities
Attachments
Actions
View potential sales opportunities that you are trying to win from this competitor.
View and add attachments that relate to this competitor.
Competitor Products
Select a competitor product to view its details.
Tab
Details
Attachments
Actions
View product details such as price, competitor and equivalent product.
View attachments that relate to this competitor product.
Products
The Products view groups together Products , Product Lists , and Registered Products .
Products
Select a product to view its details.
Tab
Details
Overview
Feed
Attachments
Sales
Actions
View product details such as code, category and unit of measure.
Get a summary of important information such as latest updates, quantity conversion and price list entries associated with this product.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this product. You can also post and comment on feed updates here.
View attachments that relate to this product.
See sales for this product.
You cannot create a product on your iPad.
Product Lists
With product lists, you can combine a set of products and associate it with one or more accounts. This allows you to quickly add products to a sales quote for example by selecting the list rather than each individual product.
Select a product list to view the details.
Tab
Details
Actions
View information such as the list status and validity dates.
Overview Get a summary of important information such as latest updates, products, and accounts associated with this product.
Products View and add products.
Accounts View and add accounts.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
181
Tab
Feed
Actions
Read any feed updates that are associated with this product. You can also post and comment on feed updates here.
Registered Products
A registered product is one that is associated with a specific customer and for which you have recorded a unique serial number. When a ticket is created, the registered product information allows you to identify the unique customer product and the current valid warranty.
You can view the list of registered products using the list or map view.
Select from several filters to narrow the list, including filters based on warranty status.
Choose to register a product.
Select a registered product to view its details.
Visits
The Visits view groups together Visits , Visit Planner , and Tours .
There's a video that covers these features: Start Here for Retail Execution. Tap , select the how-to videos link and then the video.
Customer Service
Select a ticket to view its details.
Tab
Details
Feed
Interactions
Tasks
Attachments
Solution Finder
Actions
View and edit ticket details.
Tap at the top of the ticket details screen to edit information.
Also located at the top of the item details screen, is the button. This is where you can select from options that allow you to do the following:
● Respond to the customer
● Set ticket assignment
●
●
Escalate the ticket
Add an internal note
●
●
Capture a signature
Preview and generate a ticket summary
Read any feed updates that are associated with this ticket. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View the history of a ticket including notes made by agents and comments made by customers taken from e-mail and social media Web sites.
Add and view any tasks related to the ticket.
Add and view attachments associated with this ticket.
Search for articles related to the ticket.
To attach an article to your response, tap and select the response option you'd like to use, for example Tweet Link or E-Mail Link .
182 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Tab
Follow-Up Documents
Actions
Create and view follow-up documents, like quotes or opportunities, related to the ticket.
To create a new item, tap and select the item to create, for example
Create Ticket or Create Quote .
Contracts
Select a contract to view its details.
Tab
Details
Overview
Covered Objects
Related Tickets
Related Contracts
Involved Parties
Notes
Attachments
Sales Quotes
Service and Repair
Select a work ticket to view its details.
Tab
Details
General Data
Feed
Services and Parts
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Actions
View contract details.
If you have authorization to edit the contract, tap at the top of the contract details screen to edit information.
Also located at the top of the item details screen, is the button. This is where you can select from options that allow you to change the contract status, copy, and preview the contract.
Get a summary of important information such as covered objects and related tickets associated with this contract.
View and add products and registered products assigned to the contract.
View the tickets related to this contract.
View and create other contracts related to this contract.
View and add the various parties associated with the contract, like the account or contract administrator.
View and add notes to the contract. To add/edit notes, tap .
View and add attachments associated with this ticket.
View any sales quotes associated with the contract.
Actions
View and edit ticket details.
Tap at the top of the ticket details screen to edit information.
Also located at the top of the item details screen, is the button. This is where you can select from options that allow you to start or finish work, create follow-up items, capture a signature, and preview a summary of the ticket.
Select a filter for the list to view information such as the timeline, service categories, or affected products for a ticket.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this ticket. You can also comment on feed updates here.
Add and view the services and parts assigned to the ticket.
To track work progress for a particular item, tap and select the option that applies, for example Start Work or Finish Work .
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
183
Tab
Details
Overview
Feed
Relationships
Addresses
Partner Contacts
Sales Leads
Opportunities
Attachments
Tab
Involved Parties
Notes
Attachments
Related Items
Actions
View the various parties associated with the work ticket, like the account or ship-to party.
Add and view notes for the ticket.
To add or edit notes, tap .
Add and view attachments associated with this ticket.
View related and follow-up documents, like quotes or other tickets, associated with the ticket.
View the change history for the ticket.
Changes
Library
The library shows documents uploaded to your system. Select a document to open the details screen.
From the details screen, you can select the following tabs for a document:
Tab
Details
Overview
Versions
Actions
View document details such as creator, date changed and version.
Get a summary of document information: latest updates and versions.
View version history for this document.
Tap a version of the document to open it.
Partner Contacts
Quickly view partner contact records from all or just active partner accounts and add new partner contacts.
The tabs you see on the detail screen are based on your system authorizations, as are the fields you can edit or the items you can create.
Actions
View details such as partner name, status, and contact information.
Get a summary of important information such as latest updates, partner contacts, and addresses.
Read any feed updates that are associated with this partner. You can also comment on feed updates here.
View defined interactions between this partner and other entities, for example other accounts, or contacts.
View, or add addresses that are associated with this partner. You can also set the main address for the partner.
Add contacts to, or remove contacts from, this partner. You can also designate a contact as the main contact for the partner.
View sales leads that involve this partner.
View sales opportunities involving this partner.
View or add attachments for this partner.
184 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Analysis
Working With Reports
Worksheets provide you with an area on which you can analyze data in reports in more detail, filter data, enhance reports with notes and annotations, resize, and send reports via e-mail. You can add and arrange one or more reports on a worksheet. You can also use the paperclip as a clipboard to which you can drag reports for later use.
Functions:
● Adding Reports
To view reports that can be added to a worksheet, choose the Add Report icon. For more information about a relevant report, see the Analytics document in the SAP Cloud for Customer Help, and select the relevant application area.
●
●
To refresh the data in the report, choose the Refresh icon.
Options:
●
●
●
●
●
Options icon
Info icon
Allows you to change views and variables or to switch to other chart types.
Displays information about the report, such as report description, name of the selected view, selected variables, and so on.
Calendar icon Allows you to change the time interval for which data in the report is displayed. Note that this function is only available if the selected report has a variable that supports time intervals.
You can arrange a report on a worksheet by dragging the report to the desired location.
By using the pinch and spread gesture, you can change the size of the report.
You can flip between a table and chart view of a report by selecting the Table icon and the Chart icon respectively.
You can scroll the display details of a report using two fingers.
Changing Display Details
If you have a report with a large amount of data, you can change the display details, that is, the data records that are displayed.
To change the display details, select the report. The report is then highlighted. You can scroll to view different display details. Note that in the chart view, you can also scroll the legend and the captions.
In the table view, to change column width, tap the column header to select the column and use the Column
Width icon at the top of the column.
In the chart view, you can change the display details by using the pinch and spread gesture.
Filtering Data
The following options are available for filtering data:
● Filtering Report Data
1.
To display filtered data as a table or chart, select the report. The report is then highlighted.
●
2.
Select the data in the row in the table or the segments items in the chart. You can select multiple rows or segments by tapping
3.
Tap and hold until the table icon appears.
4.
Drag the selection to an area in the worksheet. The filtered data is then displayed.
Filtering Using Criteria from Another Report
If you have two reports, you can filter using criteria from one report.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
185
●
1.
Open both reports on a worksheet.
2.
Select one or more lines in a table or one or more segments in a chart, as described above, to the other report.
For example, you have two reports: Top 25 Suppliers and Purchase Order Tracking.
To filter data by a supplier, drag a supplier from Top 25 Suppliers to the Purchase Order Tracking report.
Displaying Data in Columns as Pie Chart
To display filtered data as a pie chart, select a column in the table and drag it to an empty area on the worksheet.
For example, for the Project Costs – Line Items report, you can display the Amount in Company Currency by
Business Document Type as a pie chart.
Annotations and Notes
To add annotations and notes, select the Add Notes icon. You can also send reports using e-mail and add a voice note to the e-mail.
Organizing Worksheets
You can create new worksheets by swiping the current worksheet. To organize your worksheets, select the My
Worksheets button. All of your worksheets appear. You can manage your worksheets or stack of worksheets by long tapping the screen or by tapping the Edit button. You can then change the order of the worksheets and stacks, create stacks, rename or delete worksheets and stacks.
●
●
Stacks
You can collect worksheets into stacks by tapping a worksheet and dragging it to another one. This is useful, for example, if you want to collect worksheets by topic.
You can expand or collapse a stack using spread or pinch accordingly.
Name/Rename
To name or rename a worksheet or stack, tap the name. A keyboard appears on which you can enter a new name or change the existing one.
● Delete
To delete worksheets or stacks, long tap a worksheet. You delete the worksheet or stack by taping the
Delete icon.
Compare Versions of Reports on Worksheets
To compare versions, you must ensure that you have enabled the Store Data option. For more information about storing data, see the Security section.
When you compare versions, you compare one version of a report, such as the current version, with a version containing historical data that is stored on your device. The versions available to compare are the version that you have used previously.
Using the Compare icon, you can compare two versions of reports on worksheets.
A timeline at the bottom of the screen appears. You can zoom the timeline in and out and return to today’s date. In the timeline, versions of the report are available chronologically.
In the timeline, sheets appear to indicate the availability of a version of the report.
Multiple lines and sheets within a given time interval indicate that multiple versions of the report are available.
186 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
In the comparison area, the selected version of the worksheet is highlighted, and you can choose a version to drop to the left of the selected version or drop on sheet. You can also drop a version to the right of the selected report and the selected report is moved to the left.
Note that if after you have dropped a version of a report to the comparison area, and the report is grayed out, there is no data to compare with the other version.
If there are multiple reports on the worksheet, you can double tap one to focus.
By tapping Highlight Changes , changes to the data are highlighted, making it easier for you to analyze your reports.
You can define the significance of the deviation in the changes to the data by using the slider at the bottom of the screen.
Copyright/Trademark iPad and iTunes, are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
3.20.3 SAP Cloud for Customer for iPhone®
With this mobile application, you can access many of the main functions of the solution that have been tailored to business on-the-run. These include managing accounts, contacts, and activities; leads, opportunities and sales quotes; forwarding tasks; and viewing personalized reports. Changes made on your iPhone ® are automatically updated in the system over the Internet, online and in real time.
Information For Administrators
You need to ensure that for each mobile work center view to be accessed on a mobile device, the user of the mobile device is assigned the related desktop work center view. Work centers and views are assigned via
Administrator General Settings Business Roles or Business Users .
For information on adding existing extension fields to a mobile view, see Adding Extension Fields to Smartphones and Tablets.
You can also make your custom reports available for mobile use by selecting the Enable for Mobile Device option for the report.
The following reports have been designated for mobile use in the standard solution: Lead by Status , Sales
Effectiveness Scorecard , Lead Conversion Rate , Opportunity Pipeline Analysis , Sales Reps by Revenue Won , Sales
Reps by Revenue in Pipeline , Average Sales Cycle , Pipeline Analysis for next 12 Months , Pipeline Health Scorecard ,
Pipeline Funnel and Sales Summary (Current Year) .
Installation, Support, and Security
Install the SAP Cloud for Customer application for iPhone from the iTunes Store.
Start the application on your device then proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Options .
2.
Enter the URL to your system.
For example, https://[tenant].[domain].com
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
187
3.
Return to the logon screen to enter your user and password, and choose Log On .
If you do not have the information required for these settings or you have continued problems logging on to the application, contact your system administrator for assistance.
SAP does not warrant that the software and/or features as described herein will be available without interruption or permanently. SAP draws your attention to the fact that the availability is subject to the sole discretion of the operator of the app store. The operator of the app store may, at any time and without notice, restrict, interrupt, or prevent use of the software, or delete the software from your mobile device, or require SAP to do any of the foregoing actions.
Getting Support
To get support for technical errors, follow this standard support process. First, activate logging in the Support section of the Settings screen, then reproduce the problem. The application automatically creates, saves, and attaches the log to an e-mail, and proposes an e-mail address if you have set one as default. Choose Send Support Information to complete and send this e-mail to your local administrator, who can then try to assist you before contacting SAP
Support. Ensure that you deactivate logging when you are done, as the logging function may impair performance on your iPhone.
Security
SAML2 based SSO is supported in Cloud for Customer for iPhone®.
Steps to log in with SAML2 based SSO -
Pre-requisite: Contact your system administrator to setup your (Identity Provider) IdP.
1.
Go to the app settings on your iPhone and turn on Enable SSO
As the SSO is enabled, the SSO is automatically added to the system URL.
2.
Switch to the login page to Log On.
3.
Login with IdP user.
Your application will be launched.
Views and further tasks
Home
When you open the app, your Home screen is displayed and includes a subset of the tiles assigned to your home page in the desktop solution. Changes you make to your home page in the solution are also reflected on the home screen in the app.
Tap a tile to open the report or KPI details.
To navigate to the other app screens, tap and select a view.
Searching And Navigating
When you call up an overview, the system automatically lists your documents or other records in alphabetical or chronological order. In many cases, you can switch to a list of all available documents or other records.
You can filter any list by entering a search term manually. The application supports a wild card search with asterisks
(*).
188 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Data will usually be refreshed as you navigate from one screen to the next. However, in some situations you may have to manually refresh the displayed data using the application’s pull down refresh function. For example, you may have to use the refresh function to view the very latest feed updates.
Most views include filter buttons above the results list. These buttons let you display, for example items belonging to you, or to your team.
Feed and SAP Jam Feed
If you use SAP Jam feed in your solution, then that will be the feed you see and use in the app.
Feed
Use the filters on the Feed overview to select the feed updates you wish to view.
To create a new feed update, tap .
Tap an update to view details.
You cannot mention people or items, send private updates, or tag feed updates created on your iPhone.
SAP Jam Feed
If your system is set up to support it, you can also access your SAP Jam feed directly from the app.
To post an SAP Jam feed update, type your update and then select Share . To mention specific people, type @ before their names. To post your update to a specific group, enter the group name in the group name lookup box.
Accounts
You can display, edit and create accounts.
In the Accounts view, a colored indicator next to an account shows the status of the account in the system: a green light indicates that the account is active; a red light indicates that the account is blocked. A grey or unlit indicator means the account is obsolete. A red indicator does not stop you from processing the account on your iPhone. To create a new account in the accounts list, tap + .
In the overview, account address information and communication details are displayed on the General tab. Tap the pin icon next to the address to display it in your iOS map. You can also:
●
●
●
Call a customer by choosing the telephone number
Send an e-mail by choosing the e-mail address
Open the account Web site by choosing the hyperlink
● Create a follow-up activity, or edit the account information by tapping the actions button in the top right corner.
On the Contacts and Activities tabs, you can search for, display, and edit contacts or activities for the account. Select the contact or activity to open an overview. Here you can access contact information and communication details, as well as activities related to this specific contact, or to the account in general.
Tap ERP Docs to view sales quote or sales order documents generated by your SAP ERP system. Note: this tab does not contain any data unless your system has been configured to integrate sales documents from your SAP ERP system.
Contacts
You can display, edit and create contacts.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
189
Contact address information, communication details, and activities are displayed in the overview. To change a contact’s general data tap the actions button in the top right corner, then tap Edit or to create a new contact, tap + and enter the contact's name, address, communication and other details.
If you create a new contact for an existing account, you can search for and select the account ID of the account in the Account/Partner field.
Opportunities and Leads
You can display, edit and create opportunities and leads.
In the Opportunities , Leads , and Sales Leads views, you can access worklists of opportunities and leads.
Select one to check the details, change data, or create related follow-up activities and documents.
Tap Edit to accept or decline a lead that has been assigned to you, create an opportunity from a lead, change the chance of success, or status, of an opportunity, or follow feed updates for a lead or opportunity.
For opportunities, you can tap ERP Docs to view sales quote or sales order documents generated by your SAP ERP system. Note: this tab does not contain any data unless your system has been configured to integrate sales documents from your SAP ERP system.
Using the Business Card Scanner to Create Leads
Prerequisite
Your company has purchased the necessary licenses and your administrator has made the appropriate settings to activate the business card scanner. For more information, your administrator should see Getting
Started for SAP Cloud for Sales and Marketing Administrators.
1.
Go to Leads .
2.
Tap Actions , then choose Scan .
The phone's camera is activated.
3.
Center the business card that you'd like to scan on the screen and take the picture.
4.
Check the image. If it is clear and legible, tap Use Photo .
The app transfers the information from the business card to the appropriate fields to create the lead.
5.
Confirm or adjust the information as necessary, and save the lead by tapping Done .
The information from the business card now appears a contact under your leads.
Sales Quotes
You can display, edit, create, and submit sales quotes.
From the Sales Quotes view, you can choose either your list of open quotes or your team's.
Select one to check the details, change data, or create related follow-up activities.
To edit the quote, tap the actions button and then Edit . The following actions are available:
●
●
●
To remove a product, go the Products tab and tap next to the product you want to remove.
To add a product to the quote, go to the Products tab and tap the actions button and choose Actions then
Add Row . Select the product to add before saving your changes.
To submit a sales quote for approval, tap the actions button and choose Actions then Submit .
Activities
You can display, edit and create activities.
To change an activity, in the overview, tap the actions button in the top right corner, then tap Edit . You can also create a new activity in the Activities list by tapping and selecting the relevant activity type. The system proposes values for many of the fields, for example: organizer, dates and times, category and priority. You can manually change these values, and search for and select other values, such as an account and contacts for the activity.
190 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
Today’s Appointments
In the Today’s Appointments view, you can review and edit your appointments for the current day. You can also add new appointments here.
Tickets
You can display, edit, and create tickets.
To create a ticket, from the list of tickets tap .
Select a ticket to view the detail and tap to edit the ticket.
Reports
Select a report to open the report and display it in graph form.
Tap the sprocket icon to review and activate your default or personalized views on the report, select a variant, to sort the report by date, activate and deactivate the filter, and sort the report values in ascending or descending order.
To zoom in the graph, double tap on the graph. There are two zoom levels. On the top level, you can scroll right or left in the graph. On the bottom level, you can scroll up and down on the values and key figures.
Work Tickets
You can display, edit and create work tickets.
You can also create follow-up sales quotes and tickets. Create a follow-up item, or edit the ticket information by tapping the actions button in the top right corner.
Copyright/Trademark
3.20.4 SAP Customer Insight for iPad®
SAP Customer Insight makes you smarter with breaking news and sales information for your accounts that matter most. You view this information as an engaging digital magazine providing real-time customer information in an interactive format.
Installing The Application
Install SAP Customer Insight for iPad from the iTunes Store. Launch the application, select Options , and do the following:
● Enter the URL for your backend system (stopping at the
.com
).
●
●
●
To enable offline use, switch on Offline access password and enter a password.
If your solution is set up to support it and you have an account, you can switch on your SAP Jam feed under
Optional Features .
SAP recommends that you enable the Passcode Lock on your iPad when using SAP Customer Insight (In the iPad Settings app, General section).
Choose Done to return to the logon screen, enter your user and password, and choose Logon .
If you do not have the information required for these settings or you have problems logging on, contact your system administrator.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
191
SAP does not warrant that the software and/or features as described herein will be available without interruption or permanently. SAP draws your attention to the fact that the availability is subject to the sole discretion of the operator of the app store. The operator of the app store may, at any time and without notice, restrict, interrupt, or prevent use of the software, or delete the software from your mobile device, or require SAP to do any of the foregoing actions.
Getting Support
To get support for technical errors, use the following standard support process:
1.
Open the Options screen.
2.
Enter a Support E-Mail Address .
3.
Activate Logging .
4.
Reproduce the problem. The application automatically creates, saves, and attaches the log to an e-mail.
5.
Return to the options screen, and choose Send Log to complete and send this e-mail to your local administrator, who can then try to assist you before contacting SAP support.
6.
Deactivate logging when you are done, as the logging function may impair performance on your iPad.
Frequently Asked Questions
What information is available while working offline?
While using the app offline, you can access the following:
● First level tiles except Feed and Shelf
●
●
Default view of report details
Dashboards
After logging on, you should stay online for a few minutes–to allow all the dashboards time to cache– before going offline.
What determines the contents of the news area?
The news stories you see are related to the accounts in your activities list. This provides up to date information about accounts you will be dealing with in the near future.
How do I rearrange the items on the home screen?
Tap and hold a tile, then drag and drop just like app icons on the iOS home screens.
Can I group tiles?
You can group tiles by dragging and dropping one on top of another—this creates a group to which you can continue adding more tiles. Drag a tile out of the group to remove it from the group. Drag tiles around within the group to reorder them—the first tile of the group is the one displayed on the home screen.
Can I change the information that appears on the home screen?
Tap the icon at the top right corner of the screen and select Personalization . This opens a list of available reports that you can add to the home screen. Tap to add a report, tap to remove a report. You can also remove a tile from the home screen by tapping and holding, then tap the close icon at the upper left of the tile.
192 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
In addition to the default reports, your administrator can create custom reports for your organization.
Where do I find my SAP Jam feed?
If you've switched on your SAP Jam feed, you'll find it along with Activities on the expandable pane at the left side of the home screen.
How do I change the appearance of a tile on the home screen?
Tap and hold on a tile, then tap to choose from the tile types available for that report.
Can I resize the tiles?
Reports represented by a chart tile can be stretched to occupy the space of two tiles, either horizontally or vertically.
Use a pinch gesture to resize a chart tile.
When I open the Win Ratio report, why do I also see in process and open opportunities?
When the report first opens it shows all opportunities for the current quarter. To view won or lost opportunities for a specific month, tap a bar in the chart.
Copyright/Trademark iPad and iTunes, are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
3.20.5 VIDEO: SAP Customer Insight for iPad®
Video
SAP Customer Insight for iPad® (4m 11s)
Find out how to work with tiles, view report details, and personalize your dashboard with SAP Customer Insight.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
3.20.6 VIDEO: Navigation and Feed for iPad®
Video
Navigation and Feed for iPad® (5m 42s)
Find out how to navigate to different views and use the feed and toolbars in SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad
®
.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
193
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
3.20.7 VIDEO: Creating Items on iPad®
Video
Creating Items on iPad® (4m 46s)
Find out how to create and edit items on SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad®, including how to convert a lead to an opportunity.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
3.20.8 VIDEO: Working with iPad® Offline Mode
Video
Working with iPad® Offline Mode (5m 17s)
Find out how to use the SAP Cloud for Customer for iPad
®
app in offline mode.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
194 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Sales Features
4 Service Features
4.1 SAP Cloud for Service: Process Overview
You offer support through different communication channels such as e-mail, social media or phone calls to help customers get the maximum value from the product or service they have purchased. Agile customer service organizations are proactive and anticipate customer needs. You want to exceed customer expectations and drive the best customer service in your industry. One way you and your customers are achieving this goal is through the rapid deployment of SAP Cloud for Service.
● Incoming Communications
The process usually begins with an incoming customer communication. Customer service organizations need to provide choice in the way they offer support to customers, which means the ability to support different communication channels of contact, for example, e-mail, social media accounts, phone calls, and live chat.
● Processing
After customer contact, some steps are applied either automatically by the system or manually by certain roles in the customer service organization to make sense of the customer communication. This could mean text analysis for sentiment and keyword detection in the case of social media, or real-time lookup of matching customer information for a phone call. The end result is a ticket that describes the customer issue, identifies the customer, and a specific product. Additionally, the ticket could classify the problem, as well as what caused the issue. The ticket could specify how quickly the problem must be resolved and any keywords that describe the problem.
●
●
●
Resolve Issue
A critical step in the overall process resolving the issue that caused the customer to contact service. If it is a simple inquiry, the agent may only need to provide an answer. In more complex cases, the agent may need to work in other systems to initiate a business process based on the customer request or order. Ease of use is critical for the agents. Ease of use translates into positive interactions with customers. The solution allows agents to provide the customers at the right time.
Response
After the agent has analyzed the customer issue, the agent needs to respond to the customer. The system has the flexibility to respond either in the original communication channel or switch to a new method of communication.
Close
At the end of the service process, the ticket is completed by the agent, and in some cases may allow the customer to confirm that the issue really has been resolved. This is the point where individuals, managers, or teams can reflect on whether the process can be improved. The system supports this through analytics that provide feedback to the organization on whether they are meeting their own performance goals or benchmarks.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
195
4.2 VIDEO: Start Here for Service
Video
Start Here for Service (6m 28s)
Find out how to use SAP Cloud for Service.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
4.3 VIDEO: Start Here for Service and Repair
Video
Start Here for Service and Repair (1m 43s)
Find out how to use SAP Cloud for Service to engage customers at every service touch point, from creating the initial service order to completing the work by the field service agent.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
4.4 Customer Service
4.4.1 Queue
In Customer Service Queue , you can see a list of open and in process tickets. You can use the tools in the
Queue to process customer tickets.
To see a list of all tickets, including completed tickets, go to Customer Service Tickets .
Not all ticket processing options and channels are available for Employee Support.
196 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Ticket Tasks
To work on a ticket, you must first select it by highlighting the ticket without choosing any of the links. You can select multiple tickets by holding down either the
Ctrl
or the
Command
key.
The following table lists tasks that you can perform on any ticket:
Task
Change the status of a ticket.
Change the priority of a ticket.
Set a ticket as irrelevant.
Escalate a ticket to a supervisor or subject matter expert.
Procedure
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Set Status...
3.
Select the appropriate status from the dropdown list.
Result
The status of the ticket is updated.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Set Priority...
.
3.
Select the appropriate priority from the dropdown list.
The priority icon changes according to your selection.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Set As Irrelevant .
3.
Choose Yes in the Confirm
Ticket Relevance window.
The ticket is set to the Set As Irrelevant status and removed from all queues.
1.
Choose the Actions
2.
Select Escalate .
icon.
3.
Choose Yes in the Confirm
Escalation window.
The ticket is set to Escalated status.
Escalated tickets may be assigned to a supervisor or designee depending on your system settings.
De-escalate a ticket.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select De-escalate .
3.
Choose Yes in the Confirm Deescalation window.
Assign a ticket to yourself.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Under Assign To , select Me .
The ticket is assigned to you and moved to your queue.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
197
Task
Assign a ticket to another agent or another team.
Add a note to a ticket.
Procedure Result
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Agent...
or Team...
.
3.
Complete one of the following options:
● Enter the name of the agent or team.
● Search for an agent or team by choosing the Value
Selection icon. Select the agent or team from the options presented.
4.
Choose OK .
The ticket is assigned to the specified agent or team.
1.
2.
Choose the
Select
Actions
Add Note
3.
Enter your note.
4.
Choose Save .
.
icon.
When the ticket is opened in the agent workspace, the note appears in the
Interactions section.
The following table lists tasks that you can perform in any ticket:
Task
Create follow up items for a ticket.
Procedure
You can create tickets and sales quotes to create follow up tasks so you can complete a ticket.
1.
Open a ticket and choose
Follow Up .
2.
Select Create Ticket , Create
Sales Quote , Create Opportunity or Create Lead.
.
3.
Enter all necessary information and save your changes.
Result
You can view the follow-up items created for the ticket in Related Items . Follow-up items are indicated by an arrow that points away from the ticket you are working on.
198 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Task
Create a PDF
Submit ticket for approval.
Withdraw ticket from approval.
Procedure
1.
To create a PDF from the ticket open the ticket and under
Overview Customer select the language you want to use in the PDF.
2.
Then click
Summary Preview .
Another window with the ticket
PDF preview opens. Now you can print it out or save a PDF on your local machine to send it as e-mail to the customer.
3.
When you click
Summary Generate the system creates automatically an attachment that can be found on the Attachments tab.
Result
If approval is activated in your system a ticket will go in approval as soon as one of the defined conditions are met. You will then get a warning message and the ticket either goes into approval after saving or you have to submit it manually by clicking Approval Submit for
Approval .
When the ticket is in approval you are only able to create follow-ups or add internal notes.
For more information, see Enabling
Approval Processes in the Administrator
Guide.
If you have to withdraw the approval for any reason you can do this by clicking
Approval Withdraw from
Approval .
See Also
Start Here for Service [page 196]
4.4.2 Tickets
In Customer Service Tickets , you can see a list of all customer tickets, including completed tickets. You can use the tools in the Tickets to process customer tickets.
For a list of only the open and in process tickets, go to Customer Service Queue .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
199
Not all ticket processing options and channels are available for Employee Support.
Ticket Tasks
To work on a ticket, you must first select it by highlighting the ticket without choosing any of the links. You can select multiple tickets by holding down either the
Ctrl
or the
Command
key.
The following table lists tasks that you can perform on any ticket:
Task
Change the status of a ticket.
Change the priority of a ticket.
Set a ticket as irrelevant.
Escalate a ticket to a supervisor or subject matter expert.
Procedure
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Set Status...
3.
Select the appropriate status from the dropdown list.
Result
The status of the ticket is updated.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Set Priority...
.
3.
Select the appropriate priority from the dropdown list.
The priority icon changes according to your selection.
1.
2.
Choose the
Select
Actions
Set As Irrelevant .
icon.
3.
Choose Yes in the Confirm
Ticket Relevance window.
The ticket is set to the Set As Irrelevant status and removed from all queues.
1.
2.
3.
Choose the
Select
Actions
Escalate .
Choose Yes in the
Escalation window.
icon.
Confirm
The ticket is set to Escalated status.
Escalated tickets may be assigned to a supervisor or designee depending on your system settings.
De-escalate a ticket.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select De-escalate .
3.
Choose Yes in the Confirm Deescalation window.
Assign a ticket to yourself.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Under Assign To , select Me .
The ticket is assigned to you and moved to your queue.
200 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Task
Assign a ticket to another agent or another team.
Add a note to a ticket.
Procedure Result
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Agent...
or Team...
.
3.
Complete one of the following options:
● Enter the name of the agent or team.
● Search for an agent or team by choosing the Value
Selection icon. Select the agent or team from the options presented.
4.
Choose OK .
The ticket is assigned to the specified agent or team.
1.
2.
Choose the
Select
Actions
Add Note
3.
Enter your note.
4.
Choose Save .
.
icon.
When the ticket is opened in the agent workspace, the note appears in the
Interactions section.
The following table lists tasks that you can perform in any ticket:
Task
Create follow up items for a ticket.
Procedure
You can create tickets and sales quotes to create follow up tasks so you can complete a ticket.
1.
Open a ticket and choose
Follow Up .
2.
Select Create Ticket , Create
Sales Quote , Create Opportunity or Create Lead.
.
3.
Enter all necessary information and save your changes.
Result
You can view the follow-up items created for the ticket in Related Items . Follow-up items are indicated by an arrow that points away from the ticket you are working on.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
201
Task
Create a PDF
Submit ticket for approval.
Withdraw ticket from approval.
Procedure
1.
To create a PDF from the ticket open the ticket and under
Overview Customer select the language you want to use in the PDF.
2.
Then click
Summary Preview .
Another window with the ticket
PDF preview opens. Now you can print it out or save a PDF on your local machine to send it as e-mail to the customer.
3.
When you click
Summary Generate the system creates automatically an attachment that can be found on the Attachments tab.
Result
If approval is activated in your system a ticket will go in approval as soon as one of the defined conditions are met. You will then get a warning message and the ticket either goes into approval after saving or you have to submit it manually by clicking Approval Submit for
Approval .
When the ticket is in approval you are only able to create follow-ups or add internal notes.
For more information, see Enabling
Approval Processes in the Administrator
Guide.
If you have to withdraw the approval for any reason you can do this by clicking
Approval Withdraw from
Approval .
See Also
Start Here for Service [page 196]
4.4.3 Work Tickets
When a service agent decides that a ticket needs also service and repair, he or she normally adds the services and parts to the ticket in case they are already known. Then the agent assigns a technician, and sets the Requires
Work checkbox.
The checkbox can be set as follows and makes the ticket available to the technician:
202 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
●
●
●
Setting the Requires Work checkbox during initial ticket creation
Setting the Requires Work status or in case your administrator has changed the naming, select the status that has Planner Action assigned in business configuration
Selecting a ticket type in the quick create where the Requires Work checkbox is pre-set
After the Requires Work checkbox is set, the service technician can open the work ticket in the Service work center to review and refine the planned work. Once the technician performed the work, he or she can confirm the actual work done by finishing the items under Services and Parts .
You find the work tickets work list in the Service work center under Work Tickets .
Business Background
Prerequisite
Your administrator has enabled Service and Repair in scoping. To find the business topic Service and Repair choose
Business Configuration Implementation Projects . Then select your implementation project and click Edit
Project Scope . Now choose Service Customer Care Service and Repair .
Requires Work Flag
Please be aware that you as technician will only find the tickets in your Service work center under Work Tickets with the pre-delivered filter My Work Tickets , when the ticket is assigned to you and the checkbox is set.
Approval
If approval is activated in your system a ticket will go in approval as soon as one of the defined conditions are met.
You will then get a warning message and the ticket either goes into approval after saving or you have to submit it manually by clicking Approval Submit for Approval .
When the ticket is in approval you are only able to create follow-ups, add internal notes and add approval notes.
If you have to withdraw the approval for any reason you can do this by clicking Approval Withdraw from
Approval .
For more information, see Enabling Approval Processes in the Administrator Guide.
Billing and Costing with SAP ERP
Only if your administrator has enabled integration with SAP ERP the following feature will work as described.
In case your solution has a connection to SAP ERP it is possible to trigger billing and costing for the items of your work ticket. To trigger the right accounting records you have to set the right Type and Invoicing Method :
● Processing
With the Processing you trigger the accounting records for costs and goods movement in your company.
○ Service marks the item as a pure service item and triggers the required billing and costing in ERP.
○
○
Part Consumption from Technician Stock marks the item as taken out of the stock of the technician and triggers the required billing and costing.
Part Advance Shipment to Customer Consignment Stock marks the item to be shipped to the customer’s consignment stock before the technician plans to come to the customer.
○ Part Consumption from Customer Consignment Stock marks the item as consumed material from the customer consignment stock. It triggers also the required billing and costing.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
203
○
○
Part Return from Customer Consignment Stock marks the item as the to be returned material (partly or completely) from the customer consignment stock.
Product is the default setting and marks the item as unspecific product, such as service, spare part or expense. This type is always there but the Type field is hidden if no integration with SAP ERP exists.
Type Product triggers only billing without any costing.
● Invoicing Method
With the Invoicing Method you decide how the item shall be invoiced in SAP ERP:
○ Fixed Price takes the planned quantities for billing.
Please note that advance shipment doesn’t work with fixed price.
○
○
Time and Material is the default setting and takes the confirmed (actual) time and quantity for billing.
Not Relevant
Tasks
Prepare Your Tickets
1.
After a ticket is processed and the service agent forwards the ticket to you as a technician you find it in the
Service work center.
2.
To review and enhance the ticket, open it and check the information, for example, categorization, time lines, and incident description.
3.
On the Services & Parts tab you find items and you can adapt this list as required.
4.
Do the same on the Tasks and Survey tab. Note that you only can add surveys that are set up for work tickets.
For more information, see Designing Surveys.
5.
Check the Involved Parties tab.
Fix the Issue and Confirm Your Tickets
1.
After the ticket preparation is done you can start to work on the items that are listed under Services and
Parts , complete the Tasks , and answer the Surveys .
2.
On the Services and Parts tab set the work progress of the items you are working on to Started using
Actions Start Work . You can now enter the actual start and end dates in the table and also add notes if required.
3.
With Actions Finish Work directly under Services and Parts you state that you finished this item.
With Actions Not Relevant you can state that the item was not required.
If you select Actions Finish Work at the bottom of your screen you set all items of the ticket to Finished .
4.
Besides the confirmed services and parts, you can also provide an overall work description and categorize the cause and the resolution.
5.
After you fixed the issue and completed all items of the ticket, set the status to Completed and save the ticket.
204 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Forward Items to SAP ERP
In case your solution has a connection to SAP ERP you can either forward single finished items under Services and
Parts to ERP or you can release all relevant items of the ticket to ERP. In ERP then, you can, for example, create invoices based on the work done.
To do so select an item and click Release to ERP .
Be aware that you also can mark single items as not relevant for ERP.
Create a PDF
To create a PDF from the ticket, click Summary Preview . Another window with the ticket PDF preview opens.
Now you can print it out or save a PDF on your local machine and add it, for example, as an attachment to the ticket.
4.4.4 Processing Tickets in the Agent Workspace
When you open a ticket, you can access the tools you need to solve customer problems in the agent workspace.
Here, you can respond to tickets through the channels set up for your solution. You can also search similar tickets and the knowledge base to help you close tickets.
Not all ticket processing options and channels are available for Employee Support.
Tasks
Common Ticket Tasks
The following table lists tasks that you can perform on tickets.
Ticket Tasks
Task
Change the status of a ticket.
Change the priority of a ticket.
Procedure Result
1.
Choose Edit at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Select the new status from the dropdown.
3.
Save your changes.
The status of the ticket is updated.
1.
Choose Edit at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Select the new priority from the dropdown next to
Priority .
3.
Select a priority from the dropdown.
4.
Save your changes.
The priority icon changes according to your selection.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
205
Task
Set a ticket as irrelevant.
Escalate a ticket to a supervisor or subject matter expert.
Assign a ticket to yourself, another agent, or another team.
Procedure Result
1.
Choose Set as Irrelevant at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Choose Yes in the Confirm
Ticket Relevance window.
The ticket is set to Irrelevant status and removed from all queues.
1.
Choose Escalate at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Choose Yes in the Confirm
Escalation window.
The ticket is set to Escalated status. Escalated tickets may be assigned to a supervisor or designee depending on your system settings.
1.
Choose Assign To at the bottom of the screen.
● Select Me to assign the ticket to yourself.
● Select Agent...
to assign the ticket to another agent.
● Select Team...
to assign the ticket to another team.
2.
To assign the ticket to another agent or team, do one of the following:
● Enter the name of the agent or team.
● Search for an agent or team by choosing
Value Selection .
Select the agent or team from the options presented.
3.
Choose OK .
The ticket is moved either to you or to the specified agent or team.
206 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Task Procedure Result
Copy a ticket to an On Premise CRM system.
If your solution is connected to the on-premise SAP Customer
Relationship Management (SAP
CRM), you can copy a ticket to this solution by performing the following:
1.
Choose Edit at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Select Copy to CRM the status dropdown.
3.
Save your changes.
A copy of the ticket is now available in the external system. You can still see the ticket in your solution but it can only be edited in the external system. You can see an id number assigned to the ticket in the External ID field in the workspace.
This number cannot be changed. The external system will update the ticket status in your solution.
An agent has copied a ticket to the onpremise SAP CRM system. The agent checks the ticket periodically to make sure the ticket is completed. When the ticket is set to Completed in the external system, the agent can now see that the status of the ticket is set to Completed in the workspace.
Create follow-up items for a ticket.
You can create tickets and sales quotes to create follow-up tasks so you can complete a ticket.
1.
Choose Follow Up .
2.
Select either Create Ticket or
Create Sales Quote .
3.
Enter all necessary information and save your changes.
Copy ticket information into a new ticket.
You can view the follow-up items created for the ticket in Document
Flow . Follow-up items are indicated by an arrow that points away from the ticket you are working on.
You can copy ticket information from an existing ticket into a new ticket, for example, to make a ticket for a customer that is having a similar issue.
1.
Choose Copy .
2.
Some of original ticket information will be copied from the ticket you are working on.
3.
Enter all necessary additional information and save your changes.
You won't see tickets leave your queue until you exit the workspace.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
207
Responding to a Ticket
The channel of the ticket determines your response options. For example, you can respond to a Twitter ticket by posting a tweet.
1.
Choose Reply , Comment , or Compose New E-Mail . The options available to you will depend on the channel of the ticket and any past interactions.
2.
Type your response or select a template to use in your response.
If your system is set up to support it, you can insert a chat link in your response so that you or another agent can begin a live chat session with the customer.
3.
Attach any articles that may help your customer. This action is not available when replying to Facebook comments.
4.
Choose Tweet , Comment , or Send . Again, the options available will be determined by the ticket type.
Your response will be added to the interactions for the ticket. You may need to refresh the screen to see your response appear.
Responses that contain profanity are blocked from being sent by the solution. If your message contains profanity, the solution will ask you to remove it.
See the relevant section below for more information on responding to tickets from or through different channels.
●
●
If you reply to a tweet, your response will be sent to Twitter as a reply to the original tweet from the customer.
Public responses to Twitter tickets are limited 140 characters, including spaces. If you enter a message greater than 140 characters, you will not be able to send the response. The solution counts the remaining available characters as you type.
●
●
You can use Twitter to send a private message if the user follows the Twitter handle of the company used in the response.
You can retweet a message to Twitter that has been posted by a customer. Hover your mouse over the message in Interactions and choose Retweet . The message will be posted on your company’s Twitter page.
● Customers can send either public messages by commenting on your company's Facebook wall or private messages by messaging your company using Facebook. Your response will automatically be public if the customer's message was public or private if the customer's message was private.
●
●
If you reply to a Facebook message, your response will be sent to Facebook as a reply to the customer's original Facebook message.
If your solution is set up to support it and your company's Facebook page allows nested commenting, you can reply to comments to a post in Facebook. Your response will appear underneath the original comment.
● To respond to a customer via e-mail, your system must have the customer's e-mail address stored. For more
information about editing a customer's profile to add an e-mail address, see Individual Customers
●
●
You may have the option to reply to a ticket, or compose a new e-mail. If you choose to reply, the previous customer message will be copied, in addition to preserving any of the recipients of the last e-mail.
If your system is set up to support it, you can respond to tickets from the agent workspace using Microsoft
Outlook
®
. To do this, you must download and install the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook.
208 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
●
and
Working from Microsoft Outlook for Service Users [page 214] .
If the e-mail bounces, you will receive an error message in Interactions . The error message will be generated after the solution tries to deliver the message.
SAP HANA Cloud Portal, Support Site Option
● If your company has enabled a support portal, you can post a note to the portal.
Chat
● Depending on the configuration of your system, the chat transcript may be available to you after the live chat has ended in the ticket interactions.
Using the Knowledge Base
●
●
●
●
The knowledge base may be pre-populated with articles based on any tags associated with the ticket. If browsing in your knowledge base is enabled, you can also search the knowledge base for relevant articles.
Choose an article to preview it. Attach it to the ticket by hovering over the article and choosing Attach .
When you attach an article from the knowledge base, a URL will be entered into the reply box.
Choose Reset to clear your search terms and return to the original list of recommended solutions.
Searching for Similar Tickets
1.
Enter your search terms in the Search input field in Similar Tickets . Press
Enter
or choose Search to initiate the search.
The solution will return a list of in process and completed tickets based on your search keywords.
2.
There are two ways to see the articles attached to a ticket: a.
Click the link next to the paperclip icon in the list view.
b.
Open the ticket in detail view by choosing the ticket number and then opening the Attached Articles tab.
The ticket detail allows you to see both the ticket history and the articles attached to the ticket.
3.
You can send customers a link to an article by choosing Attach .
a.
Click Attach to Article if you accessed the article from the link in the list view.
b.
Click the attach ( + ) button if you accessed the article from the Attached Articles tab in the detail view.
A URL will be entered into the text box in the ticket activities area.
4.
Click Reset to clear your search terms.
The original list of recommended solutions will populate the tab and the keywords associated with the ticket will populate the search text box.
Creating a Note
1.
Click Add Note .
2.
Enter your note in the text box.
3.
Save your note. It will be added to the ticket interactions.
Changing Product Information
1.
Choose Edit at the bottom of the screen.
2.
In the Product section, perform one of the following: a.
Type in the product name, then choose
Enter
.
b.
Choose Value Selection to choose the product name from the list in the Select a Product window.
You can also perform a search in this window. For more information, see
.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
209
You can also register the product directly from the workspace by choosing Edit , then Serial Number , then choose
Value Selection . In the resulting window, choose New Registration .
For more information, see
Registered Products [page 234]
.
Changing a Customer
1.
Choose Edit .
2.
In the Customer section, do one of the following:
1.
Choose Value Selection to select the customer name from the list in the window.
You can perform a search in the window. For more information, see
.
2.
Type in the customer name then press
Enter
.
3.
Save the new information.
Adding an Attachment
1.
Click Attachments .
2.
Click Add . Select the source of the attachment.
The Add Attachment window opens.
3.
Click Browse and find the file you want to attach.
4.
Select either Standard Attachment or Internal Attachment from the Document Type selection field.
Internal Attachments can be viewed by all users of the solution but not to customers.
5.
Click Add .
Reviewing the Ticket Change History
In order to review the change history, you need to switch on the tab using the Personalize This Screen feature.
1.
Under Sections , choose Tabs .
2.
Under Tabs , select Change History .
3.
Save your entries and close the personalize pane.
The Change History tab is now active in the workspace.
Changing the Category Information
You can change the category information for the Service Category , Incident Category , Cause Category , Resolution
Category , and Object Category .
1.
Choose Edit .
2.
In the Category section, choose Value Selection , then select the new category ID.
a.
For incident categories you can pick the new category form the Tree View .
Changing a Message Sentiment
If text analysis incorrectly interprets a message sentiment, you can manually change the sentiment of the message in Interactions .
1.
Choose the sentiment name in Interactions .
2.
Select the new sentiment from the dropdown list.
210 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Viewing Ticket Relationships in Document Flow
The Document Flow tab displays the tickets and sales orders that are related to a ticket you are working on. When you create a follow up ticket or sales order, Document Flow displays the relationship between the items. Arrows point away from the original ticket and point toward any follow up tickets and sales quotes.
Tracking Ticket Progress with Timeline Information
The data points in Timeline help you track a ticket's progress. Some of the dates in the Timeline are pre-populated when you open a ticket. These dates are calculated based on your company's service level agreements and the time at which the ticket was created.
Some of the fields in Timeline will change when you change a ticket value or respond to a customer. The table below describes the events that cause changes to fields in the Timeline .
Field Name
Changed On
What Causes the Value to Change
● Changing information in a ticket.
You change the product associated with the ticket. After you save, the time you see in
Changed On is updated.
●
●
Responding to a customer.
Making a note to the ticket.
Initial Review
Completed
Last Customer
Interaction
Last Agent
Interaction
Changing the ticket status from Open to In Process .
Each time a customer responds to an agent, the time the response occurred will populate this field.
Each time an agent responds to a customer, the time the response occurred will populate this field.
Next Response
Due
Each time a customer responds to an agent, the time populated in Next Response Due will be updated according to your company's service level agreement, if this has been configured for you solution by your administrator.
Date Completed Changing the ticket status to Completed .
4.4.5 VIDEO: Processing Tickets
Video
Processing Tickets (4m 12s)
Find out about the tools in the Workspace and in the Queue and Tickets list that help you to complete tickets.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
211
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
4.4.6 Templates
You can use templates to save time and to standardize responses. Templates are available directly from the workspace and can include placeholders for business data like the customer name or the ticket ID.
You'll find templates under Customer Service Templates .
Tasks
Creating an E-Mail Template
E-mail templates are created and edited directly in the system using a rich text editor and can use placeholders that are automatically replaced with the related business data once the response is sent.
1.
Click New .
2.
Enter the template name.
You can also enter a template description, for example to describe when to use the template.
3.
Select E-Mail as the template's channel type.
4.
Enter the e-mail Subject line.
5.
Enter the e-mail Template Text .
6.
Save your entries.
If you want to use placeholders in your template, you can either Save And Open or go back and edit the template later.
Creating a Social Channel Template
Templates for social media channels use plain text and can include placeholders.
1.
Click New .
2.
Enter the template name.
You can also enter a template description, for example to describe when to use the template.
3.
Select Social as the template's channel type.
4.
Then select the Social Channel .
5.
Enter the Template Text .
Messages for Twitter cannot contain more than 140 characters, including spaces. As you type, the system displays a running character count below the text box.
6.
Save your entries.
If you want to use placeholders in your template, you can either Save And Open or go back and edit the template later.
Creating a Portal Template
Templates for the service portal use plain text and can include placeholders.
212 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
1.
Click New .
2.
Enter the template name.
You can also enter a template description, for example to describe when to use the template.
3.
Enter the Template Text .
4.
Save your entries.
If you want to use placeholders in your template, you can either Save And Open or go back and edit the template later.
Creating a Template from a Response in the Workspace
Once a response has been sent to a customer, you can save it as a template.
1.
Select the outbound response you want to save as a template in the interactions area of the workspace.
2.
Choose the Actions icon.
3.
Choose Save Response As Template .
The New Template quick create opens with the channel type and other relevant fields automatically filled to reflect the response you chose.
4.
Enter a name for the template and, if necessary, add additional information.
5.
Save your entries.
Creating a Corporate Template
If you have administrator access rights in the system, then you have the option of creating corporate templates.
When creating a new template, for any channel type, select Corporate to make the template available for use by all agents.
Adding Placeholders to a Text-Based Template
You can add placeholders for business data in your templates. When a response is sent using a template with placeholders, the system will replace the placeholder with the actual business data it represents.
1.
Open the template details by clicking the template name.
2.
Click inside the Template Text box.
3.
Edit the text and add any of the placeholders from the list below.
4.
Save your changes.
Available Template Placeholders
Placeholder
#AgentName#
#AccountName#
#Status#
#Description#
#TicketID#
#ContactName#
#ProductID#
#CreationDateTime#
Description
Replaced by the name of the agent assigned to the ticket
Replaced by the name of the account associated with the ticket
Replaced with the status of the ticket
Replaced with the description of the ticket
Replaced with the ID of the ticket
Replaced with the name of the contact associated with the ticket
Replaced with the ID of the product associated with the ticket
Replaced with the date and time when the ticket was created in the system
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
213
Placeholder
#ProductDescription#
#ProductSerialNumber#
Description
Replaced with the description of the product associated with the ticket
Replaced with the serial number of the registered product associated with the ticket
#WarrantyID#
#WarrantyEndDate#
Replaced with the ID of the warranty assigned to the ticket
Replaced with the expiration date of the warranty assigned to the ticket
#InitialResponseDueDateTime#
Replaced with the date and time by which the initial response to a ticket should be sent
#CompletionDueDateTime#
Replaced with the date and time by which the ticket should be completed
4.4.7 Working from Microsoft Outlook® for Service Users
The SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook allows you to exchange information between Microsoft
Outlook and SAP Cloud for Customer. After installing the add-in, you can do the tasks listed below right from
Microsoft Outlook.
Microsoft Outlook integration supports Microsoft Outlook 2007, Microsoft Outlook 2010, and Microsoft Outlook
2013.
Prerequisites
●
●
●
Your system has been set up to use Microsoft Outlook when responding to tickets.
You have installed the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook locally on your computer, made the appropriate settings, and logged on from Outlook.
.
You should have access to the shared e-mail account in your company used to respond to tickets. Make sure you use this account when replying. You may need to manually select the correct account when composing your response, or you can set the shared e-mail account as the default in Microsoft Outlook.
Tasks
Making Settings for SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook
1.
Enable the side pane in Microsoft Outlook as follows:
Microsoft Outlook Version
2007
Action
Enable the view SAP Cloud for Customer .
2010 and 2013 Enable the add-in SAP Cloud for Customer .
2.
Check the SAP Cloud for Customer folder locations in Microsoft Outlook as follows:
214 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Microsoft Outlook Version
2007
2010 and 2013
Action
Check tools for SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In Settings .
Choose SAP Cloud for Customer Settings .
The add-in automatically creates the synchronization folders, including the following:
● Default Folder
This is the main folder where error and conflict information is stored.
●
●
Accounts Folder
This folder contains the accounts downloaded from SAP Cloud for Customer.
Contacts Folder
This folder contains the contacts downloaded from SAP Cloud for Customer.
To change any of these folders, click the folder link, select a new folder, and choose OK.
3.
In the Advanced Settings section, set the following: a.
If you want the system to display synchronization-related notifications in a message in the Microsoft
Windows task bar, select the Display Synchronization Notifications checkbox.
b.
If you want the system to display synchronization-related errors in a message in the Microsoft Windows task bar, select the Display Synchronization Errors checkbox.
You can use a right click on the SAP Cloud for Customer add-in icon in the Microsoft Outlook toolbar as a shortcut to display synchronization errors and notifications directly, access the error and conflict folders, open the activities list, and send meeting requests.
4.
If you are a service agent using Microsoft Outlook to reply to tickets, in the Initial Synchronization section, select the Enable Service Scenario checkbox.
Logging On to SAP Cloud for Customer from Microsoft Outlook
If your administrator has set up single sign-on (SSO), you are logged on automatically and the SAP Cloud for
Customer sidebar appears.
If you don't see the SAP Cloud for Customer sidebar in Microsoft Outlook, log on as follows:
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, under SAP Cloud for Customer, click the button to log on to SAP Cloud for Customer.
2.
In the dialog box that appears, select the row displaying the system where your SAP Cloud for Customer system is located and choose OK .
The logon is certificate-based and runs automatically in the background.
Your Microsoft Outlook is now connected with the SAP Cloud for Customer system that you selected.
3.
If there is a problem with the certificate for your user, or if you are not working with certificates, a dialog box appears, where you can enter your user ID and password.
Enter your URL in the SAP System field, leaving out the path or directory information at the end of the URL.
For example, you log on with URL http://Test.sap.corp:7000
, and not http://Test.sap.corp:
7000/irj/portal
.
You can confirm that you have logged on to the system by checking the title of the button that you used to log on. If the text has switched to Log Off , you have logged on successfully.
When you are working offline and cannot log on to the system, any changes to relevant e-mails, appointments, and tasks, or new items for synchronization to SAP Cloud for Customer are kept in a pool in Microsoft Outlook. Actual synchronization of these items occurs automatically as soon as you log on to SAP Cloud for Customer using the add-in.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
215
If you are logged on to SAP Cloud for Customer with the add-in for many hours without any action, you may receive an authorization error when trying to use a Microsoft Outlook integration function.
In this case, your user cookies may have expired. Simply log off and log on again.
Responding to Tickets
You can respond to tickets from the agent workspace while using Microsoft Outlook.
1.
In the agent workspace, ensure that the Use Microsoft Outlook checkbox is selected.
2.
Choose Reply to respond to the last e-mail. This will copy the previous e-mail in the response, and also include other recipients of the previous e-mail.
Choose Compose New E-Mail to respond without replying to the last e-mail.
Choosing either response option will open a Microsoft Outlook window pre-populated with the customer's email address.
3.
Compose your response.
Make sure you are replying from the correct e-mail account.
Keep the ticket number in the subject line of the e-mail so that it stays associated with the ticket.
4.
Send your response. The e-mail will be associated with the ticket and appear in the Interactions .
Adding Appointments for Synchronization
You can only synchronize appointments for which you are the organizer. If you are a participant, you receive any updates from the organizer's Outlook appointment.
1.
In your calendar in Microsoft Outlook, open an appointment and under SAP Cloud for Customer , choose Add
Appointment .
You can add an appointment directly, without opening it, by right-clicking on the appointment in your calendar, and choosing Add Appointment .
When you create a new appointment, you can synchronize it and send it by choosing Save, Send, and Sync Appointment . This step combines multiple steps, saving you time.
2.
Add a reference to an account, if desired.
3.
Choose Submit .
An appointment activity is created in SAP Cloud for Customer, based on the information in the Microsoft
Outlook appointment.
. To synchronize any future changes to the appointment in SAP Cloud for Customer or in Microsoft
Outlook, repeat the steps above.
It is not possible to synchronize recurring appointments.
216 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
If you add or change attendees in an SAP Cloud for Customer appointment, you can send the meeting request as follows:
1.
Ensure that the appointment is synchronized, by repeating the steps above.
2.
Open the appointment in Microsoft Outlook and send the meeting request.
Adding Tasks for Synchronization
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, open a task in your To-Do List and choose SAP Cloud for Customer Add Task .
In the task details, if you enter a name in the Company Name field, it is used as the account name in the system.
Simlarly, if you create a task in the system and synchronize it to Microsoft Outlook, the account name appears in the task details as the company name.
2.
Add an account as a reference, if desired.
3.
Choose Submit .
A task activity is created in SAP Cloud for Customer, based on information in the Microsoft Outlook task.
Future tasks and tasks within the last 30 days are sychronized and appear in Microsoft Outlook. Tasks older than 30 days are no longer synchronized.
If you change a task in SAP Cloud for Customer, the changes are automatically synchronized to Microsoft
Outlook within five minutes. However, there is no automatic synchronization if you change a task in Microsoft
Outlook that has already been synchronized. In this case, open the task in Microsoft Outlook, make your changes, and then choose Add Task to trigger synchronization to SAP Cloud for Customer.
Displaying Synchronized Appointments and Tasks in SAP Cloud for Customer
1.
In SAP Cloud for Customer, go to Activities .
2.
Choose the Appointments or Tasks subview.
The appointment or task that you synchronized from Microsoft Outlook appears in SAP Cloud for Customer in the Activities tab.
Cancelling Appointments
You can only synchronize appointments for which you are the organizer. If you are a participant, you receive any updates from the organizer's Outlook appointment.
Unlike deleted appointments, canceled appointments still appear in the system, which means you can use them to track appointments that were originally scheduled but not completed.
When you cancel your appointment in the system, it is synchronized with Outlook as described in section Adding
Appointments for Synchronization.
Following synchronization, in Outlook, cancellations are sent to the participants and the meeting is deleted from
Outlook.
You can only cancel appointments from the system. If you delete an appointment from Outlook, after synchronization, it appears in the system as deleted.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
217
Deleting Appointments or Tasks
In the steps listed below, an appointment is used as an example, but the steps are similar for both appointments and tasks.
1.
In Microsoft Outlook, open the appointment you want to delete.
You can only synchronize appointments for which you are the organizer. If you are a participant, you receive any updates from the organizer's Outlook appointment.
2.
Choose SAP Cloud for Customer Delete Appointment .
You can only delete appointments or tasks that have been synchronized.
For appointments and tasks that were previously synchronized, the deletion is synchronized in both Microsoft
Outlook and SAP Cloud for Customer.
Displaying Synchronization Details for an Item
1.
Open the item in Microsoft Outlook.
2.
In the bottom frame of the item, in the Details — SAP Cloud for Customer section, click the link.
4.4.8 Unassociated E-Mails
If your system is configured to support e-mail as a channel for creating customer service tickets, then any incoming e-mails that the system cannot automatically convert to a new ticket or assign to an existing ticket get added to the list of unassociated e-mails. These e-mails must be manually processed by agents.
There are several reasons why an e-mail could not be automatically associated with a ticket. For example, your system may be configured to require manual processing or there may be more than one contact with the same sender e-mail address. The system displays the reason in the e-mail details to assist you determining whether the e-mail should be converted to a new ticket or assigned to an existing ticket.
Processing Unassociated E-Mails
1.
To view the list of unassociated e-mails in your system, go to Customer Service Unassociated E-
Mails .
2.
Open the E-Mail details.
3.
Review the reason why the system did not automatically associate the e-mail with a ticket.
You'll find the reason just above the General section of the e-mail details.
4.
Determine whether the e-mail should be converted to a new ticket or assigned to an existing one.
For example, the reason indicates there were no matching contacts found for the e-mail address used to send the e-mail. But the e-mail message itself mentions a corporate customer account and includes a full contact name. You look up the account and find the contact mentioned in the e-mail.
Since the e-mail message does not mention an open issue or known ticket, you determine that this e-mail should be converted to a new ticket for that customer.
218 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
5.
Under Action , choose one of the following:
● Convert to New Ticket
The New Ticket quick create opens where you can complete the required information and save your entries to create a new ticket based on the e-mail.
The e-mail is removed from the list of unassociated e-mails and can no longer be processed as an e-mail.
●
●
Assign to Existing Ticket
A selection dialog box opens where you can choose a ticket to which to assign the e-mail.
The e-mail is removed from the list of unassociated e-mails and can no longer be processed as an e-mail.
Delete
Deletes the e-mail.
Only administrators can delete unassociated e-mail messages.
6.
Close the e-mail details.
4.4.9 Contracts
In general a contract is a legally-binding service agreement between parties stating their respective obligations and responsibilities. With contracts you have the required information, such as subject matter of contract, covered objects, signature date and validity period, bundled in one place.
The Contracts work center supports you here to create those contracts and keep an overview about the active ones.
As soon as you finalized a contract with a customer and it is active, this contract is determined during ticket creation and automatically added to the ticket. In case the contract contains also service level agreements you will see them after the determination in the ticket.
Business Background
Prerequisites
You have configured the contracts in business configuration. For more information, see Configuring Contracts in the Administrator Guide.
Related Tickets
You can find the tickets that use a specific contract on the Related Tickets tab of the contract itself.
Time Zone
To get a binding validity period of the contract, you must also select a applicable time zone that is valid for Begins
On , Ends On , and Signed On .
The default time zone is taken from the time zone of the logged in employee under Personalize My
Settings Regional Settings .
Contract Determination in a Ticket
The contract determination in tickets works from the unspecific to the more specific. So the more information you enter the system is able to find the best applicable contract.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
219
You have a customer with the following active contracts:
Contract Contract Details
Normal Contract without covered objects such as a product or a registered product, so all objects are covered.
Silver
Gold
Contract with product Printer XPrint
Contract with product Printer XPrint and a registered product with ID P56789
Now the customer calls your help desk and you open a ticket for him:
● If you enter only the name of the customer and enter his issues, the system finds the Normal contract and assigns it to the ticket as a basis for the offered services.
●
●
If you enter also a product, for example, Printer XPrint, the system finds the Silver contract and assigns it to the ticket.
When the customer has a problem with one specific printer in his office and can give you the serial
ID of the registered product, the system assigns the Gold contract to the ticket.
If the system determines several active and comparable contracts, you are asked to select one manually. To select a contract manually open the value help that is pre-filtered with the active contracts. But you can also list all contracts of the customer to see whether there are already contracts in status Ready that begin soon and assign them.
Service Levels
Service levels are determined either by the entered level in the contract or automatically by determination rules. You find the maintenance for the service level determination in the Administrator work center under Common
Tasks Determine Service Level .
Generally: The service level from the contract has priority before the automatic determination.
If you remove a contract assignment from a ticket again, the service level determination is triggered again and the then most applicable service level is assigned.
Statuses
A contract can have the following statuses:
● In Preparation : The contract is created but not ready to use in service tickets.
● Ready : The contract has been activated, but the validity period is not yet reached.
●
●
●
Active : The contract activated and the validity period reached.
Obsolete : The contract activated but the validity period is over or the contract has been set to Obsolete by the contract administrator.
Blocked : You can block temporarily a contract for further usage, in case, for example, the customer didn't pay the contract fee and after everything is cleared out again, you can activate the contract again.
Tasks
Create a New Contract
1.
To create a contract choose either the Contracts work center and click New or click the New Contract quick create.
2.
Enter the required data, such as a name, the date when the contract has been signed, when it begins and ends, the service level, customer, and the contract administrator.
220 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
3.
Save and open the contract for further editing.
4.
On the Covered Objects tab you can assign products and registered products to the contract.
To enter a product click Add and select either a product or a serial ID.
●
●
If you select a serial ID, the corresponding product is entered automatically. You can also use the value help to search for the serial ID or you just register it. To register a product click New
Registration in the value help.
If you don't make any entries, the contract is valid for all products and registered products of the customer.
5.
On the Notes tab under Customer Information you can enter the subject matter of contract you agreed with your customer.
6.
Save your changes.
Copy a Contract
To copy a contract open a contract, click Actions Copy and adapt the required fields.
Create a Follow-Up Contract
1.
To create a follow-up contract go to the Related Contracts tab and click New .
2.
Enter the new dates and save the contract.
Delete a Contract
As long as a contract is In Preparation , you can also delete it again.
To delete the contract, select the corresponding line in the Contracts view and chose Actions Delete .
Activate a Contract
To activate a contract click Actions Activate .
●
●
●
In case the contract is activated before the contract period starts, its status is Ready and switches to
Active when the validity period starts.
Please note also if you change data in a contract that is Ready or Active , you should inform your customer about the changes.
You can’t activate a contract that is in approval.
After the contract period is over the status switches to Obsolete and you can correct the contract data manually or create follow-up contracts.
Checks During Activation
When you activate a contract the system performs several checks to ensure that the contract is valid:
●
●
A contract must have a start and end date and the end date must be after the start date.
If you have entered covered objects and added parties manually, the system checks whether they exist in the system.
Search for Expiring Contracts
With the Contracts Expiring Soon query you can filter for contracts where the Ends On date lies between the current date and the current date plus 28 days.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
221
Please note that you can create your own queries with your own enhanced search settings.
Create a PDF
To create a PDF from the contract, click Actions Preview . Another window with the contract PDF preview opens. Now you can print it out or save a PDF on your local machine and add it, for example, as an attachment to the contract.
Note that the language maintained in the account's master data is taken as document language in the contract and hence also taken in the contract form. If the language is not maintained, the system language is taken.
4.5 Customers
4.5.1 Accounts
On the Accounts tab, you can display existing accounts, create new accounts, and set account statuses. You can also display account details, review additional data, and rename and edit accounts, as required, and, if you are authorized to do so, assign employees to an account team.
Once you have created an account, it can no longer be deleted. You can, however, set its status as
Obsolete .
Tasks
Creating Accounts
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the Name and Country of the account, then specify its City .
If desired, you also may enter the account's Web site, or specify its classification.
4.
Save your entries.
222 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
If your administrator has configured the solution to check for potential duplicate accounts, then the system performs a duplicate check when you save the account to ensure that its information is unique.
Alternatively you can select Check for Duplicates , before you save the account.
If the information you enter is found to resemble the information of an existing account, then the solution notifies you that potential duplicate accounts were found.
You might be confused that if you enter, for example, the name
Eastsouth
and the system doesn't find the already existing
Eastsouth Corp
as a duplicate. The reason is that the system calculates the duplicate possibility according a specific algorithm and only accounts with a similarity above the configured threshold are shown as possible duplicates.
The algorithm calculates the account name similarity of two accounts with one account name consisting of one word, for example,
Eastsouth
, and the other account name consisting of two words, for example,
Eastsouth Corp
with a similarity that is below the standard threshold. Hence the existing
Eastsouth Corp
is not shown as possible duplicate.
Therefore we recommend to enter as much correct information as possible if you want to get reasonable results, especially the whole account name and, for example, address information.
Alternatively, you can contact your administrator to change the system settings to weak duplicate checks.
You can find theses settings in your implementation project in the Business Configuration work center when you edit the project scope: Phase Questions General Business Data Business
Partners Handling of Business Partners Group: Duplicate Check for Business Partners .
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
You may designate only one primary contact per account. Secondary contacts cannot be specified.
If Territory Management has been activated, then an employee who is not defined to be a territory owner cannot be defined as the owner of an account.
Editing Accounts
You can edit accounts from the Account item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the account, position the cursor over the Name field.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the dropdown menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
From the item header, you can only edit the current main address of an account.
To edit an address other than the current main address, or to designate a different address as the main address, choose the Addresses tab.
Choosing Account Filters
In the standard solution, accounts are displayed in various filters, described below:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
223
Standard Account Filters
Filter
My Accounts
Accounts Displayed
Accounts where you are assigned either to the account team or (if territory management is active in your solution) to the territory team.
My Account
Team's Accounts
Accounts where you are assigned to the account team.
This filter only appears if territory management is active in your solution.
My Territory
Team's Accounts
Accounts where you are assigned to the territory team.
This filter only appears if territory management is active in your solution.
My Team's
Accounts
Accounts where anyone in your organization, including employees in subordinate organizations, is assigned either to the account team or (where applicable) to the territory team:
● For employees, the team is defined as employees in the organization to which the logged on user is directly assigned, and employees in any organization subordinate to the logged on user’s organization.
● For managers, the team is defined as employees
○ in any organization which the logged on user is assigned as manager, and employees in any organization subordinate to the organization logged on user is assigned as a manager, and;
●
○ in the organization to which the logged on user is directly assigned, and employees in any organization subordinate to the logged on user’s organization.
If the logged on user is not assigned to any position in any organization, then the team is just the employee.
Accounts for which you have at least read access.
All
The accounts that appear in your solution, per filter, may differ in relation to the access restrictions that your administrator has established.
The standard filters above do not include obsolete accounts. To view obsolete accounts, create and save a
new filter. For more information, see Working with Lists [page 45] .
The default filter is My Accounts . You can modify the range of accounts displayed by selecting among these filters.
Using Advanced Filters
If you are using the advanced filters, you can filter your accounts, for example, by including sub-territories or narrowing the result by adding a top-level account.
Feature Account in SAP Jam
Business objects like Accounts can be featured in SAP Jam from your SAP Cloud for Customer system.
1.
In the Accounts view, select a single account or multiple accounts.
2.
Select New , Feature in Group .
3.
From the Feature in popup, select the group in which you want to feature the account and click OK .
Setting Account Status
From the account details, use the Actions menu to choose the following applicable status:
224 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
●
●
●
Choose Actions Set as Active to change the account status to Active.
Choose Actions Block to change the account status to Blocked, which will exclude the account from subsequent search results. By blocking an account, you also prevent future opportunities, activities and other items from being assigned to it.
Choose Actions Set as Obsolete to change the account status to Obsolete. By setting an account as obsolete, you also prevent future opportunities, activities and other items from being assigned to it.
You may assign a new status to an account at any time, as required. For example, you can set any active account as obsolete, or any blocked account as active.
Using Calendar View
The calendar view only appears in HTML5 clients. You are using an HTML5 client if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. For further information, contact your system administrator.
This view shows the calendar from the perspective of an account.
To show all upcoming appointments, visits, and phone calls scheduled by anyone in your organization for an account, select that account and choose the calendar view. Each one is color coded, based on its status.
You can create new appointments, visits, or phone calls right from the calendar view.
Using Map View
If your administrator has configured the solution accordingly, then you can display accounts in Map View , if desired.
Choose Map View to see, in an integrated third-party mapping service, the location of each account address — both individually, and in relation to one another. Within Map View , you can also zoom in, zoom out, and pan in any direction.
Reviewing Tabs in Account Details
The tabs that you see in the account details depend upon the features of SAP Cloud for Customer that your company has implemented.
Some of the tabs below are not visible by default. Assuming the features are enabled by your administrator, you must personalize the screen to make some tabs visible. For more information, watch the video
Customizing Your Personal Settings .
From the account details, you can select these tabs to perform additional actions. The following table summarizes, per feature, the tabs that are available:
Tab
Overview
Feed
Actions
Select this tab to see the latest updates made to the account, the contacts designated to the account, and any addresses associated with the account.
yes
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes
Select this tab to read, open, tag, flag or comment feed updates that
are associated with this account. For more information, see About the Feed [page 21] .
yes yes
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
225
Tab
Recent Orders
Actions
Select this tab to view recent orders that are associated with this account.
If your administrator has not set up the 360 overview, then this tab will not appear.
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes yes no Charts ●
●
On this tab, under Average Sales Cycle , you can view the average sales cycle, in number of days, for this account and for all accounts. Data for each average sales cycle is represented separately, but both sets of data are represented in relation to the quarterly sales cycle. You may also export this data to Microsoft Excel ® , if desired. For more
information, see About Analysis [page 157]
.
On this tab, under Revenue Trend , you can view the overall revenue trend for this account in relation to the quarterly sales cycle. You may also export this data to Microsoft Excel, if desired.
yes
Activities
Account Team
Select this tab to view, edit or create appointments, tasks, phone calls, or e-mails that are associated with this account.
yes
Select this tab to add employees to, or remove employees from, the team responsible for this account. Here you can also add employees with the same role but with different validities and sales data responsibilities, such as Sales Organization , Distribution Channel ,
Division . If you possess the appropriate authorizations, you can also modify the role of employees who are assigned to this account.
yes
If territory management is active, then the sales territory team also appears in this tab.
Sales Territories Select this tab to view associated sales territories.
If your administrator has not configured the solution to make sales territories visible, then this tab will not appear.
yes yes yes no
Relationships Select this tab to view associated relationships.
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP
ERP, then this tab will not appear.
yes yes
226 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Tab
Addresses
Contacts
Account
Hierarchy
Campaigns
Sales Leads
Opportunities
Actions
Select this tab to view, edit or add addresses that are associated with this account.
For any account, only one address can be specified as the main address.
To indicate that an address may be used for shipping or billing, select
Yes in the corresponding column. If more than one shipping or billing address is specified, select Yes (standard) in the appropriate column to designate an address as the default shipping or billing address.
yes
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes
It is not possible to remove an existing address from an account, because the existing address may already be referenced by other items, such as leads and opportunities.
If you have data for geographic placements for the address you can enter them in the fields Latitude and Longitude and you can make them visible on an online map provider using a mash-up.
You have the following options to enter latitude and longitude:
● You can export all addresses, use an external service to create the data, and import the data back using the mass data maintenance or the migration tool.
●
●
●
You can use the A2X service II_MANAGE_CUSTOMER_IN to update the data.
You can update the fields creating a custom solution using
SDK.
You can use a data mash-up to clean-up the fields on update with geo codes.
Select this tab to add new or existing contacts to, or remove contacts from, this account. On this tab, you can also designate a contact as the Primary Contact for the account.
To add an existing contact click Actions Add and select a contact.
yes
Select this tab to view the displayed accounts in a hierarchical structure, provided that a parent account has been specified for the accounts at hand. You can expand and collapse the account hierarchy at any level to display as many or as few accounts as you like.
yes
If your administrator has not configured the solution to make account hierarchies visible, then this tab will not appear.
yes yes
Select this tab to view associated campaigns.
Select this tab to view or create sales leads that relate to this account. yes
Select this tab to view or create opportunities that relate to this account.
yes yes no no no
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
227
Tab
Attachments
Groups
Actions
Select this tab to view, edit or add attachments that relate to this account.
Select this tab to view information that derives from SAP Jam, and to perform the following actions:
● create internal groups in SAP Jam to collaborate on account team meetings, prepare for customer visits, and so on
● create external or cross-company groups in SAP Jam to safeguard accounts, upsell products, and so on
●
●
●
●
● automatically invite account team members and contacts to the group in SAP Jam, with the flexibility to add or remove email addresses view a list of groups in SAP Jam that are associated with the given account, and navigate from this list to SAP Jam navigate from SAP Jam back to the account view a list of recommended groups in SAP Jam for the given account, and navigate from this list to SAP Jam view the latest SAP Jam Feed updates for the associated groups yes
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes yes no
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP
Jam, then this tab will not appear.
Sales Data
Sales
Documents
Tickets
Target Groups
Registered
Products
Visiting Hours
Select this tab to view or edit associated sales data from SAP
Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) and SAP ERP.
Select this tab to view associated sales documents.
Select this tab to view associated tickets.
Select this tab to view associated target groups.
Select this tab to view associated registered products.
yes yes
Here you can define the hours for visits. These date and time ranges are taken into account when sales and service representatives plan site visits for accounts.
yes
The Visiting Hours tab is delivered hidden. To use it, either personalize your screen, or ask your administrator to adapt the screens for everyone in the company.
Visits
Product Lists
Survey Results
Select this tab to view associated visits, and to set the recommended visit frequency for this account.
yes
Select this tab to view associated product lists.
Select this tab to view associated survey results.
yes yes no yes no no no yes no yes yes no yes yes
228 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Tab
Marketing
Attributes
Actions
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
no If integration with SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP
CRM) is set up in your system, then you can choose this tab to access
SAP CRM marketing attributes associated with this account.
yes
Assigning Employees to an Account Team
In the Microsoft Silverlight ® client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Select the Account Team tab.
4.
Open the Employees pane.
5.
Drag the icon of the appropriate employee from the Employees pane and drop it onto the table within the
Account Team tab.
In the HTML5 client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Select the Account Team tab, then choose Add .
4.
Specify the party role and name of the employee to be assigned, then choose Add .
Removing Employees from an Account Team
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Select the Account Team tab.
4.
Find the employee to be removed.
5.
In the Action column corresponding to the employee to remove, choose Remove .
Deleting Account Activities
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Activities .
4.
Within the Action column of the activity to be deleted, choose Delete .
Deleting activities from the account removes them from the system entirely.
5.
In the dialog box that follows, confirm that you want to delete the selected activity.
Generating Account Summaries
To generate a summary of any account in PDF format, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
229
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Summary .
Opening CRM Factsheet
To open a CRM Factsheet, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Actions CRM Customer Factsheet .
Launching ERP Customer Cockpit
From the details of the account on the Sales Data tab you can also launch the ERP Cockpit with Actions ERP
Cockpit and you can open an ERP Customer Factsheet as PDF with Actions ERP Customer Factsheet presumed your system is connected with ERP.
Prerequisites
To enable the Cloud for Customer system to launch the ERP Customer Cockpit you must do the following adaptations:
1.
In the Administrator work center choose General Mashups Mashup Authoring and search for
Account Cockpit (SM00105) and update the URL with the connected ERP system data.
ERP
2.
To find the URL, login to the corresponding ERP system and do the following steps:
1.
Start transaction
SICF
, enter
CFS_APPILCATION
into the field ServiceName and press F8 .
The service cfs_application is shown in the next screen.
2.
Make a right click on the screen and select Test Service .
3.
A web browser is opened with an URL. Copy this URL.
Alternatively you can also to the following:
Start transaction
SE80
, select Web Dynpro Comp/Intf.
and enter
CFS_COMPONENT
and click Display . Then open web dynpro applications cfs_application
and under the properties, copy the URL from field URL .
3.
Now you can paste the URL in the mash-up and save your work.
Using International Address Versions
If your administrator has activated this function, then proceed as follows to record address information for accounts in multiple character sets — for example, in the Greek or Roman alphabets, or in Cyrillic or Thai script, among others.
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Actions International Version .
4.
On the following screen, from the dropdown list, select the alternative alphabet or script in which the address information is to be specified.
If a user is logged on to the system in Japanese, but wants to enter address information for an account in Thailand, then that user can specify the Thai script from the dropdown to enter the address, as required.
5.
Choose OK .
This function is also accessible from the Addresses tab of the account.
230 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
See Also
Start Here for SAP Cloud for Sales
4.5.2 Contacts
On the Contacts tab, you can display existing contacts associated with accounts, create new contacts, and set contact statuses. You can also display contact details, review additional data, and rename and edit contacts, as required.
Once you have created a contact, it can no longer be deleted. You can, however, set its status as
Obsolete .
Tasks
Creating Contacts
1.
Choose Customers Contacts .
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the First Name and Last Name of the contact, then specify the Account that is associated with it.
If desired, enter additional details for the contact, such as organizational information, or the Phone , Mobile , and E-Mail of the contact.
4.
Save your entries.
If your administrator has scoped the solution to check for potential duplicate contacts, then select
Check for Duplicates , before you save the contact, to ensure that its information is unique.
If the information you enter is found to resemble the information of an existing contact, then the solution notifies you that potential duplicate contacts were found.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
Editing Contacts
You can edit contacts from the Contact item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the contact, position the cursor over the Name field.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the dropdown menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
231
From the item header, you cannot edit the business address of the account that is associated with this contact, but you can use the dropdown menu to specify a different business address for this contact, if desired.
To create or edit personal addresses for the contact, choose the Addresses tab.
Choosing Contact Filters
Contacts are displayed in one of three standard filters, described below:
Standard Contact Filters
Filter
All
Contacts Displayed
All contacts of all accounts that you are authorized to access.
My Contacts
My Team's
Contacts
All contacts of all accounts for which you are assigned as a member of the account team.
All contacts of all accounts for which you are assigned as a member of the account team, and, if you are a sales manager, all contacts of all accounts for which any subordinate of yours is assigned as a member of the account team.
The standard filters above do not include obsolete accounts. To view obsolete contacts, create and save a
new filter. For more information, see Working with Lists [page 45] .
The default filter is My Contacts , You can modify the range of accounts displayed by selecting among these filters.
Setting Contact Status
From the contact details, use the Actions menu to choose the following applicable status:
● Choose Actions Set as Active to change the contact status to Active.
● Choose Actions Block to change the contact status to Blocked, which will exclude the contact from subsequent search results.
● Choose Actions Set as Obsolete to change the contact status to Obsolete.
You may assign a new status to a contact at any time, as required. For example, you can set any active contact as obsolete, or any blocked contact as active.
Reviewing Tabs in Contact Details
The tabs that you see in the contact details depend upon the features of SAP Cloud for Customer that your company has implemented.
Some of the tabs below are not visible by default. Assuming the features are enabled by your administrator, you must personalize the screen to make some tabs visible. For more information, watch the video
Customizing Your Personal Settings .
From the contact details, you can select these tabs to perform additional actions. The following table summarizes, per feature, the tabs that are available:
232 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Registered
Products
Campaigns
Marketing
Interactions
Tickets
Marketing
Permissions
Marketing
Attributes
Tab
Overview
Feed
Addresses
Activities
Sales Leads
Opportunities
Relationships
Actions
Select this tab to see the latest updates made to the contact, and any addresses associated with the contact.
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes yes yes Select this tab to read any Feed updates that are associated with this contact. For more information, see
On this tab, you can also open, tag or flag Feed updates, mark them
as favorites, or comment them. For more information, see Tags
yes
Select this tab to view, edit or add addresses that are associated with this contact.
yes yes
It is not possible to remove an existing address from a contact, because the existing address may already be referenced by other items, such as leads and opportunities.
yes Select this tab to view, edit or create activities that are associated with this contact — including appointments, tasks, phone calls, and e-mails. For more information, see
yes
Select this tab to view leads that relate to this contact. For more
information, see Sales Leads [page 95] .
yes
Select this tab to view potential sales opportunities for this contact.
For more information, see
.
yes
Select this tab to view associated relationships.
yes
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP
ERP, then this tab will not appear.
yes yes yes
Select Registered Products to view registered products associated with this contact.
Select this tab to view associated campaigns.
Select this tab to view associated marketing interactions.
Select this tab to view tickets associated with this contact.
Select this tab to view the marketing permissions that have been defined for this contact.
no yes yes no yes
If integration with SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP
CRM) is set up in your system, then you can choose this tab to access
SAP CRM marketing attributes associated with this contact.
yes yes no no yes no no
See Also
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
233
4.6 Employee Support
Employee support enables you to create support tickets for company employees. Support tickets can be created automatically from e-mail messages sent to an internal support address, or support staff can create tickets manually.
Support staff can view employee details in the agent workspace. Employees can also create tickets on behalf of another employee.
Employee Melvin Jones loses his laptop and has no way to send an e-mail message to support. His manager, Rita Thomas, sends a request for a replacement laptop on Melvin's behalf. Support staff can process the ticket and a response will be sent automatically via e-mail.
Employee support uses the same basic ticket processing infrastructure as customer service. The documents linked below apply to both solutions. Note that not all features described in these documents are available for employee support.
See Also
Processing Tickets in the Agent Workspace [page 205]
VIDEO: Start Here for Employee Support [page 234]
Unassociated E-Mails [page 218]
4.7 VIDEO: Start Here for Employee Support
Video
Start Here for Employee Support (3m 44s)
Learn how to provide employee support in SAP Cloud for Service, from sorting and working with tickets, through sending a reply with links to knowledge base articles and resolving the issue reported.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
4.8 Registered Products
A registered product is one that is associated with a specific customer and for which you have recorded a unique serial number. When a ticket is created, the registered product information allows the agent to identify the unique
234 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
customer product, the current valid warranty, and to determine service entitlements if any exist. Additional information, such as product location or sales channel, is used in the service process and for reporting purposes.
Tasks
Registering a Product
You register products using the New Registered Product tool which can be accessed from the following locations in the solution:
● From the toolbar, click New Registered Product .
●
●
●
Under Products Registered Products , click New .
From the customer detail screen on the Registered Products tab, click New .
When you create a registered product from a customer detail screen, the relevant information is automatically copied into the form.
From the workspace, under Additional Information click the Edit icon for Serial ID , then click the Value
Selection icon. On the resulting pop-up, click New Registration .
When you create a registered product from the workspace, the customer and product information in the ticket are automatically copied into the form.
1.
Enter the data for Customer , Product and Serial ID for identifying the registered product.
The registered product ID is made up of the registered product and reference product, and is a unique
ID. However, the registered product is not necessarily unique. For example you can have a registered product 127 for the reference product A, and a registered product 127 for the reference product B.
For this reason, the system may remind you that the number already exists if you should enter a non-unique registered product.
2.
Save your entries.
Editing a Registered Product
You can review or add more information to a registered product from the registered product details screen. And similar to creating a registered product, you can access that details screen from several locations in the solution.
Primarily, from one of the following:
●
●
When creating the new registered product, rather than just saving and closing the form, you can choose instead to Save and Open .
From the customer details Registered Products tab, click the Serial ID link.
● Under Products Registered Products product you want to review or edit.
, select your query and then click the Serial ID of the registered
Adding Product Details
The Overview tab is where you can enter additional details such as the product location, the owner of the registered product (if different from the customer), and notes.
Remember to save your changes before closing the registered product details.
Adding a Warranty
1.
To add a warranty for the registered product, on the Overview tab, click the Edit icon for Warranty , then click the Value Selection icon and select a warranty from the list.
2.
Save your entries.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
235
For more information, see Warranties [page 236]
.
Adding Attachments
1.
On the Attachments tab, click Add .
2.
Select the type of attachment to add.
● Local File : allows you to choose a file from your local drive and upload it to the system
●
●
Web Link : allows you to define a URL and a display title
From Library : allows you to choose an attachment from the solution library
For more information, see
3.
Save your entries.
Reviewing or Adding Tickets
You can review any existing tickets related to the registered product on the Tickets tab. You can also create a new ticket.
1.
Click New .
2.
Review the automatically filled information and make any necessary changes.
3.
Enter a subject and description for the ticket.
4.
Save your entries.
If you choose to Save and Open , the new ticket will open for processing in the workspace.
Review Changes
You can review the change history for the registered product on the Changes tab.
4.9 Warranties
You can create warranties in the system, defining their duration and any uncovered incident categories. These warranties are then available to assign to registered products.
Tasks
Create a Warranty
1.
Go to Products Warranties and click New .
2.
Enter a name, the ID, and the duration.
Enter the duration as a number and time unit, for example “30 days” or “30 d”, and the system will recognize this and convert it to “30 Day(s)”.
3.
Under Uncovered Incident Categories you can add process or incident categories from your service category catalog.
Tickets assigned an uncovered incident category are excluded from warranty coverage.
Service or process categories without assigned incident categories are not relevant for the warranty coverage. In column Category Type you can see whether you selected a process or an incident category.
4.
Save your entries.
The warranty is created in status In Preparation .
236 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Activate the Warranty
To activate the warranty search for the corresponding warranty and select Actions Activate .
Assigning a Warranty to a Registered Product
1.
Go to Products Registered Products .
2.
Find the relevant registered product and open the details by clicking the serial ID.
3.
For Warranty , click Edit .
4.
Click Value Selection and select the relevant warranty.
5.
Save your entries.
Uncovered Incident Categories
Under Uncovered Incident Categories you can assign incident categories to exclude specific issues from the warranty in case it is selected in, for example, a ticket. To make it easier you can also add service categories. In this case all incident categories underneath the selected service category are uncovered for this warranty. The same applies incident categories below another incident category.
Only the incident categories have an impact whether a warranty should be granted for a product or not. For example, if no incident category was assigned to a service category listed in Uncovered Incident Categories and if you then select this service category in the ticket, no warranty limitation and/or exclusion will take place.
Categories are bundled hierarchically so the higher level also includes the lower levels: Catalog (hidden field by default in the Uncovered Incident Categories ) includes a selection of service categories.
A service category is used to categorize different kinds of service inquiries, for example, a product problem or an information request.
The incident categories, and all related incident categories in a lower level, are subcategories of the service categories and are used to categorize the different types of incidents. The following is an example for the service category product problem: gas boiler or electrical boilers.
● Customer Service & Support (Catalog)
○ Information Request (Service Category)
○ Product Problem (Service Category)
○ Gas Boiler (Incident Category)
○ Control Regulation Unit (Incident Category)
○ Customer Fault (Incident Category)
○ Installation Problem (Incident Category)
○ Electrical Boiler (Incident Category)
○ Control Regulation Unit (Incident Category)
○ Customer Fault (Incident Category)
○ Installation Problem (Incident Category)
A company is selling boilers. All gas boilers should have a 5–year warranty. Excluded from the warranty should be the customer fault category. The administrator creates a warranty that is valid for 5 years and selects under Uncovered Incident Categories the service category Customer Fault (Incident Category) and
Electrical Boiler .
In the case where a customer has a problem with a gas boiler and the issue was, for example, the customer's fault, the warranty of the customer does not cover this damage. But if the damage is due to an installation problem, the damage is covered by the warranty because it was not excluded.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
237
4.10 Analysis
Analysis is your access point to system analytical data and reports that you can use to recognize trends, measure customer sentiment, or track metrics like ticket volume or ticket completion rates.
You can also download reports and run ad-hoc analyses, either in your Web browser or in Microsoft Excel ® .
Service Overview Dashboard
The Service Overview is a set of charts based on the reports in your system. They provide you with a snapshot of the information you find most important and can be rearranged to suit the way you work.
.
To view report details, click the Actions icon and choose one of the following options:
● View with Web Browser
●
●
View with Web Browser — Quick Filter
View with Microsoft Excel®
Reports for the Customer Service and Social Media Features of SAP Cloud for Customer
The following reports are available from SAP, though your administrator may create custom reports that you can also choose to display in the overview dashboard (listed in alphabetical order):
Reports in SAP Cloud for Service and SAP Cloud for Social Engagement
Report Description
Customer Count Shows the number of customers by channel, product, and time.
Customer Sentiment Measure
Daily Average Service Request Backlog
Shows a customer’s average sentiment over time.
Shows the number of daily average service requests for month-to-date and year-to-date.
Daily Average Service Request Backlog (Priority) Shows the number of daily average service requests by priority.
Daily Average Service Request Backlog (Service Organization) Shows the number of daily average service requests by structure, service organization, and service and support organization.
Daily Average Service Request Backlog (Top-10 Service
Category)
Daily Average Service Request Backlog (Year)
Operational Metrics
Sentiment Measure
Shows the number of daily average service requests by the top 10 service categories.
Shows the number of daily average service requests by year.
Shows the average handle time by agent, channel, product, and time.
Shows the number of positive, neutral, and negative sentiments by channel, product, and time.
238 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
Report
Service Request Backlog
Service Request Completion Rate
Service Request Daily Average
Ticket Activity Volume
Ticket Completion Rate
Ticket Escalation Rate
Ticket Priority
Ticket Volume
Top 5 Influencers
Top 5 Knowledge Base Articles
Top 5 Topics
Description
Shows the number of open and in process service request backlog items per rolling week.
Shows the service request completion rate by day.
Shows the number of service request daily average for monthto-date and year-to-date.
Shows the total number of inbound ticket activities, including original messages, comments, and likes by channel and product.
Shows the percentage of tickets completed by channel, product, agent, and time.
Shows the percentage of tickets escalated by channel, product, agent, and time.
Shows the average and median ticket priority scores and the number of high, medium, and low priority tickets by channel, product, and time.
Shows the number of tickets by channel, product, status, and time.
Shows the top 5 influencers or customers based on the Klout score or message volume by channel and product.
Shows the top 5 knowledge base articles shared with customers by channel, product, and time.
Shows the top 5 topics identified in tickets by channel, product, and time.
4.11 Processing Inbound Phone Calls
Overview
Upon installing the Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) client adapter provided by SAP, your solution will automatically generate phone activities that capture customer information for incoming calls, provided that your solution is enabled to contain the Live Activity pane.
Prerequisites
You have installed third-party telephony software.
Tasks
Installing the CTI Client Adapter
To allow your solution to automatically generate phone activities, install the CTI client adapter as follows:
1.
In SAP Cloud for Customer, choose Download .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
239
2.
Download the CTI Client Adapter as follows:
1.
Hover over CTI Client Adapter , then click Download .
2.
Click Run when prompted.
3.
Click Yes when asked if you want the solution to publish changes on your computer.
4.
Complete the steps in the setup wizard.
Upon completing the installation steps, the adapter will be installed on your computer, and a shortcut will be visible on your desktop.
3.
Right-click the shortcut to the adapter on your desktop. Open the Compatibility menu. Enable the selection
Run the program as an administrator .
Adding Notes to Current Phone Call Activity
If you solution is enabled to contain the Live Activity pane, then you can view the details of your current phone call and add notes to the activity.
To see current phone call details, the CTI Client Adapter installed on your desktop must be running. You need to run the adapter before you open SAP Cloud for Customer .
1.
During a phone call, click Live Activity .
If necessary, you can choose Actions Reset in the live activity pane to clear the previous call information.
The details of your current call will be populated in the pane:
● Call Information contains details about the current call.
●
●
Customers contains detailed information about the customer on the call. You can also search for customer information.
Tickets contains a list of tickets related to the current customer. You can also search for tickets.
2.
Enter your comments in Notes and save your changes.
To see the notes you added to the activity, choose Activities Phone Calls , then open the phone call activity.
Your comments are visible in Notes .
Converting a Phone Activity to a Ticket
You can convert a phone activity to a ticket if your solution is scoped to use Social and Service features.
1.
Choose Activities Phone Calls .
2.
Select the phone activity you want to convert from the list.
3.
Select Actions and then Convert to New Ticket .
You will see a ticket in the Queue that contains the information from the phone activity.
240 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Service Features
5 Social Media Features
5.1 VIDEO: Start Here for Social Engagement
Video
Start Here for Social Engagement (7m 22s)
Find out the basic information you need to get working on tickets in SAP Cloud for Social Engagement.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
5.2 Customer Service
5.2.1 Queue
In Customer Service Queue , you can see a list of open and in process tickets. You can use the tools in the
Queue to process customer tickets.
To see a list of all tickets, including completed tickets, go to Customer Service Tickets .
Not all ticket processing options and channels are available for Employee Support.
Ticket Tasks
To work on a ticket, you must first select it by highlighting the ticket without choosing any of the links. You can select multiple tickets by holding down either the
Ctrl
or the
Command
key.
The following table lists tasks that you can perform on any ticket:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
241
Task
Change the status of a ticket.
Change the priority of a ticket.
Set a ticket as irrelevant.
Escalate a ticket to a supervisor or subject matter expert.
De-escalate a ticket.
Assign a ticket to yourself.
Assign a ticket to another agent or another team.
Procedure
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Set Status...
3.
Select the appropriate status from the dropdown list.
Result
The status of the ticket is updated.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Set Priority...
.
3.
Select the appropriate priority from the dropdown list.
The priority icon changes according to your selection.
1.
2.
Choose the
Select
Actions
Set As Irrelevant .
icon.
3.
Choose Yes in the Confirm
Ticket Relevance window.
The ticket is set to the Set As Irrelevant status and removed from all queues.
1.
2.
3.
Choose the
Select
Actions
Escalate .
Choose Yes in the
Escalation window.
icon.
Confirm
The ticket is set to Escalated status.
Escalated tickets may be assigned to a supervisor or designee depending on your system settings.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select De-escalate .
3.
Choose Yes in the Confirm Deescalation window.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Under Assign To , select Me .
The ticket is assigned to you and moved to your queue.
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Agent...
or Team...
.
3.
Complete one of the following options:
● Enter the name of the agent or team.
● Search for an agent or team by choosing the Value
Selection icon. Select the agent or team from the options presented.
4.
Choose OK .
The ticket is assigned to the specified agent or team.
242 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Task
Add a note to a ticket.
Procedure
1.
Choose the Actions icon.
2.
Select Add Note .
3.
Enter your note.
4.
Choose Save .
Result
When the ticket is opened in the agent workspace, the note appears in the
Interactions section.
The following table lists tasks that you can perform in any ticket:
Task
Create follow up items for a ticket.
Create a PDF
Procedure
You can create tickets and sales quotes to create follow up tasks so you can complete a ticket.
1.
Open a ticket and choose
Follow Up .
2.
Select Create Ticket , Create
Sales Quote , Create Opportunity or Create Lead.
.
3.
Enter all necessary information and save your changes.
Result
You can view the follow-up items created for the ticket in Related Items . Follow-up items are indicated by an arrow that points away from the ticket you are working on.
1.
To create a PDF from the ticket open the ticket and under
Overview Customer select the language you want to use in the PDF.
2.
Then click
Summary Preview .
Another window with the ticket
PDF preview opens. Now you can print it out or save a PDF on your local machine to send it as e-mail to the customer.
3.
When you click
Summary Generate the system creates automatically an attachment that can be found on the Attachments tab.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
243
Task
Submit ticket for approval.
Withdraw ticket from approval.
Procedure Result
If approval is activated in your system a ticket will go in approval as soon as one of the defined conditions are met. You will then get a warning message and the ticket either goes into approval after saving or you have to submit it manually by clicking Approval Submit for
Approval .
When the ticket is in approval you are only able to create follow-ups or add internal notes.
For more information, see Enabling
Approval Processes in the Administrator
Guide.
If you have to withdraw the approval for any reason you can do this by clicking
Approval Withdraw from
Approval .
See Also
Start Here for Service [page 196]
5.2.2 VIDEO: Processing Tickets
Video
Processing Tickets (4m 12s)
Find out about the tools in the Workspace and in the Queue and Tickets list that help you to complete tickets.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
5.2.3 Processing Tickets in the Agent Workspace
When you open a ticket, you can access the tools you need to solve customer problems in the agent workspace.
Here, you can respond to tickets through the channels set up for your solution. You can also search similar tickets and the knowledge base to help you close tickets.
Not all ticket processing options and channels are available for Employee Support.
244 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Tasks
Common Ticket Tasks
The following table lists tasks that you can perform on tickets.
Ticket Tasks
Task
Change the status of a ticket.
Procedure Result
1.
Choose Edit at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Select the new status from the dropdown.
3.
Save your changes.
The status of the ticket is updated.
Change the priority of a ticket.
Set a ticket as irrelevant.
Escalate a ticket to a supervisor or subject matter expert.
1.
Choose Edit at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Select the new priority from the dropdown next to
Priority .
3.
Select a priority from the dropdown.
4.
Save your changes.
The priority icon changes according to your selection.
1.
Choose Set as Irrelevant at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Choose Yes in the Confirm
Ticket Relevance window.
The ticket is set to Irrelevant status and removed from all queues.
1.
Choose Escalate at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Choose Yes in the Confirm
Escalation window.
The ticket is set to Escalated status. Escalated tickets may be assigned to a supervisor or designee depending on your system settings.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
245
Task
Assign a ticket to yourself, another agent, or another team.
Procedure Result
1.
Choose Assign To at the bottom of the screen.
● Select Me to assign the ticket to yourself.
●
●
Select Agent...
to assign the ticket to another agent.
Select Team...
to assign the ticket to another team.
2.
To assign the ticket to another agent or team, do one of the following:
● Enter the name of the agent or team.
● Search for an agent or team by choosing
Value Selection .
Select the agent or team from the options presented.
3.
Choose OK .
The ticket is moved either to you or to the specified agent or team.
Copy a ticket to an On Premise CRM system.
If your solution is connected to the on-premise SAP Customer
Relationship Management (SAP
CRM), you can copy a ticket to this solution by performing the following:
1.
Choose Edit at the bottom of the screen.
2.
Select Copy to CRM the status dropdown.
3.
Save your changes.
A copy of the ticket is now available in the external system. You can still see the ticket in your solution but it can only be edited in the external system. You can see an id number assigned to the ticket in the External ID field in the workspace.
This number cannot be changed. The external system will update the ticket status in your solution.
An agent has copied a ticket to the onpremise SAP CRM system. The agent checks the ticket periodically to make sure the ticket is completed. When the ticket is set to Completed in the external system, the agent can now see that the status of the ticket is set to Completed in the workspace.
246 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Task Procedure
Create follow-up items for a ticket.
You can create tickets and sales quotes to create follow-up tasks so you can complete a ticket.
1.
Choose Follow Up .
2.
Select either Create Ticket or
Create Sales Quote .
3.
Enter all necessary information and save your changes.
Result
Copy ticket information into a new ticket.
You can view the follow-up items created for the ticket in Document
Flow . Follow-up items are indicated by an arrow that points away from the ticket you are working on.
You can copy ticket information from an existing ticket into a new ticket, for example, to make a ticket for a customer that is having a similar issue.
1.
Choose Copy .
2.
Some of original ticket information will be copied from the ticket you are working on.
3.
Enter all necessary additional information and save your changes.
You won't see tickets leave your queue until you exit the workspace.
Responding to a Ticket
The channel of the ticket determines your response options. For example, you can respond to a Twitter ticket by posting a tweet.
1.
Choose Reply , Comment , or Compose New E-Mail . The options available to you will depend on the channel of the ticket and any past interactions.
2.
Type your response or select a template to use in your response.
If your system is set up to support it, you can insert a chat link in your response so that you or another agent can begin a live chat session with the customer.
3.
Attach any articles that may help your customer. This action is not available when replying to Facebook comments.
4.
Choose Tweet , Comment , or Send . Again, the options available will be determined by the ticket type.
Your response will be added to the interactions for the ticket. You may need to refresh the screen to see your response appear.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
247
Responses that contain profanity are blocked from being sent by the solution. If your message contains profanity, the solution will ask you to remove it.
See the relevant section below for more information on responding to tickets from or through different channels.
●
●
●
●
If you reply to a tweet, your response will be sent to Twitter as a reply to the original tweet from the customer.
Public responses to Twitter tickets are limited 140 characters, including spaces. If you enter a message greater than 140 characters, you will not be able to send the response. The solution counts the remaining available characters as you type.
You can use Twitter to send a private message if the user follows the Twitter handle of the company used in the response.
You can retweet a message to Twitter that has been posted by a customer. Hover your mouse over the message in Interactions and choose Retweet . The message will be posted on your company’s Twitter page.
● Customers can send either public messages by commenting on your company's Facebook wall or private messages by messaging your company using Facebook. Your response will automatically be public if the customer's message was public or private if the customer's message was private.
●
●
If you reply to a Facebook message, your response will be sent to Facebook as a reply to the customer's original Facebook message.
If your solution is set up to support it and your company's Facebook page allows nested commenting, you can reply to comments to a post in Facebook. Your response will appear underneath the original comment.
●
●
●
●
To respond to a customer via e-mail, your system must have the customer's e-mail address stored. For more
information about editing a customer's profile to add an e-mail address, see Individual Customers
You may have the option to reply to a ticket, or compose a new e-mail. If you choose to reply, the previous customer message will be copied, in addition to preserving any of the recipients of the last e-mail.
If your system is set up to support it, you can respond to tickets from the agent workspace using Microsoft
Outlook ® . To do this, you must download and install the SAP Cloud for Customer Add-In for Microsoft Outlook.
and Working from Microsoft Outlook for Service Users [page 214]
.
If the e-mail bounces, you will receive an error message in Interactions . The error message will be generated after the solution tries to deliver the message.
SAP HANA Cloud Portal, Support Site Option
● If your company has enabled a support portal, you can post a note to the portal.
Chat
● Depending on the configuration of your system, the chat transcript may be available to you after the live chat has ended in the ticket interactions.
Using the Knowledge Base
●
●
The knowledge base may be pre-populated with articles based on any tags associated with the ticket. If browsing in your knowledge base is enabled, you can also search the knowledge base for relevant articles.
Choose an article to preview it. Attach it to the ticket by hovering over the article and choosing Attach .
248 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
●
●
When you attach an article from the knowledge base, a URL will be entered into the reply box.
Choose Reset to clear your search terms and return to the original list of recommended solutions.
Searching for Similar Tickets
1.
Enter your search terms in the Search input field in Similar Tickets . Press
Enter
or choose Search to initiate the search.
The solution will return a list of in process and completed tickets based on your search keywords.
2.
There are two ways to see the articles attached to a ticket: a.
Click the link next to the paperclip icon in the list view.
b.
Open the ticket in detail view by choosing the ticket number and then opening the Attached Articles tab.
The ticket detail allows you to see both the ticket history and the articles attached to the ticket.
3.
You can send customers a link to an article by choosing Attach .
a.
Click Attach to Article if you accessed the article from the link in the list view.
b.
Click the attach ( + ) button if you accessed the article from the Attached Articles tab in the detail view.
A URL will be entered into the text box in the ticket activities area.
4.
Click Reset to clear your search terms.
The original list of recommended solutions will populate the tab and the keywords associated with the ticket will populate the search text box.
Creating a Note
1.
Click Add Note .
2.
Enter your note in the text box.
3.
Save your note. It will be added to the ticket interactions.
Changing Product Information
1.
Choose Edit at the bottom of the screen.
2.
In the Product section, perform one of the following: a.
Type in the product name, then choose
Enter
.
b.
Choose Value Selection to choose the product name from the list in the Select a Product window.
You can also perform a search in this window. For more information, see
.
You can also register the product directly from the workspace by choosing Edit , then Serial Number , then choose
Value Selection . In the resulting window, choose New Registration .
For more information, see
Registered Products [page 234]
.
Changing a Customer
1.
Choose Edit .
2.
In the Customer section, do one of the following:
1.
Choose Value Selection to select the customer name from the list in the window.
You can perform a search in the window. For more information, see
.
2.
Type in the customer name then press
Enter
.
3.
Save the new information.
Adding an Attachment
1.
Click Attachments .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
249
2.
Click Add . Select the source of the attachment.
The Add Attachment window opens.
3.
Click Browse and find the file you want to attach.
4.
Select either Standard Attachment or Internal Attachment from the Document Type selection field.
Internal Attachments can be viewed by all users of the solution but not to customers.
5.
Click Add .
Reviewing the Ticket Change History
In order to review the change history, you need to switch on the tab using the Personalize This Screen feature.
1.
Under Sections , choose Tabs .
2.
Under Tabs , select Change History .
3.
Save your entries and close the personalize pane.
The Change History tab is now active in the workspace.
Changing the Category Information
You can change the category information for the Service Category , Incident Category , Cause Category , Resolution
Category , and Object Category .
1.
Choose Edit .
2.
In the Category section, choose Value Selection , then select the new category ID.
a.
For incident categories you can pick the new category form the Tree View .
Changing a Message Sentiment
If text analysis incorrectly interprets a message sentiment, you can manually change the sentiment of the message in Interactions .
1.
Choose the sentiment name in Interactions .
2.
Select the new sentiment from the dropdown list.
Viewing Ticket Relationships in Document Flow
The Document Flow tab displays the tickets and sales orders that are related to a ticket you are working on. When you create a follow up ticket or sales order, Document Flow displays the relationship between the items. Arrows point away from the original ticket and point toward any follow up tickets and sales quotes.
Tracking Ticket Progress with Timeline Information
The data points in Timeline help you track a ticket's progress. Some of the dates in the Timeline are pre-populated when you open a ticket. These dates are calculated based on your company's service level agreements and the time at which the ticket was created.
Some of the fields in Timeline will change when you change a ticket value or respond to a customer. The table below describes the events that cause changes to fields in the Timeline .
250 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Field Name
Changed On
What Causes the Value to Change
● Changing information in a ticket.
You change the product associated with the ticket. After you save, the time you see in
Changed On is updated.
●
●
Responding to a customer.
Making a note to the ticket.
Initial Review
Completed
Last Customer
Interaction
Last Agent
Interaction
Changing the ticket status from Open to In Process .
Each time a customer responds to an agent, the time the response occurred will populate this field.
Each time an agent responds to a customer, the time the response occurred will populate this field.
Next Response
Due
Each time a customer responds to an agent, the time populated in Next Response Due will be updated according to your company's service level agreement, if this has been configured for you solution by your administrator.
Date Completed Changing the ticket status to Completed .
5.2.4 Social Media Messages
Social Media Messages allows you to see a messages generated on social media Web sites and broadcasts that you have created. You can see all replies and comments to messages and broadcast as separate items in the social media messages list that can be sorted, filtered, and searched.
You can delete Facebook messages and Twitter responses in the social media messages list using the Actions icon.
Tasks
Sending Broadcast Messages
1.
Click New .
2.
Select the channel to receive the broadcast by either typing in the channel name in the channel field or clicking the Select Channel icon and selecting the channel from the resulting list.
A broadcast can only be used for one channel.
Picture attachments can be sent to Twitter channels.
3.
Enter the broadcast message in the Message text box.
Messages for Twitter cannot contain more than 140 characters, including spaces. As you type, the solution counts the number of characters you have used.
4.
Click Send .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
251
Once a broadcast is sent, it cannot be edited.
See Also
5.2.5 Templates
You can use templates to save time and to standardize responses. Templates are available directly from the workspace and can include placeholders for business data like the customer name or the ticket ID.
You'll find templates under Customer Service Templates .
Tasks
Creating an E-Mail Template
E-mail templates are created and edited directly in the system using a rich text editor and can use placeholders that are automatically replaced with the related business data once the response is sent.
1.
Click New .
2.
Enter the template name.
You can also enter a template description, for example to describe when to use the template.
3.
Select E-Mail as the template's channel type.
4.
Enter the e-mail Subject line.
5.
Enter the e-mail Template Text .
6.
Save your entries.
If you want to use placeholders in your template, you can either Save And Open or go back and edit the template later.
Creating a Social Channel Template
Templates for social media channels use plain text and can include placeholders.
1.
Click New .
2.
Enter the template name.
You can also enter a template description, for example to describe when to use the template.
3.
Select Social as the template's channel type.
4.
Then select the Social Channel .
5.
Enter the Template Text .
Messages for Twitter cannot contain more than 140 characters, including spaces. As you type, the system displays a running character count below the text box.
252 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
6.
Save your entries.
If you want to use placeholders in your template, you can either Save And Open or go back and edit the template later.
Creating a Portal Template
Templates for the service portal use plain text and can include placeholders.
1.
Click New .
2.
Enter the template name.
You can also enter a template description, for example to describe when to use the template.
3.
Enter the Template Text .
4.
Save your entries.
If you want to use placeholders in your template, you can either Save And Open or go back and edit the template later.
Creating a Template from a Response in the Workspace
Once a response has been sent to a customer, you can save it as a template.
1.
Select the outbound response you want to save as a template in the interactions area of the workspace.
2.
Choose the Actions icon.
3.
Choose Save Response As Template .
The New Template quick create opens with the channel type and other relevant fields automatically filled to reflect the response you chose.
4.
Enter a name for the template and, if necessary, add additional information.
5.
Save your entries.
Creating a Corporate Template
If you have administrator access rights in the system, then you have the option of creating corporate templates.
When creating a new template, for any channel type, select Corporate to make the template available for use by all agents.
Adding Placeholders to a Text-Based Template
You can add placeholders for business data in your templates. When a response is sent using a template with placeholders, the system will replace the placeholder with the actual business data it represents.
1.
Open the template details by clicking the template name.
2.
Click inside the Template Text box.
3.
Edit the text and add any of the placeholders from the list below.
4.
Save your changes.
Available Template Placeholders
Placeholder
#AgentName#
#AccountName#
Description
Replaced by the name of the agent assigned to the ticket
Replaced by the name of the account associated with the ticket
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
253
Placeholder
#Status#
#Description#
#TicketID#
#ContactName#
#ProductID#
#CreationDateTime#
#ProductDescription#
#ProductSerialNumber#
#WarrantyID#
Description
Replaced with the status of the ticket
Replaced with the description of the ticket
Replaced with the ID of the ticket
Replaced with the name of the contact associated with the ticket
Replaced with the ID of the product associated with the ticket
Replaced with the date and time when the ticket was created in the system
Replaced with the description of the product associated with the ticket
Replaced with the serial number of the registered product associated with the ticket
Replaced with the ID of the warranty assigned to the ticket
Replaced with the expiration date of the warranty assigned to the ticket
#WarrantyEndDate#
#InitialResponseDueDateTime#
Replaced with the date and time by which the initial response to a ticket should be sent
#CompletionDueDateTime#
Replaced with the date and time by which the ticket should be completed
5.2.6 Unassociated E-Mails
If your system is configured to support e-mail as a channel for creating customer service tickets, then any incoming e-mails that the system cannot automatically convert to a new ticket or assign to an existing ticket get added to the list of unassociated e-mails. These e-mails must be manually processed by agents.
There are several reasons why an e-mail could not be automatically associated with a ticket. For example, your system may be configured to require manual processing or there may be more than one contact with the same sender e-mail address. The system displays the reason in the e-mail details to assist you determining whether the e-mail should be converted to a new ticket or assigned to an existing ticket.
Processing Unassociated E-Mails
1.
To view the list of unassociated e-mails in your system, go to Customer Service Unassociated E-
Mails .
2.
Open the E-Mail details.
3.
Review the reason why the system did not automatically associate the e-mail with a ticket.
You'll find the reason just above the General section of the e-mail details.
4.
Determine whether the e-mail should be converted to a new ticket or assigned to an existing one.
For example, the reason indicates there were no matching contacts found for the e-mail address used to send the e-mail. But the e-mail message itself mentions a corporate customer account and includes a full contact name. You look up the account and find the contact mentioned in the e-mail.
Since the e-mail message does not mention an open issue or known ticket, you determine that this e-mail should be converted to a new ticket for that customer.
254 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
5.
Under Action , choose one of the following:
● Convert to New Ticket
The New Ticket quick create opens where you can complete the required information and save your entries to create a new ticket based on the e-mail.
The e-mail is removed from the list of unassociated e-mails and can no longer be processed as an e-mail.
●
●
Assign to Existing Ticket
A selection dialog box opens where you can choose a ticket to which to assign the e-mail.
The e-mail is removed from the list of unassociated e-mails and can no longer be processed as an e-mail.
Delete
Deletes the e-mail.
Only administrators can delete unassociated e-mail messages.
6.
Close the e-mail details.
5.3 Customers
5.3.1 Accounts
On the Accounts tab, you can display existing accounts, create new accounts, and set account statuses. You can also display account details, review additional data, and rename and edit accounts, as required, and, if you are authorized to do so, assign employees to an account team.
Once you have created an account, it can no longer be deleted. You can, however, set its status as
Obsolete .
Tasks
Creating Accounts
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the Name and Country of the account, then specify its City .
If desired, you also may enter the account's Web site, or specify its classification.
4.
Save your entries.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
255
If your administrator has configured the solution to check for potential duplicate accounts, then the system performs a duplicate check when you save the account to ensure that its information is unique.
Alternatively you can select Check for Duplicates , before you save the account.
If the information you enter is found to resemble the information of an existing account, then the solution notifies you that potential duplicate accounts were found.
You might be confused that if you enter, for example, the name
Eastsouth
and the system doesn't find the already existing
Eastsouth Corp
as a duplicate. The reason is that the system calculates the duplicate possibility according a specific algorithm and only accounts with a similarity above the configured threshold are shown as possible duplicates.
The algorithm calculates the account name similarity of two accounts with one account name consisting of one word, for example,
Eastsouth
, and the other account name consisting of two words, for example,
Eastsouth Corp
with a similarity that is below the standard threshold. Hence the existing
Eastsouth Corp
is not shown as possible duplicate.
Therefore we recommend to enter as much correct information as possible if you want to get reasonable results, especially the whole account name and, for example, address information.
Alternatively, you can contact your administrator to change the system settings to weak duplicate checks.
You can find theses settings in your implementation project in the Business Configuration work center when you edit the project scope: Phase Questions General Business Data Business
Partners Handling of Business Partners Group: Duplicate Check for Business Partners .
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
You may designate only one primary contact per account. Secondary contacts cannot be specified.
If Territory Management has been activated, then an employee who is not defined to be a territory owner cannot be defined as the owner of an account.
Editing Accounts
You can edit accounts from the Account item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the account, position the cursor over the Name field.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the dropdown menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
From the item header, you can only edit the current main address of an account.
To edit an address other than the current main address, or to designate a different address as the main address, choose the Addresses tab.
Choosing Account Filters
In the standard solution, accounts are displayed in various filters, described below:
256 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Standard Account Filters
Filter
My Accounts
Accounts Displayed
Accounts where you are assigned either to the account team or (if territory management is active in your solution) to the territory team.
My Account
Team's Accounts
Accounts where you are assigned to the account team.
This filter only appears if territory management is active in your solution.
My Territory
Team's Accounts
Accounts where you are assigned to the territory team.
This filter only appears if territory management is active in your solution.
My Team's
Accounts
Accounts where anyone in your organization, including employees in subordinate organizations, is assigned either to the account team or (where applicable) to the territory team:
● For employees, the team is defined as employees in the organization to which the logged on user is directly assigned, and employees in any organization subordinate to the logged on user’s organization.
● For managers, the team is defined as employees
○ in any organization which the logged on user is assigned as manager, and employees in any organization subordinate to the organization logged on user is assigned as a manager, and;
●
○ in the organization to which the logged on user is directly assigned, and employees in any organization subordinate to the logged on user’s organization.
If the logged on user is not assigned to any position in any organization, then the team is just the employee.
Accounts for which you have at least read access.
All
The accounts that appear in your solution, per filter, may differ in relation to the access restrictions that your administrator has established.
The standard filters above do not include obsolete accounts. To view obsolete accounts, create and save a
new filter. For more information, see Working with Lists [page 45]
.
The default filter is My Accounts . You can modify the range of accounts displayed by selecting among these filters.
Using Advanced Filters
If you are using the advanced filters, you can filter your accounts, for example, by including sub-territories or narrowing the result by adding a top-level account.
Feature Account in SAP Jam
Business objects like Accounts can be featured in SAP Jam from your SAP Cloud for Customer system.
1.
In the Accounts view, select a single account or multiple accounts.
2.
Select New , Feature in Group .
3.
From the Feature in popup, select the group in which you want to feature the account and click OK .
Setting Account Status
From the account details, use the Actions menu to choose the following applicable status:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
257
●
●
●
Choose Actions Set as Active to change the account status to Active.
Choose Actions Block to change the account status to Blocked, which will exclude the account from subsequent search results. By blocking an account, you also prevent future opportunities, activities and other items from being assigned to it.
Choose Actions Set as Obsolete to change the account status to Obsolete. By setting an account as obsolete, you also prevent future opportunities, activities and other items from being assigned to it.
You may assign a new status to an account at any time, as required. For example, you can set any active account as obsolete, or any blocked account as active.
Using Calendar View
The calendar view only appears in HTML5 clients. You are using an HTML5 client if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. For further information, contact your system administrator.
This view shows the calendar from the perspective of an account.
To show all upcoming appointments, visits, and phone calls scheduled by anyone in your organization for an account, select that account and choose the calendar view. Each one is color coded, based on its status.
You can create new appointments, visits, or phone calls right from the calendar view.
Using Map View
If your administrator has configured the solution accordingly, then you can display accounts in Map View , if desired.
Choose Map View to see, in an integrated third-party mapping service, the location of each account address — both individually, and in relation to one another. Within Map View , you can also zoom in, zoom out, and pan in any direction.
Reviewing Tabs in Account Details
The tabs that you see in the account details depend upon the features of SAP Cloud for Customer that your company has implemented.
Some of the tabs below are not visible by default. Assuming the features are enabled by your administrator, you must personalize the screen to make some tabs visible. For more information, watch the video
Customizing Your Personal Settings .
From the account details, you can select these tabs to perform additional actions. The following table summarizes, per feature, the tabs that are available:
Tab
Overview
Feed
Actions
Select this tab to see the latest updates made to the account, the contacts designated to the account, and any addresses associated with the account.
yes
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes
Select this tab to read, open, tag, flag or comment feed updates that
are associated with this account. For more information, see About the Feed [page 21] .
yes yes
258 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Tab
Recent Orders
Actions
Select this tab to view recent orders that are associated with this account.
If your administrator has not set up the 360 overview, then this tab will not appear.
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes yes no Charts ●
●
On this tab, under Average Sales Cycle , you can view the average sales cycle, in number of days, for this account and for all accounts. Data for each average sales cycle is represented separately, but both sets of data are represented in relation to the quarterly sales cycle. You may also export this data to Microsoft Excel ® , if desired. For more information, see
On this tab, under Revenue Trend , you can view the overall revenue trend for this account in relation to the quarterly sales cycle. You may also export this data to Microsoft Excel, if desired.
yes
Activities
Account Team
Select this tab to view, edit or create appointments, tasks, phone calls, or e-mails that are associated with this account.
yes
Select this tab to add employees to, or remove employees from, the team responsible for this account. Here you can also add employees with the same role but with different validities and sales data responsibilities, such as Sales Organization , Distribution Channel ,
Division . If you possess the appropriate authorizations, you can also modify the role of employees who are assigned to this account.
yes
If territory management is active, then the sales territory team also appears in this tab.
yes yes
Sales Territories Select this tab to view associated sales territories.
If your administrator has not configured the solution to make sales territories visible, then this tab will not appear.
yes no
Relationships Select this tab to view associated relationships.
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP
ERP, then this tab will not appear.
yes yes
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
259
Tab
Addresses
Contacts
Account
Hierarchy
Campaigns
Sales Leads
Opportunities
Actions
Select this tab to view, edit or add addresses that are associated with this account.
For any account, only one address can be specified as the main address.
To indicate that an address may be used for shipping or billing, select
Yes in the corresponding column. If more than one shipping or billing address is specified, select Yes (standard) in the appropriate column to designate an address as the default shipping or billing address.
yes
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes
It is not possible to remove an existing address from an account, because the existing address may already be referenced by other items, such as leads and opportunities.
If you have data for geographic placements for the address you can enter them in the fields Latitude and Longitude and you can make them visible on an online map provider using a mash-up.
You have the following options to enter latitude and longitude:
● You can export all addresses, use an external service to create the data, and import the data back using the mass data maintenance or the migration tool.
●
●
●
You can use the A2X service II_MANAGE_CUSTOMER_IN to update the data.
You can update the fields creating a custom solution using
SDK.
You can use a data mash-up to clean-up the fields on update with geo codes.
Select this tab to add new or existing contacts to, or remove contacts from, this account. On this tab, you can also designate a contact as the Primary Contact for the account.
To add an existing contact click Actions Add and select a contact.
yes
Select this tab to view the displayed accounts in a hierarchical structure, provided that a parent account has been specified for the accounts at hand. You can expand and collapse the account hierarchy at any level to display as many or as few accounts as you like.
yes
If your administrator has not configured the solution to make account hierarchies visible, then this tab will not appear.
yes yes
Select this tab to view associated campaigns.
Select this tab to view or create sales leads that relate to this account. yes
Select this tab to view or create opportunities that relate to this account.
yes yes no no no
260 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Tab
Attachments
Groups
Actions
Select this tab to view, edit or add attachments that relate to this account.
Select this tab to view information that derives from SAP Jam, and to perform the following actions:
● create internal groups in SAP Jam to collaborate on account team meetings, prepare for customer visits, and so on
● create external or cross-company groups in SAP Jam to safeguard accounts, upsell products, and so on
●
●
●
●
● automatically invite account team members and contacts to the group in SAP Jam, with the flexibility to add or remove email addresses view a list of groups in SAP Jam that are associated with the given account, and navigate from this list to SAP Jam navigate from SAP Jam back to the account view a list of recommended groups in SAP Jam for the given account, and navigate from this list to SAP Jam view the latest SAP Jam Feed updates for the associated groups yes
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes yes no
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP
Jam, then this tab will not appear.
Sales Data
Sales
Documents
Tickets
Target Groups
Registered
Products
Visiting Hours
Select this tab to view or edit associated sales data from SAP
Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) and SAP ERP.
Select this tab to view associated sales documents.
Select this tab to view associated tickets.
Select this tab to view associated target groups.
Select this tab to view associated registered products.
yes yes
Here you can define the hours for visits. These date and time ranges are taken into account when sales and service representatives plan site visits for accounts.
yes
The Visiting Hours tab is delivered hidden. To use it, either personalize your screen, or ask your administrator to adapt the screens for everyone in the company.
no yes no
Visits Select this tab to view associated visits, and to set the recommended visit frequency for this account.
yes
Product Lists Select this tab to view associated product lists.
Survey Results Select this tab to view associated survey results.
yes yes no no yes no yes yes no yes yes
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
261
Tab
Marketing
Attributes
Actions
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
no If integration with SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP
CRM) is set up in your system, then you can choose this tab to access
SAP CRM marketing attributes associated with this account.
yes
Assigning Employees to an Account Team
In the Microsoft Silverlight ® client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Select the Account Team tab.
4.
Open the Employees pane.
5.
Drag the icon of the appropriate employee from the Employees pane and drop it onto the table within the
Account Team tab.
In the HTML5 client, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Select the Account Team tab, then choose Add .
4.
Specify the party role and name of the employee to be assigned, then choose Add .
Removing Employees from an Account Team
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Select the Account Team tab.
4.
Find the employee to be removed.
5.
In the Action column corresponding to the employee to remove, choose Remove .
Deleting Account Activities
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Activities .
4.
Within the Action column of the activity to be deleted, choose Delete .
Deleting activities from the account removes them from the system entirely.
5.
In the dialog box that follows, confirm that you want to delete the selected activity.
Generating Account Summaries
To generate a summary of any account in PDF format, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
262 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Summary .
Opening CRM Factsheet
To open a CRM Factsheet, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Actions CRM Customer Factsheet .
Launching ERP Customer Cockpit
From the details of the account on the Sales Data tab you can also launch the ERP Cockpit with Actions ERP
Cockpit and you can open an ERP Customer Factsheet as PDF with Actions ERP Customer Factsheet presumed your system is connected with ERP.
Prerequisites
To enable the Cloud for Customer system to launch the ERP Customer Cockpit you must do the following adaptations:
1.
In the Administrator work center choose General Mashups Mashup Authoring and search for
Account Cockpit (SM00105) and update the URL with the connected ERP system data.
ERP
2.
To find the URL, login to the corresponding ERP system and do the following steps:
1.
Start transaction
SICF
, enter
CFS_APPILCATION
into the field ServiceName and press F8 .
The service cfs_application is shown in the next screen.
2.
Make a right click on the screen and select Test Service .
3.
A web browser is opened with an URL. Copy this URL.
Alternatively you can also to the following:
Start transaction
SE80
, select Web Dynpro Comp/Intf.
and enter
CFS_COMPONENT
and click Display . Then open web dynpro applications cfs_application
and under the properties, copy the URL from field URL .
3.
Now you can paste the URL in the mash-up and save your work.
Using International Address Versions
If your administrator has activated this function, then proceed as follows to record address information for accounts in multiple character sets — for example, in the Greek or Roman alphabets, or in Cyrillic or Thai script, among others.
1.
Choose Customers Accounts .
2.
Open the appropriate account.
3.
Choose Actions International Version .
4.
On the following screen, from the dropdown list, select the alternative alphabet or script in which the address information is to be specified.
If a user is logged on to the system in Japanese, but wants to enter address information for an account in Thailand, then that user can specify the Thai script from the dropdown to enter the address, as required.
5.
Choose OK .
This function is also accessible from the Addresses tab of the account.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
263
See Also
Start Here for SAP Cloud for Sales
5.3.2 Contacts
Contacts are organized in relation to the accounts from which they originate. For more information, see
.
On the Contacts tab, you can display existing contacts associated with accounts, create new contacts, and set contact statuses. You can also display contact details, review additional data, and rename and edit contacts, as required.
Once you have created a contact, it can no longer be deleted. You can, however, set its status as
Obsolete .
Tasks
Creating Contacts
1.
Choose Customers Contacts .
2.
Choose New .
3.
Enter the First Name and Last Name of the contact, then specify the Account that is associated with it.
If desired, enter additional details for the contact, such as organizational information, or the Phone , Mobile , and E-Mail of the contact.
4.
Save your entries.
If your administrator has scoped the solution to check for potential duplicate contacts, then select
Check for Duplicates , before you save the contact, to ensure that its information is unique.
If the information you enter is found to resemble the information of an existing contact, then the solution notifies you that potential duplicate contacts were found.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
Editing Contacts
You can edit contacts from the Contact item header, as follows:
1.
Position the cursor over the information to be edited. For example, if you want to rename the contact, position the cursor over the Name field.
2.
Change the desired entries.
Depending on the field, use the dropdown menu or automatic search to choose an entry.
3.
Save your entries.
For a description of the available save options, see Save Options.
264 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
From the item header, you cannot edit the business address of the account that is associated with this contact, but you can use the dropdown menu to specify a different business address for this contact, if desired.
To create or edit personal addresses for the contact, choose the Addresses tab.
Choosing Contact Filters
Contacts are displayed in one of three standard filters, described below:
Standard Contact Filters
Filter
All
Contacts Displayed
All contacts of all accounts that you are authorized to access.
My Contacts
My Team's
Contacts
All contacts of all accounts for which you are assigned as a member of the account team.
All contacts of all accounts for which you are assigned as a member of the account team, and, if you are a sales manager, all contacts of all accounts for which any subordinate of yours is assigned as a member of the account team.
The standard filters above do not include obsolete accounts. To view obsolete contacts, create and save a
new filter. For more information, see Working with Lists [page 45]
.
The default filter is My Contacts , You can modify the range of accounts displayed by selecting among these filters.
Setting Contact Status
From the contact details, use the Actions menu to choose the following applicable status:
● Choose Actions Set as Active to change the contact status to Active.
● Choose Actions Block to change the contact status to Blocked, which will exclude the contact from subsequent search results.
● Choose Actions Set as Obsolete to change the contact status to Obsolete.
You may assign a new status to a contact at any time, as required. For example, you can set any active contact as obsolete, or any blocked contact as active.
Reviewing Tabs in Contact Details
The tabs that you see in the contact details depend upon the features of SAP Cloud for Customer that your company has implemented.
Some of the tabs below are not visible by default. Assuming the features are enabled by your administrator, you must personalize the screen to make some tabs visible. For more information, watch the video
Customizing Your Personal Settings .
From the contact details, you can select these tabs to perform additional actions. The following table summarizes, per feature, the tabs that are available:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
265
Registered
Products
Campaigns
Marketing
Interactions
Tickets
Marketing
Permissions
Marketing
Attributes
Tab
Overview
Feed
Addresses
Activities
Sales Leads
Opportunities
Relationships
Actions
Select this tab to see the latest updates made to the contact, and any addresses associated with the contact.
Available in SAP
Cloud for Sales?
Available in SAP
Cloud for
Service and SAP
Cloud for Social
Engagement?
yes yes yes Select this tab to read any Feed updates that are associated with this
contact. For more information, see About the Feed [page 21]
.
On this tab, you can also open, tag or flag Feed updates, mark them
as favorites, or comment them. For more information, see Tags
.
yes
Select this tab to view, edit or add addresses that are associated with this contact.
yes yes
It is not possible to remove an existing address from a contact, because the existing address may already be referenced by other items, such as leads and opportunities.
yes Select this tab to view, edit or create activities that are associated with this contact — including appointments, tasks, phone calls, and e-mails. For more information, see
.
yes
Select this tab to view leads that relate to this contact. For more information, see
.
yes
Select this tab to view potential sales opportunities for this contact.
For more information, see Opportunities [page 97] .
yes
Select this tab to view associated relationships.
yes
If your administrator has not enabled integration with SAP
ERP, then this tab will not appear.
yes yes yes
Select Registered Products to view registered products associated with this contact.
Select this tab to view associated campaigns.
Select this tab to view associated marketing interactions.
Select this tab to view tickets associated with this contact.
Select this tab to view the marketing permissions that have been defined for this contact.
no yes yes no yes
If integration with SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP
CRM) is set up in your system, then you can choose this tab to access
SAP CRM marketing attributes associated with this contact.
yes yes no no yes no no
See Also
266 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
5.3.3 Individual Customers
Individual customers are those customers who are not associated with a corporate account and do business with your company directly.
If your system has been configured to support e-mail as a channel for individual customers, then each time an individual sends an e-mail which results in a new ticket, the system automatically creates an individual customer record based on the e-mail address of the individual.
Additionally, if your system has been configured to support social media channels for customer interaction, then similarly each time an individual posts a message for the first time on one of your social media channels which results in a new ticket, the system automatically creates a customer profile based on their user account for that channel.
You can open the customer profile to view the details by clicking the customer name anywhere it appears on the user interface.
Reviewing and Editing Customer Details
General Information
Field or Feature
Contact Information
Social Information
This information is only available if your system has been configured to support social media channels.
Description
The initial contact information can be limited, for example by the customer's privacy settings on the originating social media site. If you have further details you want to add to the customer's profile, for example a phone number or address, you can edit it by placing your cursor over the field and clicking inside the box that appears.
Here you can also mark the customer as Prospect .
These are links to the customer's profiles, if available, on the associated social media sites.
You can also assign a social profile by clicking Edit for the associated channel. For more
information, see Reassigning an Individual Customer's Social Media Profile
.
Tickets
All tickets posted directly by this customer are included on the Tickets tab.
You can also manually create a new ticket for the customer from this tab.
1.
Click New .
All the available, relevant information is pre-filled in the new ticket quick create.
2.
Complete the mandatory fields and enter any other relevant information.
3.
Save your entries.
A new, open ticket is created.
Account Team
Here you can maintain the employees and their roles for this customer.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
267
Sales Data
On the Sales Data tab you can maintain the sales data relevant for this customer, such as Sales Organization ,
Distribution Channle , and Division .
Social Media Messages
All social media messages associated with this customer are listed in Social Media Messages .
You can delete social media messages by selecting the Actions icon and then Delete .
Social Profiles
If the customer has an associated Twitter profile, the Social Profiles tab will display additional information about the customer's Twitter account, if available, as well as his or her recent tweets (Twitter Timeline), and Klout profile information.
Section
Twitter Profile
Description
Additional information about the customer's Twitter account
The availability of information is based on the customer's privacy settings on
Twitter.
Klout Profile
Twitter Timeline
A breakdown of the customer's Klout score
Recent tweets to or from the customer's handle, listed in real-time order
Addresses
All addresses for the individual customer are listed here.
If you have data for geographic placements for the address you can enter them in the fields Latitude and
Longitude and you can make them visible on an online map provider with a mash-up.
Activities
All activities related to the customer are included in the tables. You can also create new activities by clicking New in the relevant section.
For more information, see
.
Registered Products
Any products registered to the customer are displayed in the list. You can also add new registered products by clicking New .
For more information, see
Registered Products [page 234]
.
Sales Territories
This tab is only visible if your administrator has enabled the usage of more then one territory for each account in your system.
You can find the option in the scoping phase Questions of your implementation project the Business Configuration work center under Sales Accoutn and Activity Management Territory Management :
Do you want to assign an account to more than one territory?
268 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Opening CRM Factsheet
To open a CRM Factsheet, proceed as follows:
1.
Choose Customers Individual Customers .
2.
Open the appropriate individual customer.
3.
Choose Actions CRM Customer Factsheet .
5.3.4 Reassigning an Individual Customer's Social Media Profile
You can reassign a social media profile, that is, a Facebook profile or Twitter handle, from one individual customer to another. Reassigning the social profile does not automatically reassign any other data, including any open or in process tickets—those must be moved manually.
There are two customer records for the same individual—one created from a Facebook post (customer
A) and the other from a Twitter post (customer B). You decide which of the two individual customers to keep, let's say customer B. So you transfer any open or in process tickets from customer A to customer
B. Then you reassign the Facebook profile from customer A to customer B. Finally, you contact your system administrator to mark the extra individual customer, customer A, as obsolete. This will ensure that the system ignores that record going forward.
This example is depicted in the following figure:
Example of Reassigning a Social Media Profile
Tasks
Moving Tickets
Because reassigning a social media profile does not reassign any tickets, you should manually move any open or in process tickets from the individual customer whose social media profile you'll be reassigning.
1.
From the Tickets tab of the individual customer whose tickets you want to move, open a ticket.
2.
Change the customer.
For more information, see Changing a Customer.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
269
3.
Save your entries and repeat for any remaining tickets to be moved.
Assigning a Social Media Profile
Every social media profile in the system is associated with an individual customer, so by assigning a social media profile to one, you are removing it from another.
1.
Go to the Individual Customer details.
2.
Under the Social Information section, click Edit to assign either a Facebook or Twitter profile.
3.
Click the value help to find the social media profile you want to assign to the individual customer.
4.
Save your entries.
If you know that the individual customer whose profile you have just removed is a duplicate record and should be ignored by the system for further processing, then contact your system administrator to mark that customer as obsolete.
5.4 Registered Products
A registered product is one that is associated with a specific customer and for which you have recorded a unique serial number. When a ticket is created, the registered product information allows the agent to identify the unique customer product, the current valid warranty, and to determine service entitlements if any exist. Additional information, such as product location or sales channel, is used in the service process and for reporting purposes.
Tasks
Registering a Product
You register products using the New Registered Product tool which can be accessed from the following locations in the solution:
● From the toolbar, click New Registered Product .
●
●
●
Under Products Registered Products , click New .
From the customer detail screen on the Registered Products tab, click New .
When you create a registered product from a customer detail screen, the relevant information is automatically copied into the form.
From the workspace, under Additional Information click the Edit icon for Serial ID , then click the Value
Selection icon. On the resulting pop-up, click New Registration .
When you create a registered product from the workspace, the customer and product information in the ticket are automatically copied into the form.
1.
Enter the data for Customer , Product and Serial ID for identifying the registered product.
The registered product ID is made up of the registered product and reference product, and is a unique
ID. However, the registered product is not necessarily unique. For example you can have a registered product 127 for the reference product A, and a registered product 127 for the reference product B.
For this reason, the system may remind you that the number already exists if you should enter a non-unique registered product.
2.
Save your entries.
270 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Editing a Registered Product
You can review or add more information to a registered product from the registered product details screen. And similar to creating a registered product, you can access that details screen from several locations in the solution.
Primarily, from one of the following:
● When creating the new registered product, rather than just saving and closing the form, you can choose instead to Save and Open .
● From the customer details Registered Products tab, click the Serial ID link.
● Under Products Registered Products product you want to review or edit.
, select your query and then click the Serial ID of the registered
Adding Product Details
The Overview tab is where you can enter additional details such as the product location, the owner of the registered product (if different from the customer), and notes.
Remember to save your changes before closing the registered product details.
Adding a Warranty
1.
To add a warranty for the registered product, on the Overview tab, click the Edit icon for Warranty , then click the Value Selection icon and select a warranty from the list.
2.
Save your entries.
For more information, see Warranties [page 236]
.
Adding Attachments
1.
On the Attachments tab, click Add .
2.
Select the type of attachment to add.
● Local File : allows you to choose a file from your local drive and upload it to the system
● Web Link : allows you to define a URL and a display title
● From Library : allows you to choose an attachment from the solution library
For more information, see Library [page 53] .
3.
Save your entries.
Reviewing or Adding Tickets
You can review any existing tickets related to the registered product on the Tickets tab. You can also create a new ticket.
1.
Click New .
2.
Review the automatically filled information and make any necessary changes.
3.
Enter a subject and description for the ticket.
4.
Save your entries.
If you choose to Save and Open , the new ticket will open for processing in the workspace.
Review Changes
You can review the change history for the registered product on the Changes tab.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
271
5.5 Warranties
You can create warranties in the system, defining their duration and any uncovered incident categories. These warranties are then available to assign to registered products.
Tasks
Create a Warranty
1.
Go to Products Warranties and click New .
2.
Enter a name, the ID, and the duration.
Enter the duration as a number and time unit, for example “30 days” or “30 d”, and the system will recognize this and convert it to “30 Day(s)”.
3.
Under Uncovered Incident Categories you can add process or incident categories from your service category catalog.
Tickets assigned an uncovered incident category are excluded from warranty coverage.
Service or process categories without assigned incident categories are not relevant for the warranty coverage. In column Category Type you can see whether you selected a process or an incident category.
4.
Save your entries.
The warranty is created in status In Preparation .
Activate the Warranty
To activate the warranty search for the corresponding warranty and select Actions Activate .
Assigning a Warranty to a Registered Product
1.
Go to Products Registered Products .
2.
Find the relevant registered product and open the details by clicking the serial ID.
3.
For Warranty , click Edit .
4.
Click Value Selection and select the relevant warranty.
5.
Save your entries.
Uncovered Incident Categories
Under Uncovered Incident Categories you can assign incident categories to exclude specific issues from the warranty in case it is selected in, for example, a ticket. To make it easier you can also add service categories. In this case all incident categories underneath the selected service category are uncovered for this warranty. The same applies incident categories below another incident category.
Only the incident categories have an impact whether a warranty should be granted for a product or not. For example, if no incident category was assigned to a service category listed in Uncovered Incident Categories and if you then select this service category in the ticket, no warranty limitation and/or exclusion will take place.
272 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Categories are bundled hierarchically so the higher level also includes the lower levels: Catalog (hidden field by default in the Uncovered Incident Categories ) includes a selection of service categories.
A service category is used to categorize different kinds of service inquiries, for example, a product problem or an information request.
The incident categories, and all related incident categories in a lower level, are subcategories of the service categories and are used to categorize the different types of incidents. The following is an example for the service category product problem: gas boiler or electrical boilers.
● Customer Service & Support (Catalog)
○ Information Request (Service Category)
○ Product Problem (Service Category)
○ Gas Boiler (Incident Category)
○ Control Regulation Unit (Incident Category)
○ Customer Fault (Incident Category)
○
○
○
Installation Problem (Incident Category)
Electrical Boiler (Incident Category)
○ Control Regulation Unit (Incident Category)
○ Customer Fault (Incident Category)
Installation Problem (Incident Category)
A company is selling boilers. All gas boilers should have a 5–year warranty. Excluded from the warranty should be the customer fault category. The administrator creates a warranty that is valid for 5 years and selects under Uncovered Incident Categories the service category Customer Fault (Incident Category) and
Electrical Boiler .
In the case where a customer has a problem with a gas boiler and the issue was, for example, the customer's fault, the warranty of the customer does not cover this damage. But if the damage is due to an installation problem, the damage is covered by the warranty because it was not excluded.
5.6 Analysis
Analysis is your access point to system analytical data and reports that you can use to recognize trends, measure customer sentiment, or track metrics like ticket volume or ticket completion rates.
You can also download reports and run ad-hoc analyses, either in your Web browser or in Microsoft Excel ® .
Service Overview Dashboard
The Service Overview is a set of charts based on the reports in your system. They provide you with a snapshot of the information you find most important and can be rearranged to suit the way you work.
.
To view report details, click the Actions icon and choose one of the following options:
● View with Web Browser
●
●
View with Web Browser — Quick Filter
View with Microsoft Excel®
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
273
Reports for the Customer Service and Social Media Features of SAP Cloud for Customer
The following reports are available from SAP, though your administrator may create custom reports that you can also choose to display in the overview dashboard (listed in alphabetical order):
Reports in SAP Cloud for Service and SAP Cloud for Social Engagement
Report Description
Customer Count Shows the number of customers by channel, product, and time.
Customer Sentiment Measure
Daily Average Service Request Backlog
Shows a customer’s average sentiment over time.
Shows the number of daily average service requests for month-to-date and year-to-date.
Daily Average Service Request Backlog (Priority) Shows the number of daily average service requests by priority.
Daily Average Service Request Backlog (Service Organization) Shows the number of daily average service requests by structure, service organization, and service and support organization.
Daily Average Service Request Backlog (Top-10 Service
Category)
Daily Average Service Request Backlog (Year)
Operational Metrics
Sentiment Measure
Service Request Backlog
Shows the number of daily average service requests by the top 10 service categories.
Shows the number of daily average service requests by year.
Shows the average handle time by agent, channel, product, and time.
Shows the number of positive, neutral, and negative sentiments by channel, product, and time.
Shows the number of open and in process service request backlog items per rolling week.
Service Request Completion Rate
Service Request Daily Average
Ticket Activity Volume
Ticket Completion Rate
Ticket Escalation Rate
Shows the service request completion rate by day.
Shows the number of service request daily average for monthto-date and year-to-date.
Shows the total number of inbound ticket activities, including original messages, comments, and likes by channel and product.
Shows the percentage of tickets completed by channel, product, agent, and time.
Shows the percentage of tickets escalated by channel, product, agent, and time.
Ticket Priority
Ticket Volume
Top 5 Influencers
Shows the average and median ticket priority scores and the number of high, medium, and low priority tickets by channel, product, and time.
Shows the number of tickets by channel, product, status, and time.
Shows the top 5 influencers or customers based on the Klout score or message volume by channel and product.
274 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
Report
Top 5 Knowledge Base Articles
Top 5 Topics
Description
Shows the top 5 knowledge base articles shared with customers by channel, product, and time.
Shows the top 5 topics identified in tickets by channel, product, and time.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Social Media Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
275
6 Industry Features
6.1 Design Win Exchange
6.1.1 VIDEO: Start Here for Design Win Exchange
Video
Start Here for Design Win Exchange (4m 42s)
Find out how collaboration between brand owners and channel partners is supported using the design win exchange process.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
6.1.2 Design Registration
About this document
The customer aliasing feature is not supported on iPad for Design Win Exchange.
Please note that this document is relevant only for HTML5-based screens. Either the described function is available only in HTML5, or its HTML5 version differs from the Microsoft Silverlight ® version. To use this function in the Microsoft Silverlight client, please log on to the Microsoft Silverlight-based screen and follow the instructions in the corresponding help document.
Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. Your solution is Microsoft Silverlightbased if a Silverlight pop-up window appears when you right-click anywhere on the screen.
If your system is set up to support it, you can use the design win exchange process to drive your indirect channel sales through design registration. Your channel partners can access your solution directly to upload or create new design registrations. You can then review, approve, and even transfer the design registrations within your channel partner network. You can also create sales quotes based on design registrations.
For more information, watch the video Start Here for Design Win Exchange [page 276]
.
276 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
Design Registration Process
The following table describes the various tasks involved in the design registration process:
Design Registration Tasks
Create or upload design registrations
Submit design registration for approval
Review design registration and assign sales team, including an approver
Assign end customer
Approve design registration
Obtain end customer acceptance
Set to design in
Set to design win
Copy design registration (optional)
Convert design registration to sales quote
Set to design won
Who Performs the Task
Channel partner contact
Channel partner contact
Brand owner
Brand owner
Approver assigned by brand owner
Channel partner contact
Channel partner contact
Brand owner
Brand owner
Brand owner
Brand owner
Tasks
Creating Design Registrations
1.
To create a single design registration, go to Design Win Exchange and click New .
2.
Enter the information for your new design, being sure to pay special attention to the end customer data so that the brand owner can easily match it to a customer account.
3.
Save your entries and open the design registration to add products and any technical specifications you may have.
4.
To add products to the design, go to the Products tab and click Add .
a.
Choose from the list of available registrable products.
Any win metrics defined for the product are displayed.
b.
Enter the quantity information and save your entries.
5.
To include technical specifications, upload the file from the Attachments tab.
6.
Save your entries.
7.
Once you're ready to submit the design to the brand owner, click Actions
The brand owner will receive a notification to review the design registration.
Submit for Approval .
Importing Design Registrations
Rather than creating design registrations one at a time in the solution, you can import one or more via a file upload.
1.
Go to Design Win Exchange .
2.
Click and choose Import Design Registrations from Microsoft Excel® .
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
277
You need to download the Add-In for Microsoft Excel from the Download screen.
3.
Once the file opens, fill in the details for the design registrations you want to submit.
4.
Before you can save the data to the SAP solution, you need to establish a connection from the file.
Go to the SAP Cloud for Customer tab in the file and click Logon .
5.
For the SAP System URL , enter the URL for the solution tenant up to the
.com
. For example, https://<sap solution tenant>.com
.
6.
Enter the user name and password you use to log on to the solution and click Log On .
7.
Once you've logged on successfully, you have the option to Save Data to which transfers the data in your file to the SAP solution.
8.
Once you're ready to submit a design to the brand owner, open the design in the solution and click
Actions Submit for Approval .
The brand owner will receive a notification to review the design registration.
Reviewing Design Registrations
You will receive a notification any time a channel partner contact assigned to your sales unit submits a new design registration. After reviewing the details provided by the partner, you also need to assign an approver for the design and identify the end customer account before the design can be approved.
1.
To open the design registration, click the link in the notification or select the design registration from the list on the Design Win Exchange tab.
2.
To add an approver, go to the Internal Sales Team tab and click Add .
3.
Select Approver for the role and then assign an employee.
4.
To assign an account in your system as the end customer, click Actions Convert to Account .
5.
Select an account from the results list and click OK .
The solution will run a search based on the partner entry for end customer. If no matches are found, you need to send the design registration back to the partner for more information.
6.
Save your entries.
The approver you assigned will receive a notification that the design registration needs to be approved.
Approving Design Registrations
You will receive a notification any time you are assigned as an approver for a design registration.
Once you're satisfied that it is not a duplicate and it should be approved, open the design registration and click
Actions Approve .
The partner contact who submitted the design registration will receive a notification that the design is approved.
Setting Design Registrations to Design In
You will receive a notification any time a brand owner's organization has approved one of your design registrations.
This signals that you can work with the end customer to get their acceptance of the design.
Once you get the end customer to accept the design, you indicate this in the solution by changing the status of the design registration to Set as Design In .
The brand owner will receive a notification that the design is in.
278 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
Copying Design Registrations
Once a design is in, you can create a direct copy of the design registration, Actions Copy , which copies all information from the original to create a new design registration.
You can also create a copy of the design registration with the intent to transfer it to a different distributor,
Actions Transfer , which copies all information from the original except the distributor.
Converting Design Registrations to Sales Quotes
Once you're satisfied with a design registration which has the status, Design In , you can covert it to a sales quote.
1.
From the design registration details, click Actions Set as Design Win .
2.
Then choose Actions Convert to Quote .
A New Quote screen opens.
3.
Complete the information for the sales quote and save your entries.
You can see access the new sales quote from the Sales Documents tab of the design registration details.
For more information, watch the video Creating Sales Quotes [page 111]
or see Creating and Processing Sales
Setting Design Registrations to Design Won
Once the sales cycle has been completed for a particular design, and you are satisfied the accumulated point-ofsale threshold has been met, you can set the design to won.
From the design registration details, click Actions Set as Design Won .
6.1.3 Defining Registrable Products for Design Win Exchange
By indicating that a product is registrable, you make it possible for your channel partners to include that product in the design registrations they submit.
Please note that this document is relevant only for HTML5-based screens. Either the described function is available only in HTML5, or its HTML5 version differs from the Microsoft Silverlight
®
version. To use this function in the Microsoft Silverlight client, please log on to the Microsoft Silverlight-based screen and follow the instructions in the corresponding help document.
Your solution is HTML5-based if the system URL contains
/HTML5
. Your solution is Microsoft Silverlightbased if a Silverlight pop-up window appears when you right-click anywhere on the screen.
Tasks
Identifying Registrable Products
In order to make a product registrable, you need to set the following parameters on the product master:
● Registrable –allows your channel partners to include a product when they register a new design.
● Not Registrable –removes the product from the list of registrable products so that it can no longer be included in new design registrations.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
279
●
●
Start Date –indicates the date from which a product is registrable.
End Date –indicates the date after which a product is no longer registrable.
You need to set these parameters by editing individual products.
1.
Go to Products Product Administration .
2.
Click the product from the list to open the details.
3.
Click Edit .
4.
Select the registrable value.
5.
Enter the start and end dates and save your entries.
The product is now available from the list of products when a partner contact creates a design registration.
Maintain Registrable Product Win Metric Values
You can also maintain various win metric values for each registrable product by uploading the values via Microsoft
Excel®.
You need to download the Add-In for Microsoft Excel from the Download screen.
1.
Go to Design Win Exchange Design Registrable Products .
2.
Click and choose Import Registrable Products from Microsoft Excel® .
3.
Once the file opens, you need to establish a connection to your SAP solution from the file.
Go to the SAP Cloud for Customer tab in the file and click Logon .
4.
For the SAP System URL , enter the URL for your solution tenant up to the
.com
. For example, https://<my tenant>.com
.
5.
Enter the user name and password you use to log on to your solution and click Log On .
6.
Once you've logged on successfully, you have the option to Save Data to which transfers the data in your file to your SAP solution.
7.
Fill in the details for the registrable products in your solution.
For Registrable , you can use the Lookup function in the template to get a list of possible entries.
8.
When you're finished with your entries, save the data to the SAP solution and click Log Off in the file template.
Now, when partners add products to design registrations, they see the win metrics you defined for those products.
6.2 Retail
6.2.1 SAP Cloud for Customer for Retail: Solution Overview
For store associates, retail allows them to enhance the in-store experience for customers. It allows them to provide personalized and streamlined assistance, as well as unique offers, targeted product recommendations, and convenient check out options.
280 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
Associate Only Business to Enterprise Flow In-Store
Associates use SAP Cloud for Retail to perform their work and to assist customers while shopping in the retail establishment.
● Clock-In:
A store associate can enter the times they have worked on a particular day, or for multiple days in a week.
They can also cancel a time entry, or edit any previous time entries.
●
●
●
Check Calendar:
The store associate can use the calendar to view their scheduled tasks, appointments, store events, and current running store promotions
Manage Tasks and Appointments:
Associates and managers can also use the calendar to create new tasks for themselves, as well as to add notes to any tasks that have been assigned to them. They can also block the calendar for training events, record vacation times, sick leave, or other off-work requests.
Check Store Events and Promotions:
Using the calendar, a store associate can view all current and planned promotions in the store. It is possible to have multiple promotions running at the same time. Store events are similar to store promotions; it is possible to have multiple store events running at the same time, and associates can view all store events running on the calendar.
●
●
●
Customer Look-Up/Loyalty Status:
An associate has the ability to access the complete details of a customer in order to provide exceptional customer service. Details include loyalty information, household information, shopping and wish lists, and customer preferences.
Product Look-Up:
In line with the experience the associate wants to provide to the customer, they should be able to recommend any products based on the customer's wish lists.
Personalized Offers:
As part of the custom shopping experience the associate is able to offer to the customer, they should be able to suggest personalized offers to the customer based on previous shopping history, redeemed offers, preferences, and wish lists. These offers are presented to the associate on their device after they have a checkin with a particular customer.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
281
6.2.2 SAP Cloud for Customer for Retail Scenario Overview
About this document
This document is meant for:
● Administrators
●
●
Marketing Managers
Customer Service Agents
●
●
Consultants
End Users
Overview
The SAP Cloud for Customer for Retail solution can be used and deployed by retailers to empower their employees in providing customers with a personalized, and streamlined shopping experience. Sales and service are essential for establishing new rules for retail, as loyalty will be enhanced or eroded with every customer interaction. Every sales associate using a mobile device, varies their interaction with customers in the store. They would know far more about customers who “check in” to the store with their mobile device and will be able to offer a personalized set of products and services. The simple physical presence of a customer in the store will trigger the presentation of personalized promotions.
The consumers' use of digital technology makes it imperative for the retailers to deliver a seamless buying experience across all channels, complete with personalized offers in real-time, based on a consumer’s location and buying habits.
SAP Cloud for Customer for Retail includes a solution for the retail store employee. You have the ability to import all user details, in-store products, offers, and store details from your chosen system of integration and leverage it for a great in-store customer experience using the features and functions of the solution.
SAP Cloud for Customer for Retail enables retailers to get-to-market quickly with an end-to-end application, that offers the features mentioned below. The retail store associate can do the following:
● Customer look-up look-up details for any customer that walks into the store, to get a complete view of the customers’ loyalty status, contact details, and brand interactions
●
●
●
●
●
Check customer into store check-in customer into the store for shopping
Complete customer view access customer details and shopping history to provide exceptional and personalized service
Personalized offer suggestions provide targeted offers to a customer, based on their shopping history, redeemed offers, preferences and/ or wish lists
Product recommendations recommend any products to the customer based on their wish lists
Product lookup look up a product for their customers and provide details like prices, offers, or aisle placement in the store
●
●
In-store availability check check for inventory availability in their stores as well as across other store locations
Product and store offers
282 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
● access any offers available for a product or offers specific to the store
Create and maintain in-store activities and tasks
Tasks
Scenarios for SAP Cloud for Customer for Retail
The SAP Cloud for Customer for Retail solution is targeted towards two major business roles:
● Store Associate
Is responsible for providing personalized assistance and an enhanced in-store experience for shoppers with unique offers and promotions, access to complete customer view and shopping history with your brand, product lookup and check for store inventory, and targeted product recommendations
● Store Manager
Is responsible for general operations of the store and the employees within the store, time management for all store employees, creating and assigning tasks to store associates, store events, and day-to-day running of the store.
These are SAP recommended roles. The retailer has the option of creating any roles for this solution, and assigning them appropriate work centers. For information on creating business roles and assigning work centers, refer to:
Getting Started with SAP Cloud for Customer for Retail
See Also
Customer lookups with Complete Customer View [page 283]
Product Lookups and In-Store Availability Checks [page 284]
Store Information and Assigning Employees to Stores [page 285]
Creating and Assigning In-Store Activities [page 285]
Creating Appointments and Store Events [page 286]
6.2.3.1 Customer Lookups with Complete Customer View
This task is performed by a Store Associate . The store associate is a store employee, who assists the customer with in-store shopping, thus enhancing customer experience.
Step 1: Customer Information
When a customer steps into a store, you request for customer information such as:
●
●
Loyalty card information
Name
This is based on the assumption that the customer has already registered for a loyalty card.
The consumer information is replicated from the customer's loyalty system of records. Hence, the consumer must have already registered for a loyalty card and has an existing user in the loyalty system.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
283
Furnished with the customer identification information, you can now lookup the customer details to get a better understanding of customer preferences to serve them better.. To do so, go to Customers Individual
Customers .
1.
You have the option of searching for the customer by name, loyalty ID, phone number, e-mail address, or postal address.
2.
Once you find the customer, click on the name in the customer list.
When retail is scoped, you can view retail-specific work centers such as: overview, preferences, shopping lists, shopping history, and offers.
Customers
This work center displays loyalty information details of the individual customer, and all the account information. You can also view if the customer has a household setup and the member details in the household.
Step 2: Preferences
Having viewed the consumer details in the Overview tab, you can move on to the Preferences tab to display consumer maintained preferences. Based on the preferences, you can also suggest products guide them to where the products are located in the store.
Step 3: Shopping Lists
The Shopping Lists tab displays the (shared) shopping lists a customer has maintained. A shared list is a shopping or wish list that a consumer maintains and shares with other members of the household. A loyalty customer can invite other members to be part of the household and hence give them access to the shared list. Every time a household member enters items into the shared list, after updating the list, the added items display in the list
You have access to a customers‘ shopping list, which enables you to provide personalized and exceptional customer service.
When you click on any shared list, all products associated with the list displays. A great advantage of the shared shopping list is the ability of other members to update this while the consumer is shopping in the store.
When a member, who is part of a household, checks into a store; then the other members of the same household, receive a notification. At this time, other household members using the same shared list can update the list. The shopper can update the list to view the updates made by the other members.
Step 4: Shopping History
This tab displays the consumer’s shopping transactions with your brand. This provides you with valuable insights into a customers’ shopping behavior and can further influence them on their future purchases by recommending similar products, or referring them to offers on new and comparable product lines.
Step 5: Offers
The Offers tab displays offers that are targeted to the customer. The offers also provide further details about validity dates, description, value, and products associated to the offer, if any.
6.2.4.1 Product Lookups and In-Store Availability Checks
When a consumer walks into a store, you, as the store associate, can offer assistance in several ways. You could help the consumer by suggesting offers on various products based on the shopping history. The solution displays a list of products sold in the store. The associate can also help lookup products and point the consumer to their physical location in that store.
Step 1: In-store Products
This tab provides retail employees with a list of products that are sold in the stores. The store associate has the ability to look up a product and get detailed information about it to aid the shopper find their products easily.
Step 2: Store Availability
284 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
When you click on a product, the product details display. The Store Availability tab displays the stores where that product is available with details such as the number of available items, the bay and aisle where they can be found.
Availability check can be performed across all stores of the same retailer.
Step 3: Offers
The Offers tab here, displays all offers associated with the selected product. This enables you provide those offers to the customer.
6.2.5.1 Store Information and Assigning Employees to Stores
Once the business configuration is complete, the customer and store information gets replicated to SAP Cloud for
Customer for Retail. The next step would be to create a list of store employees for a particular store.
The administrator can add/assign employees to a store. An employee can be assigned to more than one store at a time. This is possible if an employee works across multiple stores.
Step 1: Stores
Go to the Stores tab to display a list of all existing stores. Find the store you are looking for and click on it to display the store details. You can look up products and offers for that particular store. This work center also allows the store manager to create a list of employees for a particular store.
Products
This tab displays all products available in the selected store.
Offers
This tab displays all offers available for all products in the selected store.
Employees
The administrator has the ability to add employees to the selected store. To do so:
1.
Click on the Add button
2.
Select the appropriate role from the drop down list
3.
The name field allows you to choose from a list of available names
4.
To add multiple employees at a time, you can use the add and new options from the Add button in the add employees screen
6.2.6.1 Creating and Assigning In-store Activities
Creating and assigning activities can be accessed from the Activities work center. Any store employee has the ability to create and assign an activity.
Create a New activity
To create a new activity, go to:
1.
Activities In-store Activities
2.
In the In-store Activities work center, click on the New button
3.
In the New Task window, enter all required fields and assign the activity to any employee
4.
Depending on who you assign the activity to, the activity will display in that employee’s list
You can edit a created activity to change its status or any other field values.
Filtering Activity
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
285
From your activity list, you can filter activities based on several parameters. You have the ability to further reassign those activities and re-prioritize them as well. You can also create follow-ups from activities.
6.2.7.1 Creating Appointments and Store Events
Appointments can be created by any store employee.
Store Events
Employees create store events to attract shoppers to their stores. These events could be created around various holidays or seasons.
Christmas, Easter, Spring season, Thanksgiving etc.
Any store employee can create a store event from the Store Events work center. To create a new store event, go to:
1.
Activities Store Events
2.
Click on the New button to create a new event
3.
You have the option of choosing the store name and the organizer from an available list
4.
You can add attendees for an event individually, by clicking on the Add button. You can also choose to add all employees to an event by clicking on the Get Attendees button
5.
Once you have created an event, you can go back to it later to edit the details
The attendees do not have the ability to edit an event.
6.2.8.1 Time Entry
Store employees need a quick and convenient way to record their hours worked in a day as part of their employee self-service benefits. An associate could be part-time, full-time, seasonally hired or a permanent member of staff.
Hence, they have the ability to clock-in or out in a manner that is adaptable to their needs.
An employee needs to enter time for themselves to record their work hours. A store associate can enter the times they have worked on a particular day, or for multiple days in a week. The times they will enter could vary, based on how many hours they work.
They can enter time more than once during a single work day as well. To enter time, access the time entry work center from Activities Time Entry .
1.
Click the New Time Entry icon in the menu
2.
Enter your hours, and save and close the time entry quick create
An employee can enter time more than once a day. This can be possible when the employee goes on a lunch break, or works several hours scattered during a day, or could work in different branches of the store.
An employee can enter several hours in the morning, and then again access the same time entry to log in the afternoon hours. If the employee works in several store locations during the same day, then they would enter time in several stores.
286 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
An employee can view only their time entries. A store manager can view time entries for all employees in a store.
To reopen an existing time entry record:
1.
Find your entry from the time entry list
2.
Next, choose the time entry and open the detail view
3.
To add an additional entry to it, click the Add button
4.
To edit the time entry, click the Edit button
5.
To delete the entire time entry, click the Remove button
6.2.9 Store Check In
Business Background
As a store employee, you have to check in to a store before you can begin your day. The in-store employee check in provides a store context to a product overview.
Tasks
When you first check in to a store, you have to click the vertically right-aligned Store Check In tab and click on
Check In .
1.
Next, select the store you want to check in, from the displayed list of stores with the store ID and the store name, and complete the process.
2.
Once you have checked in, you will be able to view all offers, prices, products and product availability for that store.
3.
The store hours for that store also displays. You can display the store hours from the store ID as well.
4.
In the Visiting Hour tab, you can maintain hours for a day or different hours for all days of the week.
5.
You also have the ability to search for a product in the other stores belonging to the store chain.
The store manager is the only person with the ability to maintain store hours.
6.2.10 Setting Preferences
Business Background
As an in-store associate, you have the ability to set preferences and maintain marketing attributes for a customer.
Besides the in-store employee, the administrator can also set/configure preferences manually. See the
Administrators Guide.
Tasks
As a store associate, to set preferences for a customer:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
287
1.
Navigate to Customers Individual Customers , and click on the customer for whom you want to add/ set preferences.
2.
Next, navigate to the Marketing Attributes tab.
3.
Click on Edit to enable Add .
4.
Click on Add to select from the displayed attributes list and add to the existing attributes.
5.
After adding the attribute, you can also add a value. For Example: Nike, Adidas etc.
6.2.11 Transaction History and Order Tracking
Business Background
As an in-store associate or the store manager, you have the ability to view the transaction history for any customer.
SAP Cloud for Customer for Retail fetches the transaction history data from theSAP ERP system.
Tasks
To view the transaction history for a customer:
● Navigate to Customer Individual Customer , and open the customer record whose transaction history you want to view. Then navigate to the Transactions tab.
Here you would be able to view the entire history of an order for the selected customer.
When creating sales order in the SAP ERP backend system, you have to maintain the Natural Person flag to differentiate between an individual customer from a corporate account.
To view this transaction record in the sales order:
●
●
Navigate to Sales Sales Orders , and select the relevant sales order to display the details.
Next, navigate to the Tracking tab. This displays the status and transaction history of all orders for that customer.
To track and maintain order status for every order:
●
●
Navigate to Customer Individual Customer Transactions , and click on a sales order in the
Transactions tab.
Then click the tracking tab to view the status of that order.
6.2.12 Creating a Shopping Cart
About this document
This document provides you with available options for creating a shopping cart in the SAP Cloud for Customer for
Retail solution.
288 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
Business Background
When a customer walks in to a store, the store employee, or the customer attendant approaches the customer to help provide a good shopping experience. The store employee does this by creating a shopping cart, finding items for purchase, and providing offers on the items.
You can create a shopping cart for your customer from the Individual Customers , or the Products tab.
Tasks
From the Individual Customers Tab
To create a shopping cart from the individual customers tab:
● Navigate to customer.
Customers Individual Customers , and either create new customer, or select an existing
Using an Existing Customer
This scenario assumes that you are using an existing customer. The customer may have carts that have been created before with different statuses associated with each cart as follows:
Open status The cart was saved and closed but has not yet been transferred to the SAP Retail POS server. You can edit the cart
Active status This cart is currently being edited and has not been saved or closed yet
Transferred status This cart has been transferred to the SAP Retail POS server, and cannot be edited
Click on the customer with an open or active cart. If the customer does not have any cart with the above mentioned statuses, then you can create a new cart.
1.
To create a new cart, click on the individual customer and then navigate to the Shopping Cart tab.
2.
Next, click the Create Shopping Cart (+) button to create a new cart. A new cart is created with an active status.
3.
Open this cart and begin adding products to it.
4.
Click on Add Product to add new products to the cart.
5.
Choose a product from the displayed list and select variants for it. Then click on Add to Cart to add the product to the customer’s shopping cart.
6.
To check for any available price offers on the product, go to the Offers tab.
7.
To see the item in the cart, click on Shopping Cart .
8.
You can continue adding products to the shopping cart, or if the customer is ready to make the purchase, then you have to move the shopping cart to the SAP Retail POS server. Once you move the shopping cart to
SAP Retail POS, the order is taken.
For more information see SAP Point of Sale
Creating a New Customer
This scenario assumes that you are creating a new customer. Click on New Individual Customer and enter required information in the provided fields. Once you have created a customer, follow steps 2 through 8 mentioned above.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
289
From the Products Tab
You can create a shopping cart from the Products tab that allows you to add or select products directly from the instore products catalog.
Navigate to Products In-Store Products and select product from the displayed catalog.
There is no customer context for this scenario, so you have to create a shopping cart first. To do this, click on
Create Shopping Cart in the In-Store Products tab.
In the shopping cart display screen, you have the option of doing any one of the following:
1.
Selecting an existing customer. Check the Existing Customer checkbox.
● This brings up the customer field. You can search for a customer by name or customer ID and select.
●
●
Next, you can click on Add Product to start adding the products.
Click on Shopping Cart to view the cart you just created for the customer.
●
●
The header data displays the new cart ID, cart status set to active, customer ID, and customer name.
You can now start adding products to the cart by clicking on Add Products .
2.
Registering a new customer
● Register a new customer and follow the process mentioned above.
●
●
After adding products to your cart, when the customer decides to check out, then you have to move the shopping cart to the SAP Retail POS server.
Now an order is created for this customer in the SAP ERP backend system.
To delete a product from the shopping cart, just highlight/select the item and click on Delete .
The shopping cart is created in SAP Cloud for Customer and then transferred to the SAP Retail POS server.
290 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
6.3 Insurance
6.3.1 SAP Cloud for Customer Insurance Overview
6.3.2 Quick Quote
Overview
Creating a Quick Quote
1.
To create a quick quote, go to the Insurance work center and select the Quick Quote tab. The template for a quick quote is similar to a sales quote.
2.
Enter a name for the quick quote, name of the policy holder and select an insurance product. Save your entries.
3.
The Details tab will display the mashup screen with the insurance back end. Header data such as Status , Start
Date , End Date and Annual Premium will be sent from the insurance back end only after a quick quote is completed and saved. After the header data is available in the Cloud for Customer solution, Action buttons such as Simulate Commission , Copy Quick Quote , and Convert to Quote are enabled.
4.
Submit the quick quote (using Submit under Actions . This creates a submission ID, option ID, and mashup URL in the application.
5.
To copy a quick quote, go to Action in the Quick Quotes screen. At this point, the solution makes a copy of only the products and the captive agent's information and calls the insurance back end to make another copy of this quote.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
291
6.3.3 Quote
Overview
Creating a Quote
1.
To create a quote, go to the Insurance work center and select the tab for Quote .
2.
The Details screen in the quote displays the mashup screen with the insurance back end. Header data such as Status , Start Date , End Date and Annual Premium are updated from the insurance back end only after the quick quote application is completed and saved.
After the header data is available in the Cloud for Customer solution , Action buttons such as
Simulate commission , Copy Quote , and Convert to Quote are enabled.
3.
To issue a policy from the quote, follow the process flow in the Details
tab. For detailed information, see Policy
4.
To simulate a commission, go to Actions in the Quote screen to fetch the commission amount, which is displayed in the header data.
5.
To copy a quote, go to Actions in the Quote screen and click on Copy Quote . At this point, the solution makes a copy of only the products and the captive agent's information and calls the insurance back end to make another copy of this quote.
6.3.4 Policy
Overview
There are two types of policies in the Cloud for Customer for Insurance solution:
1.
Policies are issued using an interface with the SAP insurance back end. This interface is displayed in the
Details screen. For detailed documentation, see the section on Issuing a Policy from a Quote.
Policies are created to capture information on competitor policies. Details such as the name of the policy,
Start Date , End Date , can be maintained for competitor policies. For detailed documentation, see the section on Creating a New Policy.
Issuing a Policy from a Quote
The Details screen in the Quick Quote and Quote displays policy term and product master data. You can follow the guided procedures in this screen to complete the procedure from filling the application to issuing the policy. Follow the steps listed below to issue a policy:
1.
In the Details tab, maintain general policy and product details such as Effective Date , Expiration Date , Primacy
Risk State , Term and Product
2.
Review a summary of the application:
1.
Sum Insured
2.
Annual Premium
Tax Amount
Premium After Tax
3.
Validate the following information before issuing a policy:
● If policy details are approved by the customer
Product and premium information
292 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
Producer details
4.
Click on Issue Policy . This will trigger creation of a policy in the insurance back end.
5.
After the policy has been issued in the insurance back end, you can use the Actions button to view the following:
● View Binder Letter
● View Policy Letter
Creating a New Policy
You can create a policy to capture information on competitor contracts. Follow these steps to create a new policy:
1.
In the Insurance screen, click on Policy .
2.
Click on New to create a new policy.
3.
Specify header data such as Policy Type , Name , Policy Holder , Competitor Contract .
4.
Save your entries.
5.
In the Policy screen, click on the new policy that you created.
6.
Click on Edit to maintain further details for the policy. You can maintain details such as Premium , contract
Start Date , End Date , and Status .
7.
Save your entries.
Displaying an Insurance Premium
The Insurance premium amount is displayed in the Details screen. The premium can be viewed after the application is completed and saved in the insurance back end.
Lead to Process Flow
Factsheet
The Additional Info tab for individual customers is displayed if insurance is in scope. This tab displays the 360 customer overview for a customer.
Products
Household Insurance and Non-Standard Personal Auto are supported for the current release version.
In the current release version, the product master data are uploaded to the cloud solution using the standard
Cloud for Customer migration process from Product Administration through a CSV file.
Leads
For detailed information, see
To create a lead for an individual customer (as is the business requirement for the Insurance solution), use the
Personalize key in the New Lead dialog screen and scope Use Existing Account .
Converting a Lead to a Quick Quote
Converting a Lead to a Quote
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
293
Attachments
The policies coming from the insurance back end or FS-PM will be added as PDF attachments in quick quotes, quotes, and policies. Any other attachments can also be created in the solution.
6.3.5 Lead to Policy - Process Flow
Overview
The insurance lead to policy sales process includes the following:
● Lead (optional)
To create a lead for an individual customer (as is the business requirement for the insurance solution), use the Personalize key in the New Lead screen and scope with Use Existing Account .
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Quick Quote (optional)
Quote (mandatory to trigger an issue of a policy)
Policy (optional)
You can also view PDF versions of policy documents using the standard Microsoft Outlook
®
integration feature.
Status Management
Possible statuses for policies, quotes and quick quotes can be configured in Cloud for Customer through status BC configuration.
Factsheet
In the Individual Customers facet, the tab for Factsheet displays a 360 degree overview of the insurance customer. Use the insight displayed in the factsheet to evaluate the buying capacity and determine product interest. The factsheet also displays the product profile including the own policies of the customer, competitor product policies and the prospective product interest for the customer. You can choose to display the analytic using graphical representation. Click on Summary to print a PDF version of the factsheet.
Products
The following products, Household Insurance and Non-Standard Personal Auto Insurance, are supported for the current release version.
In the current release version, product master data is uploaded to the Cloud for Customer for Insurance using the standard Cloud for Customer migration process from Product Administration through a CSV file.
Insurance Premium
Insurance premium amount is displayed in the Details screen after the application is completed and saved in the insurance back end.
Simulate Commission Amount
Simulate commission under Actions in the Quick Quote and Quote screens fetches the commission amount, which is displayed in the header data.
Notes
Any additional notes can be maintained in this section.
Activities
294 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
●
Activities can be created for follow-up meetings and appointments to explain product and policy details to the customer.
Outlook e-mail integration: the standard SAP Cloud for Customer feature can be used with the insurance solution.
Attachments
The policies coming from FS-PM or the insurance back end will be added as PDF attachments in quick quotes, quotes, and policies. Any other attachments can also be created in the application.
For detailed information on the insurance back end, see http://service.sap.com/instguides Industry
Solutions Industry Solution Guides SAP for Insurance SAP Product and Quotation Management for
Insurance
6.4 Utilities
6.4.1 SAP Cloud for Utilities: Solution Overview
SAP Cloud for Utilities is the next generation 'lead-to-quote' sales solution for utility companies to engage with their commercial and industrial customers to build better relationships, capture insights, and help close deals that are built on a robust and flexible cloud platform that can adapt from a simple to the most complex sales process.
● Lead and Opportunity Management
Leads represent interest customers might have through various channels such as web or a campaign during events. These interest levels are qualified and matured into opportunities that sales representatives or key account can pursue. Opportunities are achievable representations of sellable product by the organization and desired products by the customers. Opportunities are generally used as representative pipelines for reporting and forecasting purposes.
●
●
Customer Factsheet
Displays Account Summary with customer information. Also includes recent activities and interactions with notes, utility-specific financial information such as billing and business agreements that provide information for key account managers in a single view.
Utilities Key Account Management
Includes business agreements, quotation management, and utilities contracts.
● Analytics
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
295
Analytic tools improve the key account manager's sales insight. Use interactive reporting to create configurable reports. Sales analytics provide contextual, real-time customer information and sales insight.
Embedded reports track sales cycles, wins and losses, and revenue trends.
6.4.2 Business Agreement
Overview
The business agreement in Utilities add-on represents a contract in back end CRM system and a contract account in ERP IS-Utilities. In the Business Agreement tab, you can create new business agreements and specify proposed payment method and payment terms that will determine the billing terms for a Utilities contract in the back end CRM system.
To be valid for an account, a business agreement must be bound to a sales quote. This direct link between a sales quote and business agreement ensures that details such as Dunning, Payment Terms and Payment Methods are replicated to CRM. These details are used in determining pricing details.
Tasks
Creating a Business Agreement
1.
Go to Utilities work center and select the Business Agreement tab.
2.
Click on New .
3.
Specify the following mandatory details:
● Agreement Name
●
●
Account
The agreement class (agreement classes must be defined in the Customizing or fine tuning for Utilities).
Note that the agreement classes that you define must be the same as those defined in the back end CRM system.
4.
Payment terms (payment terms must be defined in the customizing or fine tuning for Utilities. Note that the payment terms that you define must be the same as those defined in the back end CRM system.
5.
Save your entries.
6.4.3 Utilities Lean Quotation (Sales Quote)
Overview
The document type - Utilities Lean Quotation is provided to support the business process for creating a Utilitiesspecific sales quote. An additional field for Business Agreement ID has been added to the sales quote header. Few other fields have been added to the product search filter (see the documentation for the topic — Adding Products to a Utilities Sales Quote.
Tasks
Creating a Sales Quote
For detailed documentation on creating sales quotes, see
Creating and Processing Sales Quotes [page 111] . Note
the following important information regarding a Utilities specific sales quote:
● Document type: Use the document type Utilities Lean Quotation to create a Utilities specific sales quote.
296 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
●
●
Submit: When you Submit a sales quote using Actions Submit , an online sync returns the submission
ID of the corresponding quotation created in CRM. This ID is displayed as External Reference ID in the Sales
Documents tab
External Follow-up Documents: When you click on Actions External Follow-up Document in the sales quote, the CRM system returns the pricing data for the sales quote in a PDF attachment. Note that the External
Reference ID is filled in the table in the following location: Sales Quote Sales Documents External Followup Documents .
This External Reference ID is hyper-linked and contains the PDF attachment that is sent from backend
CRM system and contains pricing and other relevant information for the quote.
● Status Management: Status management for quotes is supported from backend CRM system.
Adding Products to a Utilities Sales Quote
A new field Utilities Service Type has been added to the template for products to support service product types for
Utilities solution. Service types can be configured in the fine tuning for Utilities add-on. Note that these must be the same as the corresponding service types maintained in backend CRM system
The filter criteria for product search in sales quotes have been enhanced with the following fields for the Utilities solution
●
●
●
●
●
Business agreement ID
PoD (Point of Delivery)
Contract Start Date
Contract End Date
Planned Contract End Date
Binding a Sales Quote to a Business Agreement
After creating a business agreement with the valid payment method and payment terms, you can bind the finalized sales quote to a business agreement. To do this you must:
1.
In the sales quote header, scroll down to the bottom of the screen to view the field for business agreement
ID.
2.
Specify the ID of the business agreement to which you want to bind the sales quote.
3.
The sales quote is now bound to the business agreement. You can navigate to the business agreement where the identification of the sales quote is displayed in the Overview tab.
Displaying the Quotation Created in Backend CRM System
When you submit a sales quote, the submission ID of the corresponding sales quote created in the CRM system is displayed as a URL in the Sales Documents tab. Use this URL to view the quotation created in the backend CRM system.
The information is displayed in a PDF format and contains details of the business agreement like the product information, point of delivery, contract start and end dates, and payment terms and method.
Once you create the sales quote, in Sales Quotes Overview tab, go to Actions and then choose
Edit Output Settings
Apply
. In the Edit Output Settings dialog box, select the Utilities Lean Quotation template and choose
. Then, when you click to display the PDF, the information displays in the appropriate format.
Customers
For detailed documentation, see
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
297
Under Customers Accounts , all the displayed tabs show account details of the chosen customer account.
These tabs display the 360 account overview information such as billing details and list of existing contracts for the customer. This information can be used to gather insight into customer buying profile.
The following sections describe briefly some of the important functions of some of the utility-specific tabs:
Contracts Tab
The “Additional Information” tab is now called Contracts . This tab displays utilities-specific CRM contract information. The data is pulled in from the CRM system, and displays in a list as active contracts for the customer.
All contracts expiring within the next 90 days is shown in red, to make the customer aware that there is some action required on his part.
You can click on a contract record, to display further details like
Sales Organization
,
Distribution
Channel
, and the
Business Agreement ID
.
Interaction Records
This is a new tab, and displays up to last ten interaction records for an account. SAP Cloud for Customer pulls this data from the SAP CRM system. Other data, associated with an account also gets pulled in from the SAP CRM system.
You can also view the following from this tab:
●
●
●
Each interaction record has notes associated with it. Select a record to display it's notes. Each interaction can have numerous notes associated with it.
This tab also displays the associated contacts that were created for this interaction record.
You have the ability to drill-down from each displayed interaction record.
Financials
This tab displays the account balance for a customer. For the selected account, the Recent Payments section displays all past payments, amount paid due date, and amount due.
The Recent Invoices section displays recent invoices for the selected account. The header displays the account balance, and due date the customer has to pay. Clicking on the invoice number generates a 'PDF' displaying details of the account.
Service Location
For details on this tab, see
Tasks
Printing the Account Factsheet
1.
Go to Customers Additional Information
2.
Navigate to the menu path Summary Open Print
Analytics
All Utilities specific reports will be displayed under Reports . You must know the report number or name to search for the specific report.
298 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
6.4.4 Service Location
Service Location
This tab displays the utilities specific technical master data from the ERP IS – Utilities. These include the connection object, premise and point of delivery. The Connection Object serves as a link to the IBASE (includes all Utilities technical master data) object in backend CRM system. Therefore, when you click on Service Location , you will see a list of connection objects. Both premise and point of delivery (PoD) are associated with a connection object. You can determine product interest of a Customer and identify service locations for prospects using the details displayed in this tab.
Tasks
Adding a New Service Location
1.
Go to the Service Location tab in the Utilities tenant.
2.
In the New Service Location dialog box that appears, maintain the location details.
3.
Click on New .
4.
Save your entries.
After an online sync with the backend CRM system, the new service location description will be replaced with a unique identifier that was created in the backend CRM system.
Adding a New Premise and Point of Delivery
1.
Go to the Service Location tab in the Utilities tenant.
2.
Click on one of the connection objects listed in the tab.
3.
In the following screen, select New (in the respective sections for Premise and PoD) to create a new premise or point of delivery.
4.
The annual consumption field shows you the yearly consumption for that account for the chosen service type.
You have the ability to choose the unit of measurement based on the service type you choose at the point of delivery.
6.5 Banking
6.5.1 SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking: Solution Overview
Overview
SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking is the next generation collaborative sales platform for both, Client Managers/
Financial Advisors and Product Specialists, without sacrificing the individual line of business processes to focus on the client and collaborate on opportunities and coverage.
Our solution enables all aspects of customer engagement for banking companies, from demand to sales and service.
It also enables account and activity management. You have the option of selecting wealth management or commercial banking. This will allow you to use different types of features and functions pertaining to your scope selection You can also decide to choose both. You can do the following with SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
299
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Create an account for an individual customer (specific to wealth management)
Create an account (specific to commercial banking)
Maintain a contact for the account specific to a line of business
Assign a client manager/financial advisor to the customer
View account hierarchy for an account based on chosen filters
Enter KYC (know your customer) details
Assign a household to a customer and add members to it (specific to wealth management)
Assign a coverage team to the customer, who, as an expert can offer various products and services to the customer
Create a lead, based on customer details and requirements
Convert the lead to an opportunity
Create tiered opportunities, which allows the coverage team to enter details for each product/service offered to the customer
Create follow-ups from tiered opportunities
The following diagram displays a high level process flow of the SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking solution:
Banking Process Flow
●
●
The processes marked above with an * are specific to wealth management.
The process marked with an ** is specific to commercial banking.
● Individual Account
This is the first step in the process, where you, as a financial advisor, can create an account for a potential customer. This consists of entering all profile and portfolio details (also known as KYC/know your customer) for your customer to better serve them. This process also helps verify the identity of your clients, which is essential to any bank.
Next, appoint a coverage team for your customer, which consists of experts from various lines of business, who will assist in selecting from the available products and services offered by your bank.
Cash management, loans, credit cards, etc
● Lead
300 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
●
●
You can create leads from an individual account based on customer requirements. Leads can be created for a line of business and the relevant bank officers can be assigned to it based on who can qualify the lead using pre delivered checklists.
Household
You can create a household for your customer from an individual account, and add members to it. This step also enables you to add net worth details for individual members of a household.
Tiered Opportunity
Next, based on interest and requirements of your customer, you can create several opportunities for a single customer. For Example: Your customer might be interested in a loan as well as cash management. So there would be two opportunities from the same customer. However, since both the services are different, the opportunity would be assigned to two different experts.
In the following sections, we will go over some common banking scenarios to help familiarize you with the important processes.
6.5.2 SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking Scenario Overview
Overview
The SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking solution allows you to choose from the following banking-specific product line:
Graphical Representation of the Banking Industry Solution
●
●
Commercial Banking
Wealth Management
The SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking solution is targeted towards the following primary business roles:
1.
Commercial Banking
● Client Manager
● Product Specialist
2.
Wealth Management
● Product Specialist
● Financial Advisor
These are SAP recommended roles. You can create your own business roles for this solution, based on your requirements, and assign them appropriate work centers. For more information on creating business roles and assigning work centers, see Enabling Features in Scoping for SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking and Getting started for SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking.
See Also
●
Commercial Banking Scenarios [page 302]
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
301
●
●
Wealth Management Scenarios [page 303]
Common Scenarios for Commercial Banking and Wealth Management [page 305]
6.5.3 Commercial Banking Scenarios
Overview
The following tasks are specific to commercial banking only, and is performed by the client manager or product specialist.
Creating an Account
This task is the first step in the process, and is performed by a client manager, who is also a bank employee and the first point of contact for the customer, assisting with setting up an account.
1.
To create an account, go to Customers Accounts necessary information and save your entries.
tab, and choose the New action button. Fill in the
2.
Next, open the account to assign a coverage team.
3.
To do this, you must navigate to the Coverage team tab. It is essential for you to associate a role, a line of business, and assign an officer from the associated group, to the account.
4.
Next, based on the LOB selection, you can assign different product specialists to the coverage team. You also have the option of assigning yourself to the coverage team.
A coverage team comprises of product experts based on their territories. When you add the LOB, you automatically associate a territory to it. This has been defined by the administrator and already exists in the system.
There can be only one primary for each line of business.
5.
Based on the status of each line of business associated with the opportunity, you can decide whether to create leads or opportunities for the customer.
6.
The Overview tab displays all details associated with that account.
The currency defaults to the country maintained in the customer’s address. If you use a different currency, you must maintain the currency values manually.
Client — Roll Ups
This task is performed by a client manager, and the tab displays the account hierarchy list details for the selected account. To view this:
● Go to Customers Client - Roll Ups
Each account has an owner, who is the client manager. In the client roll up view, you can filter your display results by the three given options, which displays the account hierarchy. This is a read-only screen that enables you to view all hierarchy details of an account at once.
Adding a Contact
This task can be performed by a client manager or a product specialist, who is a bank employee, and has been assigned to an account, based on the line of business associated with the account.
302 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
Under Customers Contacts tab, for search parameters, the
Line of Business Name and
Line of
Business ID
fields are displayed only when commercial banking is scoped.
Besides leads and opportunities, you can also associate a contact with a line of business. To do this:
1.
Go to Customer Contacts tab.
2.
Next, create a contact, and associate it to an account.
3.
Next, go to Line of Business tab, and click on the Assign button.
Under the Accounts tab, the Line of Business tab is visible only when commercial banking is scoped.
4.
Here, you can associate a contact with a line of business.
5.
When you click to select from the account value selection field, you will see only accounts that the selected contact is assigned to.
6.
Next, select your line of business.
7.
You have the option of setting the primary flag for the chosen contact and account. You can have only one primary for one account and a line of business.
You have to assign a contact to an account first before you can assign set the primary flag.
See Also
6.5.4 Wealth Management Scenarios
Overview
The following tasks are specific to wealth management for banking only, and is performed by the financial advisor or product specialist.
Creating an Individual Customer
This task is usually performed by a financial advisor, who is also a bank employee and the first point of contact for the customer; assisting with setting up an account and KYC (know your customer) on-boarding details.
1.
To create an individual customer, go to Customers Individual Customers button. Fill in the necessary information and save your entries.
tab, and choose the New action
2.
Next, you have to fill in all KYC (know your customer) details.
The profile, portfolio, and KYC tabs constitute KYC information. This information pool provides you with a complete 360 degree view of your customer and will help you select the appropriate LOB (line of business) and assign a coverage team for them.
3.
After completing KYC, you must assign the LOB. LOB is a banking-specific product or service.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
303
4.
To do this, you must navigate to the Coverage Team tab. It is essential for you to have already associated an
LOB to a LOB type.
5.
The LOB and relationship information defaults to the creator of the account. However, you can edit to change this.
6.
Next, based on the LOB selection, you can assign different product specialists to the coverage team. You also have the option of assigning yourself to the coverage team.
A coverage team comprises of product experts based on their territories. When you add the LOB, you automatically associate a territory to it. This has been defined by the administrator and already exists in the system.
7.
Based on the status of each LOB associated with the opportunity, you can decide whether to create leads or opportunities for the customer.
8.
The Relationships tab displays all existing households and relationships information for that individual customer.
The currency defaults to the country maintained in the customer’s address. If you use a different currency, you must maintain the currency values manually.
Assigning a Household
This task is usually performed by a financial advisor, who is a bank employee and can create a household for an individual account.
You can create a household for an individual account and add members to the household.
1.
To do this, navigate to Customers Household tab.
2.
Here, you can search by a household name to add members to it.
3.
You can also create a new household.
4.
While creating a household, you have the option of selecting from a list of financial advisors for the household, that has been created by the administrator.
5.
When adding a member to a household, you can specify the relationship type.
The added member could be the mother, brother, child, spouse, or any other relation to the household.
6.
You can also add/define other relationships to a member.
When adding other relationships, you can specify different kinds; such as lawyer, contact person etc.
When adding existing/new accounts to a household, net worth details of the added accounts gets carried over and you can view these details in the household tab.
By default, SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking offers you the ability to specify only one type of relationship to a household.
You can maintain the role of a father in only one household.
However, you have the ability to maintain the same relationship to multiple households by selecting the option in the questions tab during scoping. For more information on how to do this, see Enabling Features in Scoping for SAP
Cloud for Customer for Banking
304 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
6.5.5 Common Scenarios for Commercial Banking and Wealth
Management
Overview
The following scenarios are common to both the product lines of banking.
Creating Leads
This task can be performed by a client manager/financial advisor or a product specialist, who is a bank employee..
The Leads tab displays the last five leads.
You can create leads from an individual account or an opportunity.
1.
To create a lead from an account, display an individual customer account and go to the Leads tab.
2.
Fill in all required information and save your entries.
3.
You can convert a lead to an opportunity. To do this, go to the Opportunities tab from the individual account, and create an opportunity.
You can also create a lead from Marketing Leads New action button.
By default, the system creates a referral lead. To create a client lead, you must select the line of business for client manager/financial advisor.
Creating Opportunities
This task can be performed by a financial advisor/client manager/product specialist, who is a bank employee. The
Opportunities tab always displays the last five opportunities. SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking displays fields based on the chosen LOB.
Loans, Cash Management etc.
For an individual customer, you can create a client-managed opportunity.
For a corporate account, you can create a commercial-managed opportunity.
To create an opportunity from an individual customer/account:
1.
Go to the Individual Customer/Accounts tab, and display details of the account for which you want to create the opportunity.
2.
Next, go to the Opportunities tab and create a new opportunity from that account.
3.
Then go to the Facts tab to add banking-specific products (line of business) for the account. When you save your entries, you will be able to view the opportunity details and all the products associated with the account.
You can also create an opportunity from Sales Opportunities New action button.
You can create multiple opportunities from an account and also associate multiple products with an opportunity.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
305
Create Follow-on Opportunity
This function is specific to the new assets line of business for wealth management; and for cash management line of business for commercial banking. When you change the status of an opportunity ( Facts Opportunity
Details section) to closed or won, the solution performs a quick check for all the product statuses associated with the opportunity. Based on any open status, the Create Follow-up flag appears. Once you check the flag, details of the product with open status gets copied and moved to a new opportunity. The status for the product in the source opportunity is changed to Moved and Open in the new opportunity.
This function is specific to the New Assets line of business for wealth management, and for cash management line of business for commercial banking.
When creating an opportunity from a follow-up, the Closer Accepts flag is auto-selected. Once this happens, then only the following employees can update/edit that opportunity:
●
●
Closer of the opportunity
Any member belonging to the associated line of business
The Sequence tab displays bidirectional details of an opportunity.
Creating Activities
This task can be performed by a product specialist, who is a bank employee, and has been assigned to an individual account, based on the line of business (LOB) associated with the account. Within the activities tab, you can add appointments, tasks, phone calls or e-mails for an account.
You can create activities for an account from the activities tab as follows:
1.
Open an account/individual account, and display details for that account.
2.
Then go to the Activities tab.
3.
Here, you can add appointments, tasks, phone calls, or e-mails for an account.
Within an appointment, you can add topics that you might have discussed with your customer about an LOB. In meeting notes, all LOB types are displayed and pre filled.
When you create an activity for an appointment, then in the Meeting Notes tab, you have the option of adding details to the Topics Discussed , and Line of Business sections. You can also generate a tear sheet or a call report form this activity in the PDF format.
The generate call report/summary feature enables you to create a call report at the end of a customer visit.
Using Analytics
This task can be performed by a financial advisor/client manager/product specialist, who is a bank employee and can access all reports for customers associated with their territory.
1.
To access banking-specific reports, go to Analysis Reports tab.
2.
Next, search using banking-specific terms, such as, LOB, generator, closer etc.
3.
Enter selection criteria to display your data in a report.
4.
You can choose from different report displays.
SAP Cloud for Customer for Banking delivers the following reports:
306 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
●
●
●
●
●
●
Opportunity pipeline report
You can run a report on information consolidated for an opportunity and view it by business role, or territory.
This report displays all opportunity details.
Opportunity milestone report
You can run a report on opportunities that have milestone statuses associated to them. You have the ability to sort by milestones with high and immediate statuses, and run the reports based on the statuses.
Milestone risk analysis report
If one of the opportunities, has an urgent status, then this gets precedence over others. You can run a report on an opportunity with different statuses to view this.
Milestone at risk report
This report allows you to view milestones set within an opportunity that are at risk and need immediate attention.
Coverage detail report
This report displays if a member of the team has met with his meeting goals for the customer based on filters such as time frame (quarter/year), and activity type (phone calls and appointments).
Call topics report
This report displays the following views:
1.
Topics Discussed displays the number of times the bank employee meets with a customer to discuss the opportunity
2.
Topics Discussed and Interest Level displays the status of the discussed topic. (For Example: high, low, medium)
3.
Leads Generated from them displays the number of leads generated from the topics discussed with the customer
4.
New Deals displays the number of opportunities that were generated from the topics discussed with customer
5.
Closed Deals displays the number of deals that were won/closed
You have the option to drill down from a report to see the details of the lead or opportunity.
See Also
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
307
6.6 Professional Services
6.6.1 SAP Cloud for Customer for Professional Services: Solution
Overview
Overview
Process Flow Overview for Professional Services Solution
The Professional Services solution offers project-based firms with a real time and holistic view of finance and project structure using the anytime and anywhere access to back-office data such as master project and other crucial metrics. This is possible using the integration setup with SAP Commercial Project Management (SAP CPM) add-on in the ERP system.
The integrated access to create and edit master projects in the SAP CPM can also be used to view crucial calculations maintained in the master project. For example, you can use the information residing in the CPM master project for creating accurate winning bids and eventually translate them into profitable projects.
The current version of the solution offers a direct integration between the opportunity in the cloud solution with the master project in the CPM in the system. Following features are available in the current release version:
●
●
●
●
Creating an opportunity in the cloud solution triggers creation of a master project in the CPM system.
Updating the master project updates the opportunity that is referenced in the master project.
Deleting an opportunity triggers deletion (of the reference to the opportunity) in the corresponding master project.
Updating or deleting a primary contact in the cloud solution is also reflected in CPM. Similarly, new contacts added in CPM system or modifications to contacts in CPM will be updated in the Projects tab of opportunity.
● Bi-directional updates to modification of account number in the cloud solution as well as in CPM.
308 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
●
●
Direct access to financial plan in CPM using the URL for master project displayed in the Projects tab of an opportunity. Changes made to financial plan in CPM can be updated in cloud solution. Financial plan details in Cloud for Customer are read-only and cannot be modified.
Default login language in the cloud solution is used to display the master project residing in CPM system.
6.6.2 Opportunity and Master Project
6.6.2.1 Creating a Master Project
Overview
To create a master project from the cloud solution, perform the following steps:
1.
In the Sales work center and click on Opportunities .
2.
In the Opportunities screen, click on New to create a new opportunity.
3.
Enter header data for the opportunity such as Name , Account and Document Type and then click on Save .
The new opportunity is created.
4.
Open the new opportunity and navigate to the tab for Projects .
The tab for Projects appears only if Professional Services solution is included in scoping. This tab has two sections, namely the Master Project and Financial Plan . Additional fields can be added to the section for Master Project using extensibility. However, no further enhancements are possible for Financial
Plan .
5.
Click on Refresh to see the link to the master project in the section for Master Project .
6.
Click on this URL for the master project in the CPM system.
If you are logged in to the CPM system, you will be navigated to the master project screen. The reference URL for the corresponding opportunity is displayed In the Related Business Objects section (bottom of the screen) of the master project screen.
From the cloud solution, you cannot modify the master project details. However, you can update account, add new contacts or delete existing contacts for an account. These updates will be reflected in the corresponding master project.
6.6.2.2 Updating a Master Project
Overview
1.
In the Sales work center, click on Opportunities .
2.
Select an opportunity, the master project for which you wish to edit.
3.
In the Projects tab, click on the link to Master Project ID in the header area.
You are navigated to the web client for the CPM system where the master project is displayed. On the left hand side of the master project screen, you see the section for Master Project Data .
4.
Edit the master project. You can modify all fields in the master project header:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
309
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Master Project ID
Description
Master Project Type
Stage
Customer Number
Organization
Start Date
End Date
Confidential
This list is valid for standard solution. The fields may vary depending on extensibility implemented at the Customer location.
5.
Click on Save in the header bar.
6.
Refresh the corresponding opportunity (for the master project) in the cloud solution and you will see that the changes you made to the master project are now reflected in the opportunity.
If no response is sent to the cloud solution, an exception is displayed to the user that the update has failed.
Settings or workflow for monitoring and handling exceptions must be defined in the CPM add-on system.
You can only modify the master project in the CPM system. However, in the cloud solution, you can update account, add new contacts or delete existing contacts for an account. These updates will be reflected in the corresponding CPM master project.
6.6.2.3 Updating Accounts and Contacts
Updating Contacts from Cloud for Customer to SAP CPM
Only the primary contact of an opportunity is included in the list of contacts in master project in CPM.
This contact is listed along with other master project contacts in the Projects tab of opportunity. Note that the master project contacts are not included as contacts for an opportunity.
1.
In the Sales work center, click on Opportunities .
2.
Click on an opportunity whose contacts you wish to edit.
3.
In the header details, click on the account associated with the opportunity.
4.
In the Contacts tab, add a new contact and mark it as the Primary contact.
Only contacts marked as Primary will be considered for update in CPM add-on.
Only one of the Customer’s contacts can be marked as Primary at any time.
5.
Save your changes.
6.
Navigate to the CPM add-on using the URL for the master project.
7.
In the master project screen, click on the You can also in the header bar and select View Contact Persons .
You will see that the primary contact for the account is updated in the master project. If you delete the primary contact in the cloud solution, the updates will be reflected in the master project.
310 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
Similarly, in the CPM system, you can edit the list of contacts, add new contacts or modify existing contacts.
These modifications will be displayed in the cloud solution.
Updating Accounts
If an existing account for an opportunity is modified, the changes will be reflected in the master project in CPM.
Similarly, it is possible to change account number in CPM and these changes will again be reflected in the cloud solution.
6.6.2.4 Deleting a Referenced Opportunity in Master Project
Overview
1.
In the Sales work center, click on the tab for Opportunities .
2.
Select the opportunity that you want to delete and click on the delete icon that appears at the end of the row.
This deletes the opportunity in the cloud solution.
3.
Now, open the corresponding master project in the CPM system. You will see that the reference to the opportunity in the Related Business Objects tab has also been deleted.
6.6.3 Financial Plan
Overview
The integration with master project in CPM is now extended to financial plan in SAP Commercial Project
Management. When you create a new opportunity in the cloud solution, a corresponding financial plan is created in
SAP CPM along with the master project. Use the URL for the master project to connect to the CPM system. The following features are available for financial plan:
Update
The financial plan details can be modified only in CPM. The Update in the section for Financial Plan fetches the latest financial plan details from CPM and displays them in the cloud solution.
Total Margin and Total Planned Value
Provision to display total margin and total planned value (corresponds to the bid value in CPM) from CPM system.
Versioning
Maintain versions for the financial plan. Version maintenance helps you track changes to financial plan Status and the values for Total Margin and Total Planned Value . For each version, you can modify the financial plan details, select a version type and version status. Note that you can only modify the financial plan in CPM system. The details displayed in cloud solution are read-only and cannot be modified.
The latest version of the financial plan will always be marked Active by default. Note that in a new opportunity, the checkbox for Active remains un-selected as the default version is the only active version available.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
311
Financial Plan Status , Version Type and Version Status are configurable in the cloud solution. A direct mapping with the values configured in CPM ensures that appropriate values are filled for these fields in the cloud solution.
Status Maintenance
For a new opportunity, the status of financial plan will be displayed as New. You can modify the status in CPM and use Update to display the changes details in the cloud solution. You can use the field help values and use the Custom filler to enter a custom text.
Fields
The following details are displayed for financial plan.
● Plan ID
●
●
Description
Plan From
●
●
Plan To
Status Description
No enhancements are possible to the financial plan and therefore you cannot add additional fields to the screens in the cloud solution.
To view the financial plan in CPM,
1.
Use the URL for the master project to navigate to the CPM system.
2.
To navigate to the financial plan, use the menu option You Can Also View Workspace .
3.
In the subsequent screen, click on Financial Plan . The financial plan that was created corresponding to the opportunity will be displayed in the table below.
4.
Click on the financial plan to navigate to the detailed screen. Use Edit to make changes to the financial plan and also maintain versions.
6.7 SAP Cloud for Customer Apparel and Footwear Solution (AFS)
6.7.1 SAP Cloud for Customer for Apparel and Footwear Solution
(AFS): Scenario Overview
Business Background
SAP Cloud for Customer for AFS is a highly integrated and comprehensive solution developed by SAP and industry leaders to address the particular needs of today’s and tomorrow’s apparel and footwear industry. It puts apparel and footwear companies in complete control of their supply chain, from procuring raw materials to delivering finished styles and helps them to monitor their complex processes – independent of time and place. This solution helps in maintaining the right-on-time coordination with suppliers and customers, the different agreements laid out with them, and the most effective purchasing and payment integration methods.
SAP Cloud for Customer for AFS industry enables and mobilizes the direct sales representatives and enables them to engage with their customers to build better relationship, capture insight, and help close deals.
312 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
Tasks
The solution provides you with the ability to do the following:
● replicate customer profile from SAP AFS
●
● replicate grid products from SAP AFS display AFS product profiles that include material groups, divisions, seasonal information, characteristics, and variants
●
●
●
● display product catalog views with digital content sourced from product content management systems (PCM) display enhanced list views display enhanced product overview pages create product listings, order from product lists, and order from grid
6.7.2.1 Adding AFS Products to a Sales Order
As a direct sales representative, you have to create a sales order for your customer. Using the SAP Cloud for
Customer for AFS solution, navigate to Sales Sales Orders New .
6.7.2.1.1 Creating Product Lists
Log on to the AFS system as a direct sales representative.
You have the option of choosing products from a product list, when creating a sales order. So you have to create a product list first.
Your first step in the process is to create a product list for your customer to select items from, when creating the sales order.
1.
Navigate to Products Product Lists .
2.
Click on New to start creating and adding products to the list for your customer.
3.
Add a description and then choose Save and Open to display the Product List screen. You have created a parent product.
4.
Now go to the Products tab and click on Add .
5.
In the Products pop up screen, search for your product to choose it. Add the quantity and click on Add to add it to the list or Add and New to add more. By adding the proposed quantity to the product, you have created a logical product for the parent product you created in the steps above.
6.
Select the Valid for All Accounts flag to make this product available for all accounts.
7.
Finally, Save and close out of the screen.
8.
Refresh the Product Lists screen to view the product list you just added.
The AFS Products tab displays all replicated products from SAP AFS.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
313
6.7.2.1.2 Ordering from Product Lists
As a direct sales representative, using the SAP Cloud for Customer for AFS solution, once you have created a product list, your next step would be to create a sales order for your customer. In the sales order, you would order products, from the products list, specific to your customer’s requirements.
1.
Navigate to Sales Sales Orders and choose New to create a new sales order.
2.
You can add products directly from the products list here.
3.
When choosing from the products list window, all real/parent products display along with all their associated logical products. You have the option of selecting the quantity for each variant of the logical products.
4.
Follow standard steps for sales order to complete the process.
An order is taken on the logical product and not the true product.
For details on creating a sales order, see Creating and Processing Sales Orders [page 118] .
6.7.2.1.3 Ordering from Grid
As a direct sales representative, using the SAP Cloud for Customer for AFS solution, once you have created a product list, your next step would be to create a sales order for your customer. While in the process, you would order products, from the available products grid, specific to your customer’s requirements.
1.
Navigate to Sales Sales Orders , and choose New to create a new sales order.
2.
Next, associate the sales order to an account that has been replicated from SAP AFS, otherwise, the backend
SAP ERP system will not recognize this. Then open the sales order.
Maintain appropriate account ID mapping between SAP Cloud for Customer and SAP AFS to ensure account associations without errors.
3.
Navigate to Products Actions , and choose the Add Item from Grid option.
You have the option to choose from the following options:
● Add item from list
● Add from past order
● Add item from grid
The product you choose has to have a sales organization maintained in SAP AFS that is in an active status.
4.
Choose from the displayed list of seasons, collections, and themes. When selecting a product from the grid you can view the variant details for it. Click on ADD to add the product to the list. Now add the product quantity and save your updates.
314 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
The product list always displays true products and all available variants for each product. When you enter a quantity, the product gets selected. Next, click on ADD to add the product to the list. The true product is determined by the variant selected and is maintained as the parent item.
5.
Next, proceed to simulation to check for any errors in the sales order you created. If there are no errors, then you can proceed to order transfer.
In grid based order creation, you can order a product based on the grid value, which is processed in the SAP ERP backend, and then transfer the order from SAP CLoud for Customer to SAP AFS.
6.7.2.1.4 Order Simulation
As a prerequisite, you must have created a products list for the chosen account.
1.
Simulation checks to see if sales orders have been created accurately. If the order conforms to all conditions maintained in SAP AFS, and satisfies all conditions, then the order simulates successfully.
2.
To simulate a sales order successfully, check to see if the sales organization information is maintained accurately in the header section of the sales order. In case it is not maintained, you have to edit the sales order and enter information for the following fields:
● Sales Unit
●
●
●
Sales Organization
Distribution Channel
Division
Choose a sales organization for which the ID mapping has been maintained.
3.
Next, maintain the ID mapping for pricing and products with SAP AFS. Before you can do this, you have to first enable/maintain this in fine tuning.
For details on how to fine-tune pricing and products, see Enabling Features in Scoping for SAP Cloud for
Customer for AFS.
4.
Now choose Actions Simulate . Order simulation fetches the pricing from SAP AFS, and creates a new sales order on SAP Cloud for Customer.
6.7.2.1.5 Order Transfer
Once you save the sales order, in the header section, check the Pricing Status field for any error messages. If you have failed to maintain any information/conditions in the SAP AFS system accurately, then you will see an error message here and the price will not display.
In that case, you will be unable to transfer the sales order to the SAP ERP backend. Hence, the pricing calculation will not occur accurately. As a result, the Actions Transfer would be disabled.
However, if you are able to complete simulation successfully, without any errors, then click on
Actions Transfer to move the sales order to the SAP AFS system.
A message displays informing you that your action has been saved. This means that your order has been created and has been successfully sent to SAP AFS for processing.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
315
Once an order has been transferred, you are unable to edit the products. All edit/add options are disabled.
In SAP AFS , when you search using your order ID from the SAP Cloud for Customer sales order, and choose
Execute , the SAP AFS system provides you with the corresponding order number in SAP AFS and displays all the order details you created in SAP Cloud for Customer.
316 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Industry Features
7 Appendix
7.1 General Features
7.1.1 Personalization
7.1.1.1 Personalizing My Settings
You can personalize your system settings by selecting My Settings from the Personalize menu. Note that if you change your settings, you have to log off the system and then log on again in order for your changes to take effect.
Regional Settings
You can adapt the default system settings for the display of dates and times. You can also select a system language.
This language is used only when you log on to the system with no language preference in your Web browser and without specifying any language on the logon screen.
When a user is created the solution determines the values for the regional settings based on the private address. If the address does not specify a country the solution uses the default settings for the USA. By default, the system language used for on-screen texts is determined by the preferred languages defined in your client, for example your web browser. The language field in the user settings is used when no preferred language is sent by the client and also when system-generated e-mails are sent to your workplace e-mail address.
In addition, the language depends on the method used to log on:
●
●
Logging on with a user ID and password
You can choose the language on the logon screen. The preferred languages of the client determine which language is set as a default. If none of the preferred client languages is supported by the system, English is selected as a default. You can choose any of the supported languages when logging on with your user ID and password.
Logging on with a user certificate or single-sign on (SAML)
No language selection is offered when user certificates or single-sign on are used for authentication. The first supported language specified by the client is used. If you have not specified a preferred language in your browser or if the preferred languages specified in your browser are not supported, the language specified in the user settings is used as logon language.
Change Password
You can change the password that you use to log on to the system. To change your password, enter the old password and then enter a new password twice to confirm that you have typed it correctly.
Manage Certificates
You can request or assign a logon certificate that enables you to log on to the system without entering your user ID and password. The logon certificate is saved to your user account on your local computer. Therefore, you can only use the certificate when you are logged on to your local computer. You can also create a certificate on each computer on which you need to access your solution. If you need to work in multiple systems, you can assign the certificate to
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
317
the appropriate user of each system. However, you cannot log on to a system with multiple users using the same certificate.
You can also upload your S/MIME certificate that you need for e-mail communication with S/MIME.
Onscreen Help
By default, you are shown onscreen explanatory texts to assist you in using the system. Onscreen explanatory texts consist of text boxes that are shown at the top of a screen or screen section, and short help texts that are displayed when you move the cursor over a field that is underlined.
By deselecting the Display Additional Onscreen Explanatory Texts checkbox you can hide these texts.
In addition, you can activate country-specific help and learning content. This means that the standard help and learning content will be supplemented with additional information specific to the country in which you are located.
To activate country-specific content, select a country from the list.
Accessibility
You can enable screen readers to read UI texts and mouse-over texts in all screens.
Personalizing My Background Image
You can personalize your background image and related settings to change the look and feel of your SAP solution.
You can set an image as your personalized background image and adjust the color and transparency settings
7.1.1.2 Personalizing My Background Image
You can personalize your background image and related settings to change the look and feel of your SAP solution.
You can set an image as your personalized background image and adjust the color and transparency settings associated to the background image.
Your changes take effect immediately and are only visible to you.
Personalize Your Background Image
1.
From the Personalize menu, select My Background Image .
2.
To upload your background image, in the My Background Image window, click Browse and choose an image file.
The image file should be in
.png
or
.jpg
format. We recommend that the size of the image is the size of your screen resolution. The size of the image cannot exceed 1MB.
3.
Choose the position of your background image. By default, the image fills the background screen.
4.
In the Color and Transparency field, open the color pane and choose a color as a layer on top of your background image. By default, the color is black and remains invisible.
In the Select Color screen, you have the following options:
● In the color pane, click to select a starting color and move to select the color that you want to use.
●
●
●
Under the color pane, choose a recently used color.
Adjust the HSB or RGB settings for the color.
Enter a hexadecimal color code of the color. For example, enter
#FF0000FF
for blue.
5.
Adjust the transparency of the color layer. By default, the color layer transparency is set to 0%.
6.
Adjust the transparency of the infobars. By default, the infobar transparency is set to 100%.
318 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
7.
To save your changes, click OK .
You can export your background image and related settings as a background image file. To do this, in the My Background Image screen, click More and then Export… .
You can drag and drop one or more images or background image files to an SAP screen and use one image or file for your background image settings.
To remove your background image and related settings, in the My Background Image screen, click
More and then Reset All .
7.1.1.3 Personalizing Dashboards
1.
Click Personalize at the upper right of the screen.
Choose This Screen .
A list of dashboard reports appears, as well as mashups and web services. Use the filters to narrow the list, or use search to find a specific report.
2.
Drag the report title from the list to the desired chart position.
Drop on top of an existing chart to replace the chart currently in that position; drop between charts to insert the new chart between the existing charts.
3.
Drag and drop to rearrange the charts as desired.
4.
Click the wrench icon at the upper right of a chart to remove, rename, or resize the chart.
5.
Click Save above the reports list to save changes.
You can also click Discard to cancel changes and revert back to the previous version of the dashboard.
6.
Click the X icon at the upper right of the report list to exit Personalize mode.
7.1.2 Pricing for SAP Cloud for Customer
Overview
Pricing is based on price master data such as price lists and discount lists, which are used to automatically calculate pricing within all business documents. A predefined pricing procedure is used to determine the net value the customer has to pay for certain products to be received on a certain day at a certain place. The pricing procedure consists of price components, such as list price, discounts, surcharges, freights, and costs. The order of these price components is essential for the calculation of the total value.
Price Components
The solution contains a predefined set of price components, most of which you can activate through the business configuration. Price components can be:
● Automatically determined by the system and able to be overwritten by the user, for example, list price or automatically-determined product discounts
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
319
● Manually entered by the user, for example, a manually-entered product discount
The manual behavior is influenced by the Manual checkbox in the business configuration for pricing. If the Manual checkbox is selected, the system does not find the price component automatically and it must be added manually by the user.
The following sections show the set of price components that may display depending on your configuration.
You can influence the pricing in the fine-tune activity Configuration: Price Strategy.
List Price
This price component is naturally the first step of a pricing procedure, because many price components such as discounts or surcharges depend on it. To determine the net list price, the system checks all price lists that fit the parameters passed from the sales or service document. These parameters are customer, customer group, distribution chain, and date.
Price lists can be customer specific, distribution chain specific, and base price lists. The price lists are maintained as price master data, have a validity period, and need to be released before they are active.
Because the customer may have special prices, the system checks first for a customer-specific price list. If there is no customer-specific price found, then it checks for a distribution chain specific price list. Finally, if there is no distribution-chain-specific price, it checks for the base price list. You have to ensure that the system can find a price for all products or services you sell in the base price list at the very least. Prices can be manually revised within a sales or service document, allowing you to flexibly adjust your net prices.
Product Discount (%)
To determine the discount, the system checks all discount lists that fit the parameters passed from the sales or service document. All found discounts are considered in the price calculation.
Discount lists can be Customer Specific Discount Product, General Customer Discount, Overall Customer Group
Discount, and Customer Specific Discount Product Category discount lists.
Because the customer may have a special discount for a certain product, the system checks for a discount list with customer product discounts.
Discounts can always be revised manually within a sales or service document, allowing you to flexibly adjust discounts.
Surcharge
Two different price components are available for surcharges. You can define surcharges as percentages or fixed amounts according to your needs. All surcharges can be used side by side.
Total Item Net Value
This is calculated by adding all the item net values. This value cannot be edited.
Cost and Profit Margin
Cost displays only if profit margin is included in your business configuration. A cost estimate can be manually entered and makes the calculation of the profit margin possible.
Overall Discount (%)
The overall discount (%) is an additional general discount applied to the total item net value. This can only be applied manually.
320 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
Total Net Value
This is calculated by adding all the item net values plus freight. This value cannot be edited.
Total Given Discounts
This is calculated by adding all the relevant product discounts given. This value cannot be edited directly by the user.
It can be influenced by editing the product discounts at item level.
Rounding Difference
This is a value that has been lost or gained through rounding. This value is used only for currencies that do not have low denomination coins such as 1c or 2c – for example, Swiss francs or Australian dollars. For these currencies, the price must be rounded to the nearest available value, such as 0c or 5c.
Total
This is calculated by adding the total net value.
Price Calculation
Pricing is centrally implemented in this solution and linked to all relevant business processes. The procedure is predefined and you cannot modify the procedure or create a new one.
The pricing procedure controls which price components are automatically calculated for the relevant business documents, such as sales quotes. It contains the most commonly-used price components, including product prices, discounts, and surcharges. These various kinds of price components can be combined and control the price calculation process.
The pricing procedure also contains the sequence in which the system takes these price components into account during pricing. It calculates the net prices. The pricing procedure also determines:
●
●
●
Which subtotals will be considered during pricing
To what extent pricing can be processed manually
Which method the system uses to calculate percentage discounts and surcharges
● Which requirements for a particular price component must be fulfilled before the system takes the element into account.
Currency and Quantity Conversion
During the price calculation, currency conversion occurs if the currency of the price master data differs from the document currency, depending on the exchange rates maintained as master data. The document currency is defaulted from the account master sales data or from the selling company data.
In addition, during the price calculation, quantity conversion occurs if the unit of measure requested in the document differs from the price unit maintained in the price list. A prerequisite is that the quantity conversions are maintained in the product master data. For example, product master data maintains a quantity conversion “1 pallet = 20 each”, the price list specifies a price unit of “$50/1 each”, and the sales quote requests 5 pallets - in this case, the 5 pallets are converted to 100 units and price is calculated at $5000.
Scales
You can define scales for prices which depend on different quantities. The scale you use determines how values are calculated. For example, you can use a scale to define that a single boiler costs $500, but if you buy at least 10 boilers the price decreases to only $450 per unit.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
321
7.1.3 Party Processing
In SAP Cloud for Customer, you can automatically determine all involved parties for business transactions and their related documents using party roles and determination rules. This allows you to streamline account team assignments, and ensure that business partners are correctly assigned to business objects in a way that matches your company processes.
Business Background
Business partners is the collective term for all the companies and people you interact with in your business, and includes accounts, contacts, partners, and employees. When you create a document, you can designate a business partner as an involved party and assign them a role.
You can create a sales quote and add an account as the ship-to party. In this case, the account is the business partner, and ship-to is the party role.
The ship-to account may be a subsidiary of a parent company, which is a different account. You may have the parent company account as the bill-to party.
You can designate roles for sales quotes, leads, opportunities, service tickets, or activities. You can then automatically determine involved parties for these business transactions and documents using determination rules and master data.
Tasks
Prerequisites
●
●
You have already maintained relationships in the General Business Partners fine-tuning activity, and created any custom relationships you plan to use in your involved parties determination.
For more information on this configuration activity, see the General Business Partners — Configuration Guide.
You have assigned these relationships between accounts, contacts, partners, and partner contacts from the appropriate details screen, from the Relationships tab.
Define New Party Roles
To customize the way you use involved parties, you may want to define new party roles.
1.
Go to Business Configuration Implementation Projects and select the relevant implementation project.
Next, select Activity List and find the Party Role Definition fine-tuning activity.
2.
Add a row and enter the necessary data.
● The Party Role Code will identify the party role and must begin with a
Z
, such as
Z123456789
.
● If you check Responsibility Role , then the role is an internal role that involves employee assignment to an account, based on the customer master data. An account team member and the employee responsible are both examples of responsibility roles.
You or a sales user can define a role as a responsibility role through direct manual assignment in the account master data or through rule-based definitions, such as assigning employees to an account based on region or postal code. See the Maintain Responsibility Assignments section below.
322 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
●
●
●
If you have checked Responsibility Role you can also check Sales Data and mark this role as sales data dependent. This means that you can maintain different employees responsible for the same role depending on, for example, the sales area.
Note that you can exchange the sales data dependencies only for contacts with SAP ERP and SAP
CRM.
With SAP CRM you can also exchange validities.
If you specify a Relationship Type , the relationship assignment in the account master data will automatically determine the party role in a document.
For example, you might define a Reseller role, and the relationship could be Has a Reseller .
If you check Sales Data , you enable the system that this role can be determined by sales data, such as
Sales Organization , Distribution Channel , and Division .
Both the Party Category and Relationship Type act as filters for that role. When a user manually selects a business partner for a party role, then the list of available business partners will be based on the party category and/or the relationship type selected here. For example, if a user is in the details for a sales quote and wants to change the reseller role, and the relationship has been defined to allow only sales and service partners, then the user will only be able to choose a sales and service partners as a new reseller.
Add Party Roles to the Relevant Business Objects
In order to use new or existing roles, you must add them to the relevant business object in the associated fine-tuning activity. You can add party roles to sales quotes, leads, opportunities, service tickets, or activities.
1.
Under Business Configuration , navigate to the relevant fine-tuning activity for sales quotes, leads, opportunities, service tickets, or activities
2.
Choose Maintain Involved Parties .
3.
Add, edit, or delete roles.
Pre-delivered party roles cannot be renamed or reassigned.
If you checked Forbid Manual Changes , the automatically determined role and employee can’t be changed.
4.
Maintain Determinations to decide how the role is assigned.
If you add a new role, determinations are added automatically.
You can not add determinations yourself, but you can enable or disable the determinations the system proposes.
If you see more than one determination step, then the system will use the enabled steps in order.
For example, the employee responsible role for an opportunity might first determined by the step Employee
Responsible of Account Team , then the step Employee Responsible of Territory Team . Then, when an opportunity is created, the system will first look for an employee responsible for the account for which the opportunity was created. If there is no employee responsible for the account team, then the system will look for an employee responsible based on the territory for which the opportunity was created. The first employee responsible found will be designated to the employee responsible role for that opportunity.
Maintain Responsibility Assignments
If you checked a role as a Responsibility Role , you can maintain it in several ways:
● Accounts
You can directly maintain the responsible role for a specific account from the account details, in the Account
Team tab.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
323
●
●
Territories
You can maintain the responsible role for an account through sales territories.
For example, an employee might be responsible for accounts in a region, and thus would be automatically assigned to sales quotes associated with accounts in that region.
Employee Work Distribution Rules
You can indirectly maintain the responsible role for an account through work distribution rules. Choose
Administrator General Settings , then Employee Work Distribution .
For example, an employee might be assigned all accounts that buy a certain product.
Parties in Documents
●
●
●
●
Consistency Checks
There are several consistency checks performed when a business partner is used in a party role for a document. Some checks will determine if you can change a party role. You may want to set a parties to readonly to ensure consistency in your business processes. You can do this in Business Configuration .
Determination of Parties
When you first create a document such as a sales quote, initially, no parties are assigned. Once you enter an account, other party roles, such as the employee responsible, or ship-to party, are determined automatically.
You can manually change these parties, if your system is set up to allow you to change them.
Parties are automatically redetermined when a document is changed, unless the party has been manually changed.
Copying Parties from an Existing Document
When you create a new document based on an existing document, the parties are copied to the new document, unless the party role is the employee responsible or the sales unit. These parties are not copied. Instead, the system will trigger a new determination for these roles in the new document.
If you created a party role, it will also be copied to a new document, assuming that the role has also been added to the target document. For example, if you created a role and added it to a sales quote, then created an item from that sales quote, then you must also add the role to the items in order for the role to be copied.
Error Handling
If you find that the system is determining involved parties incorrectly, or is unable to find involved parties, there are a few possibilities:
○ The party determination steps do not match your business case. You can enable and disable party determination rules to solve this issue.
○ The master data required to determine parties is missing or inconsistent. Make sure you have added the role to the correct business object and that you have maintained the responsibility and/or relationship assignments above.
Recommended Combinations of Party Roles and Business Partners
The following table explains each party role, and recommends which business partners should be combined with those party roles.
Party Role
Account
Contact
Ship-to
Description
A party that purchases goods or services.
Business Partner
Account or Individual Customer
A party that is the contact in a document.
Contact or Partner Contact
A party to which goods or services are supplied. Account or Individual Customer
324 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
Party Role
Bill-to
Sender
Recipient
Recipient (CC)
Description
A party that receives the bill for the goods or services supplied.
A party from whom the message originates.
Business Partner
Account or Individual Customer
Employee, Contact, Partner Contact, or
Individual Customer
A party that is to receive a message.
Employee, Contact, Partner Contact, or
Individual Customer
A party that is to receive a copy of a message.
Employee, Contact, Partner Contact, or
Individual Customer
Recipient (BCC) A party that is to receive a copy of a message without the other recipients’ knowledge.
Employee, Contact, Partner Contact, or
Individual Customer
Service and Support Team A party that is responsible for the processing of customer complaints.
Organizational Unit with Function 'Customer
Service'
Sales Partner A party that initiates and performs business transactions for another company.
Partner
Partner Contact
Organizer
Attendee
Employee Responsible
Processor
Activity Contact
Service Performer
Sales Unit
Call Participant
Sales Employee
Organizational Unit
An employee of a sales partner.
A party that is responsible for the organization of an appointment.
Partner Contact
Employee, Contact, Partner Contact, or
Individual Customer
A party that is required as an attendee of an appointment.
Employee, Contact, Partner Contact, or
Individual Customer
A party that is responsible for something. Often, this employee also has tasks to fulfill or is responsible for updating the document. The party can be an internal or external employee.
Employee or Partner Contact
A party that processes a task or a ticket.
A party that has a reference to the current activity.
A party that performs services.
Employee or Partner Contact
Contact or Partner Contact
A party that participates in real-time communication, for example, a phone call or
Internet chat session.
Employee or Partner Contact
An organizational unit that is responsible for the sales and distribution of products in business processes.
Organizational Unit with Function 'Sales'
Employee, Contact, Partner Contact, or
Individual Customer
A party that is included in the sales department of an enterprise, or that carries out sales tasks.
Employee or Partner Contact
An element of your organizational model that is assigned to an activity.
Organizational Unit
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
325
7.1.4 Keyboard Navigation
The SAP solution aims to comply with the keyboard standards of your operating system. You can use the keyboard to reach active screen elements and use the associated functionality in the solution.
To print this document, press
CTRL
+
P
.
Navigation Keys
You can use the following hot keys to navigate SAP screens:
Tasks Hot Keys
(Supported by Mozilla Firefox Web
Browser 3.6 or Higher)
Go to the next UI element.
Go back to the last UI element.
TAB
SHIFT
+
TAB
Go to the next UI section.
Go back to the last UI section.
Open a link.
F6
SHIFT
+
SPACEBAR
F6
Trigger the default action of a field or button; open a link.
Go to the previous tab.
ENTER
Move between options in a drop-down list or in a group of options, such as quick links.
Arrow keys
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
P
Go to the next tab.
CTRL
+
SHIFT
+
N
Hot Keys
(Supported by Microsoft Internet
Explorer 8 or Higher)
TAB
SHIFT
+
TAB
CTRL
+
TAB
SHIFT
+
CTRL
+
TAB
SPACEBAR
ENTER
Arrow keys
CTRL
CTRL
+
+
SHIFT
SHIFT
+
+
P
N
Function Keys
You can use the following hot keys to use certain functions in the SAP solution:
For keyboard shortcuts that contain two or more keys, you press these keys simultaneously and let go of the last key first. In the table, these keys are separated by a plus sign (+).
Tasks
Save your data.
Log off.
Hot Keys
(Supported by Mozilla Firefox Web
Browser 3.6 or Higher)
CTRL
+
S
SHIFT
+
CTRL
+
Q
Hot Keys
(Supported by Microsoft Internet
Explorer 8 or Higher)
CTRL
+
ALT
+
S
SHIFT
+
CTRL
+
As an administrator, you can use the following hot keys in the administration screens of the SAP solution:
Q
326 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
Tasks
Save your data and close the screen.
Save your data.
Close the screen.
Refresh the worklist.
Open basic or advanced find in the worklist.
Open filter in the worklist.
Add a new row in the worklist.
Delete a row in the worklist.
Expand a group in the hierarchy list.
Collapse a group in the hierarchy list.
View all information in a business document.
Log off.
Hot Keys
(Supported by Mozilla Firefox Web
Browser 3.6 or Higher)
CTRL
+
W
CTRL
+
S
CTRL
+
Q
CTRL
+
R
CTRL
+
G
CTRL
+
H
CTRL
+
INSERT
CTRL
+
DELETE
CTRL
+
+
CTRL
+
-
SHIFT
+
CTRL
+
A
SHIFT
+
CTRL
+
Q
Hot Keys
(Supported by Microsoft Internet
Explorer 8 or Higher)
CTRL
+
ALT
+
W
CTRL
+
ALT
+
S
CTRL
+
Q
CTRL
+
ALT
+
R
CTRL
+
ALT
+
G
CTRL
+
ALT
+
H
CTRL
+
INSERT
CTRL
+
DELETE
CTRL
+
+
CTRL
+
-
SHIFT
+
CTRL
+
A
SHIFT
+
CTRL
+
Q
7.2 Analysis
7.2.1 Working with Reports
7.2.1.1 Viewing Reports with the Web Browser Option
Overview
Viewing reporting with the Web Browser option allows you to execute ad hoc analyses. You can open reports from the reports list in the Reports view and from embedded reports.
Administrators use a limited range of functions as described below to preview data sources.
Functions in the Content Area
Display
In the content area for the report, data is displayed in a table or chart depending on settings. You can switch the display format of the report. You can also undo a step or revert to the last saved state of the report.
You can also sort data in ascending or descending order.
Analytical Navigation
In cells of reports displayed in table format, you can use the context menu for further navigation and analysis. Using the context menu, you can view existing documents related to a value. When you double-click a cell, the documents
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
327
and reports to which you can navigate are displayed. For example, you can navigate to a preceding document, such as a purchase request, an overview document that provides information about a customer, or to another report.
Functions in the Navigation Pane
In the navigation pane, you can find functions to make display settings. Analysis functions are also available to display certain values.
The following table provides an overview of display settings and analysis functions available for key figures and characteristics:
Key Figures
Display
Hide
Decimals
Scaling
Conditions
Exceptions
Sorting
Characteristics
Display
Hide
Adding Attributes
Displaying Hierarchies
Conditions
Exceptions
Sorting
Display Settings
By clicking Settings , you can determine how characteristics and key figures are displayed in the report along with making settings for charts and tables.
Creating Exceptions and Conditions
To create conditions and exceptions for the report, under Columns , click the dropdown list for Key Figures . You can create, edit, and delete exceptions and conditions by choosing Manage Exceptions or Manage Conditions accordingly.
Selecting Key Figures
To add additional key figures to the report from the available key figures or to remove them from the report, from
Settings , choose Key Figures .
You can determine the order in which key figures appear as columns in your report by moving them up or down in the list accordingly.
You can also decide if you want to display technical IDs by clicking Show ID .
Displaying Characteristics and Key Figures
You can drag and drop characteristics and key figures in columns and rows to the Not Currently Shown list. To drag and drop, you use the Move function. This function is available from the dropdown list from the characteristics and key figures. If you select Remove , the characteristic or key figure is moved to the Not Currently Shown list.
Toolbar Functions
●
●
Close
Closes the Web browser window.
View
328 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
You can save the current report view, save the report view under a different name, and manage the report views.
Under Manage Views , you can set a report view as default, rename, or delete personal report views.
Settings
You can determine how characteristics and key figures are displayed in the report along with making settings for charts and tables.
Selections
You can set values for filter and variables in the Selection area, and manage selections. You can decide whether to hide or show the Selection area before starting a report using the start options.
The start options indicate whether the Selection area is displayed. By default, the Selection area is displayed, but the report is not started. Note that if you set the start option to Hide Selection Area and Start Report , the next time you start the report, the system uses the existing set of variables with the current value selections.
To close the selection area, click the icon to the right of the Start Options dropdown list.
Add Fields
You can add fields, such as characteristics and attributes of a characteristic, to the report. You can also add variables and hierarchies as variables. For more information, see Add a Field to a Report.
Allows you to print the report using one of the printers connected to your computer.
Download
Downloads the report to Microsoft Excel® in XML or CSV format. Note that the report opens in read only mode.
You can also download data sources in CSV format.
The format and the available fields of the downloaded data source differ from a downloaded report. For example, in a downloaded report, the value and unit of measure are combined in one field whereas in the downloaded data source, the fields are separate. Another example is that there may be key figures only defined for the report, which are not available in the underlying data source.
To perform ad-hoc analyses, you must open the report in Microsoft Excel®. From the Reports work center view, click View With , and choose the Microsoft Excel option.
Send
You can send the report as an e-mail attachment or as a link.
Chart and Table
Switch the display of the report to a table, chart, or display both formats.
Navigate To
You can navigate to a different tool with which to view and analyze the report.
View
Shows the report view that is displayed in the Web browser. The dropdown list displays the report views that are available with the corresponding report. A report view is a modified view of the data available with a report.
You can also define one or more views for a report. You define a view by saving the current status of a report.
Selection
Shows the saved set of values for the filter and variables currently used with the report. The dropdown list shows the selections available with the report.
Set as Default
Sets the current report view and defined selection as default. Selections can also be set as default in the
Selection area. For selections, the last set default is valid whether the default is set in the Web browser or from the Selection area.
Report Header
The report header is located to the right of the toolbar. By clicking the Show Report Header icon, the system displays the access context, selection ID, and any filters set. If available, any information and warnings are also displayed.
For example, if the display currency is set using key figure settings or variables.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
329
You can also view technical information about the report, such as the report ID and the data source for the report.
Note that you can also undo the last step or go back to the default view and selection.
7.2.1.2 VIDEO: Working with Report Details
Video
Working with Report Details (4m 37s)
Find out how to modify a report in the Web Browser view and how to add it to your dashboard.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
●
●
The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
7.2.1.3 Viewing Reports with Web Browser — Quick Filter
Overview
Viewing reports with the Web Browser – Quick Filter option allows you to quickly filter data that can be displayed as a chart, table or both. You can open reports from the reports list in the Reports view and from embedded reports.
Toolbar Functions
●
●
●
●
Close
Closes the report.
View
You can save the current report view, save the report view under a different name, and manage the report views.
Under Manage Views , you can set a report view as default, rename, or delete personal report views.
Save
You can save the displayed report view and selection as default.
Settings
Enables you to change the layout of the report and make display settings. The following options are available:
○ Characteristics
On the Edit tab page, you can select characteristics to be displayed in the report.
For additional information, see Characteristic Settings.
○
○
Key Figures
On the Edit tab page, you can select key figures to be displayed in the report.
For additional information, see Key Figure Settings.
Exceptions
Enables you to identify deviations from threshold values or intervals.
330 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
○
○
○
For additional information, see Exceptions.
Conditions
Enables you to restrict the results area of a report in accordance with certain criteria.
Note that conditions only restrict the results displayed in a report; they do not restrict the value available with characteristics in the quick filter area.
For additional information, see Conditions.
Table
Enables you to make display settings for the report when displayed as a table.
For additional information, see Table Settings.
Chart
Enables you to make display settings for the report when displayed as a chart.
For additional information, see Chart Settings.
Selections
You can set values for filter and variables in the Selection area, and manage selections. By default, the
Selection area is closed.
For additional information, see Working with Selections.
Allows you to print the report using one of the printers connected to your computer as a table or chart, independent of the current display.
Download
Exports the report to Microsoft Excel
®
in XML or CSV format. Note that the report opens in read only mode.
The format and the available fields of the downloaded data source differ from a downloaded report. For example, in a downloaded report, the value and unit of measure are combined in one field whereas in the downloaded data source, the fields are separate. Another example is that there may be key figures only defined for the report, which are not available in the underlying data source.
To perform ad-hoc analyses, you must open the report in Microsoft Excel. From the Reports work center view, click View With , and choose the Microsoft Excel® option.
Send
You can send the report as an e-mail attachment or as a link.
Table and Chart
Switch the display to a table, chart, or both table and chart.
Navigate To
You can navigate to a different tool with which to view and analyze the report.
View
Shows the report view that is displayed in the Web browser. The dropdown list displays the report views that are available with the corresponding report. A report view is a modified view of the data available with a report.
You can also define one or more views for a report. You define a view by saving the current status of a report.
Selections
Shows the saved set of values for filter and variables currently used with the report. The dropdown list shows the selections available with the report.
By clicking Selections , and choosing Manage , you can set a selection as default, rename, or delete selections.
Note that the Initial selection cannot be deleted and is not available on the Manage tab page.
Set As Default
Sets the current report view and defined selection as default. Selections can also be set as default in the
Selection area. For selections, the last set default is valid whether the default is set in the Web browser or from the Selection area.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
331
Quick Filter Area
In the Quick Filter area, from the Characteristics list box, you can select from all characteristics available with a report.
The Characteristics list box contains the characteristics available with the report. To display the values available with a characteristic, click the characteristic. The characteristic then appears to the right of the Characteristics list box.
Values can then be selected and deselected. To support a quick selection of values, the list boxes provide sorting and filter functions for values. The report data which is displayed in the chart and table changes when you change values in the Quick Filter area.
Note that when you remove a characteristic from the Quick Filter area, any values that you have selected for the filter are removed.
The values available with the characteristics are restricted to the value selections that you set using the variables in the Selection area.
Any changes you make to the value selections for variables in the selection affect the value selections available to be filtered for characteristic. The system resets any filter value selections you have made if you change the values selections set in the selection and start the report again by clicking Go .
The order of characteristics in the Characteristics list box and the order as displayed in the report is set using characteristic settings. The order of characteristics in the Characteristics list box is alphabetical, starting with selected characteristics, and then the available characteristics.
The order of characteristics that you have selected to filter in the Quick Filter area has no effect on the order of characteristics as displayed in the report.
Content Area
In the content area for the report, data is displayed as a table, chart, or both, depending on settings. You can switch the display format of the report.
Analytical Navigation
In cells of reports displayed in table format, you can use the context menu for further navigation and analysis. Using the context menu, you can view existing documents related to a value. When you click a cell, the documents and reports to which you can navigate are displayed. For example, you can navigate to a preceding document, such as a purchase request, an overview document that provides information about a customer, or to another report.
7.2.1.4 VIDEO: Using the Reports Quick Filter
Video
Using the Reports Quick Filter (4m 42s)
Find out how to use the quick filter for reports to close more deals.
You are entering a site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, YOU AGREE that unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP:
● The content of the linked-to site and any further external site is not product documentation and that you may not infer any product documentation claims against SAP based on this information.
332 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
● The fact that SAP provides links to external sites does not imply that SAP agrees or disagrees with the contents and information provided on such sites. SAP does not guarantee the correctness of the information provided.
7.2.1.5 Working with Reports and Plans in Microsoft Excel®
Overview
The SAP add-in for Microsoft Excel enables you to execute ad hoc analyses, create workbooks, create plan data, and define sales targets.
●
●
Microsoft Excel-Based Reporting
You can open reports from the workbooks and reports list in a Reports work center view by clicking
View With and choosing the Microsoft Excel option. You can also open reports directly in Microsoft Excel by logging on the SAP system.
Administrators can create design workbooks and make them available for business users from the Business
Analytics work center.
Microsoft Excel-Based Planning
To overcome the limitations of the conventional approach of planning in spreadsheets, business planning consists of features to enable planners to efficiently obtain and work with planning data in business environments.
Analytic Features
To view and work with Microsoft Excel-based reports and plans, ensure that the add-in for Microsoft Excel is installed.
Depending on your authorization, you can download the add-in from the following locations:
● By clicking Download in the top right corner of the solution.
●
●
From the Self-Services Overview work center view of the Home work center under Install Additional
Software .
From the Download Center work center view of the Application and User Management work center.
The analytic features in the add-in tab enables you to save workbooks to the solution system. You can also use available Microsoft Excel functions. Depending on your access rights, different workbooks and reports are available.
Saved workbooks are then available from different work center views. Note that the functions available to you depend on your access rights and work center and work center view assignments; the reports you work with in a Web browser are also available using the add-in for Microsoft Excel.
Administrators
Administrators can create and edit public workbooks as follows:
1.
Open the public or personal workbook.
2.
Switch to design mode by clicking Design Workbook.
If you want to view the workbook with generated test data, refresh the workbook.
3.
Make any relevant changes and save.
4.
Assign the workbook to the relevant work center views to make it public.
Note that if the workbook has already been assigned and is public, you do not need to assign the workbook again.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
333
Workbook Group
The workbook group provides functions to open and save workbooks and reports. You can also copy, remove, and protect reports and worksheets.
● Open
Downloads and opens a workbook from the solution system.
●
●
Save
Saves the workbook back to the solution system as a public workbook. You have the following options to save workbooks to the solution system.
Save All
The following options are available
○ Save All
●
○
○
Save Workbook
Save Plan Data
○ Save Workbook As New
Switch Workbook Type
The follow table provides an overview of the workbooks available.
●
●
●
●
Workbook Type
Personal workbook
Public workbook
Description
A workbook that is adapted to the individual business needs of a user. A personal workbook is only available to the user who creates it. Any change to a personal workbook is saved back to the solution system.
A workbook that can be consumed by all users who have the corresponding work center views assigned. Public workbooks are read-only and can be adapted with personalized views and selections to the business needs of the user.
Note that before a created workbook can be made public, administrators must first save the workbook as a design workbook.
Design workbook A workbook that only includes the layout without data and is only available from the Business Analytics work center. Since administrators in general are not allowed to view business data, the data is deleted whenever you store a design workbook.
As soon as a design workbook is assigned to a work center view, business users can use it as a public workbook with real data.
Insert Report
Inserts a report into the worksheet starting in the active cell.
By selecting the Paging checkbox, the system displays the first 50 rows of the report including the column headers. Paging down shows the next 50 lines. This is useful if you want to start a report that has large amounts of data.
By limiting the number of rows displayed, the system can display the report more quickly. You can still filter or make value selections in order to display the data you want. Note that if you filter or make value selections, the system displays the first page with the specified number of rows.
Copy Report
Copies the report and any report views and variable values in order to paste it in a different location.
Paste Report
Pastes the report and any report views and variable values that was last cut or copied into the active cell.
Remove Report
Removes the report and any report views and variable values in order to paste it in a different location.
334 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
● Protect
Uses the Microsoft Excel function to protect the worksheet to prevent changes to all cells containing data from the solution system.
Refresh Group
Refreshes the data in the report. You can also defer refreshing the report.
● Refresh
Refreshes the data in the report.
○ Refresh Current Report
Refreshes the data in the report that is currently selected.
●
●
○
○
○
Refresh Worksheet When Activated
If this feature is active for a workbook, any reports on a sheet in the workbook are automatically refreshed when the sheet is activated.
Refresh Report
You can select a report to refresh from the list.
Refresh All
Defer Refresh
Defers refreshing the report until you refresh it manually. This function is useful, for example, if you make multiple changes to a report, such as to the layout or you add another key figure or column.
Paging
You can enter the number of rows you want to display. For example, rows 10 to 40. If you click the down arrow, the system displays the next page with 30 rows, including the column headers.
View Group
Displays the report views that are available with a report. You can change the current report view.
In the view pane, you can save changes as a new report view. The view pane also enables you to select the characteristics and key figures that are shown in the report.
●
●
●
Displaying Characteristics and Hierarchies
For characteristics and hierarchies, you can specify in which format the individual characteristic values of the characteristic are displayed. You can display characteristics and hierarchies as name, ID, or a combination thereof.
Sorting
You can also specify how characteristic values are sorted. You can sort characteristics displayed in rows and columns according to the description or ID in ascending or descending order.
Results Row
Using the values from the dropdown list, you can decide how the result is to be displayed. You can decide if results are to be displayed or if results are to be displayed when there are at least two single values.
You can also activate and deactivate conditions that are either delivered with a report or that have been defined for the report or report view in a Web browser. For more information, see Conditions.
Selection Group
You can display the set of value selections for variables that are available with a report. You can change the current set of value selections. In the Selection pane, you can save changes as a new set of value selections for variables.
You can also set filter values by selecting values in the report and clicking the Filter icon in the Selection group. To remove the filter, click the corresponding icon.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
335
If you have multiple reports in a workbook and want to apply the same set of value selections, you can use values from dedicated cells.
For example, you have multiple reports that all contain customers. You want to filter the data in the reports to show data related to customer 1001.
On sheet 2, in cell D14, you enter
1001
. In the Selection pane of the report, in the Customer variable entry field, you enter
=Sheet2!D14
. After refreshing the report, data is filtered to customers 1001. Alternatively, using Microsoft Excel® functionality, you can define a name for the referenced cell, such as Customer, and enter the name instead of the address of the referenced cell in the Customer variable entry field; in this case, you enter
=Customer
.
Note that this tip does not work for advanced restrictions, such as excluding a value or using intervals.
Also note that data in the workbook is not automatically refreshed if you change the entry in the referenced cell.
Header Group
Enables you to insert a report header.
You can specify if the report name is to be displayed along with technical information about the report. The header can be inserted either as a range of cells above the report or as a text box.
Report Group
Enables you to make further display settings.
● Navigate
Enables you to navigate to another report or to an overview document.
●
●
Insert Chart
Enables you to insert a chart using Microsoft Excel functions. For information about Microsoft Excel chart types and functions, see Microsoft Excel documentation.
Switch Display Mode of Current Report
○ Grid Display
Displays the report using the solution cell styles in the Microsoft Excel grid.
○ PivotTable Display
Enables you to display the report as a PivotTable using Microsoft Excel functions. For information about
Microsoft Excel PivotTable functions, see Microsoft Excel documentation.
●
○ Excel Table Display
Enables you to display the report as a Microsoft Excel table. Note that if you select this display mode, the Microsoft Excel Design tab is displayed.
This display mode is useful, for example, if you want to filter or to sort data using Microsoft Excel functions. For information, see Microsoft Excel documentation.
Settings
○ Freeze Panes
Uses the Microsoft Excel freeze pane function to fix the header columns and rows.
○
○
○
Format Report
Formats the report using the default SAP Business solution cell styles as listed under the Microsoft Excel
Home tab.
Adjust to Complete Column
Adjusts the width of columns to the width of the longest value in each column.
Adjust to Report Result
336 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
●
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Adjusts the column width to the width of the longest value in the column.
Use Outline for Hierarchies
Uses the Microsoft Excel outline function to group characteristic hierarchies by expansion level.
Expand Rows to Level
You can choose the hierarchy level up to which the hierarchy is to be displayed when it is expanded.
Merge Repeated Cells
You can specify whether every instance of a characteristic value is displayed in a row or column.
○
○
Show Results First
You can specify how results are to be displayed. You can decide if they are to be displayed above rows or to the left of columns.
Arrange As Hierarchy
The system arranges characteristics in rows and in columns as a hierarchy. The row or column further left serves as the tree structure into which characteristics to the right are inserted.
○ Invert Hierarchies
The system inverts the hierarchy so that the hierarchy is displayed from bottom to top or from right to left. You can decide to invert a hierarchy in rows and in columns.
○ Suppress Zero Values
You can suppress columns or rows that contain zeros in your report.
Show / Hide
○ View
Variables
Planning
Header
Messages
You can specify if all messages or only errors are displayed. You can also decide if messages are displayed on user request.
Dynamic Paging
You can retrieve report data in chunks rather than all at once. To do this, go to Show/Hide Dynamic
Paging . The system opens a dialog box. Select the Dynamic Paging checkbox and in the Page Size field,
.
enter the desired number of data that you want to run at one go.
Assigning Workbooks
Administrators can assign workbooks to work center views, make them available to business users.
For more information, access the Help Center from the relevant screen.
Planning Features
The planning features of the add-in tab enables you to create and edit plan data. Cells that are enabled for input have a white background and become yellow when you change their value. Cell that are gray are read-only.
Refresh Group
● Refresh
Refreshes the data in the plan.
Depending on the planning application you are using, when you make entries in cells, the changes you make are sent either synchronously or asynchronously.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
337
○ Upload Input (Asynchronous Sending including save)
When you click Upload Input , the changes you make to the plan data are transferred to the system asynchronously, values are calculated, and the data is saved. You may need to wait before you can make further changes to the plan.
While the system is calculating and saving, the related data in the cells is locked and is read only. Although you can still change values in the sheet, you cannot upload the new values.
The only option is to refresh the data. If the system has completed the upload when you refresh, the system reads the data again and overwrites all values. In this case, cells are available again for entries.
If the calculation is still in progress, a message about the progress of the upload is displayed.
Note that if you want all read-only cells to be protected against changes, click Protect in the Workbook group.
Tips and Tricks When Uploading Input
● When you create a plan, reduce the amount of data to the relevant characteristic value combinations, for example, account and cost center, that are required from a business perspective.
● Before changing plan values, restrict the amount of data as much as possible by using selection criteria for characteristic values in the Selection pane.
●
●
●
If when changing plan values, the system takes a long time to transfer the data, consider changing less data at one time. For example, you want to change the plan data in 500 cells; change the data of the first 250 cells, upload, and then change the next 250 cells.
If not needed from business perspective, avoid changing rows containing the Not Assigned characteristic value. If the value is required, upload rows containing this value separately from the rest of the data.
If not needed from business perspective, avoid entering data on different aggregation levels, such as subtotals and totals in Result rows.
●
●
○ Send Input (Synchronous Sending excluding Save)
The changes you make to the plan data are sent to the system synchronously. You can continue to make changes to the plan as soon as the system has finished calculating and is ready for data entry again. Click
Save Plan Data to save the data in the system.
○
○
○
Refresh Current Report
Refreshes the data in the report that is currently selected.
Refresh Worksheet When Activated
If this feature is active for a workbook, reports on a sheet in the workbook are automatically refreshed when the sheet is activated.
Refresh Report
You can select a report to refresh from the list.
Refresh All ○
Defer Refresh
Defers refreshing the report until you refresh it manually. This function is useful, for example, if you make multiple changes to a report, such as to the layout or you add another key figure or column.
Paging
You can enter the number of rows you want to display. For example, rows 10 to 40. If you click the down arrow, the system displays the next page with 30 rows, including the column headers.
Planning Group
Enables you to plan at different levels and adjust values accordingly.
338 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
●
●
Mark Selected
Marks cells that you select to be sent back to the system. By marking selected cells, you set the value for the cell. The value therefore does not change when you redistribute values by clicking Refresh .
Unmark All
Unmarks all selected cells.
The following example illustrates how values for sales and target planning can be distributed. Note that the characteristics available for financial planning may differ.
You want to project revenue for your products and create a plan that contains the characteristics
“Product” and “Customer”. Each product is sold to several different customers but you only want to see how much money you received for each product. You therefore choose a view that displays the aggregated revenue for your products. Any changes that you make to the product revenue on this aggregated view are distributed down to the individual customers for the relevant product.
The following figures are used to illustrate how the data is distributed.
● The estimated revenue for your Product 1 is USD 1000, for Product 2 USD 2000, and for Product 3 USD 3000.
In the system, this information is distributed down to the customer level:
● You then change the value for Product 1 from USD 1000 to USD 3000. The system recalculates the result and again distributes all the values down to customer level in the same proportions:
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
339
● You then double the total revenue. The system distributes this over the three products in the same proportions as at the beginning and also distributes this information down to customer level:
Note that if you have a value for equal distribution on more than one level of a hierarchy, it may not appear to be distributed equally. The system distributes the value equally on the lowest level. The remainder is then distributed equally on the lowest level before the results are aggregated to the next highest level.
340 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
•
P U B L I C
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
For example, You have 11 items to be distributed equally (without decimal places) on multiple levels in a hierarchy.
The higher level has two nodes; one node has one branch; the other node has two branches. Thus, the lowest level has three nodes.
Equal distribution results in each lowest-level node having the value 3. The remainder is then distributed on the lowest level. This results in two lowest-level nodes having the value 4, and one lowest-level node having the value 3.
Once aggregated to a higher level, one higher-level node has the value 4. The other higher-level node has the value 7.
The result is displayed below.
Further Notes
The functions of the add-in for Microsoft Excel are restricted or not available when using the Microsoft object linking and embedding (OLE) feature. We therefore recommend not using this feature.
SAP Cloud for Customer
Appendix
P U B L I C
•
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
341
www.sap.com/contactsap
© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company.
The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and
SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Please see http://www.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/ index.epx
for additional trademark information and notices.
icon courtesy of W3C, see http:// creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/ .
डाउनलोड
सार्वजनिक दुवा अद्यतनित केला
आपल्या चॅटचा सार्वजनिक दुवा अद्यतनित केला गेला आहे. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
दस्तऐवजाचा सार्वजनिक दुवा
जाहिरात
